Home

Quantum Scalar i500 User's Guide

1. No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 31 Hardware B C The tape drive has a hardware fault The drive has a 1 Turn the tape drive off and then on nee fault mab j not read write again f related or requires a 2 Restart the operation power cycle to 3 Ifthe problem persists call the tape rapes drive supplier help line 32 Primary W The tape drive has a problem with the The drive has interface host interface identified an 1 Check the cables and cable pte connections 2 Restart the operation 33 Eject media C The operation has failed Error recovery 1 Eject the tape or magazine ON 2 Insert the tape or magazine again 3 Restart the operation 34 Microcode W The microcode update has failed Microcode update update fail because you have tried to use the failed incorrect microcode for this tape drive Obtain the correct microcode and try again 35 Drive humidity W Environmental conditions inside the Drive humidity tape drive are outside the specified limits exceeded humidity range 36 Drive W Environmental conditions inside the Cooling problem temperature tape drive are outside the specified temperature range 37 Drive voltage W The voltage supply to the tape drive is Drive voltage limits outside the specified range exceeded 38 Predictive C A hardware failure of the tape drive is Predictive failure of failure predicted Call the tape drive supplier help line drive hardware Scala
2. General Settings Allow concurrent scans Unlimited Scan Settings Scan upon import None Normal scan time interval 0 Days 0 off Full scan time interval 0 Days 0 off Result Action Settings Disable RAS ticket for bad or suspect media Cancel Scalar i500 User s Guide 217 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Figure 35 EDLM Policy Settings for Standard Partitions Create Partition EDLM Policy Settings Set up EDLM scan policies scan type and notifications for the new partition General Settings Allow concurrent scans Unlimited Report media inaccessible Use StorNext configuration None Scan Settings Scan upon import None Scan based on Tape Alert None Tape Alert count Normal scan time interval 0 Days 0 off Full scan time interval 0 Days 0 off Scan based on StorNext media suspect count one Result Action Settings Disable RAS ticket for bad or suspect media Initiate StorNext copy operation for Dissbled 5 Set EDLM scanning policies on this partition Table 8 describes the policies that you can set Scalar i500 User s Guide 218 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Note To disable E
3. Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a 5U control module weighs approximately 60 lbs 27 2 kg A 9U expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 lbs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules Caution If the library contains a partition that spans modules and you plan to install the new expansion module between those modules you must delete the partition before adding the new module and re create the partition after installing the module Scalar i500 User s Guide 340 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Required tools e Phillips 2 screwdriver for removing and replacing the top cover plate T10 TORX screwdriver for removing and replacing the bottom cover plate You need to unstack the library to install the new expansion module at the bottom of the new library configuration 1 Upgrade the library firmware to a level that can support the number of modules you are adding See Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware on page 278 for information on upgrading firmware 2 Ifyou havea partition that spans modules and you plan to add the new expansion module between those modules you must delete the partition before adding the new module see Deleting Partitions on page 74 3 Remove all tape cartridges f
4. e Tape drives connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade must not be connected to an FC I O blade Instead connect them to a host or switch Scalar i500 User s Guide 469 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 67 Ethernet Connectivity on 14U and Higher Libraries Ethernet cable to network m nse SEDIS ES Power j cables cS S57 I Internal Ethernet ports on LCB Cover plate S Pe ed F Fibre Channel cables to host Pep PURE ies Ethernet EE E i sie pa wok ch Expansion blade J j i a R Nai cables with six Ethernet ports connected to tape drives via Ethernet cables EM PORT UPPER LO UPPER port Do not use for LOWER port connected via Cover plate Ethernet Expansion blades Ethernet cable to LCB Scalar i500 User s Guide 470 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade oO or EA 3 Go Casa t Ss 2ongo ono wUVSES au N A amp gt mo v Eg U ov fa c o te E o a w aus saa act Bom port Do not use for Ethernet Expansion blades UPPER Cover plate uroon v ox m o vouos eL E R H U casey c c gt wo Q r zI Uae zca 23 vooavoadoga ss ond vdgqgS c a v ae c gt e tees 6 so
5. Scalar i500 User s Guide Details about Advanced Reporting reports include The data for the reports is collected in log files When the log files reach their maximum size the oldest information is deleted as new information is added This may affect how much historical data you can access The on screen reports contain a chart and a data table When the log files are large it would take an excessively long time to load all the historical data into the data table For this reason the table displays a maximum of 1000 rows of data beginning with the most recent even if more data is available The graph displays information for the entire range To view all of the data you need to save or e mail the data file See Saving and E mailing Report Data Files on page 142 The reports are built according to data in the log files not your current library configuration For this reason your library may contain tape drives or cartridges that do not show up in the report Similarly the report may contain tape drives and cartridges that no longer reside in the library Information about a tape drive cartridge or operation is not recorded in the Drive Resource Utilization log file until after a tape cartridge has been mounted loaded and unmounted unloaded from the tape drive This report identifies how tape drive resources are utilized in your library You can use this report to help you determine the proper work load distribution
6. 143 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Viewing the Media Usage Log When the log file reaches its maximum size the oldest information is replaced as new information is added To configure what information gets tracked in the log select Setup gt Notifications gt Advanced Reporting gt Media Security from the Web client To view save or e mail the report select Reports gt Log Viewer from the Web client Select Media Security Log from the list of logs and click Next Viewing the Media Usage Log The Media usage report lists information regarding data written and read on the media and lists statistics pertaining to soft and hard read and write errors The media usage log collects information on all media that have ever been in the library including media that are no longer in the library Lifetime media usage metrics are associated with the cartridge and are kept on the embedded cartridge memory The log reflects what the drive reports from the embedded cartridge memory whenever the media is unloaded If the tape cartridge was never mounted and unloaded it will not appear in the log When the log file reaches its maximum size old information is deleted as new information is added This may affect the amount of available historical data The log provides the following information e Volser Media cartridge barcode label e SN Media cartridge serial number e Mfr Media cartridge manufacturer e Date Media cartridge
7. 16 Save the library configuration see the library user s guide for instructions Cable the library and Ethernet Expansion blade as follows see Figure 67 on page 470 e Ina14U and higher library it is recommended that you do not connect HP LTO 5 FC tape drives to the library control blade LCB Instead you should connect the tape drives to an Ethernet Expansion blade using normal Ethernet cables The Ethernet Expansion blade must be installed in the lower left slot of the expansion module A cover plate must cover the slot next to the Ethernet Expansion blade See Figure 67 For every expansion module that contains an Ethernet Expansion blade make sure a standard Ethernet cable is connected from one of the four internal Ethernet ports on the library control blade LCB to the Ethernet port marked LOWER located on the bottom right of the expansion module in which the Ethernet Expansion blade is installed There are two ports marked UPPER and LOWER Since the Ethernet Expansion blade must be installed in the lower bay of the expansion module you must use the port marked LOWER The LOWER port is on the right See Figure 67 You must do this BEFORE placing the Ethernet Expansion blade into the library as per 468 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade the instructions in Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 461
8. Doing this aligns the Y rails with the Y rails of the module beneath it Scalar i500 User s Guide 398 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Caution Check to make sure that there is no gap between the top and bottom Y rails on both the front and back of the library If a gap exists the library cannot mechanically initialize 9 Unpark the robot assembly a Gently raise the robot assembly so that it no longer rests on the parking tab Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot b With your free hand move the parking tab in a clockwise direction until it stops in the unparked position When in the correct position the parking tab is removed completely from the interior of the module and will not accidentally swing into the path of the robot c Gently release the robot assembly It will lower to the bottom module of the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 399 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Px Sg R ES A ZX Ke 2 A A ee a me As p Z 2 l p ZB 2 we J a Ks A ZB eax ee a 1 Parking tab in unparked position Preparing to Use the 9U Exp
9. IBM LTO 4 drive brick firmware PGA3 82FB and newer contain special security restrictions that prevent downgrading this firmware to previous versions that are not FIPS compliant for example PGA1 77BE If you need to downgrade LTO 4 tape drive firmware from level 82FB or higher to level 77BE or lower contact Quantum Technical Support for instructions and assistance Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware Scalar i500 User s Guide The autoleveling feature enables you to automatically upgrade firmware on all FC tape drives that are connected to the FC I O blades or Ethernet Expansion blades This allows you to keep all FC tape drives of the same type for example LTO 5 at the same firmware level Tape drive firmware is checked whenever a tape drive is reset such as when the library is power cycled or restarted or whenever a tape drive is added or replaced If the firmware does not match the tape drive firmware is autoleveled FC tape drives must be connected to an FC I O blade or an Ethernet Expansion blade to participate in autoleveling operations The library does not support autoleveling FC tape drives connected directly to an FC 283 Uploading Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling Deleting Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware host or switch In addition the library does not support autol
10. No_Label means unreadable barcode media type element address vendor model Scalar i500 User s Guide 269 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing the Library Configuration Report physical SN logical SN World Wide Node Name WWNN World Wide Port Name WWPN loop ID topology request speed request actual topology actual speed maximum speed active port if the drive has more than one FC port SNW licenses displays which Storage Networking features the tape drive is using if any see Chapter 6 Storage Networking SCSI ID SAS address tape drive firmware level control path status and encryption method of each tape drive Note The library configuration report lists the native device identifier as reported by the tape drive HP tape drives always report SCSI as the native device identifier even if they are Fibre Channel or SAS For example if you have HP L TO 4 Fibre Channel or SAS drives they will be listed in the report as HP LTO 4 SCSI drives Slots Type assigned partition name storage and import export I E station slots only location coordinates barcode storage and I E station slots only media type element address encryption method get count get retries put count and put retries If the slot is a cleaning slot the cleaning status usable expired and cleaning count the number of times the cartridge was used to clean a tape
11. Partition names are limited to 12 lower case alphanumeric characters and underscores _ e The maximum number of partitions that can be created is equal to the number of tape drives in the library e At minimum a partition consists of one tape drive and one slot The tape drive or slot cannot be shared with another partition e I Estation slots are shared between all partitions Partitions take temporary ownership of I E station slots when importing or exporting tape cartridges Caution Before permanently removing an expansion module from your library you need to perform a set of configuration operations that includes deleting all partitions See Deleting Partitions on page 74 and Removing the Expansion Module on page 365 Scalar i500 User s Guide 69 Automatically Creating Partitions Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions At any time after the initial configuration of the library administrators can add to the number of existing partitions by using the automatic partitioning process Automatic partitioning assigns available library resources proportionately among the partitions grouping tape drives according to their interface type SCSI FC or SAS tape drive vendor and media generation The default number of partitions created is the number of distinct tape drive interface vendor media type combinations of the tape drives that are not curren
12. Primary DNS Address optional Web client only must be entered as an IP address This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled Secondary DNS Address optional Web client only must be entered as an IP address This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled Port Settings operator panel only allows you to change the autonegotiate mode speed and duplex settings on the Ethernet port 61 Enabling SSL Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network Caution Modifying network settings will modify network connectivity parameters requiring remote communication configuration changes Your current Web client browser session might become invalid requiring you to close your current browser session Access the Web client using the new network configuration settings and log in again Note Be sure to add your library s IP address to the list of trusted allowed sites on your library supported browser so the Web client pages automatically refresh Note For step by step network configuration instructions see your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Network Management gt Network e From the operator panel select Setup gt Network Mgmt
13. Scalar i500 User s Guide 264 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports This chapter describes how to find information about your library From the operator panel you can find system information in the About Scalar i500 screen Tools gt About Library From the Web client you can find information in the Reports and Tools menus Note Users without administrator privileges can view only certain reports See User Privileges on page 50 for information about user privileges This chapter covers Viewing Information About the Scalar i500 Viewing the System Information Report Viewing the Library Configuration Report Viewing the Network Settings Report Viewing Logged in Users Viewing the All Slots Report Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs Viewing FC I O Blade Information Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information 265 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing Information About the Scalar i500 Viewing Information About the Scalar i500 The About screen gives you a quick glance at your library settings From the Web client you can view the About Scalar i500report which provides the following information about the library e Serial Number e Firmware Version Number From the operator panel the About screen provides the following information about the library Library name e State e Seria
14. 1 Y rail in unlocked functional position 2 Add the tape drives to the modules For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 3 Add the power supplies For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 4 If your library contains FC I O blades install both the I O blades and the accompanying fan blades in the expansion module For details see Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades on page 443 and Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 5 Unpark the robot assembly a Gently raise the robot assembly so that it no longer rests on the parking tab Scalar i500 User s Guide 373 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot b With your free hand move the parking tab in a clockwise direction until it stops in the unparked position When in the correct position the parking tab is removed completely from the interior of the module and will not accidentally swing into the path of the robot c Gently release the robot assembly It will lower to the bottom module of the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 374 Scalar i500 User
15. 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Certificate gt Import 4 Click Browse to locate the saved encryption certificate file 5 Click Open 6 Click Apply to import the certificate onto your SKM server Exporting Data Encryption Keys SKM servers provide a unique encryption key for each tape cartridge that is encrypted In order for another i e destination SKM server to read tapes encrypted by your SKM server i e source you need to export the encryption keys used to encrypt those tapes and send them to the destination server Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to export data encryption keys Scalar i500 User s Guide 194 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Note Missing Changed Barcode Labels If a tape cartridge barcode label is missing the key used to encrypt the tape will not be exported in an Export Current operation If a tape cartridge barcode label is changed the key used to encrypt the tape will not be exported in an Export Current or Export Selective operation The keystore metadata pairs the data encryption key with the label that was present at the time of first encryption If the label is lost or changed the pairing is lost and these export options will either export no key or possibly the wrong key Encry
16. Administrators can enable or disable SSL settings on the library Enabling SSL settings encrypts all Web browser connections to the Web client and it enables SSL based authentication for SMI S SMI S is the newest standard of SNMP which makes sets of data continuously available SMI S is disabled by default You can enable SMI S on the Tools gt System Settings screen on the operator panel The default SSL setting is Disabled Disabling SSL settings creates an unencrypted connection from a Web browser to the Web client See the Scalar Intelligent Libraries SMI S Reference Guide 6 01317 xx for further configuration and access details 62 Configuring SNMP Settings on the Library Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network Note Before enabling SSL settings make sure you enter a name for the library in the Library Name text box when configuring network settings Setup gt Network Mgmt on the operator panel After enabling SSL settings use that library name to access the library If you do not use that name you will receive a security alert In addition make sure to complete all the text boxes listed on the Web client Contact Information screen Setup gt Notification gt Contact Information before enabling SSL settings This information is used to identify company information in the SSL certificate You cannot enable the SSL settings from the Web client The path to
17. Ethernet cable to expansion module A 3 A gt D Cover plates EM PORT UPPER LO Fibre Channel cables to host UPPER port Do not LOWER port connected via use for Ethernet Ethernet cable to LCB Expansion blades Scalar i500 User s Guide 463 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade 6 Prepare the library for Ethernet Expansion blade installation The Ethernet Expansion blade must be installed in the bottom left bay of an expansion module e Insome cases this may require removal or relocation of an FC I O blade and its accompanying fan blade e Remove the cover plate covering the two bottom left slots To remove the cover plate unscrew the two captive thumbscrews securing the cover plate and pull outward on the plate Save the cover plate in case you need to use it later 7 Remove the new Ethernet Expansion blade from the protective anti static bag 8 Press up and out to open the latch hooks on each side of the blade Hold the Ethernet Expansion blade upright with the latch hooks on the left side and the status LEDs at the bottom see Figure 65 Scalar i500 User s Guide 464 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 65 Ethernet Expansion Blade OE _ Latch hooks open Gt At At Ais
18. Starting with the topmost module of your library open the I E station and access doors of each module Caution Before unstacking the modules the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 Disengage the Y rails so the modules can be unstacked safely 390 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module A 5y MAN MN Me Ul Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up A O N Squeeze here to release Scalar i500 User s Guide 391 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module a From the front of the library find the Y rail release mechanism which is located on the left side of the control module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place 1 Y rail in locked non functional position b From the rear of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place 4 Remove the rack ears that fasten the module to the rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for detailed instructions on using the rack ears 5 Loosen the thumbscrews located at the base of the front of the module Scalar i500 User s Guide 392 C
19. e Media Security e RAS e Receiver Addresses Contact Information e Network Management e Network e SNMP SNMP Trap Registrations Media e Move Import Export Cleaning Media Import Export Partitions Change Mode Drive e Load e Unload e Change Mode VE Station Lock Unlock System Shutdown Logout e All RAS Tickets Capture Snapshot Save Restore Configuration E mail Configuration Record Save Configuration Record Identify Drives Drive Operations Download SNMP MIB FC I O Blade Info FC I O Blade Port Info EKM Management e Import Communication Certificates Encryption Certificate Import Export e Encryption Key Import Export e Retrieve SKM Logs if SKM enabled e System Information Library Configuration Network Settings Logged In Users All Slots Log Viewer Advanced Reporting Drive Resource Utilization Media Integrity Analysis About Scalar i500 User s Guide 46 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees Setup Menu Operations Menu Tools Menu Reports Menu User Management e User Accounts Remote Authentication FC I O Blades e Port Configuration e Channel Zoning e Host Mapping e Host Management Host Port Failover Data Path Conditioning e FC I O Blade Control Encryption if licensed e System Configuration e Partition Configuration Syste
20. messages displayed in the header Figure 13 and Figure 14 show the operator panel and the Web client interfaces Scalar i500 User s Guide 40 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Common User Interface Elements Figure 13 Operator Panel User Interface Total Full Empty LE Station Slots 6 iy 6 2 4 Cy 133 J Drives 3 Act Avail library a 3 oo 00 Storaae Slots 65 Full Empty library a 41 4 Be 163 Unassigned 0 at a Cleaning Slots 4 i mo Co 0 Figure 14 Web Client User Interface Scalar i500 Ta OO System Summary VE Station Slots 6 Cleaning Slots 1 Total Full Empty Total Full Empty library 6 0 6 0 library 1 0 1 70 Storage Slots 121 Drives 3 Mode Total Full Empty Total Active Avail library_a Online 20 10 10 50 library_a 1 0 160 0 library_b Online 20 0 20 0 library_b 1 0 1 r 0 library_c Online 81 7 74 9 library_c 1 0 1 r 0 Unassigned 0 Unassigned 0 Unlicensed 81 Subsystem Status Scalar i500 User s Guide 41 System Summary and Subsystem Status Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Common User Interface Elements You can quickly gauge the health of the library by observing the color of the three subsystem status buttons located at the bottom of the home page These buttons provide quick access to information about the health of the library for faster recovery if probl
21. Aad Status LEDs 9 Carefully align the Ethernet Expansion blade with the guide slots in the bay Caution Forcing the blade into the bay can cause the pins to bend 10 Evenly apply pressure to both sides of the blade and slide it into the expansion module until the latch hooks begin to move toward the middle of the blade Push the latch hooks toward the middle of the blade and into the locked position You will feel the blade pins connect with the expansion module s backplane as the blade locks into place Scalar i500 User s Guide 465 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade 11 Observe the status LEDs on the Ethernet Expansion blade The blue LED should blink once every 10 seconds indicating the blade is powered on The green LED should blink once per second indicating the blade s processor is working normally The amber LED should be off 12 Install a cover plate over the empty bay to the right of the Ethernet Expansion blade Caution If the cover plate next to an Ethernet Expansion blade is not installed Ethernet Expansion blade temperature errors will occur Scalar i500 User s Guide 466 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 66 Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade Double wide cover plat
22. C The tape drive needs cleaning 1 Ifthe operation has stopped eject the tape and clean the drive 2 Ifthe operation has not stopped wait for it to finish and then clean the drive Check the tape drive user s manual for device specific cleaning instructions The drive thinks it has a head clog or needs cleaning 21 Cleaning requested The tape drive is due for routine cleaning 1 Wait for the current operation to finish 2 Then use a cleaning cartridge Check the tape drive user s manual for device specific cleaning instructions The drive is ready for a periodic cleaning 22 Expired cleaning media The last cleaning cartridge used in the tape drive has worn out 1 Discard the worn out cleaning cartridge 2 Wait for the current operation to finish 3 Then use a new cleaning cartridge The cleaning tape has expired 23 Invalid cleaning tape The last cleaning cartridge used in the tape drive was an invalid type 1 Do not use this cleaning cartridge in this drive 2 Wait for the current operation to finish 3 Then use a valid cleaning cartridge Invalid cleaning tape type used Scalar i500 User s Guide 535 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 24 Retension W The tape drive has requested a retension The drive is having requested op
23. Caution Check to make sure that there is no gap between the top and bottom Y rails on both the front and back of the library If a gap exists the library cannot mechanically initialize Scalar i500 User s Guide 352 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 1 Y rail in unlocked functional position 9 Repeat these steps for each module you need to re install in the library configuration Preparing to Use the Prepare to use the library as follows Library 1 Add the tape drives to the modules For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 2 Add the power supplies For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 3 Add the LCB to the control module For details see Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card on page 402 Scalar i500 User s Guide 353 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 4 If your library contains FC I O blades install both the I O blades and the accompanying fan blades in the expansion module For details see Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades on page 443 and Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 5 Unpark the robot assembly a Gently raise the robot assembly so that it no longer rests on the parking tab Cauti
24. Error The CRC data does not match the key or key metadata The export file is corrupt Suggested solution Try to import the same file again If this fails export the key s for the listed tape cartridge s again and then perform the import operation again Import To Primary Secondary Server Failed Error The key import to the stated server failed probably due to a network or other connection issue If the key failed to import to the secondary server it may have been imported successfully to the primary server Suggested solution Check network connections and perform the import operation again e Key Metadata Update Failed but key data was imported successfully Warning The key was imported but the metadata update failed You can access the key but you cannot export it until it is actually used in an encryption operation on the library Suggested solution Use the key to read decrypt a tape This marks the key as used and updates the metadata which will allow you to export the key This log is only available if you are running SKM and have encryption key management licensed on the library The log file is cleared and created new for each import operation so that it shows only the key corruptions and import failures that occurred during the latest encryption key import attempt The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Reports gt Log Viewer 198 Chapter 7 Enc
25. If you select this policy a tape will be queued for EDLM testing when its suspect count threshold is reached If the EDLM test indicates the tape is good you can reset the suspect count on the StorNext application and continue to use the tape For more information on suspect counts and resetting suspect counts refer to your StorNext application s documentation Result Action Settings Disable RAS ticket for bad or suspect media Select this check box if you wish to disable summary RAS tickets and RAS ticket e mail notifications stating media is bad or suspect media based on the results of EDLM scans By default these summary RAS tickets are disabled i e this check box is selected because this information is available from the EDLM test results Note RAS tickets for specific drive and media issues found during EDLM scans will never be disabled Only the summary results tickets and notifications stating media is suspect or bad can be enabled or disabled Initiate StorNext copy operation for Only available if you selected Use StorNext Configuration above Automatically requests StorNext Storage Manager to copy all data from a bad and or suspect tape to another tape From the drop down list you can choose to copy bad tapes suspect tapes or both You can also choose Disabled which disables the policy This policy is disabled by default A RAS ticket will be generated for each request to copy data indicating w
26. Library Not Ready message which indicates that an inventory is occurring wait until the library is ready before you select Apply to begin Library Demo The operator panel will show that the demonstration is in progress There is an intentional delay of two seconds between move media commands to prevent unnecessary wear on the robotics To stop the demonstration select Stop on the Library Demo screen The last issued commands will complete before the demonstration is stopped and library control is returned The operator panel will display a Demo Being Stopped message Library Demo cannot be performed from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows Scalar i500 User s Guide From the operator panel select Tools gt Library Tests gt Library Demo 512 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Configuring the Internal Network Configuring the Internal Network When installing your library you need to make sure that the external network setting is different than the internal network setting on the library If the external and internal network settings are the same the Web client cannot connect to the library If DHCP is enabled or you do not know what your external network setting is check with your network administrator From the operator panel you can change the setting of your internal network using the Internal Network Configuration screen Select the new internal IP address from the list on the scre
27. Scalar i500 User s Guide 281 Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware Upgrading Tape Drive Firmware Using an Image File to The Web client allows you to upgrade tape drive firmware using a Upgrade Tape Drive firmware image file The firmware upgrade can take up to 40 minutes Firmware less if the upgrade is performed using FC I O blades Tape drive firmware is available from Quantum Support Verify with the release notes or Quantum Technical Support that you are updating the tape drives with the correct version of firmware Details on using an image file to upgrade tape drive firmware include The library allows you to upgrade firmware on multiple tape drives at one time Upgrade firmware on all tape drives of the same interface type at the same time to make sure that all drives are at the same firmware level Having different levels of drive firmware in the library is not recommended e Each tape drive interface type requires unique firmware The image file must contain the appropriate SCSI FC or Serial Attached SCSI SAS firmware image for the corresponding SCSI FC or SAS drive type e The tape drive and associated partition are automatically taken offline during the operation and brought back online when the operation completes You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the tape drive and partition offline Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline unt
28. and e Password is the password for the account that you specified in the Login Account text box The password can contain the following special characters and 93 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With RAS E mail Notifications e Send a test e mail to allows you to enter an e mail address you want to test Enter the address and click Send e mail Then check the e mail account to verify that an e mail message was sent from the library After configuring the e mail account save the library configuration For information see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 You can configure the library e mail account from the Web client only but you can view e mail account information from the operator panel The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications gt E mail Configuration e From the operator panel select Setup gt Notification gt E Mail Account Working With RAS E mail Notifications The library can be configured to automatically send e mail notifications to specified e mail addresses whenever an issue of a particular severity level occurs with one of its components The information in the e mail notification provides details about the issue and the library conditions at the time of the error Before you can configure e mail notifications you must configure the library s e mail account so that the library can sen
29. cece eesesescsesssesescsesesesescscseeneseeees 151 Configuring Data Path Failover ccc ceesesecsesesesesesesesesesescssaeseseeseeenens 154 Enabling Data Path Failover ss sssssssssessssssesissesresrerrsresnesrerrsrrsresneene 155 Forcing Data Path Failover cccscscsssocessesonsecsesonessececeossnonsevesssevecnees 157 Configuring Host Access oiriin secs cactessccnstesoucsanctosviesenstonnevsevensnee 160 Registering a Host for Host Access ccccccssesesesescseeesescscsssnaeeeeesees 161 Enabling Tape Drives for Host ACCESS cceeseeseeessssseseserenseseeesens 162 Mapping a Host to Tape Drives and Partitions eee 163 Modifying OSE ecrire en E A E RERE 163 JDI E tarea TOS EE E cnsdesextiass 164 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management 165 KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management s ssesssisressesresrerresress 167 General Notes About Encryption on the Library cee 168 About the EKM License s s 0 sisscscsonsisessssacecseesceshssetsecevsssividesnsdeetntecstseas 168 Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 0 169 Using EKM Path Diagnostics cece ee seeseeeeeeteeseeseseeneseseees 183 Differences Between Manual and Automatic EKM Path Dia STOSHCS ois5cccscecesesedeinchsdtes these staebesstessestasseessseedetvecdeetaeevndeenteseweets 184 Using Manual EKM Path Diagnostics 0 cece eeseseseseeneeeneees 185 Using Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics 00 eeeseeeeeeneneeees 186 Viewing and Changi
30. e Rollup default Displays the Grouping on the x axis and the Attribute amount on the y axis e Trend Shows how the Attribute amount changes over time for the selected Grouping Scalar i500 User s Guide 137 Configuring the Media Integrity Analysis Report Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports e Grouping Specifies which tape drive s or partition s to include in the report Select one of the following All Drives by Coordinate default Presents the sum total of the selected Attribute for all tape drives according to their location in the library If more than one tape drive resided in that location during the selected Date Range then the Attribute values for all the tape drives that resided in that location are combined in the chart All Drives by Physical SN Presents the sum total of the selected attribute for all drives according to the physical tape drive serial number e All Partitions Presents a comparison of all drives grouped by partition in the physical library e Selected Drive by Coordinate The report chart is based on an individual tape drive location in the library If more than one tape drive resided in that location during the selected Date Range then the attribute values for all the tape drives that resided in that location are combined in the chart e Selected Drive by Physical SN The report chart is bas
31. ktpass out library keytab princ library lt fqdn of library gt lt realm gt rndPass ptype KRB5 NT _SRV_HST crypto RC4 HMAC NT mapUser lt realm gt computers lt computer account gt For example ktpass out library keytab princ library delos dvt mycompany com OURREALM LOCAL rndPass ptype KRB5 NT _SRV_HST crypto RC4 HMAC NT mapUser ourrealm local computers kerbtest e For Windows 2008 ktpass out library keytab princ library lt fqdn of library gt lt realm gt rndPass ptype KRB5 NT SRV_HST crypto AES256 SHA1 mapUser lt realm gt computers lt computer account gt For example ktpass out library keytab princ library delos dvt mycompany com OURREALM LOCAL rndPass ptype KRB5 NT SRV_HST crypto AES256 SHA1 mapUser ourrealm local computers kerbtest Setting the Date Time and Time Zone Administrators can either set the library date time and time zone settings manually or configure the Network Time Protocol NTP Note The following operations should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Scalar i500 User s Guide 106 Setting the Date and Time Manually Setting the Date and Time Using the Network Time Protocol Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setti
32. managed partition go to Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions on page 216 9 Ifyou do not wish to configure automatic EDLM scanning policies on the partition click Apply to finish Scalar i500 User s Guide 215 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions You can set EDLM scanning policies on both standard partitions and on EDLM library managed partitions Once configured scanning takes place automatically per the policies You can temporarily stop automatic scans on partitions by using the Pause feature see Pausing EDLM Scans on Partitions on page 222 1 Log onas an administrator 2 From the Web client select Setup gt Partitions 3 Click Create to create a new partition or select a partition and click Modify to modify an existing partition 4 When finished configuring the general settings click Next The Create Partition EDLM Policy Settings screen appears see Figure 34 and Figure 35 Note Fewer policies are available on EDLM library managed partitions because they are inaccessible to hosts Scalar i500 User s Guide 216 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Figure 34 EDLM Policy Settings for EDLM Library Managed Partitions Create Partition EDLM Policy Settings Set up EDLM scan policies scan type and notifications for the new partition
33. 1 LCB compact flash card 5 If the new LCB and compact flash card came in discrete packages insert the new compact flash card into the new LCB or if replacing the compact flash card only remove the existing compact flash card and install the new one in the existing LCB Insert the new LCB into the vacant LCB slot on the back of the library When inserting the new LCB into the slot be sure that the LCB LEDs are located at the top of the blade and that the latch hooks are on the right side of the blade When sliding the new LCB into the slot there should be no resistance Scalar i500 User s Guide 404 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card Caution Do not force the LCB into the slot or damage may occur 7 After inserting the new LCB secure it by depressing both of the LCB latch hooks into the blade The LCB will fit snugly into its slot 8 Reconnect all cables to the new LCB 9 Power on the library The green power light on the front panel turns on The screen may remain dark for up to 5 minutes Then an Initialization In Progress screen displays The initialization process can take up to 30 minutes depending on library configuration Initialization in progress The library is booting This process may take several minutes Please do not power off the librar
34. Authentication Generating the Service Keytab file These instructions are for generating the service keytab file for use with Microsoft Active Directory If you not using Active Directory refer to your Kerberos vendor for instructions on generating this file 1 Set up an Active Directory domain on the Windows server 2 If Active Directory is not already configured run dcpromo 3 Windows 2003 servers only Install Windows Support Tools on the Windows 2003 server as follows a Goto www microsoft com and search for windows server 2003 support tools sp2 or click on the following link http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 96a35011 fd83 419d 939b 9a772ea2df90 amp DisplayLang en b Download both support cab and suptools msi c Run suptools msi to begin installation 4 Create a computer account in Active Directory e Do not select any of the check boxes during creation e The account name will be used for lt computer account gt fields shown in the following steps 5 Atthe command prompt map SPN to the computer account Use the following format setspn A library lt fqdn of library gt lt computer account gt For example setspn A library delos dvt mycompany com kerbtest Scalar i500 User s Guide 105 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setting the Date Time and Time Zone 6 At the command prompt create the keytab file for the SPN Use one of the following formats e For Windows 2003
35. Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring Library Security Settings The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt I O Blades gt Data Path Conditioning From the operator panel select Setup gt I O Blades gt Data Path Conditioning Configuring Library Security Settings Administrators can use the operator panel Security Settings screen to change the following security features Scalar i500 User s Guide Network Interface Enables external access to the library over Ethernet This setting is enabled by default to allow external access SSH Services Opens port 22 to allow Secure Shell SSH services to access the library This setting is enabled by default ICMP Enables external attempts to discover the library by pinging it by means of the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Echo packets This setting is enabled by default Remote UI Opens port 80 to allow remote access to the library via the Web client This setting is enabled by default SNMP Opens port 161 to allow SNMP communication to the library This setting is enabled by default Note This setting differs from enabling SNMP services in the Tools gt System Settings menu see Enable SNMP V1 V2 on page 129 In order to run SNMP the port must be open and the SNMP services must be enabled SMI S Opens port 5988 to allow SMI S communication to the library This se
36. Encryption is supported on LTO 4 and LTO 5 media and IBM and HP LTO 4 and LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS tape drives Encryption is not supported on SCSI tape drives more information refer to the online help or user s guide Select Allow Application Managed as the encryption method to disable library managed encryption The Allow Application Managed encryption selection allows your bacl application to control when encryption is used If your backup application is not configured to control encryption data will not be encrypted Partition FIPS Encryption Method ibaya 1 Enable Library Managed w library_b E Allow Application Managed library_c pa t library_d E library_e y Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics adie Scalar i500 User s Guide 201 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management FIPS Certified Encryption Solution Viewing FIPS Status on There are three ways to view FIPS status on the library the Librar 7 e The Partition Configuration screen Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration shows which partitions are enabled for FIPS All tape drives in FIPS partitions are enabled e The System Information Report Reports gt System Information contains a FIPS column in the Library Partitions section The column displays Yes if FIPS is enabled on the partition and No FIPS is disabled e The tape drive information pop up screen on the Library Configuration Report Reports gt
37. Go ss Z s lt lt Z a By amp sS 3 A X SN 0 B os VA Bs re a200 Z J 9 o 0 Z WS 22020 ZB 07 0 0 7 292020 Z 9 22020 ZB 720209 120929 ZB FA 790525 ESAP sose oS a2 a2 292920 S gt 22020 3000 d 22 LO J 1 Parking tab in parked position 7 Remove all power supplies from each module 8 Remove all tape drives from each module Scalar i500 User s Guide 342 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Unstacking the Existing Unstack the modules as follows Modul siais 1 Starting with the topmost module of your library open the I E station and access doors Caution Before unstacking the modules the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Install an Additional Expansion Module above 2 If your current configuration already uses an expansion module disengage the Y rails so the modules can be safely unstacked a From the front of the library find the Y rail release mechanism which is located on the left side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place b From the rear of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place
38. Idap hostname 389 Idap 10 50 91 103 Idap mycompany com LDAPS Optional See Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library on page 101 StartTLS Optional See Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library on page 101 Install TLS CA Certificate Optional See Installing an LDAP TLS CA Certificate on page 101 Remove TLS CA Certificate This check box is available if a TLS CA certificate is installed You can remove the certificate by selecting this check box The certificate will be removed after you click Apply Principal An LDAP user login ID with permissions to search the LDAP directory The library logs on to LDAP using this ID For an example see Figure 15 on page 103 Password The password for the principal authorization login ID User DN The Fully Qualified Distinguished Name that contains the users For an example see Figure 15 on page 103 Group DN The Fully Qualified Distinguished Name that contains the groups For an example see Figure 15 on page 103 Library User Group The value of the Common Name attribute for the group entry on the LDAP server associated with library users who have user level privileges see User Privileges on page 50 for information on privilege levels This group must exist on your LDAP server see LDAP Server Guidelines on page 100 For an example see Figure 15 on page 103 Library Admin Group The value of the Common Name attribute for the group entr
39. If the Assign I E screen appears do the following a On the Assign W E screen select System The System button turns red after it is selected Selecting System assigns the cartridge to the physical library and not to a specific partition b Select Apply 3 Use the Import Cleaning Media screen on either the operator panel or the Web client to import the cleaning cartridges into the library Follow the on screen prompts or see the library s online Help for 257 Exporting Cleaning Media Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives step by step procedures To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You need to provide the following information in the Import Cleaning Media screens to import media e Media the cleaning cartridges that you want to import The screen includes information about the number of empty cleaning slots in the library The number of cleaning cartridges you can import is limited to the number of empty cleaning slots Note You can filter the list of media by entering all or part of a barcode in the Search text box Use an asterisk to search with wildcards You can also sort the list by clicking on columns with bold headings For example selecting the Location column heading sorts the list by location coordinates The paths to open the appropriate screens are a
40. It is a representation of real physical elements combined to create a grouping that is different from the physical library Also a logical portion of the physical library that is viewed by the host as if it is acomplete library Partitions present the appearance of multiple separate libraries for purposes of file management access by multiple users or dedication to one or more host application Pathname A list of directories separated by slashes and ending with the name of a directory or nondirectory file A pathname is used to trace a path through the file structure to locate or identify a file Picker The robotic hand that handles cartridges Point to Point A Fibre Channel topology that consists of a dedicated connection between two devices a sending device and a receiving device R Rackmount An industry standard communication and computer equipment rack cabinet RAS Reliability Availability and Serviceability Three key attributes of computing system quality design See Reliability Availability and Serviceability An infrastructure to support serviceability in order to identify diagnose and fix problems within the system This approach is designed to address the ability of service personnel and customers to diagnose and resolve problems identified within the system Additionally configuration is addressed to support detection of hardware configuration compatibility issues and persistence across FRUs RAS ticket A
41. Library Configuration contains a FIPS Enabled item This item only displays when the tape drive is an HP LTO 5 or LTO 6 Fibre Channel tape drive The item displays Yes when FIPS is enabled on the drive and No when FIPS is disabled Scalar i500 User s Guide 202 AO P Chapter 8 KR Extended Data Lifecycle E Management Extended Data Lifecycle Management EDLM provides data protection and integrity checking by scanning your tape cartridges providing results and allowing StorNext to migrate data from bad or suspect tapes EDLM allows you to run manual scans on any tape cartridge in the library at any time and performs automatic scans according to schedules and policies that you set up To use EDLM you will set up one or more dedicated partitions to be used for scanning These partitions are called library managed partitions because they are not accessible by hosts You can manually scan a tape cartridge at any time or you can set up automatic scanning schedules and policies Scanning takes place using EDLM scanning drives which are different from regular tape drives You cannot use regular tape drives to perform EDLM scans This section covers the following topics e About EDLM on page 204 e Cleaning for EDLM Drives on page 207 e Incomplete EDLM Scans on page 207 e Configuring EDLM on page 207 e Step 1 Preparing the Library on page 208 e Step 2 Installing the EDLM Plug in for SNAPI on page
42. Middle Amber Right Green Scalar i500 User s Guide 476 Table 11 Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LED Descriptions Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade LED Color Represents Blade Status Green Processor e Solid OFF Blade s main processor is not operating or blade is status booting e Solid ON Blade s main processor is not operating e Blinks once per second 1 Hz Normal Amber Health status Solid OFF Normal e Solid ON Failure or blade is autoleveling In conjunction with the blue LED blinking once very 10 seconds this is a normal condition Autoleveling takes about three minutes per blade and blades autolevel in series Never remove a blade when the amber LED is solid ON unless it has been on continuously for at least 10 minutes Blue Power e Solid OFF Blade is not receiving power control Solid ON Blade is not operational status e Blinks once every second 1 Hz Powered off Ready to remove e Blinks once per 10 seconds flash Normal Blade is powered on Table 2 Explanation of Ethernet Expansion blade Ethernet Port LED States LED Color Blade Status Green e Solid ON Link is up data can be sent or received through the Ethernet port e Solid OFF Link is down data cannot be sent or received through the Ethernet port Amber e Flashes at irregular intervals D
43. Prepare the rack to hold modules if you want to install your library in a rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions on installing a rack mount kit Make sure all tape drives have been removed from the control module See Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 for instructions on removing tape drives Make sure all power supplies have been removed from the control module See Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 for instructions on removing power supplies Open the library s I E station door and access door Lift the control module and place it in the desired location If you are placing the control module in a rack use the rack ears to fasten the control module to the rack For instructions see Installing the Bottom Module in the Rack on page 427 If not already installed install the library control blade LCB in the control module See Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card on page 402 for instructions on installing the LCB Add the tape drives to the module 8 Install the power supplies See Adding Removing and Replacing 10 11 12 13 Power Supplies on page 414 for instructions on installing power supplies Close the library s I E station door and access door Connect all power cords and network data cables See Cabling the Library on page 289 Install module terminators in the top and bottom mod
44. QO 7 00 3 av 9 akv 10 Q Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics 2 Key Server Type This field only appears if you have HP tape drives installed in the library If this field is visible select which encryption solution you plan to use Q EKM SKM or KMIP Key Manager 3 Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics Enable or disable as desired however it is recommended you leave the default For more information see Using Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics on page 186 When enabled this feature performs a check at specified intervals to make sure both key servers are connected to the library and functioning properly The library generates a RAS ticket if there are problems Scalar i500 User s Guide 171 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 4 Interval If Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics is enabled select the interval at which the library performs the diagnostics 5 Test Warning Threshold For Q EKM only If Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics is enabled specify the number of consecutive missed test intervals required to generate a RAS ticket 6 SSL Connection Enable or disable as follows depending on which key server you are using e Q EKM To enable SSL for communication between the library and the EKM servers select the SSL Connection check box The feature is disabled by default If you enable SSL you must make sure that the port numbers listed in
45. Scalar i500 User s Guide 9 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description The Scalar i500 tape library automates the retrieval storage and management of tape cartridges Tape cartridges are stored in the library and mounted and dismounted from tape drives using firmware running on the library or software running on the host systems The Scalar i500 tape library offers advanced management features and reliability as well as scalable performance and storage capacity As your storage capacity and tape drive requirements change expansion modules can be added to the library allowing a configuration of up to a full 41 rack units 41U where 1U 1 75 This chapter covers e Intelligent Storage e Library Configuration e Modules e Front Panel Components e Back Panel Components e Robotic System and Barcode Scanner e Tape Drive Support e Library Features Understanding the Location Coordinates e Understanding Logical Element Addressing 10 Chapter 1 Description Intelligent Storage E Intelligent Storage The Scalar i500 is the intelligent library platform that gives growing midrange storage environments faster easier and more reliable data protection The Scalar i500 combines modular design with continuous robotics to provide industry leading scalability performance and reliability Designed with Quantum s iPlatform architecture and iLayer management approach the Scalar i500
46. configuration A maximum of four FC drives can be connected to one FC I O blade e Ports 1 and 2 on each FC I O blade are reserved for connection to hosts Ports 1 and 2 are always in target mode The other four ports 3 4 5 and 6 are always in initiator mode See Figure 47 e Ideally an installed tape drive should be cabled to a port on the nearest FC I O blade to eliminate the need to manage excessively long cables The nearest FC I O blade is usually located in the same expansion module as the tape drive Scalar i500 User s Guide 308 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library See Cable Management Guidelines on page 316 for best practice guidelines for cabling a library Note Figure 47 FC I O Blade Ae 8 cy 1 Target ports 1 and 2 to host s 2 Initiator ports 3 6 to drives 3 LEDs blue amber green Use the following procedure along with Figure 48 if you are installing a library that includes FC tape drives that are connected to FC I O blades 309 Scalar i500 User s Guide Figure 48 FC With I O Blade Cabling Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library a A OO N Library control blade LCB 7 GB Ethernet port 8 Power supplies 9 Power cords 10 Ethernet cables from LCB to 11 expansion module one per FC I O blade FC c
47. e High Warning message Indicates that a condition exists within the library that impacts system performance redundancy or a specific host application Typical library operations can continue without immediate corrective action although an application may have failed and may need to be restarted A user should investigate the condition and correct the problem soon e Urgent Critical issue Indicates that a failure has occurred or a serious condition exists within the library that requires immediate corrective action In most cases a hardware component is no longer functioning at an acceptable level or has failed Typical library operations required for backup or restore operations are either not possible or are highly unreliable When possible the RAS ticket provides instructions for resolving problems You can view RAS tickets on both the operator panel and the Web client Access the library s online Help system if you have questions about the instructions provided To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You can frequently resolve a simple problem yourself but if the problem is complex or involves a field replaceable unit FRU you will be directed to contact service Only qualified service technicians can service FRUs Caution Do not work with RAS tickets while the library is performing an inventory Doing so may result in inventory di
48. e Manual Cartridge Assignment Disable Remote Service User e Enable SSL e Enable SNMP V1 V2 Enable IPv6 e Enable SMI S Unlabeled Media Detection Scalar i500 User s Guide 48 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees Setup Menu Operations Menu Tools Menu e FC I O Blades Port Configuration Channel Zoning Host Mapping Host Management Host Port Failover Data Path Conditioning FC I O Blade Control Security e Network Interface SSH Services e ICMP e Remote UI e SNMP e SMI S Display Settings e Brightness Contrast e Defaults e Library Tests e Installation amp Verification Tests e Library Demo e View Last Summary Log e View Last Detailed Log E mail Last Detailed Log Blade Info e Port Info e Command History Log a Administrators only bavailable only when the library contains I O blades Visible only when host mapping has been enabled Scalar i500 User s Guide 49 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface User Privileges User Privileges Scalar i500 User s Guide User privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the library Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves the integrity of the library and the data that is stored in it See Working With User Accounts on page 97 for more information on setting user privilege levels Three types of users are defined i
49. gt RAS gt Receiver Addresses From the operator panel select Setup gt Notification gt E mail Alerts Administrators can create e mail notifications The library supports a maximum of 20 e mail notification recipients including the default support e mail notification Each e mail notification recipient must have a unique e mail address To set e mail notifications you need to provide the e mail address and filter level setting for the recipient For more information on filter levels see Working With RAS E mail Notifications Each e mail notification includes an optional Comments text box you can use to enter important system configuration details such as the network environment or third party software applications that interface with the library Such information will appear in the body of the e mail and can help technical support personnel to troubleshoot the library 95 Modifying RAS E mail Notifications Deleting RAS E mail Notifications Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With RAS E mail Notifications Note Do not enter more than one address in the Enter E mail Address text box If you need to send e mail notifications to multiple addresses create an e mail notification for each e mail address The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications gt RAS gt Receiver Addresses gt Create
50. modules in the library stack Install one module terminator in the top terminator connector on the topmost module and one in the bottom terminator connector on the bottommost module b If you need to add expansion modules to the control module remove the module terminator from the control module terminator connection that is closest to the expansion module c Replace the module terminator in the expansion module in the terminator connection that is furthest from the control module d Connect the module to module cable from the control module to the expansion module 5 Connect your Ethernet cable to the Gigabit GB Ethernet port on the library control blade LCB for remote access to the library via the Web client Scalar i500 User s Guide 302 Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected Directly to a Host or Switch Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Connect a power cord to the outlet on the power supply on the rear of the library There should always be a power cord connected to the power supply on the control module If redundant power supplies are used connect a power cord to each of the additional power supply outlets Plug the power cord into a nearby AC power source Power on the library a Turn on the rear power switch of each of the power supplies b Turn on the front power button c Power up the host system Verify communication
51. s modules using the I E station commands from the operator panel or Web client 11 Open the host application and reinventory in order to synchronize its logical inventory with the physical inventory of the library Due to the way the library logically addresses its tape drives and slots internally adding an expansion module will change the element addresses and this can affect proper communication to a controlling host See Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 Because of this you must refresh the configuration of any backup application that manages the library to reflect the adjusted positions In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detect the changes P Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Follow the instructions in this section before performing any of the following procedures e Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library on page 364 e Replacing the Control Module on page 376 e Replacing an Expansion Module on page 388 Caution If a control module is replaced all library configuration data will be invalidated and requires a new library configuration Follow the instructions below to completely export all tape cartridges and completely delete all logical partition configuration and cleaning slot assignments Caution If an expansion module is removed or replaced you must follow the steps below to modify or delete all the affected
52. service use only Cleaning Type Manual Auto MoveMedium Expired Invalid if the tape is expired or a data tape was improperly used to clean if not applicable Usage Count N A if the cleaning did not complete Reserved Slot Position Log Shows current information for all slots in the library The comma separated values csv file provides the following information for each slot Date and Time Slot Type Picker Drive Storage or IE Object Present Y N Location Coordinates X Position Y Position Angle Position X Calibration Offset Y Calibration Offset RAS Tickets Log Records all RAS tickets for the library When the log file reaches its maximum size the oldest information is replaced as new information is added 274 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing FC I O Blade Information Media Security Log Lists media that have been completely removed from the library This log is only available if you have an Advanced Reporting license installed on the library see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 and you have enabled the library to collect data for the log file For more information about this log and how to enable the library to collect data for the log see Configuring and Viewing the Media Security Log on page 143 Media Usage Log Lists information regarding data written and read on the medium and lists statistics pertaining to soft and ha
53. 208 optional e Step 3 Configuring the StorNext Host Settings on the Library on page 211 Scalar i500 User s Guide 203 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management About EDLM e Step 4 Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on page 213 e Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions on page 216 e Pausing EDLM Scans on Partitions on page 222 e Running Manual EDLM Tests on page 224 e Working With EDLM Test Results on page 226 e Testing Suspect EDLM Drives on page 235 About EDLM Details about EDLM are as follows e The EDLM feature requires an Extended Data Lifecycle Management license to be installed on the library One license covers the entire library See the Scalar i500 User s Guide for instructions on how to enable a license Library firmware must be at code version 620G or later to use EDLM e You need Administrator privileges to configure EDLM and initiate manual tests e At least one dedicated library managed partition is required for the media scans This library managed partition is accessible only by a library administrator It is not presented to any other applications The library managed partition is assigned its own dedicated resources and EDLM scanning is executed in the background Cartridges are moved into EDLM scanning drives residing in the EDLM library managed partition After being scanned cartridges are returned to their original locations See
54. 4 3 2 Port 6 Scalar i500 User s Guide 315 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines Cable Management Guidelines Cable Management Kit As the library expands to support larger configurations it is important to restrain and organize cables and power cords on the rear of the library Doing so ensures that the rear of the library remains accessible and reduces the possibility that cables become damaged Use this section to find cable management guidelines and best practices for power cords and Ethernet cables Use the equipment specified in the Cable Management Kit section below If you purchase a Fibre Channel I O blade or an Ethernet Expansion blade you will receive a cable management kit with all the equipment necessary to perform these procedures You can also order the cable management kit from http shop quantum com The color of the straps matches the color of the cords they are designed to secure Component Description Quantity Black hook and loop fastener Secures power cords 1 to expansion modules Ol g Jj A Blue hook and loop fastener Secures Ethernet cables 1 to expansion modules Scalar i500 User s Guide 316 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines Component Description Quantity Push in clip to secure hook and loop fasteners to 2 I expansion modules VU ir M5 thumbscrew For ol
55. 427 x Installing Additional Modules Into the Rack ccceceeceseseseeteeseees 431 Adding Removing and Replacing Tape DIives cccccseeeeeeeeetesees 438 Adding a Tape Drive viccieasheesteciateectdete nn E R 438 Permanently Removing a Tape Drive cccccesseseeesteteseeeeesteseeeenens 440 Removing and Replacing a Tape DYive cccseceeseseeeseseseeteeeeenees 441 Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades cccseseseeseeeeteeees 443 Read This First Complete Installation Steps eens 446 Adding an PC I O Blade ss sccccsessssseissessssessssnsssooneeesisseisvensassed sansiessise 448 Removing an FC I O Blade nniisesisnniiia es 452 Replacing an EC I O Blade senorrrniseai ree e e E 453 Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade 0008 454 Adding an FC I O Fan Blade s sssssssssssesssesiesissesrsesresresrsrresrenresessrese 455 Removing an FC I O Fan Blade cccesesseseseseeeeseseeseneesesnseeeseeseeess 457 Replacing an FC I O Fan Blade ccccesesessesesseseesscssensneeseeeeeeneecesenens 457 Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade 458 Cabling a 5U Library for Ethernet Connectivity ccceeseeeeeees 460 Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade cccsesessseseseeteeseseseeees 461 Cabling the Ethernet Expansion Blade s sssssssssssissrsrsersesrsessresesees 468 Permanently Removing or Relocating an Ethernet Expansion Blad r tenpera eip a E E T 472 Re
56. 528 Library Power Consumption and Heat Output eee 529 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions 531 Glossary Scalar i500 User s Guide 541 Scalar i500 User s Guide Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Tables Web Client Men s sesvi issescissesesesdsbsesevestasvesesesctovscsventastensnestiotease 46 Operator Panel Menus cesecesseeeeceseeeteeseseaeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeees 48 Number of Partitions Supported 0 ee eeseseeeeeeereeeeeeeeees 69 Number of I E Station Slots Available cccceseeeeneeees 81 Control Path Assignment During Partition Creation 86 Available Slots and COD Upgrades Per Configuration 148 Partition Encryption Methods ccs eseseeeeteseeees 181 EDLM Policy Settings for Partitions eee 219 Rackmount Kit Content 0 0 0 0 ccceccesesesescseseeececseeeaeseeseeeeens 418 Rack Ear Kit Content cscccsscsetscsseassssscsecastovesenassecvesssaansesess 421 Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LED Descriptions 477 Blade Status LEDS icscsccsessscsesssssssoassiessoseabsvessessebsvessessabsventessass 502 LCB Ethernet Hub Link Activity o oo eeeeeeereneeeees 503 Fibre Port Link LED on FC I O Blade eeceeeeeseceeteeeees 504 Ethernet Expansion Blade Ethernet Port Link LED States 504 Tape Drive LEDS vsccicssesecreesvievestenace ar n eared 506 Fibre Port Link Sta
57. 5U control module 3 9U 32U 55 9 in x 17 4 in x 31 4 in Pepanston modules 141 9 cm x 44 2 cm x 79 8 cm 5U control module 4 9U 41U 71 6 in x 17 4 in x 31 4 in a 181 9 cm x 44 2 cm x 79 8 cm Component Weights Component Weight Drive Sled 10 lbs 4 6 kg Power Supply 5 Ibs 2 3 kg 5U Chassis empty 60 lbs 27 2 kg Scalar i500 User s Guide 528 Appendix A Library Specifications Library Power Consumption and Heat Output Component Weight 9U Chassis empty 65 lbs 29 5 kg 5U Packaging Kit 20 Ibs 9 kg 9U Packaging Kit 24 Ibs 10 9 kg 14U Packaging Kit 40 Ibs 18 kg SSS a ee Library Power Consumption and Heat Output The typical library power consumption Watts hour and heat output BTU hour is listed below writing Note Typical values for tape drives assumes tape drives are Typical Power Typical Heat Consumption Output Library Configuration kW Hour BTU Hour Subassembly Power Consumption Scalar 1500 Library with Robot and LCB no tape drives installed 0 079 269 0 robot moving LCB installed UDS3 IBM LTO 2 Drive Sled Module SCSI 0 029 99 0 UDS3 IBM LTO 2 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 032 109 2 UDS3 IBM LTO 3 Drive Sled Module SCSI 0 027 92 1 UDS3 IBM LTO 3 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 029 99 0 UDS3 IBM LTO 4 Drive Sled Module SCSI 0 038 129 7 UDS3 IBM LTO 4 Drive Sled Module Fi
58. 9U Expansion Module Module Module Module Module 17 Chapter 1 Description Front Panel Components Front Panel Components Figure 5 shows the front panel components of the library The paragraphs following Figure 5 describe the components in detail Figure 5 Front Panel Components ini Tn ll Yai a ie 72 UUU rw 4 1 Access door 2 Operator panel 3 I E station 4 Front power button Access Door _ 7 Theaccess door allows access to the internal components of the library Each control module and expansion module has an access door In most Scalar i500 User s Guide 18 E Station Operator Panel Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Front Panel Components cases you will not need to access the library through this door except when you want to bulk load or unload cartridges from the library The access door is locked by the I E station door To open the access door you must first open the I E station door If you want to prohibit access to the library which is recommended for security reasons lock the I E station door This keeps unauthorized users from accessing tape cartridges You can lock and unlock the I E station door using commands on the Operations menu For more information see Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations on page 262 If the access door is opened the library is not available for use When an access door on any module is opened all in p
59. Channel zoning A method of subdividing a storage area network into disjoint zones on a per channel basis in order to enhance security and qualify access Cleaning tape cleaning cartridge A tape used to clean recording heads and reading heads on a tape drive Cleaning slot The physical home where a cleaning tape or cartridge resides CLI Command Line Interface A method of interfacing with a file system in which the user types commands using a specific command syntax from a command line COD Capacity on Demand A library feature that allows users to have a large physical library but only be licensed to use a subset of its total capacity Users pay only for what they are currently using License upgrades enable more capacity without causing a system interruption Compact flash A card on the LCB that stores information about a library s contents and configuration Connectivity The method by which hardware devices or software communicate with other hardware or software Control module The first module of the library It consists of an operator panel touch screen library control blade LCB storage tape drives power supplies I E station Control path The connection between a partition and host application The control path connection is made through a designated tape drive Only one tape drive can be selected as the control path per partition Controller The PCB or system that translates computer data and commands into a
60. Configuration screen Select the new internal IP address from the list on the screen You can select from nine IP addresses The Internal Network Configuration screen is only accessible from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt Internal Network 125 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings Configuring System Settings User Session Timeout minutes Scalar i500 User s Guide This section describes the system wide settings you can configure on the library Each setting is described in detail below Details on the system settings include The only setting users with User privileges can configure is the Touch screen audio setting e Administrators can configure all the system settings e All of the system settings are available on the operator panel The only settings available on the Web client are user session timeout and unlabeled media detection The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings e From the Web client select Setup gt System Settings The library automatically logs out a user or administrator when the library has detected no activity for a specified length of time You can adjust the user session timeout by entering a numeric value in the User session timeout minutes text box Valid user session timeout values are
61. Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Tools Required None Instructions 1 2 Upgrade library firmware to version 600G or later Upgrade tape drive firmware on all HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drives that you plan to connect to the Ethernet Expansion blade to the latest version qualified with the Scalar i500 library see the Scalar i500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels Optional Save the library configuration see the Scalar i500 User s Guide for instructions Shut down the library 5 For every expansion module that will contain an Ethernet Expansion blade connect a standard Ethernet cable from one of the four internal Ethernet ports on the library control blade LCB to the Ethernet port marked LOWER located on the bottom right of the expansion module in which the Ethernet Expansion blade is installed There are two ports marked UPPER and LOWER Since the Ethernet Expansion blade must be installed in the lower bay of the expansion module you must use the Ethernet port marked LOWER The LOWER port is on the right See Figure 64 462 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 64 Connecting the Library Control Blade to the Expansion Module Via Ethernet Ethernet cable to network SEDIT Ce 2o o BS i ramm j See g ab o oe J o o EDZI C
62. Emulation Type Select Media Barcode Format Oo 0 2 Fibre HP LTO 4 Online Ready 3 From the Select Partition Type drop down list choose Library Managed EDLM Scalar i500 User s Guide 214 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans 4 Typea name for the partition in the Enter Name text box 5 Type in the number of storage slots to assign to the partition in the Enter Number of Slots text box Note The number in parentheses indicates the number of slots available for use in the partition For standard partitions the number equals the number of licensed slots available and the default equals the total number of available slots Since EDLM partitions can contain both unlicensed and licensed slots using all unlicensed slots before using licensed slots the number in parentheses equals the total number of licensed and unlicensed slots and the default equals the number of unlicensed slots available You can configure EDLM partitions to use zero slots if desired Note The Select Emulation Type and Select Media Barcode Format fields are not selectable when creating EDLM library managed partitions 6 Select the drive s you want to add to the partition from the table Only EDLM scanning drives appear in the list 7 Click Next The Create Partition EDLM Policy Settings screen appears see Figure 34 on page 217 8 If desired set EDLM scanning policies on this EDLM library
63. Ethernet port labeled LOWER in the lower right corner of the expansion module Connect the other end of the cable to a port in the Ethernet hub on the LCB b Ifthe FCI O blade is installed in the upper bay of the expansion module connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port labeled UPPER in the lower right corner of the expansion module Connect the other end of the cable to a port in the Ethernet hub on the LCB c Follow the instructions in Cable Management Guidelines on page 316 for best practices in routing the Ethernet cables Scalar i500 User s Guide 311 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library 3 Remove and discard the necessary number of the black rubber protective covers from the ports on the FC I O blades 4 Carefully unwrap the FC cables and remove the two white plastic protective caps from each end of the cable Caution FC cables will be damaged if they are bent at more than a four inch arc 5 Connect the FC cable to one of the following initiator ports on the FC I O blade 3 4 5 or 6 When you choose the port take into account the location of any other tape drives that you plan to connect to the same FC I O blade See Cable Management Guidelines on page 316 for best practice guidelines for cabling a library 6 Insert the other end of the FC cable into the FC port on the FC tape drive 7 Repeat the above steps for ea
64. Expansion blade To disable FIPS mode the tape drives must be Ethernet connected to allow the tape drives to reconfigure See Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape Drives on page 201 2 Remove the Ethernet Expansion blade from the library s configuration as follows a On the library web client select Tools gt Diagnostics to enter library diagnostics A message warns you that entering diagnostics will log out all other users of the same or lower privilege level Click OK to agree to log all other users out The diagnostics menu bar displays Select Drives gt EE Blade Control The Diagnostics Ethernet Expansion Blade Control screen displays see Figure 68 472 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 68 Ethernet 27 Ethernet Expansion Blade Control Diagnostics Ethernet Expansion Blade Control Set the Ethernet Expansion Blade Control Settings Please select an operation on an EE Blade d Click the Remove button corresponding to the Ethernet Expansion blade you want to remove Note Removing an Ethernet Expansion blade may cause key exchange failures if FIPS is enabled A message warns you about the possible failures and asks you to confirm that you want to proceed 3 Click OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel the operation without removing the Ethernet Expansion blade 4 Disconnect the Ethe
65. Firmware Upgrading Library Firmware Upgrading Library Firmware Scalar i500 User s Guide The library firmware upgrade operation allows you to upgrade library firmware using the Web client Upgrading library firmware can take up to an hour for large configurations Contact Quantum Support for a copy of the latest firmware Download the file to your computer hard drive Library firmware comes bundled with tape drive firmware firmware upgrade instructions and release notes Verify with the release notes or Quantum Support that you are updating the library with the correct version of firmware For technical support see Getting More Information or Help on page 8 Library firmware version 200G GSxxx and 210G GSxxx SP1 support library configurations of up to 14U Library firmware 300G GSxxx I1 supports library configurations up to 23U Library firmware versions 320G GSxxx SP3 and higher support library configurations up to 41U Make sure you are running the appropriate firmware version to support the size of your library It is recommended that you use the most current version of firmware regardless of library size e To determine the latest version of library firmware refer to the release notes or check the Quantum Web site at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocu mentationDownloads SI500 Index aspx e To find out the latest version of tape drive firmware refer to the release notes Release notes and instru
66. From an Existing Library These instructions explain how to permanently remove an expansion module from the library There are some configuration settings to take into account when removing an expansion module from an existing library e COD licenses remain the same After the expansion module is removed there may be more slots licensed than are available Only the available slots appear on the License screen Scalar i500 User s Guide 364 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library e All resources in the removed module s are removed A partition with all resources in the removed module s will be present with no slots or drives This partition can only be deleted Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a 5U control module weighs approximately 60 lbs 27 2 kg A 9U expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power suppl
67. Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You cannot retrieve tape drive sled logs from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Drive Operations Identifying FC I O Blades Administrators can flash the green LED on a selected FC I O blade to identify the physical location of the I O blade in the library After performing this blade operation go to the back of the library and identify Scalar i500 User s Guide 496 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Permanently Removing FC I O Blades the I O blade with the rapidly blinking LED at the bottom of the FC I O blade The LED will blink for one minute The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt I O Blades gt Blade Control e From the operator panel select Setup gt I O Blades gt Blade Control gt Identify Blade Permanently Removing FC I O Blades Library firmware monitors all FC I O blades after they are installed in the library Once an FC I O blade is installed the library expects the blade to be in the same installed location after every power cycle If an FC I O blade is relocated or is permanently removed from the library the library firmware must be configured to stop monitoring the blade Administrators can perform this operation by selecting the FC I O bla
68. Instructions Scalar i500 User s Guide 479 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting The Scalar i500 library includes advanced system monitoring and alerting mechanisms that inform you of library status and issues It provides you with status information about various library subsystems and components It also notifies you of issues it detects and guides you through diagnosing and correcting issues before problems interfere with backups This chapter covers e About RAS Tickets e Capturing Snapshots of Library Information e Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record e Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration e Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages e Duplicate Devices Discovered e Duplicate Media Changer Devices Discovered e Identifying Tape Drives e Retrieving Tape Drive Logs e Retrieving Tape Drive Sled Logs e Identifying FC I O Blades e Permanently Removing FC I O Blades e Resetting FC I O Blade Ports Scalar i500 User s Guide 480 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Quantum s Knowledge Base e Viewing and E Mailing the Command History Logs e Interpreting LEDs e Using the Installation Verification Test e Configuring the Internal Network e Library Diagnostics Drive DiagnosticsDrive TestsMedia TestsEthernet Expansion Blade Control e Robotics Diagnostics a a EE Quantum s Knowledge Base Quantum keeps a dynamic listing of frequen
69. LCB and touch screen display The control module also contains an import export I E station fixed storage slots tape drives and at least one power supply Expansion modules are supplementary modules that can be stacked above or below the control module Each expansion module contains fixed storage slots tape drive slots and power supply slots The I E stations on expansion modules are included and may be configured as storage Expansion modules also contain bays for optional Fibre Channel FC Input Output I O blades which provide FC connections for FC drives in the library If an expansion module is used only for storage and does not contain tape drives or FC I O blades it does not need a separate power supply All power is derived from the control module The maximum rack height of the library is 41U which consists of a 5U control module and four 9U expansion modules Figure 4 illustrates the stackability of the library and the recommended library configurations 16 Chapter 1 Description Scalar i500 User s Guide Modules Figure 4 Base Systems Plus Expansion Modules 5U 14U 23U 32U 41U 41 slots 133 slots 225 slots 317 slots 409 slots 9U Expansion Module 5U Control 5U Control Module Module 5U Control 9U Expansion 9U Expansion Module Module Module 5U Control 9U Expansion 9U Expansion 9U Expansion Module Module Module Module 5U Control 9U Expansion 9U Expansion 9U Expansion
70. Note The rear Y rail is impossible to lift up with the tape drives installed Scalar i500 User s Guide 343 Scalar i500 User s Guide 7 4 ry 5y A O N dao UM A LAIN 3 7 Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up Squeeze here to release Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 344 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 3 Remove the rack ears that fasten the module to the rack 4 Loosen the thumbscrews located at the base of the front and rear of the module S nA f Pi 9900000000 VECOS E CCOCCOT CCCA KONO 10A AAA OAO NNO 1 Thumbscrews behind doors Scalar i500 User s Guide 345 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 5 Open the module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module beneath it 1 Guide pin 2 Thumbscrew 6 From the front of the library slide the entire module toward you and lift it off of the module below it 7 Repeat these steps for each module that you need to remove Scalar i500 User s Guide 346 Installing the New 9U Expansion Module Scalar
71. O blades there would be four media changer devices visible on ports 1 and 2 of both FC I O blades for a total of 16 To minimize unnecessary discovery of media changer devices you need to configure host mapping See Managing FC Hosts and Host Mapping on page 113 When FC I O blades are installed in the library administrators can configure channel zoning for selected FC I O blades Channel zoning also called port zoning configures access to an entire FC and all the LUNs on that channel for the exclusive use of a host or group of hosts on a single port Channel zoning enables you to control access between specific target ports 1 and 2 and initiator ports 3 6 on an FC I O blade Note Channel zoning acts upon the FC tape drive LUNs seen through the initiator ports on the FC I O blade Channel zoning does not affect media changer partition LUNs If you want to map hosts to media changer LUNs though an FCI O blade you must use the FC I O blade s FC host mapping feature For information on FC host mapping see Managing FC Hosts and Host Mapping on page 113 Note If both channel zoning and host mapping are enabled the channel zoning settings supersede any host LUN mapping on the FC I O blade 111 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Details on configuring channel zoning include e By default all target FC ports ports 1 and 2 onan FC I O blade have access to all initiator ports
72. Removing Power e Restarting the Library e Logging In e Logging Out e Performing Media Operations e About Cleaning Tape Drives e About Tape Drive Operations e Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations e Controlling FC I O Blade Power Scalar i500 User s Guide 237 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Powering on the Library Sa er Powering on the Library To power on the library 1 Connect all power cords to their electrical source 2 Turn on each power supply using the switch on the rear of the power supply 3 Press the power button located on the front door of the library s control module When you power on the library the library performs a self test to ensure that all of its parts are functioning properly All tape drives and partitions are brought online aS a Shutting Down Powering Off and Completely Removing Power Scalar i500 User s Guide The Shutdown command shuts down the library s operating system and firmware When performing a shutdown the library finishes the current command and lowers the robot to the floor of the library Caution Always perform a shutdown before powering off the library or completely removing power from the library Before performing a shutdown make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library To power off the library Perform the shutdown sequence and then press the power button on the front of
73. SKM server is connected operational To export an encryption certificate 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 2 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Certificate gt Export 3 Click Apply to export your SKM server s native encryption certificate 4 Click Close to close the Progress Window 5 Inthe File Download dialog box that displays click Save 6 Inthe Save As dialog box that opens choose a location in which to save the file then click Save 193 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Importing Encryption Certificates The encryption certificate contains a public key that is used to wrap encrypt encryption keys prior to transporting them to another SKM server When sharing tape cartridges you need to import the encryption certificate of the destination SKM server Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to import encryption certificates To import encryption certificates 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 2 Receive the encryption certificate file from the destination SKM server administrator and save it to a known location on your computer
74. Scalar i500 User s Guide Administrators can reset individual ports on FC I O blades Resetting these ports can help troubleshoot FC I O blade issues The Setup Blade Control screen allows you to perform the Reset Port operation on a selected FC I O blade port Resetting an FC I O blade port will cause a temporary loss of communication with connected hosts The screen will display a warning message about the communication loss and ask you to confirm that you want to proceed Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Note Before resetting FC I O blade ports verify the location of the FC I O blade See Identifying FC I O Blades on page 496 498 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Viewing and E Mailing the Command History Logs The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt FC I O Blade Control e From the operator panel select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt FC I O Blade Control gt Reset Port Viewing and E Mailing the Command History Logs When FC I O blades are installed administrators can use the Command History Log screens to view the most recent command and response activity that has occurred with externally addressable library dev
75. Table 9 Rackmount Kit Contents Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a control module weighs approximately 60 lbs 27 2 kg An expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 lbs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules Note The rackmount kit cannot be used with every type of rack Racks with threaded rails or unique hole spacing for example may not support the rackmount kit In addition the rack must have rail spacing front to rear of between 605 mm 23 8 in and 770 mm 30 3 in Required tools None 1 Before beginning installation verify the contents of the rackmount kit see Table 9 and the rack ear kit see Table 10 You only need one rackmount kit per library The rackmount kit allows you to secure the bottom module in the rack It includes rack ears for additional security You need one rack ear kit for each additional module Each rack ear kit contains the supplies to install right and left rack ears on one module You must install one set of rack ears for each module in the rack Component Description Quantity Small ferrule Usedin 10 8 fy racks with round holes required SS 2 spares 418 Chapter 12 Instal
76. Tape Drive Firmware Note If your library is running firmware version 600G or later you can only downgrade library firmware to version 410G or later If you need to downgrade to a version earlier than 410G contact Quantum Support for assistance Note If you purchased your library after October 15 2008 you cannot downgrade library firmware to below version 520G Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Note The library automatically restarts after the firmware upgrade is complete Before logging into the library clear the Web browser cache See your Web browser s documentation for instructions on how to clear the cache You can find instructions on updating library firmware on the Quantum Website You can also find step by step instructions in your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You cannot upgrade library firmware from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Update Library Firmware E a an Upgrading Tape Drive Firmware You can use the Web client to upgrade one or more tape drives in your library with an image file obtained from Quantum Support
77. Warning Before operating this product read all instructions and warnings in this document and in the System Safety and Regulatory Information Guide The System Safety and Regulatory Information Guide is located on the Scalar i500 Documentation Training and Resource CD A ga REFERMI PAMRANHRAR RERARAVEM THER FARHA Agee ERAS RH BAWRARERAR EMARE SHEA h A AHAM t gamt A ADVERSAL L s alle instruktioner og advarsler i dette dokument og i Vejledning om system sikkerheds og lovgivningsoplysninger f r produktet betjenes Avant d utiliser ce produit lisez la totalit des instructions et avertissements de ce document et du Guide d informations sur le syst me la s curit et la r glementation AVERTISSEMENT Lesen Sie vor der Verwendung dieses Produkts alle Anweisungen und A HINWIES Warnhinweise in diesem Dokument und im System Safety and Regulatory Information Guide Info Handbuch System Sicherheit und Richtlinien NIN NNATNAI NININA 7 NA NIP AT NIN PW APVONA 97 ATR A AIPZNI NINU NIWN NWN YT N NTN pPI AT Mona Scalar i500 User s Guide 2 Preface een COMRERAT SHIC ALB HLUILATL RE ICT A BS Zee EMcRRL COST ATO BSLIEREBRACESL rat 2 2 Ho x Se 7 XASH OA A Hal GE HLH A o HAHEI HAS SASNAL Mepeg Hasanom kcnnyaTaynn AaHHOrO YCTPO CTBA O3HAKOMbTECb BO BCeMn NHCTpPYKUMAMN n NpeAynpeXKAeHnAMn NPUBEDCHHbIMU B AAHHOM MPEAYNPEKAEHME py peaynp preen DOKyMeHTeE n B CNpaBO4HOM py
78. Web client is Reports gt Logged in Users Viewing the All Slots Report The All Slots Report contains information on all slots that are currently assigned to a partition and all I E slots A maximum of 20 responses displays per page You can scroll between the pages using the page arrows at the bottom left of the screen The report contains the following information about each slot Slot type Drive I E station cleaning or storage slot Barcode Barcode number of the cartridge installed in the slot no barcode number means the slot is empty e Partition The partition that owns the slot Scalar i500 User s Guide 272 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs Location Location coordinates of the slot For a description of location coordinates see Understanding the Location Coordinates on page 32 Element Address Element address of the slot Encryption The encryption state of the media in the slot In order for the library to know the encryption state the tape must have been placed into an encryption capable tape drive in the library The encryption capable tape drive reads and records the encryption state of the tape and the encryption state displays as Encrypted or Not Encrypted If the tape was not placed into an encryption capable tape drive in the library or if the slot is empty the encryption state displays as Unknow
79. You will not be able to open the main access door to bulk load tape cartridges into the library without first unlocking the I E station door If possible bulk load the library before configuring the I E station slots as storage Otherwise unlock the I E station door For information on locking and unlocking the I E stations see Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations on page 262 For information on configuring I E station slots see Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 To perform an initial bulk load open the access door and manually insert directly into storage slots as many cartridges as you plan to use The cartridges will not go in all the way if they are inserted incorrectly Note Asmall number of physical storage slots are inaccessible to the robot and should not be used for any tape cartridges These slots appear as unavailable in the Library Configuration report For detailed information on these slots see Unused Slots on page 247 Note When you open the main access door to load tape cartridges into the library the library will automatically generate a Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS ticket alerting you to the fact that the door was opened For information on resolving a RAS ticket see About RAS Tickets on page 481 After the initial bulk load you can use the Import Media screen to add cartridges without interrupting library operations as long as I E station slots have been
80. a Control Module in a Library Running SKM Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module If your library is running SKM you must you run a special script on the SKM server after you replace the control module The script will correct the library serial number associations in the key server database and allow you to export used SKM encryption keys via the Web client correctly For instructions refer to the chapter titled Updating the SKM Keystore After Replacing a Library Control Module in the Scalar Key Manager 2 0 User s Guide When running the script you will need to enter the serial numbers of both the non functioning control module as well as the serial number of the new replacement control module Before you send the control module back to Quantum record the serial numbers so you can provide them when required If you have already returned the failed control module to Quantum contact Quantum Support to obtain its serial number Locating the Serial Number on the Scalar i500 On the Scalar i500 the serial number label is located inside the control module on the horizontal bar at the back of the library To see the label open the front door See Figure 4 for location and Figure 61 for an example The serial number is listed first The serial number is all of the characters following the SN on the serial number label Do not enter the SN characters
81. and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please visit our Web site at http www quantum com AboutUs weee Index aspx or contact your local government authority your household waste disposal service or the business from which you purchased the product This document is organized as follows Chapter 1 Description describes basic library configurations and features Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface discusses the operator panel and the Web client and the features available on each Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library explains how to configure your library for use Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting describes the features available with the Advanced Reporting license Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand describes how to purchase additional slot capacity for the library Chapter 6 Storage Networking describes the features available with the Storage Networking license Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management describes the features available with the Encryption Key Management license Chapter 9 Running Your Library explains how to perform library tape drive and media operations Preface e Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports explains how to use the library s built in reports to get information you need e Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware explains how to update library and tape drive firmware e Chapter
82. appropriate When removing the cover plate ensure that you do not remove the y home flag screw as shown in Figure 53 on page 330 Before removing the control module s bottom cover Caution plate the robot assembly must be parked as described in Step 4 above 329 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Figure 53 Cover plate with y home flag 1 screws to remove 2 y home flag screw do not remove Scalar i500 User s Guide 330 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration a Ifyou plan to stack the control module at the top of the library and if an expansion module will be located below it remove the control module s bottom cover plate and the expansion module s top plate b If you plan to stack the control module between expansion modules remove both the top and bottom plates of the control module Also remove the top plate of the expansion module located below the control module and the bottom plate of the expansion module located above the control module c If you plan to stack the control module at the bottom of the library and if an expansion module will be located above it remove the control module s top plate and the expansion module s bottom plate Figure 54 Recommended Module Locations 5U 14U 23U 3
83. as the tape drive You will need to provide fibre cables long enough to connect a host or a SAN switch to a target port on an FC I O blade 313 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library It is important to consider how drives are assigned to partitions when cabling tape drives and hosts to an FCI O blade If you want a host to be able to communicate with a tape drive that is assigned to a particular partition both the drive and the host that has access to the partition should communicate through the same FC I O blade The following table provides an example of a 41U library with FC I O blade attached tape drives The information next to the image shows each tape drive and the FC I O blade and port to which each tape drive is connected Scalar i500 User s Guide 314 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Recommended Cabling With FC I O FC I O Blade Blades In Maximum Capacity Library Tape Drive FC I O Blade Port i FE 1 1 N A direct attached 1 2 N A direct attached 1 3 1 2 Port 3 1 4 1 2 Port 4 0 1 1 2 Port 5 0 2 1 2 Port 6 1 1 1 2 Port 3 1 2 1 2 Port 4 1 3 1 2 Port 5 1 4 1 2 Port 6 2 1 2 2 Port 3 2 2 2 2 Port 4 2 3 2 2 Port 5 2 4 2 2 Port 6 3 1 3 2 Port 3 3 2 3 2 Port 4 3 3 3 2 Port 5 3
84. behaviors on blades during autoleveling operations see Blade Status LEDs on page 500 ES Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade Each FC I O blade is cooled by a fan blade The fan blade is always installed in the bay to the right of the FC I O blade Each expansion module has four bays and can accommodate two FC I O blades and two fan blades The recommended order of installing the FC I O blade and fan in the expansion module is starting from the bottom two bays and moving up Scalar i500 User s Guide 454 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade Figure 62 on page 445 shows the FC I O blade and I O fan blade installed side by side in the expansion module Adding an FC I O Fan These instructions explain how to add an FC I O fan blade to your Blade library You can add an FC I O fan blade while the library is powered on Required tools None 1 Access the back of the expansion module 2 Remove the cover plate from blade bay to the right of the bay for the FCI O blade Note The recommended order of installing the FC I O blade and fan blade in an expansion module is starting from the bottom two bays and moving up 3 Press up and out to open the latch hooks on each side of the FC I O fan blade The LED must be at the bottom of the blade Scalar i500 User s Guide 455 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Rem
85. both Ethernet Expansion blades and FC I O blades 459 Cabling a 5U Library for Ethernet Connectivity Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade You may not connect a tape drive to both an Ethernet Expansion blade and an FC I O blade You are limited to a maximum of four blades per library Ethernet Expansion blades and FC I O blades in any combination If the tape drive Ethernet connection or an Ethernet Expansion blade fails you will not be able to perform encryption operations on any connected tape drives that have FIPS mode enabled You will still be able to collect tape drive logs and update tape drive firmware via internal serial communication Caution If the Ethernet Expansion blade or Ethernet connectivity fails and the attached tape drives have FIPS mode enabled all encryption operations encrypting decrypting key requests on the attached tape drives will fail These operations will NOT automatically continue over internal serial communication If this happens contact Quantum Support for a replacement Ethernet Expansion blade as soon as possible In a 5U library 1 2 Upgrade library firmware to version 600G or later Upgrade tape drive firmware on all HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drives that you plan to connect via Ethernet to the latest version qualified with the Scalar i500 librar
86. box to log in using a local user name and password For more information on LDAP see Configuring LDAP on page 99 For more information on Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos on page 104 Logging Out Logging out secures the library from being accessed by unauthorized users Log out whenever you have finished accessing the library through either the Web client or the operator panel From the Web client or the operator panel you can click the LOGOUT button at the top right of the screen to log out From the Web client you can also select Operations gt Logout Scalar i500 User s Guide 240 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations Performing Media Operations Scalar i500 User s Guide Administrators and users can use commands on the Web client and operator panel Operations menu to perform the following media operations Import data cartridges into the library Export data cartridges from the library e Move data cartridges between tape drives I E stations and storage slots within a partition Import cleaning cartridges into the library AutoClean is enabled Export cleaning cartridges from the library AutoClean is enabled e Load cartridges into tape drives e Unload cartridges from tape drives Change the tape drive mode from online to offline and back as needed In addition administrators can e Clean tape drives manually using the Tools gt Drive Mgmt gt Clean Drive command
87. by selecting a different tape drive You can also disable a partition s control path by clearing the current control path selection Caution Do not select an FC tape drive as control path if it is connected to an FC I O blade The control path will be filtered out by the I O blade and will not be visible to the host Scalar i500 User s Guide 87 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Obtaining and Installing a License Key Note You may need to modify settings in your host application as a result of modifying the control path See your host application documentation Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates Note If you have more than one FC I O blade in the library each FC I O blade will present each partition that does not have a tape drive as the control path as a target device to the host Thus the host may see the same partition multiple times To minimize confusion you should configure host mapping so that each host sees each device only once See Configuring Host Mapping on page 118 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Control Path e From the operator panel select Setup gt Control Path LSE ee a Se 2 Obtaining and Installing a License Key Several features can be added to the standard library config
88. cable is now secured to the expansion module Repeat these steps to secure other Ethernet cables if necessary Once complete the Ethernet cabling for a 41U library containing four FC I O blades should appear similar to Figure 50 on page 322 321 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines Figure 50 Ethernet Cable Management Scalar i500 User s Guide 322 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines Figure 51 shows how a 41U library with FC I O blades installed would appear with power Ethernet and fibre cables installed and managed according to these guidelines Figure 51 Cable Management All Cables FC I O Blades Installed Scalar i500 User s Guide 323 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines Figure 52 shows how a 41U library with Ethernet Expansion blades installed would appear with power Ethernet and fibre cables installed and managed according to these guidelines Figure 52 Cable Management All Cables Ethernet Expansion Blades Installed Ea esac cis m oe yy Het lay Wi Scalar i500 User s Guide 324 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a Stand Alone 5U Control Module Installing a Stand Alone 5U Control Module Scalar i500 User s Guide Required tools None Use this procedure to install a 5U library configuration 1
89. click Delete When you first open an Advanced Report configuration page the system loads all the data from the library log file for that report to the Internet browser in preparation for creating your reports If there is a lot of information in the log files this may take several minutes The data that is loaded in the Internet browser remains unchanged until you log out of your library session or reload the data If new data is added to the library log file during your session for instance a TapeAlert occurs it will not appear in the onscreen report until you either log out of the library and log on again or reload the data To reload the data without logging out click the Reload button This reloads the entire data set which may again take several minutes You can see how many records were loaded from the log files for this report by looking at the Report Data section of the report configuration page A note says XX records read where XX is the number of records see Figure 17 In some circumstances you may wish to delete the information contained in the log files used to build the advanced reports To do this click the Delete button in the Report Data section of either report configuration page This deletes the data for both the Drive Resource Utilization report and the Media Integrity Analysis report 141 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports Caution Once you delete the dat
90. clip or cage nut to that location on the rack For example if the control module s rack ears are located at 1U and 2U then the nut clips or cage nuts should be installed at 6U and 7U Next determine which holes you must use within the 6U and 7U markers Notice that each rack unit as delineated by the alignment markers in the rack contains three mounting holes If you are adding a module anywhere above the control module position the nut clip or cage nut at the middle hole in that unit If you are adding a module anywhere below the control module position the nut clip or cage nut at the upper hole in that unit 3 Install the nut clips or cage nuts to the desired location in the rack Installing nut clips a Hold the nut clip so that its semi circle design faces outside the rack b Push the nut clip onto the rack s mounting holes so that the nut is behind the rack s holes After the nut clip is installed you can slide it up and down the mounting holes if necessary Installing cage nuts a Hold the cage nut so that its hinges face outside the rack and so that its hinges clasp the upper and lower portions of the square hole b Place the cage nut in the desired hole Insert one hinge in the hole first then pinch the cage nut and push it into the hole until it snaps into place You may want to use a screwdriver to help push the hinge into the hole 4 Prepare the module to be stacked in the rack a Power
91. configuration after modifying configurable items If modifying items results in problems the library snapshot will help technical support personnel to troubleshoot the problem Saving the library configuration will allow you to restore the most current settings if necessary For more information on taking a library snapshot and saving and restoring the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Note Setup Wizard operations cannot be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Scalar i500 User s Guide 58 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Accessing the Web Client The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Setup Wizard e From the operator panel the Setup Wizard is available only upon first power on of library Accessing the Web Client Once you have configured network settings on the operator panel you can log on to the library s Web client The operator panel network configuration screen lists the IP address of the library Use this IP address to access the Web client using a Web browser When typing the IP address into the Web browser make sure to precede it with http for example http 123 123 123 123 Managing the Network Administr
92. configure secure LDAP communication using TLS If TLS mode is not supported on your LDAP server then login operations will fail Do not use StartTLS if you are using LDAPS See Figure 15 on page 103 Installing an LDAP TLS CA Certificate If you are using LDAPS or StartTLS you can also install a TLS CA certificate for additional verification that the LDAP server has not been compromised The certificate must be the same certificate that is installed on your LDAP server and must be in pem format The library will only perform the verification if you have configured Secure LDAP using either LDAPS or StartTLS Place a copy of the certificate file in an accessible location on your computer and use the Browse button to locate and install it Once a certificate is installed you can remove it by selecting the Remove TLS CA Certificate check box See Figure 15 on page 103 Configuring LDAP on the Library Before configuring LDAP obtain the following LDAP parameters from your network administrator You need to enter these parameters in the Setup Remote Authentication screen on the Web client e Server URI The Uniform Resource Identifier URI of the LDAP server where user account information is stored The URI includes the LDAP server host name or IP address and can include the LDAP server network port Port 389 is the default 101 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts Examples
93. described in Chapter 6 Storage Networking Encryption Key Management described in Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management If you purchase these features with your library the license will be installed when you receive the library If you upgrade or add new features after the initial purchase you will need to obtain and install a license key For information on how to obtain and install a license key see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 Understanding the Location Coordinates This section describes the numbering system the library uses to identify components of the library The library location coordinates contain the following digits Module Column Slot Figure 11 shows how a Scalar i500 User s Guide 32 Chapter 1 Description Understanding the Location Coordinates library with a control module and an expansion is numbered Note The library location coordinates are different from the logical element addressing see Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 for more information Figure 11 Library Location Coordinates Column 3 Drives Column 2 Control 4 Module l Column 4 0 Column 5 I E Station Expansion Module 1 Scalar i500 User s Guide 33 Modules Slots Tape Drives Fibre Channel I O Blades Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Understanding the Location Coordinates Library modules are represent
94. different entries regardless of the day or time If you have duplicate recipients make sure that the reports selected in each entry are not an exact match For example if you have one entry in which Recipient A receives the Drive Utilization and Media Integrity reports on Monday you cannot create another entry to send Recipient A the Drive Utilization and Media Integrity reports on Thursday Instead you can create one entry for Recipient A and send the reports every day select Daily as the day to send the report or you can change the reports you are sending so that they are not the same as the first entry You could create three entries for Recipient A as follows 1 send both reports out on Monday 2 send Drive Utilization out on Thursday and 3 send Media Integrity out on Thursday in a different entry The recipient is the same but the reports sent in each entry are different Each e mail notification includes an optional comment text box you can use to enter information about the library or the reports and logs that you want the recipient to know This information appears in the body of the e mail You can modify the settings of an existing e mail notification at any time after it is created If an e mail notification is no longer needed you can delete it Before the library can send e mail notifications you must configure the library e mail account For information on how to configure the e mail account see Config
95. drive are also displayed For more details about slot data see Viewing the All Slots Report on page 272 Partitions Name online status emulation type barcode policy number of total tape drives in the partition number of active tape drives partition total media mounted media total slots full slots total I E stations full I E stations and encryption method of each partition Modules Chassis Manufacturer model type and serial number of each module You can print the report by clicking on the printer icon in the report window The path to open the report from the Web client is Reports gt Library Configuration 270 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing the Network Settings Report Viewing the Network Settings Report The Network Setings Report provides information on the following library network settings Network host name primary DNS alternate DNS IPv4 Settings Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP enabled disabled IP address gateway address and net mask IPv6 Settings if IPv6 is enabled DHCP enabled disabled Stateless enabled disabled Static enabled disabled network prefix gateway and all IPv6 addresses SSL SSL port and cipher of the library SMI S access and state enabled disabled settings of the library e Access Indicates whether the SMI S port for SMI S traffic to the library port 5988 is enabled or disabled You can chan
96. drive above The SCSI cable connecting the two tape drives should be at least 30 cm in length b Use another SCSI cable to connect the bottom tape drive of the SCSI bus to your host c Use a SCSI terminator to terminate the top tape drive of the SCSI bus Scalar i500 User s Guide 296 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Figure 42 Cabling One or Two Tape Drives Per SCSI Bus One tape drive per SCSI bus Two tape drives per SCSI bus SCSI terminator SCSI drive to host cable SCSI cable connecting two SCSI tape drives 3 Connect the module terminators Caution The module terminator is not the same as a SCSI terminator Using a SCSI terminator instead of a module terminator will damage the library a Using the module terminators terminate the top and bottom modules in the library stack Install one module terminator in the top terminator connector on the topmost module and one in the bottom terminator connector on the bottommost module If your library configuration consists of a single module place module terminators in the module s top and bottom module terminator connector Scalar i500 User s Guide 297 Cabling Libraries With SAS Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library b If you need to add expansion modules to the control module remove the module terminato
97. eeneeeseneeeteneeneees 310 Power Cord Management es serseeeeeeeeneseeeneees 319 Ethernet Cable Management cceseseeesssssssseeeeeneeseseees 322 Cable Management All Cables FC I O Blades Installed 323 Cable Management All Cables Ethernet Expansion Blades Installed arresi eea at 324 Cover plate with y home flag ss ssssssssissessessessissierrsrseseesees 330 Recommended Module Locations 0 cee csseeeeeeseneeeeeees 331 Y Rail in Unlocked Functional Position cccccceeeeseees 335 Cover Plate Location After Adding an Expansion Module348 Library Configuration Example 1 0 ccccccceeeneeseeeeteens 358 Library Configuration Example 2 ccsssesseesseneeseseeteens 361 Cover Plate Location After Removing an Expansion Mdtlle ssc iae a er n En obese E E E coaventen ties 370 Scalar i500 Serial Number Label On Control Module Seen Through Open Front Door387 Scalar i500 SN WWN Label 2 canthndiie nan Sieaits 388 FCI O Blade and Fan Blade Bays in an Expansion Mod le sugeria ies ee RR See tans oS es 445 Ethernet Connectivity on 5U Libraries eee 461 Connecting the Library Control Blade to the Expansion Module Via Eth mets icici ictus ies te ietivin Gchetetesnauatis 463 Ethernet Expansion Blade 0 cee csseeseeeseeeseeseseneeeeseenees 465 Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade ccccceceeeeee 467 Ethernet Connectivity on 14U and Higher Libraries 470 Ethernet 2775 2 icc siseict ae i
98. fae eee 29 13 20 05 2011 CMT vania Issuer C US S Colorado L Englewood O Quantum OU Tape Automation CN Quantum tira oee 27 13 20 05 2021 GMT vana flissuer C US S Colorado L Englewood O Quantum OU Tape Automation CN Quantum cien ntl Libi aa 4 oe ee 29 13 26 05 2011 CMT varia Issuer C US S Colorado L Englewood O Quantum OU Tape Automation CN Quantum trary basee 26 13 26 05 2021 GMT vana fuer C US S Colorado L Englewood O Quantum OU Tape Automation CN bwentz Installing Quantum Supplied TLS Certificates on the Library Quantum supplied TLS certificates are only available for use with SKM The Quantum supplied certificates come on a CD which you received The TLS certificates are bundled in a single file 1 Ensure that the date on both SKM servers and the library are set to the current date Incorrect date settings may interfere with the TLS certificates and cause the library to stop communicating with the SKM servers 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive of your computer Either copy the file to a known location on your computer or use the CD as the location from which you will retrieve the file Scalar i500 User s Guide 176 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Import Communication Certificates The Tools TLS Communication Certificate Import screen opens see Figure 26 If TLS c
99. failover Note The tape drive must be in the ready state in order to be selected 4 Click Apply The new active port displays in the Active Port column Note If the new active port does not display refresh the page in the browser Note The library will issue a RAS ticket if the forced failover fails The library will not issue a RAS ticket if the forced failover succeeds Scalar i500 User s Guide 159 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Host Access EE er Configuring Host Access Host Access provides a way to limit host access to specific tape drives and partitions via the library interface To use host access you must have a Storage Networking license on the library The Storage Networking license must be sufficient to cover the tape drive s you want to configure for host access To configure host access you must first register the host s for host access and enable host access on the desired tape drive s Then you will map the host to the tape drives or partitions you want the host to access Details about host access include e A registered host has full access to all tape drives in the library that have not been enabled for host access and full access to all tape drives that are enabled for host access and have been mapped to that host A registered host has no access to drives that have been enabled for host access but are not mapped to that host e An unregistered
100. file takes approximately 30 minutes The resulting file size can be large Your firewall file size limitations could prohibit you from e mailing the file Scalar i500 User s Guide 485 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record On the Web client ensure that the library e mail account is appropriately configured before you attempt to e mail the snapshot from the library If the library e mail account address is not configured an error appears For information on setting up the e mail account see Configuring the Library E mail Account on page 92 You can configure the library to automatically attach a library snapshot to certain RAS ticket e mail notifications see Configuring the Library E mail Account on page 92 If the library is in the process of capturing an automatic snapshot you will not be able to manually capture a snapshot via the Web client until the automatic snapshot is complete If this happens an error message will display Wait about 10 minutes and try again The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Capture Snapshot e From the operator panel select Tools gt Capture Snapshot Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record The library configuration record is a text file that contains details about the library s configuration The configuration record can be saved or e mailed to a specified e mail addres
101. flash e Solid ON e LCB Failure OR blade is booting up or initial firmware update on new compact flash If solid ON for more than 10 minutes the LCB may need to be replaced e FCI O Blade Failure OR blade is booting up or blade firmware is autoleveling e FCI O Fan Blade There may be one or more problems including fan speed is too high or too low temperature is too high there is a faulty fan speed sensor or there is a power control problem Ethernet Expansion blade Failure OR blade is booting up Note In most cases solid ON means a failure however in conjunction with the blue LED blinking once every 10 seconds an amber LED solid ON can be a normal condition for a short period of time Autoleveling takes about three minutes per blade and blades autolevel in series Never remove a blade when the amber LED is solid ON unless it has been on continuously for at least 10 minutes Never remove an LCB while the library is powered on Scalar i500 User s Guide 502 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs LED Color Represents Blade Status Blue Power e Blinks once every 10 seconds Normal Blade is powered on peak Solid ON status e LCB Error condition Power off library before removing or replacing the LCB e FCI O blade Swap mode Blade is ready to be removed or replaced Ethernet Expansion blade Blade is not operational Solid OFF Blade is no
102. gt Control Path You can manually force a control path failover You might want to force a failover to check that the non active tape drive still works or to switch back to the original control path tape drive once the issue that originally caused the failover has been fixed To force a control path failover 1 From the Web client click Tools gt Drive Operations The Tools Drive Operations screen displays see Figure 19 151 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Control Path Failover Figure 19 Forcing Control Path Failover Scalar i500 trainingi500 Tools Drive Operations To complete tape drive operations the tape drive must be operational and contain no media Select the desired operation Update tape drive firmware using a firmware image file Retrieve tape drive log Retrieve tape drive sled log Clean a tape drive Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling Force Data Path Failover Force Control Path Failove lt j 2 Select Force Control Path Failover and click Next The Force Control Path Failover screenu displays see Figure 20 All of the partitions that have control path failover enabled are listed The location and status of the tape drive that is currently serving as the control path are listed in the Active columns The location and status of the tape drive that is currently serving as the standby control path are listed in the Standby columns For each partitio
103. host applications Importing with Manual Cartridge Assignment Disabled Disabling manual cartridge assignment allows you to load several tape cartridges into the I E station and assign them to different partitions e The Assign I E screen does not appear on the operator panel The cartridges in the I E station are available for use by any partition including the system partition The cartridges in the I E station remain unassigned until you import them into a partition importing assigns them to the partition e You can import unassigned tape cartridges via the operator panel or the Web client When importing unassigned tape cartridges only the cartridges you actually import into a partition will be assigned to that partition The rest of the cartridges will remain unassigned in the I E station Unassigned cartridges are visible to host applications and can be claimed by any host application on a first come first served basis Process for Importing Media You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to import cartridges If you have AutoClean enabled you can also import cleaning cartridges into the library For information see Importing Cleaning Media on page 256 In addition you can bulk load cartridges into the library rather than use the I E station to import media For information see Bulk Loading on page 246 Note Once the import operation has started do not interfere with the
104. host has full access to all tape drives in the library that have not been enabled for host access but no access to tape drives that have been enabled for host access e Tape drives that are enabled for host access can only be accessed by registered hosts that are mapped to them e Tape drives that are not enabled for host access can be accessed by all hosts e Ifthe control path and any failover tape drives for a partition are enabled for host access then only the hosts mapped to that partition will be able to send media changer commands to that partition Unregistered hosts and registered hosts not mapped to that partition will not be able to send media changer commands to that partition However unregistered hosts and registered hosts that are not mapped to that partition do still have access and can send commands to any non host access enabled tape drives in the partition as well as any host access enabled tape drives in the partition to which they are mapped Scalar i500 User s Guide 160 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Host Access A maximum of 64 host entries can be mapped for access control to each tape drive regardless of whether the hosts are mapped to the tape drive to the partition for which the drive provides the library control path or both If the same host is mapped to both the tape drive and the partition the same host consumes two host entries You can only configure host access control from the Web cli
105. host uses Port 2 until failover occurs again or the library is rebooted Note Performing a drive reset operation is another way to make Port 1 the active port again unless the reason Port 2 is active is due to a forced failover see Forcing Data Path Failover on page 157 If you forced a failover to Port 2 and then reset the tape drive the library and host will continue to use Port 2 until failover occurs again or the library is rebooted A tape drive can be configured for both data path failover and control path failover If both are configured the control path will not fail over to another tape drive unless both ports on the control path tape drive fail If desired you can manually switch the active port see Forcing Data Path Failover on page 157 154 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Data Path Failover Note If you are NOT using data path failover on a tape drive then only Port 1 is used for data path or control path transmission The library and host will not recognize Port 2 unless data path failover is enabled on the tape drive Details about data path failover include The tape drives must be HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives HP LTO 5 FC tape drive firmware must be at the version qualified with the Scalar i500 library see the Scalar i500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels The library must have a Storage Networking license sufficient to cover the tape drive s on which
106. how to change them By default the library applies the Standard barcode format to each partition You can change this setting by modifying the partitions after it has been created For information on modifying partitions see Modifying Partitions on page 73 70 Manually Creating Partitions Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions Note This operation cannot be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Partitions From the operator panel select Setup gt Partition Mgmt gt Create Partition Using the Web client administrators can manually create additional partitions any time after the initial configuration of the library The maximum number of partitions that can be created is equal to the number of drives in the library You can mix tape drive interface type vendor and media generation in partitions that you create manually Exception You may not mix tape drive vendor types for example HP and IBM in partitions that are configured for library managed encryption see Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 The library must contain at least one unassigned tape d
107. i500 systems By adding 9U expansion modules you can upgrade a base system to e A32U library consisting of one 5U control module and three 9U expansion modules e A41U library consisting of one 5U control module and four 9U expansion modules Figure 1 5U Library Configuration Standalone Control Module Scalar i500 User s Guide 12 Chapter 1 Description Library Configuration Figure 2 14U Library Configuration 5U Control Module Plus One 9U Expansion Module 1 Control module 2 Expansion module Scalar i500 User s Guide 13 Figure 3 23U Library Configuration 5U Control Module Plus Two 9U Expansion Modules Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Library Configuration M 1 2 3 5U control module 9U expansion module 9U expansion module O 14 Chapter 1 Description Modules Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm2 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library eS Modules Scalar i500 librari
108. including the picker assembly and the Y carriage assembly the barcode scanner and the calibration sensors Time required to complete the Robot test is five minutes e The Frame test assesses the control and expansion module configuration and alignment Time required to complete the Frame test is three minutes per module 509 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Using the Installation Verification Test The VE Station test assesses the configuration and functionality of each I E station Time required to compete the I E Station test is three minutes per I E station Drives performs functional tests on the library drives Time required to complete the Drives test is 15 minutes per drive Tour moves a scratch data cartridge through all storage slots in the extreme library locations It also scans the top and bottom most slots in the library Time required to complete the Tour is five minutes per module Details on running the IVT subtests include All IVT subtests are preselected by default Clear the check box next to a subtest name to exclude that test from this IVT run Select Apply when you are ready to run the IVT The Robot Drives and Tour subtests each require that you to provide a scratch data cartridge before the test can begin If you select one of these subtests you will be prompted to place a scratch data cartridge into the top I E station slot When you close the I E station the Assign I E screen
109. is complete and the RAS ticket is resolved b To leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting click Exit Then you can perform the diagnostic steps you need to resolve a related RAS ticket If you want to request technical support the ticket Resolve window provides a link to the online service request Website Note To display all closed tickets select the Include Closed Tickets check box at the bottom of the screen The Tools All RAS Tickets screen refreshes with the Resolve button unavailable for all closed RAS tickets Caution Be careful when pressing the Close All Tickets button This closes all RAS tickets even if they are not resolved It is recommended that each RAS ticket be viewed analyzed and closed individually The path to open the appropriate screen is From the Web client select Tools gt All RAS Tickets Scalar i500 User s Guide 484 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Capturing Snapshots of Library Information Closing RAS Tickets The library will close all currently open RAS tickets when you reboot the Automatically library If any errors occur during the reboot the library issues new tickets Automatic ticket closure will only occur when you intentionally initiate a reboot by either restarting the library shutting down the library or upgrading library firmware Automatic ticket closure will not occur if the library shuts down unexpectedly or if the power cord is u
110. is disabled by default Ethernet connectivity is required for the tape drives on which you want to enable FIPS mode For most libraries this requires one or more Ethernet Expansion blades installed on the library unless your library consists of a single 5U control module For 5U libraries you can connect your tape drives directly to the Ethernet ports on the library control blade LCB See Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 458 199 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management FIPS Certified Encryption Solution The library must be connected to Scalar Key Manager Scalar Key Manager software must be at version 2 0 or later in order to be FIPS certified Caution If the Ethernet Expansion blade fails and the attached tape drives have FIPS mode enabled all encryption operations encrypting decrypting key requests on the attached tape drives will fail If this happens contact Quantum Support for a replacement Ethernet Expansion blade as soon as possible Configuring the Library To configure your library for FIPS perform the following steps for FIPS 1 Upgrade library firmware to version 600G or later 2 For all HP LTO 5 or LTO 6 FC tape drives that you plan to enable for FIPS upgrade firmware to the latest version qualified with the Scalar i500 library see the Scalar i500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels 3 Shut down the library 4 Do one of the fo
111. its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go 10 Unpark the robot assembly a Gently raise the robot assembly so that it no longer rests on the parking tab Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot Scalar i500 User s Guide 383 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module b With your free hand move the parking tab in a clockwise direction until it stops in the unparked position When in the correct position the parking tab is removed completely from the interior of the module and will not accidentally swing into the path of the robot c Gently release the robot assembly It will lower to the bottom module of the library 1 Parking tab in unparked position Scalar i500 User s Guide 384 Preparing to Use the Control Module Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module Close the library s I E station and access doors Add the tape drives to the modules For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 Add the power supplies For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 Install the LCB or compact fla
112. lower case letters numbers and underscores _ For example john_usa e Password the unique password for the user account you are creating Passwords are limited to 6 16 lower case alphanumeric characters and can include also include underscores _ periods hyphens asterisks and the at symbol For example pass_ 19 e Privilege is set to either User or Admin See User Privileges on page 50 for more information on user privilege levels The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts e From the operator panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Create User After a local user account has been created administrators can modify the account settings such as the password privilege level and partition access You cannot modify the user name Instead you will need to delete the user account and create a new one 98 Deleting Local User Accounts Configuring LDAP Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts To modify local user accounts you need to provide information for the following fields e Password the unique password for the user account you are creating Passwords are limited to 6 16 lower case alphanumeric characters and can include also include underscores _ periods hyphens asterisks and and the at symbo For ex
113. makes backup easier to manage Its proactive monitoring and remote diagnostics can reduce service calls by 50 and shorten issue resolution times by 30 Its Capacity on Demand COD scalability lets it grow non disruptively with users data And the Scalar i500 is designed to integrate easily with disk backup making it the perfect library for next generation backup architectures With the Scalar i500 Information Technology managers can be assured they will have reliable high performance backup certain restores and effective long term protection for years into the future no matter how their storage needs evolve Library Configuration The Scalar i500 library is designed for ease of installation configuration and field upgrades The Scalar i500 library is built upon two basic building blocks the 5U control module and 9U expansion module These building blocks form the basis of the following library configurations e A 5U library consisting of a 5U stand alone control module Figure 1 shows the front view of a 5U library e A14U library consisting of one 5U control module and one 9U expansion module Figure 2 on page 13 shows the front view of a 14U library A 23U library consisting of one 5U control module and two 9U expansion modules Figure 3 on page 14 shows the front view of a 23U library Scalar i500 User s Guide 11 Chapter 1 Description Library Configuration The 5U 14U and 23U libraries are the base Scalar
114. more detailed step by step instructions see your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You cannot retrieve tape drive logs from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Drive Operations Scalar i500 User s Guide 495 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Retrieving Tape Drive Sled Logs Retrieving Tape Drive Sled Logs Administrators can retrieve tape drive sled logs Tape drive sled log information can be used to help troubleshoot library tape drive sled and tape drive issues You can use the Retrieve Drive Sled Log screen to select the appropriate tape drive sled Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates Details on retrieving tape drive sled log files include e Tape drive sled logs adhere to the following naming convention UDS_ID_SN LOG where ID identifies the tape drive sled coordinate location within the library and SN identifies the tape drive sled serial number e You can select the interface type SCSI SAS or FC of the tape drive sled from which you want to retrieve logs e A Save dialog allows you to specify where you want to save the tape drive sled log files file For detailed step by step instructions see your library s online
115. more information There are some configuration settings to take into account when adding an expansion module to an existing library e All COD licenses remain the same If the current license key does not cover the expanded capacity you will need a new license key to use the newly available slots Scalar i500 User s Guide 338 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library e Partition I E station slot and cleaning slot assignments do not change however unassigned slots may change location e Modifying partitions can cause the storage slots to be scattered throughout the library e I Estation slots in the new module s are assigned as data storage slots You can reconfigure these slots as I E station slots after the expansion module has been added to the library A library can use up to four expansion modules to a maximum height of 41U There are no restrictions on where the control module can be installed in the library configuration However the recommended placement of the control module for library configurations up to 32U is on top of all installed expansion modules The recommended placement of the control module for 41U library configurations is on top of three expansion modules and below the top expansion module When adding additional expansion modules to an existing library configuration the recommended placement of the new expans
116. of rack ears b Using two M5 thumbscrews fasten the rack ear to the rack The thumbscrews should thread through the holes in the rack shelves and fasten completely and evenly Scalar i500 User s Guide 428 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack 4 Install the left rack ear a With the I E station door open open the left door the access door of the module and locate the slot in the lower left corner of the module The flexible door hinge allows the door to be pulled away from the module providing access to the slot Note You may need to pull the door toward you in order to access the slot b Install the left rack ear in the same manner as the right rack ear c Using two M5 thumbscrews fasten the rack ear to the rack The thumbscrews should thread through the holes in the rack shelves and fasten completely and evenly Scalar i500 User s Guide 429 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack If you are only installing one module a control module5U Library Control Module unpark the robot assembly now For instructions see step 1 on page 336 If you are installing more modules proceed to the next step and do not unpark the robot assembly yet Close the module s doors 7 Install the remaining modules of your library if any following the 10 Scalar i500 User s Guide instructions in Ins
117. of the tape drive s physical serial number If the tape drive is later replaced by another tape drive in the same slot the logical serial number remains the same From the host application s perspective the replacement tape drive is the same as the original Logical SN Addressing is enabled by default When the Logical SN Addressing setting is disabled the library reports only the tape drive physical serial number to the host The library System Information Report shows both the logical and physical serial numbers on installed tape drives for your convenience Reports gt System Information Caution If you change the logical serial number addressing setting you must power cycle the library in order for the change to take effect Caution Use caution with this feature as it can be accessed by both Admin and Service login users Enabling this feature in an existing installation will change the presentation of the tape drive serial numbers to the host computer and host applications Some host operating systems and some application software will no longer see a tape drive if the serial number changes by use of this feature from a previously set host configuration If this happens you will need to reconfigure the tape drives in your backup application The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt System Settings 127 Manual Cartrid
118. off the module and disconnect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables b Consider removing all tape drives from the module Modules are much easier to lift into the rack without the additional weight of the tape drives Scalar i500 User s Guide 432 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack c Open the module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module on which you are stacking it 1 Guide pin 2 Thumbscrew 5 Lift the module align it so that it is parallel with the module below it and slide it into place 6 Lower the module s guide pin by turning it and pushing it down 7 Secure the module to the module beneath it by tightening the thumbscrews located at the base of the front and back of the module Press down the thumbscrew and then tighten it Scalar i500 User s Guide 433 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack ocol Oc E Aeon Yo G o o AHO a Bool So o e Control module front Thumbscrews Control module rear Scalar i500 User s Guide 434 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack 8 Install the right rack ear At the f
119. on the operator panel or Tools gt Drive Operations gt Clean a tape drive from the Web client The following topics provide an overview of these media operations For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel Note The information and procedures in this user s guide apply specifically to the library Web client and the operator panel user interface not to the host application Performing media operations through the library user interface may affect your host application See your host application documentation for information 241 Importing Media Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations The Import Media operation allows you to use the I E station to import data cartridges into the library The library s scanner automatically reads the barcode on new cartridges imported into the library Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export media See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to import media Using the library to import media may necessitate performing an inventory of the library with the host application See your host application documentation for more information There are two ways to import tape cartri
120. panel select Operations gt Import Media For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface Bulk loading is another way to load media into the library If zero I E station slots are configured you will always need to bulk load cartridges into the library If I E station slots have been configured you may want to perform an initial bulk load when you first start using your library The library will perform an inventory after the bulk load is complete Before bulk loading print out the Library Configuration report from the Web client to see how the physical slots of the library are configured The report shows what slots are unavailable or configured as cleaning slots or as I E station slots For information on accessing the report see Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 268 Caution Place cartridges in their appropriately configured slot location for example cleaning cartridges should not be placed in slots configured for storage 246 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations When I E station slots have been configured as I E slots the I E station door is unlocked and you can open the main access door to the library When all I E station slots are configured as storage the I E station door is always locked
121. perform Quick Normal or Full The default is Normal For a description of these scan types see the Scan Settings section of Table 8 on page 219 5 If you want the test to continue on error select the Continue On Error check box By default during normal and full scans a cartridge memory CM test is performed first If that fails the rest of the scan the tape test is skipped and the test fails When you select Continue On Error the tape test is performed even if the CM test fails 6 Select the tape s to scan from the table To select all tapes listed select the check box at the top of the check box column To filter the displayed list enter a barcode or portion of a barcode in the Filter by barcode field and click Find 225 Working With EDLM Test Results Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Note If you select a tape that is not supported by the EDLM scanning drives once you click Apply a dialog box message will appear stating You have selected to scan media that may not be supported by any of the EDLM drives installed in the library If you continue these scans may not complete successfully Are you sure you want to do this If you continue the tape will be queued for scan but may fail 7 Click Apply The test is queued Once the test is queued a Success message appears This does not mean the test was run or that the tape passe
122. place module terminators in the module s top and bottom module terminator connectors b If you need to add expansion modules to the control module remove the module terminator from the control module terminator connection that is closest to the expansion module c Replace the module terminator in the expansion module terminator connection furthest from the control module 4 Connect the module to module cable from the control module to the expansion module 5 Connect your Ethernet cable to the Gigabit GB Ethernet port on the Library Control Blade LCB for remote access to the library via the Web client 6 Connect a power cord to the outlet on the power supply on the rear of the library There should always be a power cord connected to the power supply on the control module If redundant power supplies are used connect a power cord to each of the additional power supply outlets 7 Power on the library a Turn on the rear power switch of each of the power supplies b Turn on the front power switch c Power up the host system 8 Verify communication with all devices on the bus Configure the library using the commands on the operator panel See configuration information in Configuring Your Library on page 52 Scalar i500 User s Guide 307 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected to Fibre Channel I O Blades These instructions ex
123. plan to stack the control module at the top of the library and if an expansion module is located below it remove the control module s bottom cover plate c If you plan to stack the control module in the middle of the library remove both the top and bottom cover plates d If you plan to stack the control module at the bottom of the library and if an expansion module is located above it remove the control module s top cover plate 3 Remove the LCB from the removed control module and set it aside The LCB stores information about the library s contents and configuration so you will probably want to install this LCB or possibly just the LCB compact flash card in the new control module For details about removing the LCB see Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card on page 402 Note If you plan to stack the control module on top of a 9U expansion module be sure to park the robot in the control module first If the library configuration includes expansion modules below the control module install them in the library now Install the new control module in the library Lift the control module and from the front of the library place it in the desired location Place the control module on top of the expansion module and slide it to the rear of the unit A small notch on the bottom of the control module aligns it with the top of the 9U expansion module Use rack ears t
124. ports 3 6 Changing channel zoning setting will cause the affected FC I O blade to reboot e If host port failover is enabled on the FC I O blade channel zoning must be configured so that all target FC ports have access to all initiator ports For information on host port failover see Configuring FC Host Port Failover on page 119 The Setup FC I O Blade Channel Zoning screen on the Web client lists all FC I O blades found in the library FC I O blades are listed by the following location in the library WWNN and status The corresponding Channel Zoning Select Blade screen on the operator panel lists the location in the library and state You can select the FC I O blade you want to configure for channel zoning and proceed to the next screen e The two FC target ports ports 1 and 2 and the four FC initiator ports ports 3 6 are displayed in a grid with the target ports listed in columns and the initiator ports listed in rows Check boxes allow you to associate a target port with an initiator port e To permit access select the check box at the intersection of the target port and the initiator port You can associate each initiator port with more than one target port e To restrict access clear the check box at the intersection of the target port and the initiator port e When you select a check box the entire FC channel is zoned This zoning affects any host application that might be accessing the FCI O blade If bo
125. powered long wave lasers Library A large scale tape device with robotics that can house multiple tape drives and a significant amount of tape cartridges Library Control Module See Control module License key An absolute value that can only increase a licensed feature For example a license key can be applied to the library to enable unlicensed slots Logical library See Partition Loop With this Fibre Channel option the port operates with attached loop capable devices If a point to point device is attached the appliance is not able to communicate with it Loop ID A unique 7 bit value from 0 to 126 that represents the 127 valid AL_PAs physical addresses on a loop LTO Linear Tape Open A family of magnetic tape media that are open in the sense of not being owned by a single proprietor LTO comes in two formats Accelis and Ultrium Accelis is the fast 546 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary access implementation while Ultrium is the high capacity implementation LUN Logical Unit Number A unique identifier used on a SCSI bus to distinguish between devices that share the same bus A LUN can be an end user a file or an application In storage technology a single large storage device might be divided into smaller pieces either to make the vast storage space more manageable or because the storage space is dedicated to different servers drives or applications When the storage space is divided into
126. re install them in the same locations later For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 Scalar i500 User s Guide 363 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library 15 If the module you are removing or replacing contains FC I O blades remove both the I O blades and the accompanying fan blades from the expansion module For details see Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades on page 443 and Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 16 Before removing a module you must first remove all expansion modules if any positioned above it Disconnect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables from the module you are removing or replacing and all modules located above it Then remove the modules Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a control module weighs approximately 60 Ibs 27 2 kg An expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 Ibs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules Note Ifthe library is installed in a rack you need to perform additional steps to remove modules from and place modules into the rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for more information Permanently Removing Expansion Modules
127. recognizing tape drives when tape drives control modules or expansion modules are added removed or replaced or when partitions are added deleted or modified because existing logical element addresses can change Therefore after making any of these types of modifications you must refresh the configuration of any backup application that manages the library to reflect new tape drive positions In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detect the changes See Figure 12 on page 38 for a simple example of element addressing in a 14U library with a single partition six tape drives installed and no empty tape drive slots Note that multiple partition can create complexity If you need help with the element addressing in your library contact Quantum Support Tape cartridge slots are assigned logical element addresses by partition The numbering is sequential within a partition and starts over with each partition Numbering begins at the top left slot as you look at the library from the front in the lowest module in the library and moves sequentially down the left most column The top left slot of every partition is always number 4096 the slot beneath that is 4097 and so on When the numbering reaches the bottom of the column it continues to the top slot in the next column to the right as long as it is in the same module and partition and moves down that column When all of the slots in the lowest module be
128. reduction in the writing capacity of the tape 3 Hard error W The operation has stopped because an The drive had a hard error has occurred while reading or read or write error writing data which the drive cannot correct 4 Media C Your data is at risk Media can no longer 1 Copy any data you require from this pe bias mere ao ipe performance is severely degraded 2 Do not use this tape again 3 Restart the operation with a different tape 5 Read failure C The tape is damaged or the drive is The drive can no faulty Call the tape drive supplier help longer read data line from the tape 6 Write failure C The tape is from a faulty batch or the The drive can no tape drive is faulty 1 Use a good tape to test the drive 2 Ifthe problem persists call the tape drive supplier help line longer write data to the tape Scalar i500 User s Guide 532 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 7 Media life W The tape cartridge has reached the end The media has of its calculated useful life exceeded its specified 1 Copy any data you need to another ie tape 2 Discard the old tape 8 Not data grade W The tape cartridge is not data grade The drive has not Any data you write to the tape is at risk been able to read the Replace the cartridge with a data grade MRS stripes tape 9 Write protect C You are t
129. report Note Depending on the size of the library there may be a slight delay after you apply the settings in the Setup Wizard while the Library Configuration report page loads Details on using the Setup Wizard include The only time that you do not need to log in to the library is when the Setup Wizard appears on the operator panel the first time the library is powered on After a timeout period of one hour the Setup Wizard will close and you will be logged out of the library Use the default administrator account to log in to the operator panel If you time out of the Setup Wizard or do not complete all the Setup Wizard screens the library will apply the default configuration settings plus whatever modifications you made see Default Configuration Settings on page 57 You cannot log in to the library from the Web client until you have configured network settings on the operator panel To change IPv4 settings and configure IPv6 settings go to Setup gt Network Mgmt 56 Default Configuration Settings Setup Wizard Tasks Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Using the Setup Wizard e You can return to the Setup Wizard from the Web client e Any administrators you create will also be able to use the Setup Wizard from the Web client as well as Setup and Operations menu commands to reconfigure the library If necessary you can cancel out of the Setup Wizard on the ope
130. s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts The library supports all LDAP servers You can also use Kerberos for added security For specific instructions on configuring Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos on page 104 The Login screen displays remote authentication login options only when LDAP is enabled LDAP Server Guidelines The following groups must be created on the LDAP server to enable remote login on the library e Library user group Assign users to this group who need user privilege access to the library Enter the name of this group in the Library User Group field on the Setup Remote Authentication screen on the library Web client see Configuring LDAP on the Library on page 101 e Partition groups For LDAP users with user privileges access to library partitions is determined by group assignment on the LDAP server Groups must be created on the LDAP server with names that match the library partition names names must match but are not case sensitive Users with user privileges must be assigned to these groups on the LDAP server to have access to the corresponding partitions on the library e Library admin group Assign users to this group who need administrator privilege access to the library LDAP users with administrator privileges have access to all partitions and administrator functions and do not need to be assigned to partition related groups on the LDAP server Enter th
131. smaller parts each part is configured with its own SCSI unique identifier or LUN Magazine A container for removable media storage used in tape libraries Media A material that stores data such as tapes in cartridges or optical disks Media changer device A SCSI term referring to a tape library or a partition including the robot that services it Media ID A barcode number attached to a specific piece of media Mediatype A format size of media for example LTO Medium See Media Mixed media The ability of a library to simultaneously support multiple types of storage media N_Port Node Port It only has the capability to communicate through an F Port It is a port on a computer disk drive and so on through which the device does its Fibre Channel communication as a direct fabric attached port for use with the point to point or fabric topology It is identified by a World Wide Name NL_Port Node Loop Port It has the capability to communicate over both FC AL hubs and through F_Ports Online A status for a component that indicates it is active and available for use Operator Intervention Message See RAS ticket 547 Glossary OS Operating System A control program for a computer that allocates computer resources schedules tasks and provides the user with a way to access the resources P Partition An abstraction of an underlying physical library that may present a different personality capacity or both to a host
132. space they require For example the height of a unit in a rack is 1 75 inches If a component is 5 25 inches in thickness the component is said to be a 3U component Arbitrated loop A Fibre Channel configuration that attaches multiple communicating ports in a loop Two or more ports can interconnect but only two ports can communicate simultaneously Arbitration The submission of a request to gain access to an arbitrated loop by a device so that it can transmit data in the loop Availability A RAS attribute that refers to the accessibility of a system resource in a timely manner for example the measurement of a system s uptime Barcode A printed array of varied rectangular bars and spaces that can be scanned and read for object identification Bus A transmission channel through which electrical signals are carried from one device to another device 541 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary CAN Controller Area Network A serial bus network of microcontrollers that connects devices sensors and actuators in a system or sub system for real time control applications There is no addressing scheme used in controller area networks as in the sense of conventional addressing in networks such as Ethernet Rather messages are broadcast to all the nodes in the network using an identifier unique to the network Cartridge A container that is a protective housing for storage media such as cartridges for tapes or optical disks
133. tape cartridges that were associated with a TapeAlert during the specified Date Range appear in the report e Sorting Specifies how the data will be sorted Choose from the following e Alphabetical e Count ascending e Last Occurrence default You can only access this report from the Web client The path to open the report is Reports gt Advanced Reporting gt Media Integrity Analysis Using Advanced If you want to use the same configuration repeatedly you can save it as a Reporting Templates template You can save up to 20 templates for each type of advanced report Creating a Template 1 From the report configuration page make the selections you want 2 Inthe Report Templates box at the bottom of the screen type a name for the template in the empty field next to the Save button The name can have a maximum of 15 characters You can use only lowercase letters numbers and the underscore character _ in template names 3 Click Save The report appears in the drop down list next to the Load button Scalar i500 User s Guide 140 Loading and Reloading Advanced Reporting Data Deleting Advanced Reporting Data Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports Using a Template To use a saved template select the template from the drop down list and click Load Deleting a Template To delete a template select the template from the drop down list and
134. the Port text boxes below match the SSL port numbers set on the Q EKM servers The default SSL port number is 443 Note Keys are always encrypted before being sent from the Q EKM key server to a tape drive whether SSL is enabled or not Enabling SSL provides additional security e SKM SSL is always enabled The SSL port number is always 6000 e KMIP Key Manager SSL is always enabled Note For SKM and KMIP Key Manager the library actually uses Transport Layer Security TLS a more secure successor to SSL to communicate with the encryption servers 7 Key Server IP Address or Host Name In the text boxes assign your key servers in the order in which you want failover to occur The column denotes the server failover order Once you add the servers you can change the failover order by clicking the up down arrow buttons in the Order column Scalar i500 User s Guide 172 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Note Q EKM requires one or two servers If you do not plan to use a secondary key server you may type a zero IP address 0 0 0 0 in the 2 text box or you may leave the text box blank SKM requires two servers KMIP Key Manager requires at least two servers and can have up to 10 servers for increased failover capacity For an initial key request the library tries server 1 the
135. the module and the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Then lower the module s guide pin located at the base of the front of the module by turning it and pushing it down Tighten all thumbscrews located at the base of the front and back of the modules 7 Fasten the module to the rack with rack ears Engage the Y rails of the new module in your library configuration Ensure that the Y rails are properly aligned and the thumbscrews are tightened 350 Scalar i500 User s Guide 7 4 ry 5y A O N dao UM A LAIN 3 7 Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up Squeeze here to release Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 351 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library a From the front of the library open the I E station and access doors of the expansion module b Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go c From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go Doing this aligns the Y rails with the Y rails of the module beneath it
136. the new tape drive locations do not display refresh the browser Scalar i500 User s Guide 153 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Data Path Failover Configuring Data Path Failover Scalar i500 User s Guide Data Path Failover provides an alternate data path when a preferred data path fails The Data Path Failover functionality is provided as part of the Storage Networking license and applies to HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives only HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives have two Fibre Channel ports If you enable data path failover on the tape drive one port will be used as the active port for data transmission and the other port will stand by to be used if the active port fails If the tape drive loses its Fibre Channel link with the active port it will automatically fail over and use the standby port to continue drive operations The library issues a RAS ticket when automatic failover occurs In addition the library monitors the standby port and issues a RAS ticket if the standby port does not report a good Fibre Channel link status The library uses Port 1 for data path transmission unless a failover occurs Once failover occurs the library uses Port 2 until failover occurs again or the library is rebooted Similarly if a tape drive configured for data path failover is the control path for a partition the host uses Port 1 for media changer commands unless a failover occurs Once failover occurs the
137. the other end of the cable to a port in the Ethernet hub on the LCB If the FC I O blade is installed in the upper bay of the expansion module connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port labeled UPPER in the lower right corner of the expansion module Connect the other end of the cable to a port in the Ethernet hub on the LCB Remove the control path from tape drives that you plan to connect to an FC I O blade You must not allow an FC tape drive to serve as control path if it is connected to an FC I O blade If you do the 446 10 11 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades control path will be filtered out by the I O blade and will not be visible to the host If a Fibre Channel tape drive is currently serving as the control path for a partition and you plan to connect that tape drive to an FCI O blade you must remove the control path from that tape drive To remove the control path from a tape drive a Select Setup gt Control Path from the operator panel or the Web client b If you have more than one partition select the appropriate partition and click Next c Clear the control path selection on any FC tape drive that you plan to connect to an FC I O blade Add or replace the fan blade s following the instructions in Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 The fan blade is required to prevent ov
138. the proper key associated with the library serial number License keys do not expire Once installed on the library license keys cannot be removed unless you replace the control module or the library control blade LCB compact flash card e Ifyou replace the control module The license key is associated with the serial number of the control module If you replace your control module you must replace all your installed license keys Request replacement license keys from Quantum e Ifyou replace the LCB compact flash The LCB compact flash card contains information about your library configuration If you replace your LCB compact flash card you must reinstall your license key s onto the library You may be able to reinstall them yourself if you have saved the license keys or can retrieve them from the Web sites listed above In some cases factory installed license keys will not be listed on the Web site and you will need to contact Quantum for a replacement If you cannot retrieve your license keys or need assistance contact Quantum 89 Viewing Licenses and License Keys Obtaining a License Key Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Obtaining and Installing a License Key To see the licenses you have purchased and obtained go to http www quantum com licensekeys The license history for each feature is listed feature licensed amount licensed authorization code and date license key wa
139. to report traps v1 is the default The timeout for all SNMP requests to the library must be at 10 seconds or greater command line parameter t The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP Modifying the SNMP Community String Administrators can modify the SNMP community string The SNMP community string is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate GET and GET NEXT SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c messages exchanged between the library and an external management application The SNMP community string used by the library must match the string used by the external management application The default SNMP community string on the library is publicCmtyStr For security purposes this string should be modified When modifying the community string adhere to the following guidelines the community string is case sensitive cannot be empty and cannot exceed 32 characters See the Scalar i500 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 01370 xx for further configuration and access details You cannot modify the SNMP community string from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP 66 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network Enabling and Disabling SNMP Authentication Traps Administrators can enable or disable SNMP authentication traps When the librar
140. top of Ethernet to provide high level networking services to applications Event A condition that matches a numbered predefined set of circumstances Event log A list of all predefined events logged by library and software management tools Expansion Module An optional module of the library It provides additional storage tape drive capacity power and optional I E stations The module lacks an operator panel touch screen and LCB 543 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary F_Port Fabric Port A port ona fabric switch to which N_Ports may be directly connected The F_Port is not capable of communicating with FC AL protocol FC Fibre Channel A high speed data transfer architecture Using optical fibre to connect devices Fibre Channel communications are serial communications that occur at full duplex and achieve data transfer rates of 200 MBps FC AL Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop A form of Fibre Channel network in which up to 126 nodes are connected in a loop topology See also Arbitrated loop FC AL Device A device that employs Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop and consists of one or more NL_Ports Fiber A thin filament of glass An optical waveguide consisting of a core and a cladding which is capable of carrying information in the form of light Fiber is also a general term used to cover all physical media types supported by Fibre Channel such as optical fiber twisted pair and coaxial cable Fiducial Ina library stora
141. when typing the serial number into the SKM command line 386 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module Figure 60 Scalar i500 Serial Number Label On Control Module Seen Through Open Front Door Scalar i500 User s Guide 387 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Figure 61 Scalar i500 SN WWN Label HSN DUI ET UOOA DIONEO TAT anafoor SONAKKCSSSYMDD You can also find the serial number on the library as follows e Operator panel Select Tools gt About Library e Web client Select Reports gt System Information The serial number is in the Physical Library table in the Serial Number column TE SRT ee Se Replacing an Expansion Module These instructions explain how to remove and replace an expansion module You may need to replace the expansion module if its chassis is severely damaged A library can use up to four expansion modules to a maximum height of 41U There are some configuration settings to take into account when removing and replacing an expansion module e COD licenses remain the same After the expansion module is removed there may be more slots licensed than are available Only the available slots appear on the License screen e All resources in the removed module s are removed A partition with all resources in the removed module s will be present with no slots or drives This partition can only be deleted
142. where in the rack to install the nut clips or cage nuts Note Consider using the following method to determine where to install the nut clips or cage nuts rather than adding the module to the rack first If you add the module to the rack first installing the nut clips or cage nuts can be difficult because rack space has become restricted a If you are adding a module above a previously racked expansion module count nine full units from the location of the expansion module s rack ears and prepare to install the nut clip or cage nut to that location on the rack For example if the expansion module s rack ears are located at 1U and 2U then the nut clips or cage nuts should be installed at 10U and 11U Next determine which holes you must use within the 10U and 11U markers Notice that each rack unit U as delineated by the alignment markers in the rack contains three mounting holes If you are adding a module anywhere above the control module position the nut clip or cage nut at the middle hole in that unit If you are adding a module anywhere below the control module position the nut clip or cage nut at the upper hole in that unit 431 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack b If you are adding a module directly above a previously racked control module count five full units from the location of the control module s rack ears and prepare to install the nut
143. you turn it back online manually or restart the library Note When you change a partition from Enable Library Managed to Allow Application Managed the data that was written to the tapes while the partition was configured for library managed encryption can no longer be read until you change the partition back to Enable Library Managed 182 Using EKM Path Diagnostics Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 3 SKM Only FIPS Federal Information Processing Standard is a U S government standard relating to computer security and encryption To enable FIPS mode on an SKM partition select the FIPS check box To disable FIPS clear the FIPS check box See FIPS Certified Encryption Solution on page 199 for more information FIPS mode is only available with SKM 4 Click Apply 5 Save the library configuration The EKM Path Diagnostics consists of a series of short tests to validate whether the key servers are running connected and able to serve keys as required Run the Manual EKM Path Diagnostics any time you change the key server settings or library encryption settings If you are running Q EKM you should also run the Manual EKM Path Diagnostics whenever you replace a tape drive It is recommended that you test each tape drive that communicates with Q EKM key servers The diagnostics consists of the following tests N
144. 09 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card Quantum Scalar i500 Copyright 2003 2008 Quantum Corporation Scalar i500 Firmware 000G GS019 Compact Flash replacement The current library firmware is INVALID and MUST be upgraded Please click on the link below to upgrade your library firmware Firmware downloads are available at www quantum com cs 20 Click the Click here to upgrade your library s firmware link The Tools Update Library Firmware screen appears Tools Update Library Firmware Browse to upload library firmware Note The library will be rebooted after the firmware file has been uploaded Send this library firmware file C Documents and Settings prezmovits Desi _Browse _ Apply 21 Click Browse to retrieve the tgz firmware file from the location on your computer then click Apply A dialog box appears asking you to confirm it is OK to reboot the library 22 Click OK The screen displays WORKING in the Progress Window Scalar i500 User s Guide 410 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card Once the Firmware has been transferred from the computer to the library the login screen appears Caution The appearance of the login screen on the Web browser does NOT mean the firmware upgrade has completed on t
145. 12 Installing Removing and Replacing provides instructions on how to install remove and replace hardware components in the library including modules tape drives power supplies and cables e Chapter 13 Troubleshooting describes the library s diagnostic reporting system RAS tickets and how to use it It also describes a number of diagnostic tests you can run to troubleshoot problems e Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes provides cartridge handling guidelines e Appendix A Library Specifications lists the library s specifications e Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions describes of all the TapeAlerts you may see listed in RAS tickets and reports on your library This document concludes with a glossary Notational Conventions This manual uses the following conventions Note Note emphasizes important information related to the main topic Caution Caution indicates potential hazards to equipment or data Warning Warning indicates potential hazards to personal safety This manual uses the following e Right side Refers to the right side as you face the component being described e Left side Refers to the left side as you face the component being described Scalar i500 User s Guide 5 Related Documents http Document No 6 01741 xx www quantum com ServiceandSu Document Title Scalar i500 Getting Started Guide
146. 15 minutes to 480 minutes You can change this setting from either the operator panel or the Web client When you change the setting on the operator panel the Web client is updated at the same time and vice versa e Touch Screen Audio Allows you to enable or disable the beep sound that occurs each time you press a button on the operator panel The Touch screen audio setting is enabled by default e Unload Assist Allows you to specify whether the library should automatically eject cartridges from tape drives When the setting is enabled the library will assist with tape drive unload operations in the event that a tape drive is not unloaded by a host command When the setting is disabled the library will not assist with tape drive unload operations and reject a move request from a tape drive if the cartridge is not already unloaded The Unload Assist setting is enabled by default 126 Tape Drive Logical SN Addressing Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings From the Web client select Setup gt System Settings The library assigns a fixed logical serial number to each tape drive slot in the library whether it is occupied or not When the Logical SN Addressing setting is enabled the library reports only the logical serial number to the host instead
147. 180 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Figure 27 Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Screen Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up EKM encryption for library partitions Note Encryption is supported on LTO 4 and LTO 5 media and IBM and HP LTO 4 and LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS tape drives Encryption is n supported on SCSI tape drives For more information refer to the online help or user s guide Select Allow Application Managed as the encryption method to disable library managed encryption The Allow Application Managed encryption selection allows your backup application to control when encryption is used If your backup application is not configured to cont encryption data will not be encrypted Partition FIPS Encryption Method library_a Allow Application Managed library_b Allow Application Managed Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics tell A list of all your partitions displays along with a drop down list displaying the encryption method for each partition The Encryption Method applies to all encryption capable tape drives and media in that partition Table 7 on page 181 describes the partition encryption methods Table 7 Partition Encryption Methods Encryption Method Description Enable Library For use with EKM Enables encryption support via a Managed connected EKM key server for all tape drives and encryption capabl
148. 2U 41U cover plate cover plate Expansion Module cover plate Control Control Module Module cover plate Control Expansion Expansion Module Module Module cover plate Control Expansion Expansion Expansion Module Module Module Module Control Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Module Module Module Module Module cover plate cover plate cover plate cover plate cover plate Scalar i500 User s Guide 331 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Installing the Expansion Install the expansion module as follows Module 1 Open the expansion module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module on which you are stacking 1 Guide pin 2 Thumbscrew Scalar i500 User s Guide 332 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Lift the new expansion module and from the front of the library place it in the desired location If stacking the expansion module on top of another module secure the two modules together by tightening the two thumbscrews at the base of the front of the module and the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Then lower the module s guide pin located at the base of the front of the m
149. 4 weeks default e Last 3 months e All History as far back as there is data in the log file Attribute Specifies which values are included in the report and how they are combined Select in any combination including all default If you select no attributes the report uses Cartridge Barcode e Cartridge Barcode All relevant tape cartridges Drive Physical SN All relevant tape drives e TapeAlert All TapeAlert flags that were issued For a description of all TapeAlert flags see Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Chart Specifies how the data is displayed in the chart Choose Area Bar default Line or Pie Type Specifies the chart type Select one of the following e Rollup default Displays the number of TapeAlerts for the combination of Grouping and Attributes you selected default e Trend Shows the occurrence of TapeAlerts over time 139 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports e Grouping Specifies which drive s or tape cartridge s on which to base the report Choose one of the following e All default All tape drives and tape cartridges for which a TapeAlert was issued during the specified Date Range e Selected Drive by Physical SN An individual tape drive Only tape drives which issued a TapeAlert during the specified Date Range appear in the report e Selected Cartridge by Barcode An individual tape cartridge Only
150. 52 and Exporting Media on page 249 74 Changing Partition Access Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions Details about deleting partitions include the following e After a partition is deleted its resources for example tape drives and slots become available and can be reassigned to new or existing partitions e Deleting a partition does not delete users assigned to that partition However if these users are not assigned to other partitions they will not be able to perform library operations See Changing Partition Access on page 75 e Because partitions may extend across the library s physical modules and share resources the library will report errors if you permanently remove or replace a module in your library without first deleting or modifying partitions and modifying shared resources such as cleaning slots and I E slots See Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 for detailed instructions on preparing your library for the permanent removal or replacement of a module Note You may need to modify settings in your host application as a result of deleting a partition See your host application documentation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Partitions e From the operator panel select Setup gt Partition Mgmt An administrator can control which partitions a specified
151. Administrators can modify existing e mail notification settings at any time after the e mail notification is created For example you can modify the e mail address add delete or modify a comment change the filter level and enable or disable the notification For more information on filter levels see Working With RAS E mail Notifications on page 94 Note The default techsup quantum com e mail notification settings can be modified but not deleted The e mail address techsup quantum com cannot be modified The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications gt RAS gt Receiver Addresses gt Modify Administrators can delete an e mail notification when it is no longer needed Note The default techsup quantum com e mail notification settings can be modified but not deleted The e mail address techsup quantum com cannot be modified The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications gt RAS gt Receiver Addresses gt Delete 96 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts Working With User Accounts Local Authentication vs Remote Authentication About Local User Accounts Scalar i500 User s Guide Administrators can create local user accounts on the library for local authentication or enable and configure the Lightweight Directory Ac
152. American National Standard for information systems dated March 9 1990 Copies may be obtained from Global Engineering Documents 15 Inverness Way East Englewood CO 80112 800 854 7179 or 303 397 2740 Quantum company contacts are listed below Quantum Corporate Headquarters For information about contacting Quantum including Quantum office locations go to http www quantum com aboutus contactus index aspx Quantum Home Page Visit the Quantum home page at http www quantum com Getting More Information or Help Scalar i500 User s Guide Preface StorageCare Quantum s comprehensive service approach leverages advanced data access and diagnostics technologies with cross environment multi vendor expertise to resolve backup issues faster and at lower cost Accelerate service issue resolution with these exclusive Quantum_ StorageCare services Service and Support Web site Register products license software browse Quantum Learning courses check backup software and operating system support and locate manuals FAQs firmware downloads product updates and more in one convenient location Benefit today at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Index aspx eSupport Submit online service requests update contact information add attachments and receive status updates via e mail Online Service accounts are free from Quantum That account can also be used to access Quantum s Know
153. Back Panel Components through a remote Web client For more information on the library user interfaces see Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Turning off the front power button turns off the robot and operator panel but power still runs to the power supplies Use the front power button to manually shut down the library See Shutting Down Powering Off and Completely Removing Power on page 238 for instructions on how to shut down or restart the library safely Front Power Button E E T A Back Panel Components Figure 6 shows the back panel components of the library The paragraphs following Figure 6 describe the components in detail Scalar i500 User s Guide 20 Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components Figure 6 Back Panel Components N D w N 1 a E te pV N JL ie Z ak N TE 7 f I f E upg 5 ES Ca 1 Pam f cmc 35 3 o T PRR 38 ms ss A 7 Nt Biss i ah L i Z gir G 7 7 AN L pre pe a e J oj eoi LE o Janet i m 1 Library control blade LCB 2 FC I O blade optional 3 FC I O fan blades required with FC I O blades 4 Rear power switch 5 Power supplies 6 Upper and lower Ethernet ports on expansion module 7 Module terminator connectors Rear Power Switches Rea power switches are located on ea
154. Completed The date and time the test completed 3 To view test details for a specific tape select a row in the top section Details about the test results display in the area below the table The following details display Scalar i500 User s Guide 231 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Item Description CM Scan Status One of the following Complete Test is finished however the result may not be good You can also get this if the test was stopped For details see the CM Scan Analysis Paused Pending Not Run For details see the CM Scan Analysis In Progress Stopped CM Scan Analysis One of the following Good N A Failed to receive CM data CM hardware failure Tape reached 99 of the manufacturer defined number of tape thread load operations Tape reached 99 of the manufacturer defined number of full tape capacity write operations CM indicates uncorrected errors on the tape Unable to load tape Unable to unload tape Tape not present No compatible drive T O Blade Component Failure Scalar i500 User s Guide 232 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Item Description Tape Scan Status One of the following e Complete Test is finished however the result may not be good For details see the CM Scan Analysis Paused Pending Not Run For details see the CM Scan Analys
155. DLM scanning policies on a partition select None for each of the following Scan upon import Scan based on Tape Alert and Use StorNext configuration In addition set the normal and full scan time intervals to Zero Table 8 EDLM Policy Settings for Partitions Setting Description General Settings Allow concurrent scans Select the number of tape drives that this partition can use for EDLM scans at any one time If you have several partitions that will use EDLM scanning drives you can use this feature to divide the EDLM drive resources so that a single partition with a large number of scans to perform can never hog all of the resources and prevent other partitions from performing their scans in a timely manner Choices are Unlimited default 1 2 3 or 4 Unlimited means that this partition can use all available EDLM scanning drives concurrently Report media When this check box is de selected default if a host requests a tape inaccessible cartridge that is being scanned the scan is cancelled and the tape cartridge is moved back to its original location to service the host request The interrupted scan is not rescheduled The EDLM report indicates the interruption or cancellation This ensures that normal operations are not affected by EDLM scanning When this check box is selected if a host requests a tape cartridge while it is being scanned the library responds to the host that the tape cart
156. Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans The test results display in a new window Setup Operation Tools Reports Tools EDLM Test Results The results of the session are indicated below Select a row in the table to see a detailed report face saben j sent se Scalar i500 User s Guide 230 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans The top section of the screen lists each tape in the test session The following information is reported Item Description Barcode The media barcode identifier Test Result The test result displays as one of the following e Good The tape is good e Bad The tape is bad e Suspect The tape is possibly unreliable or defective e Untested The tape could not be fully scanned for various reasons including incompatible media tape could not be loaded tape is encrypted but the data encryption key could not be obtained drive not communicating with I O blade test was stopped Note Untested media do not initiate RAS tickets or StorNext copy operations e Not Completed Test has not completed yet Scan Type The type of test that was run Quick Normal or Full Drive ID The physical serial number of the tape drive that tested the tape Partition The partition that the tape s being tested in the session belong to State The current test status Pending In Progress Completed Stopped or Paused
157. Description Tape Drive Support barcode scanner reads the fiducial labels to identify the types of magazines and tape drives that are installed in the library Every tape cartridge must have a unique machine readable barcode attached to it Tape cartridges cannot have duplicate barcode labels This barcode identifies the cartridge The library stores the physical location of the tape cartridge in an inventory database All library or host requests typically reference the location of the tape cartridges based on this barcode number Barcode labels are mandatory and must adhere to specific standards For more information on barcodes see Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Tape Drive Support Details about tape drive support include Every library configuration must contain at least one tape drive e Control modules can hold a maximum of two tape drives e Expansion modules can hold a maximum of four tape drives Please see Supported Components on page 524 for a list of tape drives and media supported by the Scalar i500 library The library supports mixing different tape drive types within the library and within partitions For information on how to do this see Working With Partitions on page 68 SCSI and SAS tape drives are attached directly to the host FC tape drives can be directly attached to hosts or to the Storage Area Network SAN FC tape drives can also be attached to FC I O blades which manage communication
158. EDs must be at the bottom Caution Forcing the blade into the bay can cause the pins to bend Evenly apply pressure to both sides of the blade and slide it into the expansion module until the latch hooks begin to move towards the middle of the blade Push the latch hooks towards the middle of the blade and into the locked position You will feel the blade pins connect with the expansion module s backplane as the blade locks into place 453 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade Note The LEDs for the FC I O blade are on the bottom of the blade when the blade is correctly installed in the expansion module 6 Remove and discard the necessary number of the black rubber protective covers from the ports on the FC I O blades 7 Reconnect the FC cables to the appropriate FC ports on the FC I O blade Caution Fibre optical cables will be damaged if they are bent at more than a four inch arc 8 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Note After you replace the FC I O blade the library ensures that the FC I O blade is loaded with the proper firmware This firmware is based on the currently installed level of library firmware If the autoleveling process fails the FC I O blade becomes inoperable and the library creates a ticket to report the issue For information about LED
159. Ensure that the Y rails are properly aligned and the thumbscrews are tightened Scalar i500 User s Guide 370 Scalar i500 User s Guide X SS J says sige f GES Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library A OUO N Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up Squeeze here to release 371 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library a From the front of the library open the I E station and access doors of the expansion module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go b From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go Doing this aligns the Y rails with the Y rails of the module beneath it Caution Check to make sure that there is no gap between the top and bottom Y rails on both the front and back of the library If a gap exists the library cannot mechanically initialize Scalar i500 User s Guide 372 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library
160. For more information see About Cleaning Tape Drives on page 254 Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling Available only for FC tape drives connected to an FC I O blade For more information see Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware on page 283 Reset tape drives Resetting a tape drive power cycles the tape drive while the tape drive remains in the drive sled in the library For more information see Drive Reset on page 514 Force data path failover For use with a Storage Networking license and HP LTO 5 tape drives See Forcing Data Path Failover on page 158 261 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations Scalar i500 User s Guide Each control module and expansion module has an I E station door with multiple open and close sensors A secondary door located behind the I E station door acts as a redundant indicator as to whether the I E station is opened or closed When you are finished accessing the I E station make sure the station door is fully closed Administrators can use this operation to lock or unlock the doors for all I E stations that are configured as I E station slots If all I E station slots are configured as storage this operation unlocks the control module I E station only Note Some host applications use a command to lock and unlock I E station doors This command usually cannot be overridden by the library Use the host applicatio
161. IOS a a E E E E E E E 34 Tape Drives arreen ani E E E ARNEE tennis 34 Fibre Channel I O Blades eirrisesiiriorrasiinrarrriinitrinkiri rirni rarr 34 Ethernet Expansion Blades ssscesisiicuineinnsiaiiinnii 35 Power SUP Plles scsi sscscaresscccessdesiusesetoushteuveceseeosedentstevexcscensteapleveenseavenseneebes 35 Understanding Logical Element Addressing 0 cece seen renee 35 Tape Drive Logical Element Addressing 0 cceeseeeeseesseseeneneeees 35 Cartridge Slot Logical Element Addressing 0 eerie 36 Understanding the User Interface 39 Common User Interface Elements cesses eseseeeseeseeeseeseeeecaesceeseearecees 40 System Summary and Subsystem Status 0 eee cesesseseeeesenenees 42 Home PASC ccscsisocecasieveectativieviceis siete nan tev EEE 43 Operator Panel saci tive inte a E E a a 43 Operator Panel Key pads si cccsssssscscstessssevesosssssosssevssssesssnnsnssenasnsssenentes 44 Operator Panel Indicates Intervention Required oe eee 44 Wep Cem E si csscsutiecstvesetssesasstenasibuvconsacersctdssetecsdtaxeveneuouevseased E EEE EN 44 Ment TICES c3 5 fas sack ca issn cod case caso cdceacs ona ioveasda ea isvenneeib E AR 45 User Privileges arnore eeni aE ari Nar KEE E 50 USEF A CCOSS pouner i enen E TE R 51 Configuring Your Library 52 About the Setup Wizard sessssesseesssscsseesesesssesesscnesensscsessesensecarseensenes 53 Using the Default Administrator ACCOUNE eee eeseeseeseereneneee 54 Completing the Li
162. KM skip this step No TLS certificates are required 174 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library At any time you may install a new set of TLS certificates to overwrite the existing set The new TLS certificates must all be valid or the overwrite will not occur and the existing certificates will remain in place Take one the following actions according to which encryption system you are using Encryption System Action Scalar Key Manager SKM If you purchased your library with firmware version 570G or higher the library came with TLS certificates pre installed You can check the Web client to see whether TLS certificates are installed see Checking for Current Certificates on page 175 If valid TLS certificates are currently installed you do not need to do anything However if you wish you may install your own certificates to replace the existing certificates see Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library on page 177 If valid TLS certificates are not installed you must install them You can install either of the following Quantum provided TLS certificates see Installing Quantum Supplied TLS Certificates on the Library on page 176 Your own TLS certificates see Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library on page 177 KMIP compliant key TLS certificates will be provided by your KMIP management ser
163. KOBOACTBe No ycTpoucTBy TEXHNKE 6 30NAaCHOCTH N AeVICTBYIOLUNM HOPMaTNBAM A ADVERTENCIA Antes de utilizar este producto lea todas las instrucciones y advertencias en este documento y en la Guia informativa sobre sistema seguridad y normas VARNING L s alla anvisningar och varningar i detta dokument och i System s kerhet och krav fr n myndigheter Informationshandbok innan denna produkt tas i bruk Mercury Statement Projectors LCD displays and some multifunction printers may use lamp s that contain a small amount of mercury for energy efficient lighting purposes Mercury lamps in these products are labeled accordingly Please manage the lamp according to local state or federal laws For more information contact the Electronic Industries Alliance at www eiae org For lamp specific disposal information check www lamprecycle org Scalar i500 User s Guide 3 Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment Document Organization Scalar i500 User s Guide Preface This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product should not be disposed of with your other waste Instead it should be handed over to a designated collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
164. Location Represents Power Supply Status Green AC OK e Solid ON The power supply s AC input is above the minimum top requirements to operate e Solid OFF The power supply s AC input is below the minimum requirements to operate Green DC OK e Solid ON The power supply s output voltage is within regulation nec e Solid OFF The power supply s output voltage is not within regulation Blue Standby e Solid OFF Normal bottom e Solid ON Swap mode Ready to be removed or replaced Scalar i500 User s Guide In the RAS tickets associated with the defective power supply record both the number of the module and the number of the power supply connected to that module The expansion modules are numbered according to their position in relation to the control module The control module is assigned the number 0 All expansion modules stacked beneath the control module are assigned a negative number while expansion modules stacked above the control module are assigned a positive number For example expansion module 2 is the second expansion module beneath the control module while expansion module 2 is the second expansion module above the control module Each module can have up to two power supplies The power supply on the left is 1 while the power supply on the right is 2 508 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Using the Installation Verification Test Using the Installation Verification Test Scala
165. M and scans selected portions of the tape focusing on areas most likely to indicate problems Takes up to 20 minutes per tape Examples of when to use a normal scan e For tapes in frequent use within the library with scanning triggered by drive reported media Tape Alert events e For tapes in frequent use within the library with scanning being performed at regular time intervals e Full Evaluates the cartridge memory CM and scans the entire tape Can take more than 2 hours on a full tape Example of when to use a full scan e When tape cartridges are accessed infrequently and are used primarily for on site or offsite long term data retention e When tape cartridges with valuable data are introduced into the library and the state and condition of the tapes are unknown Scalar i500 User s Guide 220 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Setting Description Scan based on Tape Alert Choose whether to scan tapes based on Tape Alert count and if so which type of scan to perform Quick Normal or Full described above Select None to disable this policy This policy is disabled by default When enabled a tape will be scanned if the number of Tape Alerts reported for that cartridge exceeds the user specified value in the Tape Alert count field described in more detail below The Tape Alerts included in the count are e Oth 1 Read Warning e 03h 3 Hard Error
166. Note The maximum number of expansion modules supported in a library depends on the level of firmware the library is running See Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware on page 278 for more information Scalar i500 User s Guide 388 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with IEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a control module weighs approximately 60 Ibs 27 2 kg An expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 Ibs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules 389 Removing the 9U Expansion Module Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Before removing the module follow the instructions in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356
167. On the Web client select Reports gt About gt Scalar i500 4 Access the Quantum License Key Management Web site at http www quantum com licensekeys 90 Applying a License Key Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Obtaining and Installing a License Key 5 Inthe Serial Number box enter your serial number 6 Click Submit If you have entered a valid serial number the Web site displays existing license keys for this feature Exception If the license was applied at the factory the word Factory may appear instead of the actual license key If you need to retrieve the license key in this case contact Quantum Technical Support see Contacts on page 7 Type the authorization code from your License Key Certificate in the Authorization Code text box Click the Get License Key button If you have entered a valid authorization code the Web site allows you to retrieve the license key for your new feature or upgrade You are now ready to apply the license key to the library See Applying a License Key A license key may be applied to the library during the initial configuration or whenever licensed features are purchased If increased capacity is purchased the new license key will replace the current license Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes w
168. PI Plug in occ ee eeneeenees 210 Installing the SNAPI Plug in oo eee tenses 210 StorNext Host Configuration ees cseseseeeceseneseseeees 211 Testing the StorNext Settings eee certs eeeeeeees 213 Creating EDLM Partitions cceceeeceseeceeeneteseeeeeeneees 214 EDLM Policy Settings for EDLM Library Managed PP APtMIONS RE Stace t atcevea ss edi Pesta AT 217 EDLM Policy Settings for Standard Partitions 04 218 Library Configuration Report ieee tenses 269 HP LTO 5 Dual Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive 0 0 00 291 HP LTO 5 Single Port SAS Tape Drive cccceeeeeeenees 292 IBM LTO 5 Single Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive 292 Stand Alone 5U Control Module SCSI Cabling 294 Multi Module SCSI Cabling oe essen eeneneneeeees 295 Cabling One or Two Tape Drives Per SCSI Bus 0 297 Stand Alone Control Module SAS Cabling 300 xvii Scalar i500 User s Guide Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Multi Module SAS Cabling ese eeeeeeeneteeeeeeeees 301 Stand Alone Control Module Fibre Channel Cabling 304 Multi Module Fibre Channel Cabling cece 305 PO Blad snae E iene en oka 309 FC With I O Blade Cabling oo eee
169. Preface Documents related to the Scalar i500 are shown below For the most up to date product information and documentation see ort Index aspx Document Description Provides basic cabling and setup instructions 6 01317 xx Quantum Scalar Intelligent Libraries SMI S Reference Guide Provides an interface standard that can be used in a SAN environment 6 01370 xx Scalar i500 Tape Library Basic SNMP Reference Guide Describes information you can obtain from the Scalar i500 library SNMP 6 00676 xx Quantum SNC Firmware 4 and 5 Reference Guide Provides information about the Storage Network Controller an optional component that provides Fibre Channel to Fibre Channel connectivity 6 01385 xx Scalar i500 Unpacking Instructions 5U Unpacking instructions 6 01524 xx Scalar i500 Unpacking Instructions 9U Unpacking instructions 6 01525 xx Scalar i500 Unpacking Instructions 14U Unpacking instructions 6 01378 xx Scalar i500 Release Notes Describes changes to your system or firmware since the last release provides compatibility information and discusses any known issues and workarounds Refer to the appropriate product manuals for information about your tape drive and cartridges Scalar i500 User s Guide Contacts Scalar i500 User s Guide Preface SCSI 2 Specification The SCSI 2 communications specification is the proposed
170. Quantum e 3 oO D User s Guide User s Guide User s Guide User s Guide User s Guide Quantum Scalar i500 Tape Library 6 01210 06 B Scalar i500 User s Guide 6 01210 06 Rev B February 2014 Made in USA Quantum Corporation provides this publication as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Quantum Corporation may revise this publication from time to time without notice COPYRIGHT STATEMENT Copyright 2014 by Quantum Corporation All rights reserved Your right to copy this manual is limited by copyright law Making copies or adaptations without prior written authorization of Quantum Corporation is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable violation of the law TRADEMARK STATEMENT Quantum the Quantum logo and Scalar are registered trademarks of Quantum Corporation in the USA and other countries LTO and Ultrium are trademarks of Quantum IBM and HP in the USA and other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies Preface Chapter 1 Scalar i500 User s Guide Contents 1 Description 10 Intelligent Storag Eroin ane E ER R 11 Library Config rat eseria aE E RNE E S 11 Modules srra 56305 sgee sugestgcaesenes EE E E E E CE 15 Control Mod le assinrierenien raver E RR S 16 Expansion Mod les sssssisiusssssisesssesssosossostssseesso
171. RAS tickets are displayed by clicking any header item for example Priority Last Occurrence or Name 42 Home Page Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel On the Web client you can view closed tickets by selecting the Include Closed Tickets check box You can also open the All RAS Tickets screen by selecting Tools gt All RAS Tickets See About RAS Tickets on page 481 for more information about RAS tickets The home page is common to both the operator panel and the Web client The home page provides tabular data on the capacity of the library s partitions slots and drives You can use the home page to see a quick summary of the capacity of the library You can also see which partitions are online in the Storage Slots section The current user s login privileges determine the information that is displayed on the home page Details about the home page include e On the Web client users see the partitions in alphabetical order to which they have access e On the operator panel if users have access to more than one partition they can navigate to other partitions using the arrows next to the partition name in the title bar at the top of the screen For more information about user privileges see User Privileges on page 50 and Working With User Accounts on page 97 Operator Panel Scalar i500 User s Guide The operator panel is physically attached to the front door of the control mod
172. Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card SSS a ee ga a a ee Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card Replacing the LCB Compact Flash Card or Compact Flash Card Only Scalar i500 User s Guide The library control blade LCB manages the entire library including the operator panel and robot and is responsible for running system tests to ensure that the library is functioning properly The LCB compact flash card contains important information about your library configuration If you replace the compact flash card then you need to reconfigure your library You have two options e Replacing the LCB Compact Flash Card or Compact Flash Card Only e Replacing the LCB Only Contact Quantum Support to determine which component s you need to replace and which set of instructions to follow Contact Quantum Support to help you determine whether to replace the LCB and compact flash card together or to replace just the compact flash card The instructions for both options are nearly identical except that for a compact flash card only replacement you will reuse the existing LCB and replace only the compact flash card within it You will still need to upgrade firmware as described below Equipment Required e Ethernet Cable e Host PC or laptop connected to the Scalar i500 library e Current Scalar i500 library firmware file saved to your host PC or lapto
173. S 88 Te QV SASS q h A RNY DS SN Vi NY N WR MAO DNAR RS NSS vee e NaM 9 A a T Dy g N A SsVssgqgssgqg4gssg S X MA SPH TSTSS Hoss Psesosessssssg t A KL RR RRR RRO aaa 427 M5 thumbscrews using the M5 thumbscrews in the most Parking tab in parked position Explanation of parts Each rack ear contains two elongated holes enabling you to fasten it to the rack accessible mounting holes Required parts Rack ears 4 1 Installing the Bottom Module in the Rack Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack 1 Place the desired module whichever module you want to be the bottom module of the library onto the rack mount shelves From the front of the rack lift the module onto the shelf and gently slide it into the rack Slide the module to the back of the rack so that the front of the module is flush with the mounting holes 2 From the back of the rack secure the module to the rack mount shelves by tightening the two silver thumbscrews that are attached to the rear of the rack mount shelves 3 Install the right rack ear At the front of the library a Open the I E station door At the lower right corner of the module is a vertical slot Insert the hinge of the right rack ear into the slot and then position the holes of the rack ear flush with the rack rail i ee J 1 Hinge
174. SAS Tape Drive Ethernet port do not use SAS port use this port N Figure 39 IBM LTO 5 Single Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive 1 Ethernet port do not use 2 Fibre Channel port use this port Scalar i500 User s Guide 292 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Cabling Libraries With Use this procedure along with Figure 40 and Figure 41 if you are SCSI Tape Drives installing a library that includes SCSI tape drives Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 293 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Figure 40 Stand Alone 5U Control Module SCSI Cabling Ethernet cable to customer network GB Ethernet port SCSI terminator Power supply Rear power switch SCSI cable to host Library control blade oOo N Oar WYN Module terminators Scalar i500 User s Guide 294 Figure 41 Multi Module SCSI Cabling Scala
175. SAS address for SAS tape drives The Web client Identify Drives screen lists the following information for each tape drive Location coordinates Mode status online offline State ready not ready Drive type Protocol Control path tape drive status yes no Vendor Physical serial number P SN Logical serial number L SN Tape drive firmware version Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates On the operator panel Drive Information screen you can identify the tape drives assigned to the selected partition as well as the control path tape drive for the partition by flashing the green light emitting diodes LEDs on the back of the tape drives Use the Identify All button to flash the green LEDs on the back of the tape drives assigned to the partition The LEDs blink 10 times per second for one minute Use the Identify Ctrl Path button to flash the green LED on the back of the control path tape drive for the partition The control path tape drive is used to connect each partition to the host application Use 493 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Identifying Tape Drives this button when you are cabling the library or troubleshooting the library control paths of tape drives The green LED blinks 10 times per second for one minute On the Web client Identify Drives screen you can identify the tape drives assign
176. SCSI element address interface type drive type ready state online status barcode media type element address vendor model physical serial number logical serial number SCSI ID firmware level control path status I O blade information blade number blade ID location coordinates serial number WWNN firmware version and control LUN Partition information number of partitions number of cleaning slots number of unassigned slots number of import export I E slots I E manual assignment setting partition name number of slots number of tape drives and number of cartridges Administrators can use the Tools E mail Configuration Record screen on the Web client to e mail the library configuration record Do not enter more than one e mail address in the E mail Address text box on the Tools E mail Configuration Record screen If you need to send the configuration record to multiple e mail addresses repeat the procedure for each e mail address Before you can e mail the configuration record the library e mail account must be configured For information on setting up the e mail account see Configuring the Library E mail Account on page 92 487 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration You cannot e mail the library configuration record from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt E mail Configuratio
177. Setup Wizard session is complete administrators can choose whichever method is most convenient or necessary for modifying library settings The following topics cover using the Setup Wizard as well as Setup and Operations commands to configure the library Paths to open the appropriate screens on both the operator panel and the Web client are 54 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Using the Setup Wizard given for each task For the operator panel the paths refer to the navigation tabs at the top of the home page For the Web client the paths refer to the menus For the menu trees on both the operator panel and Web client see Menu Trees on page 45 Note Power cycling powering the library on and off is not necessary to configure the library aaa ee E Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard simplifies the process of configuring the library When you first power on the library the operator panel displays the Setup Wizard After that you can no longer access the Setup Wizard from the operator panel You can always access the Setup Wizard from the Setup menu on the Web client The recommended procedure for using the Setup Wizard for the initial configuration is as follows 1 Turn on the library and begin using the Setup Wizard on the operator panel 2 Work through all of the screens as prompted see Setup Wizard Tasks on page 57 3 When you get to the network configuration screens configure the network set
178. Step 4 Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on page 213 e You can scan cartridges manually at any time See Running Manual EDLM Tests on page 224 You can also set up automatic media scanning policies by partition Each partition can have its own unique set of media scanning and action policies See Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions on page 216 Scalar i500 User s Guide 204 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management About EDLM All types of tape cartridges data cleaning diagnostic and firmware update tapes can be scanned manually However only data cartridges can be scanned automatically If StorNext Storage Manager is managing your partitions you can use it in conjunction with EDLM to automatically copy data off of bad or suspect tapes or to trigger media scans To use StorNext you must separately install a SNAPI client plug in See Step 2 Installing the EDLM Plug in for SNAPI on page 208 All media to be scanned must have a readable barcode label All scans are performed in the order in which their requests were received If there are too many scans for the available tape drives scan requests are queued Exception Manual scans always go to the top of the queue regardless of when they are scheduled A tape may only be scheduled once in the queue For example if a tape is in the queue to be scanned per a particular policy and a different p
179. TLS certificates on the SKM servers Note If you are using KMIP key managers Your KMIP server provider will provide TLS communication certificates 177 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library You need to provide the following certificates Encryption System Certificates Required SKM e Root Certificate also called the CA certificate or Certificate Authority Certificate Client Certificate e Admin Certificate KMIP key managers e Root Certificate also called the CA certificate or Certificate Authority Certificate Client Certificate These files must be in the proper format as follows If any of the following requirements is not met none of the certificates will be imported The Root Certificate must be 2048 bits and be in PEM format The Admin and Client certificates must be 1024 bits and be in pkcs 12 p12 format with a separate certificate and private key contained in each The Admin and Client certificates must be signed by the Root Certificate Certificates must have the Organization name O set in their Issuer and Subject info The Admin certificate must have its Organizational Unit name OU set as akm_admin in its Subject Info The same Root Certificate must be installed on the encryption key servers and the library All the certificates must have a valid validity period according
180. Test Detailed Log e From the operator panel select Tools gt Library Tests gt E mail Last Detailed Log 511 Running Library Demo Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Using the Installation Verification Test Administrators can run Library Demo a simple way to test robotics functionality following a FRU or CRU replacement It shows the library s ability to correctly move a scratch data cartridge from an I E station to randomly selected open storage slots until the demonstration is stopped Details on running Library Demo include Media in the storage magazines are not affected by the demonstration The scratch data cartridge is returned to the I E station following each cycle of 20 moves or when the demonstration is stopped Before running Library Demo ensure that no host applications are accessing the library After you select Library Demo on the Tools gt Library Tests screen you will be prompted to place a scratch data cartridge into the top I E station slot The library robot will use this cartridge to perform its moves during the demonstration When you close the I E station the Assign I E screen appears if the Manual Cartridge Assignment setting is enabled on the operator panel System Settings screen Tools gt System Settings Assign the new scratch data cartridge to the System partition and then select Apply Before the demonstration starts the library may perform an inventory If the screen shows the flashing
181. Test Settings button tests communication between the library and the LDAP server and tests the currently applied LDAP settings If there are any problems an error message identifies the problem area If you change the LDAP settings click Apply to save your changes before testing them Otherwise any changes you made will be lost and will not be tested To test the settings you must type a user name and password then click the Test Settings button The user you use for the test must be a member of both the Library User Group and the Library Admin Group on the LDAP server Since most normal users will not be members of both these groups you may need to create a special or temporary user specifically for this purpose After configuring LDAP settings save the library configuration Scalar i500 User s Guide 103 Configuring Kerberos Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts Note For step by step instructions on configuring LDAP on the library see your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client You can view enable and configure LDAP settings from the library Web client You cannot use the operator panel to configure LDAP settings The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt User Management gt Remote Authentication Use Kerberos if you w
182. The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Download SNMP MIB Scalar i500 User s Guide 67 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions Working With Partitions Partitions are virtual sections within a library that present the appearance of multiple separate libraries for purposes of file management access by multiple users or dedication to one or more host applications The library must contain at least one unassigned tape drive and slot to create a partition The Setup Wizard Partitioning screens allow administrators to select the number of new library partitions to create At any time after the initial configuration of the library administrators can create modify and delete partitions by selecting Setup gt Partitions on the Web client or create and delete partitions by selecting Setup gt Partition Mgmt on the operator panel There are two ways to create partitions e Automatically Library resources are assigned proportionately among the partitions Tape drives are grouped according to their interface type SCSI FC or SAS tape drive vendor and media generation LTO 3 LTO 4 LTO 5 LTO 6 You cannot mix interface type tape drive vendor and media generation in partitions that you create automatically To create a partition with mixed interface types tape drive vendors and media generations you must create the partition manually You can
183. a in the log files you cannot get it back The Reload button does NOT retrieve deleted data It is recommended that you save all the data for both the Drive Resource Utilization report and the Media Integrity Analysis report before deleting the data see Saving and E mailing Report Data Files Figure 17 Report Data Buttons Report Data 651 records read Saving and E mailing You cannot save the report as it appears on the screen but you can save Report Data Files or e mail the report data as a comma separated values csv file You can then import the csv data into a spreadsheet program and manipulate it to create your own reports for analysis The csv file contains all of the data in the log file that falls within the date range you specify 1 Generate a report 2 Scroll down to the bottom of the report viewing screen to a box titled Retrieve the Report Data File 3 To save the report data as a csv file click Save Note To e mail a saved report from the Web client you must save the report and then go to another page in the web client Return to the report viewer page scroll down to the bottom of the report viewing screen to a box titled Retrieve the Report Data File and click E mail 4 To e mail the report data as a csv file type the name of a recipient in the empty field next to the E mail button then click E mail Scalar i500 User s Guide 142 Figure 18 Saving and E mailing the Rep
184. a recovery routine UDS Universal Drive Sled The hardware that houses Fibre Channel and SCSI tape drives in a module UserID An alphanumeric value that the password database associates with a login name Also UID 550 x lt lt Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary UTC Coordinated Universal Time The world wide standard for time commonly considered to be the equivalent of Greenwich Mean Time and Zulu time For all of these time standards zero 0 hours is midnight in Greenwich England which lies on the zero longitudinal meridian The sequence of the letters in the acronym is a compromise between the English and French terms Temps Universel Coordonn WORM Write Once Read Many A common type of data storage medium in which data can be read and reread but not altered after it has been recorded WWNN World Wide Node Name A unique number assigned by a recognized naming authority The World Wide name is integral to Fibre Channel operations WWPN World Wide Port Name The WWPN is a 64 bit hard coded address for each port on an FC connected device It is used to identify available SAN devices at end points X axis X position The horizontal position of the library s robotic arm Y axis Y position The vertical position of the library s robotic arm 551
185. a simple example of element addressing in a 14U library with a single partition 37 Chapter 1 Description Understanding Logical Element Addressing Figure 12 Logical Element Addressing 14U One Partition Six Tape Drives Installed EM 1 Note Empty drive bay element addresses are skipped This picture assumes six tape drives are installed Tape cartridge slots in partition VE station slots Tape drives Unused slots Scalar i500 User s Guide 38 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface The user interface of Scalar i500 libraries is available in two formats the operator panel and the Web client Operations on the library can be performed locally on the control module using the operator panel or remotely on your computer using the Web client Similar functionality with common elements is used for both formats Both the Web client and operator panel user interfaces are required to operate the library Some functionality is only available through the Web client and some functionality is only available through the operator panel However using the Web client rather than the operator panel to perform library operations when possible is recommended Caution Do not perform inventory operations for example working with RAS tickets creating modifying deleting partitions while the library is performing an inventory Doing so may result in inventory discrepan
186. able from FC I O blade to tape drive Module terminator FC cable to host Module to module cable Ethernet cable to network UPPER and LOWER Ethernet ports 310 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Required tools None 1 If your library is larger than 14U install it in a rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions The instructions include procedures for removing and replacing tape drives Warning Al libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Note Pay attention to where the operator panel is positioned in the rack for optimum usability 2 For each FC I O blade installed in an expansion module connect the expansion module containing the FC I O blade s to a port in the Ethernet hub on the LCB Note Without these Ethernet cables connected the FC I O blades will not work a Ifthe FCI O blade is installed in the bottom bay of the expansion module connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the
187. age 57 For additional information see Using the Setup Wizard on page 55 When you power on the library for the first time you do not need to log in to use the operator panel You can start using the Setup Wizard immediately After the initial setup session on the operator panel however you will need to log in to the operator panel as well as the Web client The library ships with a default administrator account The user name on the account is admin and the password is password When you see the Login screen on the operator panel or Web client type admin in the User Name text box and password in the Password text box As soon as the initial setup is complete you should change the password on the default administrator account For information on changing passwords see Modifying Local User Accounts on page 98 Note You cannot delete the default administrator account or modify the user name You can however change the password Note If you misplace the password for the default administrator account contact Quantum Technical Support see Getting More Information or Help on page 8 The Setup Wizard is an aid to assist you with the initial configuration of the library The Setup Wizard however contains only a subset of configuration tasks The operator panel tabs and Web client menus provide access to all configuration options that are included in the Setup Wizard and many that are not Once the initial
188. aged bulk the tape 1 Check that you are using the correct format tape 2 Discard the tape or return the tape to your supplier erased or incorrect format Scalar i500 User s Guide 538 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 55 Loading or C The operation has failed because the The drive is unable to threading media cannot be loaded and threaded load the media and failure 1 Remove the cartridge inspect it as Hea specified in the product manual and retry the operation 2 Ifthe problem persists call the tape drive supplier help line 56 Unrecoverable C The operation has failed because the The drive is unable to unload failure medium cannot be unloaded unload the medium 1 Do not attempt to extract the tape cartridge 2 Call the tape driver supplier help line 57 Automation C The tape drive has a problem with the The drive has interface failure automation interface identified an 1 Check the power to the automation eee system 2 Check the cables and cable connections 3 Call the supplier help line if problem persists 58 Microcode W The tape drive has reset itself due to a Microcode bug failure detected microcode fault If problem persists call the supplier help line 59 WORM W The tape drive has detected an Someone has medium inconsistency during the WORM tampered with the
189. alar i500 User s Guide 526 Appendix A Library Specifications Environmental Requirements Environmental Requirements The environmental requirements for the library are listed below Note Temperature ranges apply to product inlet temperatures not necessarily to ambient room temperatures Airflow restrictions or other heat generating equipment within the rack enclosure may cause a rise over ambient room temperatures Operating Non Operating Storage Altitude Up to 10 000 ft Up to 10 000 ft Up to 10 000 ft 3 048 m 3 048 m 3 048 m Temperature 50 to 104 F 50 to 113 F 40 to 150 F 10 to 40 C 10 to 45 C 40 to 65 C Relative Humidity 20 to 80 10 to 90 0 to 95 non condensing non condensing non condensing eS eS Electrical Requirements Scalar i500 User s Guide Electrical requirements for the library are 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 527 Appendix A Library Specifications Dimensions a Dimensions Rack Library Configuration Height HxWxD 5U control module 5U 8 6 in x 17 4 in x 31 4 in 21 9 cm x 44 2 cm x 79 8 cm 9U expansion module 9U 15 8 in x 17 4 in x 31 4 in 40 cm x 44 2 cm x 79 8 cm 5U control module 1 9U 14U 24 4 in x 17 4 in x 31 4 in pansion module 61 9 cm x 44 2 cm x 79 8 cm 5U control module 2 9U 23U 40 1 in x 17 4 in x 31 4 in D 101 9 cm x 44 2 cm x 79 8 cm
190. ample pass_19 e Privilege set to either User or Admin See User Privileges on page 50 for more information on user privilege levels e Partition Access the partitions to which this user has access Any user assigned to a partition that has been deleted can be reassigned to other partitions The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts e From the operator panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Modify User Administrators can delete other local administrator and user accounts when they are no longer needed Note The default administrator account cannot be deleted The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts e From the operator panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Modify User Administrators can enable and configure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP LDAP is the industry standard Internet protocol that provides centralized user account management Administrators can add delete and modify only local user account information The library Web client does not allow you to create modify or delete user account information on an LDAP server This must be done by the directory service provider For more information on working with local user accounts see About Local User Accounts on page 97 99 Scalar i500 User
191. and time the test session was started Finish Time The date and time the test session completed Results A summary of results for all media tested in the session The reported values include the number of tapes scanned in parentheses for each result obtained Note To view results for individual tapes in the session select a test session row and then click the Details button Results are the following e Good The tape is good e Bad The tape is bad Suspect The tape is possibly unreliable or defective e Untested The tape could not be fully scanned for various reasons including incompatible media cartridge could not be loaded tape is encrypted but the data encryption key could not be obtained drive not communicating with I O blade test was stopped Note Untested media do not initiate RAS tickets or EDLM media action policies such as copying data from a bad or suspect tape e Not Completed The test has not completed yet Scalar i500 User s Guide 3 From the Select Time Range drop down list select the range of time for test sessions that you want displayed The time range is based on the start time of the test session Choose one of the following e Last Day Test sessions that were run in the last 24 hours e Last Week Test sessions that were run in the last seven days e Last Month Test sessions that were run in the last month 228 Chapter 8 Extended Data Life
192. anena ai e 238 Shutting Down Powering Off and Completely Removing Power 238 Restarting the Library ssicsecscssesassetinssevesetiessascscanssstsesedsbeststvendcclevdsavetexeveniueton 239 Logging Un esse dscnstcins coos cucestde aessucesturcscnesess E K EE a a enea aieeaii 239 Logging In When LDAP or Kerberos is Enabled ccceceeeees 240 Logging QU bs ssccssecvsdeeetssdecceesitesvecuencunatesvavptecesnseshureinsvaryesevts tesbaessuvebcectndonestans 240 Performing Media Operations pisarssi iioii i ea 241 importing Media sesccis soscssevssesesducdasescaazoxevccensnodsssetesnndysbeses ies okassseteeseseaes 242 Bulk GOA AIAG merrer t oren a n tie dee E TEE 246 Movin M dia ssnin r a 248 Exporting Media icnsniyne n cece e ne e E e 249 Loading Tape DriyeSsossseeane e ieaiai 251 Unloading Tape Dr ives cccceesssssseeeesssesssnenesssesssesssesseeessssseensesisaes 252 Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 253 About Cleaning Tape Drives cece ceesseeeseresesesesessseeseseseeeseseees 254 Enabling Auto Clean rs sesciccsescsscscssthevsenecscvetacsenednnosetuatetesvegestdacobpsvdenss bess 255 Viewing the Cleaning Count ccccccessssssscsneesesssseisseesseesesssseneneneees 256 Using Valid Cleaning Media cccccscesessseessscecssesssnsneessssseesseesees 256 Importing Cleaning Media eeccssscssesessssneseseseseenssesseeessseseenseeseaes 256 Exporting Cleaning Media c cccssssesesseseessscesescsssssnsesss
193. ansion Module Close the library s I E station and access doors 2 Add the tape drives to the modules For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 3 Add the power supplies For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 Scalar i500 User s Guide 400 Scalar i500 User s Guide O ON CO 10 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module If your library contains FC I O blades install both the I O blades and the accompanying fan blades in the expansion module For details see Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades on page 443 and Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 Connect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables Make sure the module terminators are installed at the top and bottom of the stack of modules For cabling instructions see Cabling the Library on page 289 Power on the library Re create partitions cleaning slots and I E station slots as desired Import tape cartridges to the correct partitions as needed Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 If the host application inventories the location of each tape cartridge in the library open the host application and reinventory in order to sync its logical inventory with the physical inventory of the library 401 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and
194. ansion Modules to an Existing Library 5 Add the power supplies For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 6 Connect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables Make sure the module terminators are installed at the top and bottom of the stack of modules For cabling instructions see Cabling the Library on page 289 7 Power on the library For libraries larger than a 14U boot time may take 15 20 minutes 8 Configure the library using the Setup Wizard that appears on the operator panel interface 9 Add the tape cartridges to the library s modules using the I E station commands from the operator panel or Web client 10 Open the host application and reinventory in order to synchronize its logical inventory with the physical inventory of the library Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Adding expansion modules to the library increases the number of data cartridges available within the library system These instructions explain how to add an expansion module to an existing library Note The maximum number of expansion modules supported in a library depends on the level of firmware the library is running The latest firmware must be installed on the library if you are upgrading from a 5U or 14U configuration to a larger configuration The latest firmware can be found at www quantum com support See Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware on page 278 for
195. ant extra security with remote authentication Make sure that both the library and the Kerberos Active Directory server are set to the same time within 5 minutes Otherwise the authentication will fail It is recommended that you use Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize the time between the library and the Kerberos server See Setting the Date and Time Using the Network Time Protocol on page 107 Fill in the following Kerberos fields in addition to all the LDAP fields Realm The Kerberos realm name typed in all uppercase letters Usually the realm name is the DNS domain name Example MYCOMPANY COM KDC AD Server The key distribution center in other words the server on which Kerberos Active Directory is installed Example mycompany com 88 e Domain Mapping The domain portion of the library s fully qualified domain name Example mycompany com e Service Keytab Click the Browse button to select the service keytab file The service keytab file is a file you generate on your Kerberos Active Directory server See Generating the Service Keytab file on page 105 You can view enable and configure Kerberos settings from the Web client You cannot use the operator panel to configure Kerberos settings 104 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt User Management gt Remote
196. ape drive bay within the module The drive bays within a module are numbered from top to bottom A one based numbering system is used The full address of a tape drive is in the form of module drive bay for example 0 1 1 3 1 2 Fibre Channel FC I O blades are addressed first by module and then by FC I O blade bay within the expansion module The blade bays within a module are numbered from top to bottom A one based numbering system is used The full address of a an FC I O blade bay is in the form of module FC I O blade bay for example 1 1 1 2 34 Ethernet Expansion Blades Power Supplies Chapter 1 Description Understanding Logical Element Addressing Ethernet Expansion Blades EEBs are addressed first by module and then by EEB bay within the expansion module9U Library Expansion Module The blade bays within a module are numbered from top to bottom The blade bay is always on the bottom of the unit A one based numbering system is used The full address of a an EEB blade bay is in the form of module EEB for example 1 2 1 2 Power supplies are addressed as module PS where PS is 1 for the left power supply and 2 for the right power supply The PS is also etched on the module chassis above each power supply Understanding Logical Element Addressing Tape Drive Logical Element Addressing Scalar i500 User s Guide The library uses standard industry conventions to logically number e
197. appears if the Manual Cartridge Assignment setting is enabled on the operator panel System Settings screen Tools gt System Settings Assign the new scratch data cartridge to the System partition and then select Apply The Drives subtest only tests those tape drives that have the same media type as the scratch data cartridge For example if the scratch data cartridge is LTO 3 then all tape drives that are not LTO 3 will be skipped in the Drives test If the tape drives in the library have different media types you must run the Drives test multiple times with a different scratch data cartridge for each tape drive media type If a subtest is missing required resources for example scratch data cartridges the subtest will fail The IVT starts by performing an inventory of the library The inventory is recorded in the IVT log along with the test results Select Details on the Library Test Progress screen to see the IVT results If the IVT is still running you will only see results for tests that have completed Select Stop on the Library Test Progress screen to cancel the current IVT run between subtests The last issued commands will complete before library control is returned 510 Viewing the IVT Logs Saving and E mailing the IVT Logs Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Using the Installation Verification Test e Once the selected tests are complete select Next You can choose to view the detaile
198. arcode labels with a length of 6 2 corresponding to the Standard Six and Plus Six formats listed below For advanced uses your Quantum library supports label lengths of up to 16 characters allowing you to create custom labels Refer to Barcode Label Requirements on page 520 for label details The library supports the following tape cartridge barcode formats e Standard Five to 16 characters total including a barcode number and optional two character media ID If a media ID is included the label must have a five to 14 character barcode number followed by a media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 If a media ID is not included the label must have a five to 16 character barcode number for example XXXXX or XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Only the barcode number is reported to the host Scalar i500 User s Guide 521 Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Installing Barcode Labels e Standard Six Six character barcode number with or without a two character media ID for example XXXXXXL4 or XXXXXX Only the six character barcode number is reported to the host e Plus Six Six character barcode number followed by a two character media ID for example XXXXXXLA4 The six character barcode and media ID are reported to the host Extended Five to 16 characters total including a barcode number and optional two character media ID All characters are reported to the host regardless of th
199. are observed within individual EDLM scan result details Quantum recommends power cycling I O blades being utilized for EDLM scans using the remote user interface s Setup gt FC I O Blade gt FC Y O Blade Control screen Please refer to the online help located on the Setup gt FC I O Blade gt FC VO Blade Control screen for further details on power cycling FC I O blades Caution If data drives are connected make sure to stop any running backups before power cycling blades Configuring EDLM consists of the following steps e Step 1 Preparing the Library on page 208 Step 2 Installing the EDLM Plug in for SNAPI on page 208 207 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Step 3 Configuring the StorNext Host Settings on the Library on page 211 Step 4 Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on page 213 Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions on page 216 Step 1 Preparing the Library 1 Upgrade library firmware to at least version 620G If needed contact Quantum Support to get the firmware 2 Install EDLM scanning drives in the library 3 Connect each EDLM scanning drive to one of the four initiator ports in a Fibre Channel I O blade If you have more than four EDLM scanning drives you will need to use more than one Fibre Channel I O blade 4 Log onas an administrator 5 Install the Exte
200. are that is qualified for the library firmware installed on your library Refer to the library release notes for the correct version of tape drive firmware It is recommended that you upgrade library firmware to the latest release Unload tape cartridges from all tape drives in the partitions on which you are configuring EKM Step 3 Configuring Encryption Settings and Key Server Addresses Configure encryption settings and key server information as follows 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt System Configuration The Setup Encryption System Configuration screen displays see Figure 25 170 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Figure 25 Setup Encryption System Configuration KMIP Key Manager Setup Encryption System Configuration Set up the encryption key management server access for library managed encryption Host names may be entered if DNS is configured otherwise enter IPv4 or IPv6 addresses only Note These server settings are only applicable when a partition s encryption method is set to library managed encryption see Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration Key Server Type KMIP Key Manager Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics Enabled Interval Smin Test Warning Threshold SSL Connection Enabled 1 2 QO 3 av Eg 100 zl fav 6
201. ata activity is occurring through the Ethernet port e Solid OFF No data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port Scalar i500 User s Guide 477 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing the Library for Moving or Shipping Preparing the Library for Moving or Shipping Scalar i500 User s Guide Before you move or ship your library follow these steps Caution When moving the library Manufacturer supplied packaging whether original or purchased is required for complete or partial de installations You must install the orange robot restraint assembly to protect the robot against damage Use the original shipping carton and packaging materials to further protect your library equipment during transport Not using the required packaging will potentially void the support contract Any damage to equipment will require re certification or for Quantum to repair any damage to the equipment or both Quantum offers de installation services Please contact your Quantum Authorized Reseller or local Quantum Representative for further details Caution When shipping the library Use the shipping carton packaging materials and the orange robot restraint assembly that originally came with the library This will help protect your library against damage Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Shut down the library using the local operator pa
202. ation For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Note A warning message will display if the command and control LUN CCL or another device is not mapped to LUN 0 zero LUN 0 is typically occupied by the command and control LUN CCL unless it has been manually mapped to another LUN Make sure at least one device is mapped to LUN 0 Note If an FC switch is attached to an FC I O blade target port the FC switch will appear in the Blade Host Management list as if it were an FC host Do not map library devices to an FC switch To avoid confusion it is recommended that you modify the FC switch host name and type using Blade Host Management See Modifying an FC Host Connection on page 115 Note If both channel zoning and host mapping are enabled the channel zoning settings supersede any host LUN mapping on the FC I O blade For information on channel zoning see Configuring FC I O Blade Channel Zoning on page 111 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Mapping e From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Mapping When FC I O blades are installed in the library administrators can enable and configure the optional FC host port failover feature This feature is disabled by default You can configure the FC host port failove
203. ators can configure the following Network settings that allow remote access to the library For more information see Modifying Network Settings on page 60 e Secure Socket Layer SSL settings that increase data protection so that data from the library can be sent over the internet securely For more information see Enabling SSL on page 62 e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP settings that allow you to use an external management application to monitor the status of the library For more information see Configuring SNMP Settings on the Library on page 63 Scalar i500 User s Guide 59 Modifying Network Settings Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network Caution Security settings must be enabled to allow SNMP SML S and IP address access to the library network These security settings are enabled by default For more information see Configuring Library Security Settings on page 124 The operator panel Setup Wizard allows administrators to configure network settings that allow remote access to the library from the Web client You must initially configure network settings from the operator panel After the initial configuration you can modify the network settings from either the operator panel or the Web client From the operator panel you can modify the following network settings library name stateless configuration enable disable IPv6 o
204. ave access to the entire library Users with user privileges can only access some of the menus See Table 1 on page 46 for the Web client menu tree and privilege level information See Table 2 on page 48 for the operator panel menu tree and privilege level information Scalar i500 User s Guide 51 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Once you have installed the hardware as described in the Scalar 1500 Getting Started Guide you are ready to configure your library s settings A Setup Wizard helps you get started configuring your library and menu commands on both the operator panel and the Web client allow you to reconfigure your library at any time Caution Always save the library configuration after modifying configurable items This will allow you to restore the most current settings if necessary See Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 This chapter covers e About the Setup Wizard e Using the Setup Wizard e Accessing the Web Client e Managing the Network e Working With Partitions e Configuring Cleaning Slots e Configuring I E Station Slots e Setting Tape Drive Parameters e Working With Control Paths Scalar i500 User s Guide 52 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library About the Setup Wizard Obtaining and Installing a License Key Setting Customer Contact Information Configuring the Library E mail Account Working With RAS E mail Notifications Working Wit
205. between the hosts and the drives For more information on FC I O blades see Working With FC I O Blades on page 109 HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives can use the library s Storage Networking features see Chapter 6 Storage Networking Tape drives are installed into tape drive slots in the rear of the library If a tape drive slot is empty a filler plate covers the empty tape drive slots to prevent debris from entering the library Tape drives are shipped filling Scalar i500 User s Guide 30 Chapter 1 Description Library Features the tape drive slots from the bottom to the top of the library but the tape drives can be reinstalled in any available tape drive slot Note Tape drive filler plates must be in place for the library to operate at normal speed For information on adding tape drives see Adding a Tape Drive on page 438 Library Features This section describes several features of Scalar i500 libraries The operator panel is located on the front door of the control module and allows you to work locally on the library via the user interface The Web client allows you to view and perform library functions from remote sites and is accessible through a browser The operator panel and Web client contain a similar user interface and functionality See Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface for more information about the operator panel and the Web client User Interface Partitions are virtual sections
206. between the tape drives in your library The following information is collected for each tape drive installed in the library Drive location module row Drive serial number Partition Megabytes read Megabytes written 136 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports e Time and date of mount UTC e Time and date of dismount UTC e Media motion time in seconds e Tape cartridge barcode To configure the report specify the following e Date Range Specifies the range of time covered in the report Choose one of the following e Last 7 days e Last 4 weeks default e Last 3 months e All History as far back as there is data in the log file Attribute Specifies which values are included in the report Select one of the following e Data Written Read default The amount of data written to and read from each tape drive shown separately in the chart e Total Read and Write The combined total amount of data written to and read from each tape drive e Media Mount Count The number of tape cartridge mounts e Media Mount Time The total amount of time media spent in the selected drive s e Media Motion Time The total amount of time media spent in motion while in the tape drive writing reading rewinding etc e Chart How the data is displayed in the chart Select Area Bar default Line or Pie Type The chart type Select one of the following
207. bility and Serviceability RAS status indicators These indicators are green amber and blue in color Library Control Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide 24 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components e Green represents processor status Amber represents health status e Blue represents power control status Figure 8 shows the location of the LCB components including LEDs For more information on the behavior of the LCB LEDs see Blade Port LEDs on page 503 25 Figure 8 Library Control Blade Fibre Channel Input Output Blades Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components 1 LEDs blue amber green 2 Gigabit Ethernet external network port 3 Ethernet I O blade control ports inactive if FC I O blades are not installed 4 Service Ethernet port Service serial port Expansion modules support optional Fibre Channel FC Input Output I O blades that provide connections for FC tape drives in the library Each FC I O blade has an embedded controller that provides connectivity and features that enhance the performance and reliability of tape drive operations I O blades also aggregate FC tape drive connections reducing switch port and cabling requirements 26 Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components Each FC I O blade has six auto negotiating 4 Gb s FC ports and backplane connections The FC I O blade provides
208. brary To identify how a specific I E station magazine is configured view the Library Configuration report available from the Reports menu on the Web client See Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 268 Configuring zero I E slots increases the number of storage slots in your library but has the following consequences e You will not be able to use the I E station to import and export tape cartridges including cleaning media You will be required to open the library access door to bulk load and unload tape cartridges disrupting library operations See Bulk Loading on page 246 You will not be able to manually clean tape drives with a cleaning cartridge For more information on using the I E station to import and export media see Running Your Library on page 237 Caution Configuring I E station slots with cartridges already loaded compromises data security First remove cartridges from the I E station and then configure the I E station slots Note This operation cannot be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation 82 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setting Tape Drive Parameters The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt I E Station Slots e From th
209. brary s initial network configuration from the operator panel touch screen See Configuring Library Security Settings on page 124 for information on setting the network configuration settings for remote use You must disable Web browser popup blockers to use the Web client interface and the library s online Help Add the Scalar i500 s Internet Protocol IP address to the list of trusted allowed sites on your Scalar i500 supported browser so the Web client pages will automatically refresh Note Do not use your Internet browser Back button to navigate the Web client pages Instead use the buttons provided within the Web client Note Log out of the library before closing the Internet browser window when you are using the Web client If you do not log out the session will remain open 44 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees LL L _ Menu Trees The following menus organize operations and commands into logical groupings The Setup menu consists of commands that administrators can use to set up and configure various aspects of the library including partitions I E station slots cleaning slots control paths network settings drive settings users notifications date and time licenses FCI O blades library registration and e mail e The Operations menu consists of commands that enable users to change the library s mode of operations import and export cartridges loa
210. brary Configuration With Menu Commands 54 Using the Setup Wizafd aiscsncncsannsieniin 55 Default Configuration Settings cece esssseeseteeseseeeenseseeees 57 Setup Wizard Tasks ics sisceisescavieveps it ea et ten NE REE E CR 57 Accessing the Web Client sissies eein eainiie 59 iv Scalar i500 User s Guide Managing the Network ccs cecseeeseseececeeseaeesesesenenanesesesenanetesesenes 59 Modifying Network Settings ccccsssesesecseeseseecscseseseececscntaeseeeses 60 Enabling SSLivessisccisssia isin cessaccpivesstasesduceavovesiterstcvusivetotespinstocss AEEA 62 Configuring SNMP Settings on the Library eee 63 Working With Partitions ccc ceseseceesesesesescsesesesescscseseseecscscatanseesees 68 Automatically Creating Partitions 0 0 0 c ccc cesses cesses ceceeseeeeeeeees 70 Manually Creating Partitions cesses eessssseseeeeesseesesensseseeees 71 Mixing Tape Drive Types Within Partitions ccccseeseeeeeeeeees 73 Modifying Partitions 0 ccc cs escsesesescscsesesesescscseaeseececetaneteceeenes 73 Deleting Partitions s scsccssssszecssssassgusscscssienseascasigusssssvesdeevasovsoeeesa sebesdeceesotees 74 Changing Partition ACCESS 00 0 eeceeseecscseaeseseececssaeseecenensnsteeeeenes 75 Taking a Partition Online or Offline 0 0 0 ieee cee eee eeteteneeeeeeenes 76 Disabling Enabling Manual Cartridge Assignment cceee 77 Configuring Cleaning Slots 0 ccc cece ee ceeseeesesceseseesneses
211. bre Channel 0 040 136 5 Scalar i500 User s Guide 529 Appendix A Library Specifications Library Power Consumption and Heat Output Typical Power Typical Heat Consumption Output Library Configuration kW Hour BTU Hour UDS3 IBM LTO 4 Drive Sled Module SAS 0 038 129 7 UDS3 HP LTO 4 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 037 126 2 UDS3 HP LTO 4 Drive Sled Module SAS 0 035 119 4 UDS3 IBM LTO 5 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 048 163 8 UDS3 HP LTO 5 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 030 102 4 UDS3 HP LTO 5 Drive Sled Module SAS 0 028 95 5 UDS3 IBM LTO 6 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 034 116 0 UDS3 IBM LTO 6 Drive Sled Module SAS 0 032 109 2 UDS3 HP LTO 6 Drive Sled Module Fibre Channel 0 030 102 4 UDS3 HP LTO 6 Drive Sled Module SAS 0 028 95 5 Fibre Channel I O Blade 0 080 272 8 Ethernet Expansion Blade 0 010 34 1 Control Module Minimum no drives installed robot not moving 0 047 160 0 Maximum 2 drives writing robot moving 0 166 565 0 Expansion Module Minimum no drives installed robot not moving 0 012 41 0 Maximum 4 drives writing 2 Fibre Channel I O blades 0 256 879 0 installed robot moving Scalar i500 User s Guide 530 Table 19 TapeAlert Flag Severity Codes Scalar i500 User s Guide TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Appendix B TapeAlert is an open industry standard that flags errors and provides possible solutions for storage d
212. calar 1500 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 01370 xx for further configuration and access details Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP Trap Registrations Enabling SNMP Versions The library supports SNMP v1 v2c and v3 Administrators can enable or disable support for SNMP v1 and v2c The recommended practice is to disable SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c in highly secure environments SNMP v3 is always enabled and cannot be disabled The authentication algorithm is set to MD5 and the encryption is disabled system wide See the Scalar i500 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 01370 xx for further configuration and access details 65 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP e From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings gt Enable SNMP V1 V2 Choosing SNMP Trap Versions The library supports SNMP v1 and v2 traps as defined by RFC 1157 v1 is the default Administrators can choose which version the library uses
213. cannot be selected for manual scans The cartridge can be located in any partition including the EDLM library managed partition However the cartridge must not be located in an EDLM drive If a tape is currently being scanned you cannot select it for manual scanning To run a manual EDLM test do the following 1 Log on as an administrator 2 Select Tools gt EDLM gt Test Selection Scalar i500 User s Guide The Tools EDLM Test Selection screen appears 224 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Tools EDLM Test Selection Perform manual EDLM testing Select the partition with the media you want fo test Tests will be performed when library resources are available Once the tests are completed the results will be visible in the EDLM Test Results interface Choose the media you would like to test and the type of test that you would like to perform Partition edim_a v Scan type Normal Continue On Error O Filter by barcode Fina Q AFG781L4 0 1 7 Mar 24 an 01 04 43 Untested R 000001L3 0 1 6 paee E AFG782L4 0 1 5 Mar 24 ae 01 07 00 Uniesisd 000098L3 0 1 4 Mar 24 an 01 29 06 ae ar ee 013 Mar 24 2012 01 23 56 i 3 From the Partition drop down list choose the partition that contains the tape s you want to scan 4 From the Scan type drop down list choose the type of scan to
214. ce 259 Manually Cleaning Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives The Clean Drive screens allow administrators to manually clean tape drives Note Be sure to unload the tape drive before attempting to clean it If the tape drive is loaded with a cartridge it will not available for this operation If you have at least one cleaning slot configured see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 78 and you are using the Web client you can choose to use a cleaning tape from either a configured cleaning slot or the topmost I E station slot If two or more cleaning slots are configured and have cleaning tapes in them the library chooses which cleaning tape to use If you have zero cleaning slots configured or if you are using the operator panel you must use a cleaning tape in the topmost I E station slot You are prompted to insert a cleaning cartridge in the appropriate slot and select the tape drive you want to clean The library then takes the associated partition offline moves the cleaning cartridge from the I E station slot to the designated tape drive and cleans the tape drive You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline When the operation is complete the library moves the cleaning cartridge back to the I E station slot and takes the partition back online Note If the operation does not complete successfully the part
215. ce the tape drive with one of the same type or delete the old tape drive from the partition and then add the new tape drive to the partition see Modifying Partitions on page 73 Required tools None 1 Prepare host applications for tape drive removal 2 Save the library configuration 3 If there is a cartridge in the tape drive use the Web client to unload it 4 Using the Web client take the tape drive offline When the tape drive is ready for removal its blue LED will be solidly lit a From the Operations menu select Drive gt Change Mode The Change Drive Mode screen appears b Locate the tape drive that you want to take offline c Inthe New column click Online to change the mode to Offline 5 Disconnect the host interface cables from the tape drive that you want to remove 6 From the back of the library loosen the tape drive s thumbscrews 441 Scalar i500 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives Remove the tape drive by gripping the tape drive handle and pulling the entire tape drive toward you Add the new tape drive in the vacant slot Using the guide rails on both the tape drive and the tape drive slot slowly slide the tape drive into the slot The tape drive must be level to slide in smoothly Tighten the tape drive s thumbscrews to secure the tape drive to the module The thumbscrews must be aligned
216. cess Protocol LDAP for remote authentication You may use either or both methods according to your needs This section covers how to set up user accounts and authentication for both local and remote authentication Local authentication control is managed on the library An administrator sets up accounts and privileges on the library To use local authentication a user must enter a local user name and password Remote authentication is managed by an LDAP server Enabling LDAP allows existing user accounts residing on an LDAP server to be integrated into the library s current user account management subsystem User account information is centralized and shared by different applications simplifying user account management tasks To use remote authentication you must enable LDAP on the library Once LDAP is enabled users can log into the library using either LDAP or local authentication See Logging In When LDAP or Kerberos is Enabled on page 240 for more information Administrators can create and modify two types of local user accounts user and administrator These users have different library privilege levels e User has access to one or more assigned partitions and can perform functions within a partition such as performing media and tape drive functions A user cannot perform actions that affect the physical library such as creating modifying or deleting a partition e Administrator has access to the entire physical lib
217. ch FC drive you want to connect to the FCI O blade Do not connect any of these FC cables to ports 1 or 2 on the FC I O blade 8 Connect the host s to ports 1 and or 2 on the FC I O blade 9 Install the module terminators Caution The module terminator is not the same as a SCSI terminator Using a SCSI terminator instead of a module terminator will damage the library a Using the module terminators terminate the top and bottom modules in the library stack Install one module terminator in the top terminator connector on the topmost module and one in the bottom terminator connector on the bottommost module If your library configuration consists of a single module place module terminators in the module s top and bottom module terminator connectors b If you need to add expansion modules to the control module remove the module terminator from the control module terminator connection that is closest to the expansion module c Replace the module terminator in the expansion module terminator connection furthest from the control module 312 Recommended Library Cabling for FC I O Blades Scalar i500 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Connect the module to module cable from the control module to the expansion module Connect an Ethernet cable to the Gigabit GB Ethernet port on the Library Control Blade LCB for remot
218. ch expansion module can support up to two FC I O blades A maximum of four FC I O blades can be present in any library configuration A maximum of four FC drives can be connected to one FC I O blade FC I O blades cannot be installed in control modules However FC tape drives in the control module can be connected to FC I O blades in an expansion module 443 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades e Each FCI O blade is accompanied by a fan blade that cools the FC I O blade The fan blade is installed to the right of the FC I O blade in the expansion module Each expansion module has four bays and can accommodate two FC I O blades and two fan blades Figure 62 shows the FC I O blade and fan blade installed in the expansion module For instructions on installing the fan blade see Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 e The recommended order of installing the FC I O blade and fan blade in any expansion module is starting from the bottom two bays and moving up Scalar i500 User s Guide 444 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades Figure 62 FC I O Blade and Fan Blade Bays in an Expansion Module 1 FC I O blade 2 Fan blade 3 Expansion module Scalar i500 User s Guide 445 Read This First Complete Installation Steps Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapte
219. ch hooks on each side of the FC I O blade 448 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades 1 FC I O blade 2 LEDs 3 Latch hooks open 4 Carefully align the FC I O blade with the guide slots in the bay The status LEDs must be at the bottom Caution Forcing the blade into the bay can cause the pins to bend 5 Evenly apply pressure to both sides of the blade and slide it into the expansion module until the latch hooks begin to move toward the middle of the blade Push the latch hooks toward the middle of the Scalar i500 User s Guide 449 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades blade and into the locked position You will feel the blade pins connect with the expansion module s backplane as the blade locks into place Note The LEDs for the FC I O blade are on the bottom of the blade when the blade is correctly installed in the expansion module 6 Remove the necessary number of the black rubber protective covers from the ports on the FC I O blades when you are ready to cable the blade Scalar i500 User s Guide 450 Scalar i500 User s Guide os Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades A O N Latch hooks locked FC I O blade Cover plate on empty bay FC I O b
220. ch power supply Turning off the rear power switch on a power supply removes all power from the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 21 Power System Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components The rear power switches should be used in all emergency and service situations Warning Turn off the rear power switch whenever you are servicing the library In the event of danger to personnel or property immediately turn off the rear power switch and remove all power cords Caution Except in emergencies use the shutdown procedure before switching off the rear power switch See Shutting Down Powering Off and Completely Removing Power on page 238 for instructions on how to shut down the library The library supports single and redundant power configurations The single power configuration has a single AC line input and single DC power supply The redundant configuration has dual AC line input and dual DC power supplies If you have redundant power supplies you can hot swap a power supply power to the library remains on while you exchange the hardware and you can hot add power supplies to other modules power to the library remains on while you are adding the hardware Caution Atleast one power supply must be plugged in at all times Warning The power outlet must be available near the library and must be eas
221. changing the partition mode include When you access the Change Partition Mode screens you will see only partitions to which you have been given access The Online Offline buttons toggle between modes If a partition is in use the Online Offline button is grayed out Restarting the library will bring all offline partitions back online see Restarting the Library on page 239 Note Some maintenance activities require that the entire library be taken offline To take the library offline change the mode of all partitions from online to offline Note When changing the partition mode from online to offline all host application commands in progress at the start of the mode change are completed 76 Disabling Enabling Manual Cartridge Assignment Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Operations gt Partitions gt Change Mode From the operator panel select Operations gt Change Partition Mode Administrators can disable or enable manual cartridge assignment When manual cartridge assignment is enabled the default setting the Assign IE screen automatically appears on the operator panel once cartridges are placed into the I E station The Assign I E screen prompts you to use the operator panel to assign the cartridges to a specific partition or to the system pa
222. cies such as missing tape cartridges This chapter covers Common User Interface Elements e Operator Panel e Web Client e Menu Trees 39 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Common User Interface Elements User Privileges User Access nT SS SO Common User Interface Elements The user interface consists of the following areas Header appears on every screen and contains the company logo product name and the three main navigation buttons The main navigation buttons are e Home Home page e Help Context sensitive Help for the active screen e Logout Ability to log out Title Bar Menu Tabs operator panel This area appears below the header On the home page it provides the library partition name and access to the menu tabs on the main screen On all other screens this area is a single bar and provides the screen name Menu Bar Web client Lists the menu choices Main Main content area of the screen Health Navigation provides information about the health of the library by means of three subsystem status buttons Library Drives and Media See System Summary and Subsystem Status on page 42 for more information on the subsystem buttons Note A message in the header alerts you when the robot is not ready to perform library functions See Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages on page 490 for more information on Library Not Ready
223. ckup Avoid manually generating keys on more than five libraries simultaneously as the key generation process is resource intensive on the server Generating keys manually on more than five libraries at once could result in a failure to complete the key generation operation or interfere with key retrieval operations If a failure does occur during key generation wait 10 minutes then try to start it again The key generation process will resume from where the error was encountered 190 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library To manually generate data encryption keys 1 Make sure that both SKM servers are running and operational 2 From the library s Web client access the encryption partition configuration screen Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration 3 Select an SKM partition configured for library managed encryption and temporarily disable library managed encryption by changing the encryption method from Enable Library Managed to Allow Application Managed Remember which partition it is because you will be changing it back in a few minutes Make sure to click Apply Caution When you change the partition s encryption method to Allow Application Managed the data that was written to the tapes while the partition was configured for Enable Library Managed can no longer be read until you change the partition back to Enable Library Managed You will on
224. configured For more information see Importing Media on page 242 Unused Slots Each library configuration contains a limited number of slots that are not accessible to the robot The slot counts in this user s guide do not include these unusable slots In any library configuration the picker cannot access the bottom slot in each column in the lowest module in the stack due to the fact that there is 247 Moving Media Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations not enough clearance at the bottom of the library for the robotic picker When bulk loading the library do not insert storage or cleaning tapes into the bottom row of the lowest module in the library configuration Once media has been imported into the library you can use the Move Media operation to move a single data cartridge between tape drives and slots within a partition Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot move cartridges to and from the I E station See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to move media Using the library to move media may necessitate performing an inventory of the library with the host application See your host application documentation for more information Details on using the library to move media include e Ifthe partition is online it will be taken offline before th
225. consecutive test intervals required to generate a RAS ticket to a higher number or you can set the library to never generate a RAS ticket for missed test intervals For SKM and KMIP Key Manager Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics is enabled by default and should always be left enabled You should not need to disable it unless Quantum Support directs you to do so For a list of tests performed see Using EKM Path Diagnostics on page 183 To enable Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt System Configuration 2 Select the Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics check box 3 Select a test interval from the Interval drop down list 4 Q EKM Only From the Test Warning Threshold drop down list select the number of consecutive missed test intervals required before the library generates a RAS ticket informing you that the test could not be performed within the specified number of test intervals You can select Off or any value from 1 to 24 If you select Off the library will never generate a RAS ticket no matter how many tests are missed The default threshold is 3 Viewing and Changing The Key Manager Status screen shows you which encryption key server the Active Key Server is currently active and allows you to change the active server When you change the active server it means that the next key server operation and all subsequent key server operations will be perf
226. create partitions automatically on either the operator panel or the Web client When you automatically create partitions you add to the number of existing partitions e Manually An administrator creates one partitions at a time and allocates resources as desired You can mix tape drive interface types tape drive vendor and media generations in partitions that you create manually You can create partitions manually only on the Web client When you manually create partitions you add to the number of existing partitions Note You may not mix drive vendor types for example HP and IBM in partitions that are configured for library managed encryption see Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 Scalar i500 User s Guide 68 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions The maximum number of partitions that can be created is equal to the number of drives in the library Table 3 shows the possible number of partitions that can be created for each of the available library configurations ke aaa PON Available Tape Drives Ea Partitions Configurations Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 5U 1 2 1 2 14U 1 6 1 6 23U 1 10 1 10 32U 1 14 1 14 41U 1 18 1 18 Details on partitions include e Administrators can create modify delete and control access to all partitions Users can be given access to only certain partitions and denied access to others
227. ction type of the port Loop Point to Point or Loop Preferred 276 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information For information about configuring FC I O blade ports see Configuring FC I O Blade Ports on page 110 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt I O Blade Port Info e From the operator panel select Tools gt Blade Info gt Port Info Scalar i500 User s Guide 277 AO P Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape LS Drive Firmware There are two types of firmware that can be upgraded on the library library firmware including drive sled firmware and tape drive firmware There may be times when you will need to upgrade your library and tape drive firmware as directed by Quantum Support You can find release notes upgrade instructions and a listing of the latest version of firmware on the Quantum Web site at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocument ationDownloads SI500 Index aspx You need to contact Quantum Support directly to receive the firmware itself Before loading firmware check the release notes to make sure that it is compatible with your library and tape drives This chapter covers e Upgrading Library Firmware e Upgrading Tape Drive Firmware e Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware Scalar i500 User s Guide 278 Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive
228. ctions for upgrading library and tape drive firmware can be found here http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocument ationDownloads SI500 Index aspx It is recommended that you resolve and close all open RAS tickets before upgrading library firmware If Auto Ticket Closure is enabled all open RAS tickets will be closed during the reboot which occurs after firmware is upgraded see Closing RAS Tickets Automatically on page 485 Saving the current library configuration before you upgrade library firmware is recommended in case the upgrade fails After you have upgraded the firmware save the library configuration again For more information see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 279 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware Upgrading Library Firmware It is also a good idea to capture a library snapshot information before making any significant change to your system such as upgrading library firmware Technical support personnel can if necessary use the snapshot file to troubleshoot the library For more information see Capturing Snapshots of Library Information on page 485 Caution If you are currently running library firmware version 320G GS004 or 400G GS006 you must first install and run the Library Service Utility before upgrading firmware If you do not first run the Library Service Utility then the firmware upgrade may not compl
229. cycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans e All All test sessions that were run on the library The storage limit is 5 000 media scans When the limit is reached old scan results are deleted as new scan results are added 4 To work with a session select a test session row and then click your desired option Option Description Stop Stops a currently running test session Once stopped you cannot restart the test session Any test results collected so far are listed Tapes that did not complete testing as a result of being stopped show a test result of Untested Pause Pauses a currently running test session If a tape is currently being scanned the scan will finish and the tape will be ejected and moved back to its original location Tapes in the test session that have not been tested yet will remain queued Resume Resumes a paused test session Queued tapes are mounted and scanned Details Displays the test report for the selected test session in a new window See Viewing EDLM Session Report Details on page 229 Delete Deletes the selected test session from the list Once deleted you cannot retrieve the information again Scalar i500 User s Guide Viewing EDLM Session Report Details To view details about a specific EDLM test session do the following 1 Go to the EDLM Test Results screen Tools gt EDLM gt Test Results 2 Select a row and then click the Details button 229 Chapter 8 Extended
230. d socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Warning Under no circumstances should a rack be moved while loaded with one or more modules 286 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a control module weighs approximately 60 lbs 27 2 kg An expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 lbs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules This chapter covers Taking the Library Online Offline Cabling the Library e Specific Instructions for LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape Drives e Cabling Libraries With SCSI Tape Drives e Cabling Libraries With SAS Tape Drives e Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected Directly to a Host or Switch e Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected to Fibre Channel I O Blades e Recommended Library Cabling for FC I O Blades e Managing Ethernet Cables Cable Management Guidelines Installing a Stand Alone 5U Control Module Installing a New Multi Module Library Configura
231. d the test it just means that the test is queued Note Even though manually scheduled tests move directly to the top of the queue it is possible that the tape will not be tested right away if all EDLM drives are currently in the process of scanning tapes they will finish their current scans before becoming available to perform the manually scheduled test 8 Click Close to close the Success message 9 To view the test results select Tools gt EDLM gt Test Results see Working With EDLM Test Results on page 226 You can view the status of all your EDLM test sessions including sessions that are queued but not started yet in the EDLM Test Sessions List screen You can stop pause resume or delete test sessions See Working with the EDLM Test Sessions List on page 227 Each entry in the EDLM Test Sessions List screen presents an overview of a single EDLM test session A test session includes all tapes in the library that were scheduled to be scanned at a particular point in time Thus a test session can include multiple tapes from different partitions e Example 1 You select 10 tapes on which to perform a manual scan The test session includes 10 tapes 226 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans e Example 2 Partition A has an automatic scan policy to scan tapes on import You import a tape Meanwhile Partition B has an automatic scan policy to scan every 180 days Ten ta
232. d IVT log or e mail the detailed IVT log Make your choice and select Next The IVT test cannot be performed from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt Library Tests gt Installation amp Verification Tests A new IVT log is created each time you run IVT The log reports detailed information about library readiness and indicates where specific marginal conditions and failures are located in the library subsystems if there are any You can view a summary or detailed version of a log following an IVT run The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Reports gt Log Viewer gt Installation Verification Test Summary Log From the Web client select Reports gt Log Viewer gt Installation Verification Test Detailed Log e From the operator panel select Tools gt Library Tests gt View Last Summary Log e From the operator panel select Tools gt Library Tests gt View Last Detailed Log You can save and e mail the summary and detailed IVT logs as a text file using the Web client From the operator panel you can e mail the detailed IVT log as a text file The path to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Reports gt Log Viewer gt Installation Verification Test Summary Log e From the Web client select Reports gt Log Viewer gt Installation Verification
233. d and unload tape drives move media perform diagnostics and log off Administrators can also access commands to lock or unlock the I E station and to shut the library down The Tools menu consists of commands that you can use to maintain your library such as viewing RAS Tickets generating diagnostic logs identifying drives configuring the internal network saving and restoring the library configuration setting system and security settings and updating firmware e The Reports menu Web client only consists of summaries of library information A hidden Service menu is available to service users with the appropriate login information The menus vary somewhat between the Web client and operator panel user interfaces Administrators have access to all menu commands users with user privileges have more limited access Table 1 lists the Web client menus Some menu commands are available only to administrators I O blade menu items are available for libraries that contain I O blades Scalar i500 User s Guide 45 Table 1 Web Client Menus Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees Setup Menu Operations Menu Tools Menu Reports Menu e Setup Wizard e Partitions e Host Access e Host Registration e Host Connections e Cleaning Slots e I E Station Slots e Drive Settings e Control Path e License e Notifications e E mail Configuration e Advanced Reporting if licensed e Receiver Addresses
234. d notifications to the designated recipients See Configuring the Library E mail Account on page 92 for information on how to configure the e mail account See Creating RAS E mail Notifications on page 95 for information on setting up additional e mail notifications The library supports a maximum of 20 e mail notification recipients including the default support e mail notification Note RAS e mail notifications are closed when the library reboots From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings to configure this setting Scalar i500 User s Guide 94 Creating RAS E mail Notifications Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With RAS E mail Notifications Note The default techsup quantum com e mail notification settings can be modified but not deleted The e mail address techsup quantum com cannot be modified There are three e mail notification filter levels e All tickets e High and urgent tickets only e Urgent tickets only Administrators can configure the library e mail account and e mail notifications Users can receive e mail notifications but they cannot configure the library e mail account and or notifications You can configure e mail notifications from the Web client only but you can view them from the operator panel The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications
235. d replace it a Power Supply with a new one You may need to replace a power supply if there are problems with one that is currently in use If the library has a redundant power supply you can replace the power supply without powering off the library If the library has only one power supply you must power off the library before performing this procedure Required tools None 1 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 If the library does not use a second redundant power supply power off the library Access the back of the library and locate the power supply that you want to replace Turn off the power supply s power using the switch on the rear of the power supply 5 Disconnect the power supply s power cord 6 Loosen the power supply s thumbscrews 7 Remove the power supply by gripping the power supply handle and 10 11 Scalar i500 User s Guide pulling it toward you Insert the new power supply into the vacant power supply slot When inserting the power supply make sure that you insert it correctly with its on off switch located at the bottom of the supply below the handle The power supply must be level to slide in smoothly Tighten the power supply s thumbscrews to secure the power supply to the library module Reconnect the power supply s power cord Turn on the power supply s power 416 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing I
236. d triangle indicates media is present but the media barcode label is unreadable A c in a tape drive indicates the drive is the control path for the partition By default the Library Configuration Report displays the coordinates for all licensed slots that are assigned to a partition To view all library slot coordinates click Show ALL coordinates To display the barcodes for all imported cartridges click Show Barcodes Figure 36 shows an example of the Library Configuration Report 268 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing the Library Configuration Report Figure 36 Library Configuration Report Your library has the following configuration Legend library_a library_b B library_c E I E Station a B Cleaning a Unavailable TTT I Media present in slot Unreadable barcode e Drive is control path Location Coordinates Partition Type Chassis Magazine Slot Show ALL coordinates Show Barcodes ri HERE Use the report to view detailed information on the following resources Click on the item you want to view and the information appears in a box to the right of the library diagram e Tape drives Depending on the interface type the information provided may not include all of the following interface type tape drive type ready state mode online offline assigned partition name location coordinates media barcode
237. d when the earlier version of library firmware was installed on the library or you can reconfigure your library s settings Note The configuration file must be at the same or an earlier version of firmware than that which is currently installed on the library You cannot restore a configuration file created with a later version of firmware Scalar i500 User s Guide 489 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages Note If your library is running firmware version 600G or later you can only restore a saved configuration that was created with firmware version 410G or later If you need to restore a configuration created with firmware that is earlier than 410G contact Quantum Support for assistance The Configuration operation is available only on the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the Web client select Tools gt Save Restore Configuration Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages Scalar i500 User s Guide The operator panel and Web client each include a header that contains the company logo product name and the three main navigation buttons Home Help and Logout In addition a message in the header alerts you when the library is not ready No message displays in the header when the library is in a ready state On the operator panel LIBRARY NOT READY flashes at regular intervals whenever the library robotics are not yet ready
238. de and performing the remove blade operation on the Setup FC I O Blade Control screen If this is not done and the library continues to monitor a removed FC I O blade RAS tickets could be generated You do not need to configure the library to stop monitoring an FC I O blade if the failed blade is replaced with a new blade For instructions on how to remove and replace an FC I O Blade see Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades on page 443 Performing the remove blade operation will cause a temporary loss of communication with connected hosts The screen will display a warning message about the communication loss and ask you to confirm that you want to proceed Note Before permanently removing the FC I O blade verify the location of the FC I O blade See Identifying FC I O Blades on page 496 Scalar i500 User s Guide 497 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Resetting FC I O Blade Ports Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt FC I O Blade Control e From the operator panel select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt FC I O Blade Control gt Remove Blade Resetting FC I O Blade Ports
239. der library models without 2 QS drilled holes for push in clips The M5 thumbscrew l J attaches hook and loop fasteners to the M5 threaded A hole on the lower right of any module chassis Push in wire saddle cable clamp Secures Ethernet 2 cables to the control module Adhesive backed wire saddle cable clamp For older 2 d library models without drilled holes for push in wire i saddle clamps The adhesive backed wire saddle J clamp secures Ethernet cables to the control module Managing Power Cords Scalar i500 User s Guide Power cord management is important especially for the larger expanded library configurations A 41U library with redundant power the maximum configuration may contain as many as 10 power supply units with 10 power cords to manage To organize power cords on the rear of the library mount a black hook and loop fastener to each module and then secure the power cords with the fastener Power cords and power cord hook and loop fasteners that are shipped with the library are black in color You can apply the following procedure to any library that contains at least one expansion module 317 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines To secure a power cord to the library frame 1 Facing the rear of the library locate a specific hole that is drilled into the back of the expansion module for the hook and loop fastene
240. dges via the library with manual cartridge assignment enabled or disabled Manual cartridge assignment is enabled on the library by default For information on disabling enabling this feature see Disabling Enabling Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 77 This section contains the following sub sections e Importing Media with Manual Cartridge Assignment Enabled on page 243 Importing with Manual Cartridge Assignment Disabled on page 244 e Process for Importing Media on page 244 242 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations The table below describes the differences in what you can do depending on manual cartridge assignment status Manual Is Importing Cartridge Cartridge Assignment in I E Unassigned Media Assignment Station Allowed Enabled You are asked to assign cartridges From operator panel default to a partition immediately upon NO placing them in the I E station You From Web client may cancel out of this window YES f without assigning them to a partition Disabled You are not asked to assign From operator panel cartridges to a partition and the cartridges remain unassigned until YES From Web client imported into the library YES Importing Media with Manual Cartridge Assignment Enabled When Manual Cartridge Assignment is enabled default once you load tape cartridges into the I E station and close the I E station door the Assign I E sc
241. e API Client Plug in snapi 2 0 1 Primary Host Address Primary Host Port Secondary Host Address Secondary Host Port Scalar i500 User s Guide 211 Scalar i500 User s Guide 10 11 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans In the Name field type a name that you will use to identify the StorNext Storage Manager server From the API Client Plug in drop down list select the SNAPI client plug in From the Primary Host Address field type the IP address or host name if DNS is configured of the primary StorNext Storage Manager server From the Primary Host Port field accept the default or type the port number of the primary StorNext Storage Manager server Note The default StorNext Storage Manager port number is 61776 If you changed the port on your server be sure to type the new port number into this field Optionally type an IP address or host name if DNS is configured for a secondary StorNext Storage Manager server in the Secondary Host Address field Optionally accept the default or type a port number of a secondary StorNext Storage Manager server in the Secondary Host Port field Note The default StorNext Storage Manager port number is 61776 If you changed the port on your server be sure to type the new port number into this field Click Apply The settings are configured When complete a Success message app
242. e This chapter covers Scalar i500 User s Guide Handling Cartridges Properly Write Protecting Cartridges Barcode Label Requirements Supported Barcode Formats Installing Barcode Labels 518 Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Handling Cartridges Properly Handling Cartridges Properly Scalar i500 User s Guide To ensure the longest possible life for your cartridges follow these guidelines Select a visible location to post procedures that describe proper media handling Ensure that anyone who handles cartridges has been properly trained on all procedures Do not drop or strike cartridges Excessive shock could damage the internal contents of cartridges or the casings themselves rendering the cartridges unusable Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight or sources of heat including portable heaters and heating ducts Store cartridges in a location that is as free from dust as possible Dust can damage or degrade performance of tape media For external long term vaulted storage store cartridges in a vertical orientation If cartridges must be stacked horizontally for moving and handling do not stack cartridges more than five high The operating temperature range for Linear Tape Open LTO cartridges is 50 F to 113 F 10 C to 45 C The operating relative humidity range is 10 to 80 non condensing The storage temperature range is 60 8 F to 89 6 F 16 to 32 C Tempera
243. e Ethernet Cover Expansion blade plate Ly H EA H Pe Latch A a hooks Sr closed o ZIN Ca e fp Ea 5 om i amp Ee iig LEDs 230 a 13 Cable the Ethernet Expansion blade see Cabling the Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 468 14 Power on the library 15 Verify the Ethernet Expansion blade is in the Ready state using one of these methods Check the LEDs on the Ethernet Expansion blade The green LED should blink once per second the blue LED should blink once every 10 seconds and the amber LED should be off Scalar i500 User s Guide 467 Cabling the Ethernet Expansion Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade e Use the library Web client a Select Tools gt Diagnostics to enter library diagnostics o A message warns you that entering diagnostics will log out all other users of the same or lower privilege level Click OK to agree to log all other users out The diagnostics menu bar displays Select Drives gt EE Blade Control oao A message warns you that power cycling an Ethernet Expansion blade may cause key exchange failures if FIPS is enabled Click OK to proceed Q h The Diagnostics Ethernet Expansion Blade Control screen displays see Figure 68 on page 473 Check the Status column for the Ethernet Expansion blade to be sure it says Ready
244. e s backplane Push the latch hooks into the locked position Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide LTO 5 and LTO 6 FC tape drives enable you to use tape drive Ethernet connectivity for FIPS certified key exchanges tape drive log collection tape drive firmware updates and tape drive firmware autoleveling via Ethernet instead of via internal serial communication This speeds up operations and provides the security required for FIPS certified key exchanges 5U libraries can access tape drive Ethernet connectivity directly via the library control blade For libraries greater than 5U Quantum provides the Ethernet Expansion blade which facilitates direct 458 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Ethernet connectivity between HP LTO 5 and LTO 6 Fibre Channel tape drives and the library s internal Ethernet via the library control blade Details about tape drive Ethernet connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion blade include Library firmware must be at version 600G or later HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drive firmware must be at the latest version qualified with the Scalar i500 library see the Scalar i500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels An Encryption Key Management
245. e Each library that you connect to an SKM server requires its own set of data encryption keys Each library only pulls data encryption keys from the set that belongs to it This means that an SKM server may contain several distinct sets of data encryption keys When the data encryption keys for one library have all been used then more keys must be generated You can generate data encryption keys in the following ways e Generating Data Encryption Keys at Initial Setup e Generating Data Encryption Keys When 80 Depleted e Generating Data Encryption Keys When 100 Depleted e Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys Generating Data Encryption Keys at Initial Setup At initial setup the library triggers each SKM server to generate a set of data encryption keys The process is described in Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 Generating Data Encryption Keys When 80 Depleted When an SKM server has used 80 percent of the data encryption keys assigned to a 189 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library particular library that library attempts to automatically generate data encryption keys on the SKM server Both SKM servers must be running and operational in order for automatic key generation to succeed e If automatic key generation succeeds a RAS ticket informs you the keys were generated and instruct
246. e 04h 4 Media e 05h 5 Read Failure e 06h 6 Write Failure e 12h 18 Tape Directory Corrupted on Load e 33h 51 Tape Directory Invalid on Unload e 34h 52 Tape System Area Write Error e 35h 53 Tape System Area Read Error e 37h 55 Loading Failure 3Bh 59 WORM Medium Integrity Check Failed Tape Alert count Use this field in conjunction with the Scan based on Tape Alert policy From the drop down list select the number of Tape Alerts allowed before a scan is performed Normal scan time interval Full scan time interval Scans a tape if the listed time interval since the last scan was performed has been exceeded In the text box type a time interval in days after which a scan will be performed A value of zero default means the this policy is disabled Note When deciding the interval consider the number of tapes to be scanned in the entire library as well as the type of scan to be performed Full scans can take more than 2 hours on full tapes Over scheduling can cause delays or cause tapes not to be scanned as intended Scalar i500 User s Guide 221 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Setting Description Scan based on StorNext media suspect count Only available if you selected Use StorNext Configuration above The suspect count is a means by which StorNext Storage Manager determines when to stop writing data to tape
247. e I E station and access doors of each module b Using your hands gently lift the robot assembly into the control module The robot assembly should glide slowly and with some resistance 327 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot c After raising the robot assembly to the approximate middle of the control module hold it in place with one hand and using your other hand move the parking tab in a counter clockwise direction until it stops in the parked position The metal parking tab is located at the bottom of column 1 d Gently lower the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab Scalar i500 User s Guide 328 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration A JA SF 4 f ES ee Wee ef ee ee Sg 5 4 2 SE TU i NA Oe wc PS TA SSTA Q SESS SSHTSHSSSSS DY S es VOSVYSHNgSggggggsg a Paasssosesesses A A TSH sss ss ggsss A Psesosessssssg t RK RR RRA ARAH AQAGSH 0 1 Parking tab in parked position 5 Remove and replace the cover plates if
248. e Shab EEEN 473 Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDS n se 476 xviii Figure 70 Location of Blade LEDS 0 cccecesessesesseeeseseeseneesesesneneseeeees 501 Figure 71 Location of Tape Drive LEDS ccccccseseeessesneeseseeteeeeeees 505 Figure 72 Barcode Label Orientation ccccccceseseseeeesesceesneseseseeseneeees 523 Scalar i500 User s Guide xix Preface Purpose Product Safety Statements Scalar i500 User s Guide This guide is intended for anyone interested in learning about or anyone who needs to know how to install configure and operate the Scalar i500 library Be aware that administrator level privileges are required to configure many of the features described in this guide This guide contains information and instructions necessary for the normal operation and management of the Scalar i500 library including e Installing the library e Basic library operations e Operator commands e Troubleshooting This product is designed for data storage and retrieval using magnetic tapes Any other application is not considered the intended use Quantum will not be held liable for damage arising from unauthorized use of the product The user assumes all risk in this aspect This unit is engineered and manufactured to meet all safety and regulatory requirements Be aware that improper use may result in bodily injury damage to the equipment or interference with other equipment Preface
249. e access to the library via the Web client Connect a power cord to the outlet on the power supply on the rear of the library There should always be a power cord connected to the power supply on the control module If redundant power supplies are used connect a power cord to each of the additional power supply outlets Power on the library a Turn on the rear power switch of each of the power supplies b Turn on the front power button c Power up the host system Verify communication with all devices on the bus Configure the library using the commands on the operator panel See configuration information in Configuring Your Library on page 52 Fibre optic cables connect Fibre Channel tape drives to FC I O blades and FC I O blades to a Storage Area Network SAN fabric or host Correctly managing these cables on the rear of the library can prevent damage to the cables and Fibre Channel ports and ensure optimal data throughput Note This section applies to libraries containing Fibre Channel tape drives which are connected to a host or a Fibre Channel switch using an FC I O blade For tape drives that are directly attached to a host or a SAN switch follow standard fibre optic cable handling best practices Ideally an installed tape drive should be cabled to a port on the nearest FCI O blade to eliminate the need to manage excessively long cables The nearest FC I O blade is usually located in the same expansion module
250. e as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt System Shutdown e From the operator panel select Operations gt Shutdown Logging In All users service users and administrators must log in to the library to perform library functions or view library operations Scalar i500 User s Guide 239 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Logging Out If you are logging in to the library for the first time using the default administrator account type admin in the User Name text box and password in the Password text box After you log on for the first time change the password for the default administrator account Passwords are limited to 6 16 lower case alphanumeric characters and can also include underscores _ periods hyphens asterisks and and the at symbol For example pass_1 For information on changing passwords see Modifying Local User Accounts on page 98 Note If you misplace the password for the default administrator account contact Quantum Technical Support For contact information see Getting More Information or Help on page 8 Logging In When LDAP When LDAP or Kerberos is enabled the Login screen displays a Remote or Kerberos is Enabled Authentication check box Log in on either the operator panel or Web client as follows Select the Remote Authentication check box to log in using a directory service user name and password e Clear the Remote Authentication check
251. e barcode label having a media ID or not If a media ID is included the label must have a five to 14 character barcode followed by a media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 If a media ID is not included the label must have a five to 16 character barcode number for example XXXXX or XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX e Media ID Last Five to 14 character barcode number followed by a two character media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 The media ID is reported to the host last as in XXXXXXXXXXXXXXLA4 e Media ID First Five to 14 character barcode number followed by a two character media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 The media ID is reported to the host first as in L4XXXXXXXXXXXXXX SS Er Installing Barcode Labels Each cartridge in the library must have an external label that is machine readable to identify the barcode Most manufacturers offer cartridges with the labels already applied or with the labels included that you can attach All barcode labels must be applied to the front of a cartridge Peel off the label and place it on the cartridge The label must be placed entirely within the recessed area on the cartridge Verify that the label is oriented so that the numbers appear above the barcode see Figure 72 on page 523 Place the barcode label as level as possible in the provided space for the label If the label is not placed horizontally level barcode label scan read operations may enc
252. e drive Knowing this can help you decide when to replace a cleaning cartridge The cleaning count is now listed in two locations Library Configuration Report from the Web client select Reports gt Library Configuration e Export Cleaning Media screen from the Web client select Operations gt Cleaning Media gt Export The preferred method of labeling a cleaning cartridge is to have CLN or CLNU as the prefix on the label Any cartridge detected with a CLN or CLNU prefix will be considered a universal cleaning cartridge regardless of any media identification extension Cartridges containing a media identification of C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 and CU will be considered cleaning cartridges and will be tracked and treated as if the media label contained the prefix CLN or CLNU When AutoClean is enabled at least one cleaning slot has been configured you can use the Import Cleaning Media operation to import cleaning cartridges from the I E station to designated cleaning slots For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 78 For a description of AutoClean see About Cleaning Tape Drives on page 254 When manual cartridge assignment is enabled the default setting you cannot import cartridges via the operator panel until you have assigned them to a specific partition or to the system partition Cleaning cartridges should always be assigned to the system partition Assigning cleaning cartridges to th
253. e drive LEDs and the fibre port link LED are located OCW Ne We T Se O IFC Nal O CI w Nene TaN iia K TILA 1 Fibre Port LED 2 Tape Drive LEDs Use Table 16 to interpret tape drive activity 505 Table 16 Tape Drive LEDs Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs LED Color Represents Tape Drive Status Green Processor activity Blinks once per second Normal operation Solid ON Solid OFF Tape drive s main processor is not operating 10 blinks per second Identify mode see Identifying Tape Drives on page 492 Blinks 3 times in 3 seconds then pauses solid off and then repeats Tape drive is initializing Solid on for 3 seconds then blinks twice Tape drive firmware is downloading 2 quick blinks within 1 25 seconds then on solid for 1 25 seconds repeat Drive sled firmware is downloading Amber Health of the tape drive Solid OFF Normal operation Solid ON Drive has failed Blue Power control status Blinks once every 10 seconds Normal operation Solid ON Offline Ready to be removed or replaced Solid OFF Tape drive is not receiving power Scalar i500 User s Guide 506 Tape Drive Fibre Port Link LED Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs The fibre port link LED shows the current state of the FC link and indicates whether or not the l
254. e drive configured in the expansion module e Library_c configured all storage elements in the expansion module and also configured two drives in this expansion module Scalar i500 User s Guide 357 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Figure 57 Library Configuration Example 1 Your library has the following configuration Legend library_a library_b B library_c E I E Station a B Cleaning a Unavailable TTT I Media present in slot Unreadable barcode e Drive is control path Location Coordinates Partition Type Chassis Magazine Slot Show ALL coordinates Show Barcodes ri HERES 2 If cleaning slots are configured for automatic library initiated cleaning operations export all affected cleaning media from the elements contained within the module you are removing or replacing See Exporting Cleaning Media on page 258 3 If cleaning slots are affected and all cleaning media has been exported from the module you are removing or replacing reduce or delete the cleaning slots so that cleaning slots are no longer configured within the module you are removing or replacing You Scalar i500 User s Guide 358 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module can designate new cleaning slots after the module has been removed or replaced See Configuring Cleanin
255. e drives e Control module 1 and 2 e Each expansion module 3 4 5 and 6 83 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setting Tape Drive Parameters For FC tape drives e DPF Data Path Failover You can enable data path failover on HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives with a Storage Networking license by selecting the DPF check box see Configuring Data Path Failover on page 154 The loop ID can be set to a value from 0 to 125 A unique loop ID is selected by default for all FC tape drives installed in the library For example the tape drive installed in the top drive bay of a control module is assigned a default loop ID of 61 The tape drive installed in the control module s bottom drive bay is assigned a default loop ID of 63 If you change the default loop IDs make sure each FC tape drive with a topology setting of Auto LN Loop L or Auto NL has a unique loop ID You cannot change the Loop ID if the Topology is set to Point to Point The requested topology connection mode can be set to one of the following e Auto LN Auto configure trying L Port first e Loop L Force L Port e Point to Point Force N Port 84 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setting Tape Drive Parameters e Auto NL Auto configure trying N Port first default Notes About Point to Point You can use Point to Point if the tape drive is connected via a switch You can use Poin
256. e media assigned to the partition Scalar i500 User s Guide 181 Scalar i500 User s Guide Allow Application Managed Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Not for use with EKM Allows an external backup application to provide encryption support to all encryption capable tape drives and media within the partition The library will NOT communicate with the EKM key server on this partition This is the default setting if you have encryption capable tape drives in the partition This option should remain selected unless you are connecting the library to an external EKM server Note If you want an external application to manage encryption you must specifically configure the application to do so The library will not participate in performing this type of encryption Unsupported Means that no tape drives in the partition support encryption If Unsupported is shown it will be greyed out and you will not be able to change the setting 2 For each partition on which you are configuring EKM change the Encryption Method to Enable Library Managed To disable EKM select Allow Application Managed Note When you change the encryption method on a partition the partition is taken offline When the change completes successfully the partition comes back online automatically If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until
257. e move is performed and brought back online after the move is complete You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 e You can select only the partitions to which you have been given access e You can only move media within one partition at a time You need to provide the following information in the user interface to move media e Partition Lists the partitions that you have permission to access Selected Media The single cartridge that you want to move Selected Destination The location to which you want to move the cartridge 248 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations Note You can filter the list of media by entering all or part of a barcode in the Search text box Use an asterisk to search with wildcards You can also sort the list by clicking on columns with bold headings For example selecting the Location column heading sorts the list by location coordinates e The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt Media gt Move e From the operator panel select Operations gt Move Media For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Hel
258. e name of this group in the Library Admin Group field on the Setup Remote Authentication screen on the library Web client see Configuring LDAP on the Library on page 101 You will need to have at least one user assigned to both the Library User Group and the Library Admin Group on the LDAP server in order to test the LDAP settings on the library see Testing LDAP Settings on page 103 Since most normal users will not be members of both these groups you may need to create a special or temporary user specifically for this purpose 100 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library Configuring Secure LDAP is optional You can configure Secure LDAP using one of the following methods do not use both e LDAPS Uses Secure Sockets Layer SSL over a specific port for LDAP 636 You may enable LDAP over SSL LDAPS by entering a URI in the form of Idaps hostname in the Server URI field This will use SSL to send secure communication via port 636 If the LDAP server does not support LDAPS or does not have LDAPS enabled then login operations will fail LDAPS has been deprecated in favor of using StartTLS see option below Do not use LDAPS if you are using StartTLS Once you apply LDAPS StartTLS will not be available e StartTLS Uses Transport Layer Security TLS over the same port as regular LDAP 389 Select the StartTLS check box to
259. e operator panel select Setup gt Partition Mgmt gt Configure I E Station Slots a EES Setting Tape Drive Parameters Scalar i500 User s Guide Administrators can view and modify certain tape drive parameters You can set the SCSI ID for a SCSI attached tape drive You can set the loop IDs topology connection mode and interface speed for a Fibre attached tape drive You can view but not set parameters for SAS tape drives A SAS tape drive s SAS address is automatically and uniquely generated based on a unique World Wide Node Name WWNN that the drive receives when it is configured If the affected partition is online it will be taken offline before the parameters are set and brought back online after they are set Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 Each device on a SCSI bus including the host bus adapter HBA needs to have a unique SCSI ID Changing the SCSI ID is necessary when there is a duplicate ID on a single bus Typically the HBA SCSI ID is set to 7 For example if two tape drives are connected together on the same bus each tape drive must have different SCSI IDs and they must be different from the HBA SCSI ID For SCSI tape drives you can set the SCSI ID to a value from 0 to 15 The library assigns the following default SCSI IDs to SCSI tap
260. e system partition makes them available to all partitions in the library For more information about manual cartridge assignment see Importing Media on page 242 and Disabling Enabling Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 77 You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to import cleaning cartridges 256 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avoid possible conflicts with the other partitions Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export cleaning media See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 Note Once the import operation has started do not interfere with the operation by opening and closing the I E station door The process for importing cleaning cartridges includes the following steps 1 Go to the front of the library and insert the cartridges into the I E station Note Do not insert cartridges into the I E station during the restart process 2 Close the I E station door The Assign I E screen appears on the operator panel if the Manual Cartridge Assignment setting is enabled on the operator panel System Settings screen Tools gt System Settings
261. e useful to 116 Host Mapping Vs Channel Zoning Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades map the controller device to a different LUN if an application typically expects to see a media changer device partition or tape drive at LUN 0 LUNs can also be mapped to be accessible by specific host server World Wide Port Name WWPN Mapping a LUN to a specific WWPN can be used instead of channel zoning to control device visibility Mapping a LUN to more than one WWPN may be useful for creating redundant paths to a media changer device partition tape drive or controller device LUNs will need to be mapped to each WWPN for host servers that use multiple ports e g multi ported HBAs or multiple HBAs if access is desired via all the host server ports e g a LUN would need to be mapped to both WWPNs of a server that uses a dual port HBA LUN masking is a complementary concept to host mapping in that LUNs that are mapped to specific host server WWPNs are hidden i e masked from other host servers This is useful when more than one host server is attached to the FC I O blade e g in a SAN One or more of the LUNs can be masked from discovery by specific host servers while maintaining their mapping and accessibility to other host servers via the same port s Channel zoning places an operational restriction on mapped LUNs for example if port 1 is zoned to ports 3 and 4 but LUNs fr
262. ears Click Close to close the Success message The main screen appears again with the server you just entered listed There is a Run button in the Diagnostics column Click the Run button to test the settings you configured If a Failed message appears you can click the Failed link and a message box appears to help you troubleshoot Make sure the IP addresses and port numbers you entered are correct and that the plug in is supported 212 Figure 32 Testing the StorNext Settings Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Failed message link Tools EDLM StorNext Configuration Create or modify the settings that EDLM can use to communicate with external StorNext servers Name Primary Host O SN 1 2 3 4 53337 Scalar i500 User s Guide Secondary Host EDLM Plug in In Use Diagnostics 5 6 7 8 53338 snapi 2 0 1 No e The Plug in Failed to Load This could be caused by an incompatible missing or corrupt plug in Verify the plug in is designed to work with this library then reinstall it and try again 12 Once you have successfully configured StorNext host settings you can configure StorNext related EDLM policies on partitions as described in Chapter 8 Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions Step 4 Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition The EDLM library managed partition is a dedicated partition that you set up in the library for sca
263. ecure the two modules together by tightening the two thumbscrews at the base of the front of the module and the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Then lower the module s guide pin located at the base of the front of the module by turning it and pushing it down 7 Tighten all thumbscrews located at the base of the front and back of the modules 8 Engage the Y rails of each module in your library configuration Ensure that the Y rails are properly aligned and the thumbscrews are tightened Scalar i500 User s Guide 396 Scalar i500 User s Guide 7 4 ry 5y A O N dao UM A LAIN 3 7 Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up Squeeze here to release Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module 397 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module a From the front of the library open the I E station and access doors of the expansion module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go 1 Y rail in unlocked functional position b From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go
264. ed by the first digit of a library coordinate Modules are identified relative to the control module The control module is numbered 0 zero Expansion modules stacked above the control module are addressed with positive integer digits depending on their position above the control module For example the expansion module stacked directly above the control module is number 1 The expansion module stacked directly above module 1 is number 2 and so on Modules stacked below the control module are numbered with negative integer digits also depending on their relative position to the control module For example the expansion module stacked directly below the control module is number 1 The expansion module stacked directly below module 1 is number 2 and so on A storage column is a group of slots arranged vertically in the library Columns are represented by the second digit of a library coordinate Columns are identified relative to the front left of the library The column in the front left of the library is number 1 The column numbering continues around the library in a clockwise direction The I E station column is always number 6 Fixed storage slots are represented by the third digit of the library location coordinate Within each column slots are numbered from top to bottom starting at 1 For example in Figure 11 on page 33 the full location coordinate of Slot 1 is 0 1 1 Tape drives are addressed first by module and then by t
265. ed on an individual tape drive identified by its physical drive serial number e Selected Partition The report chart is based on an individual partition in the physical library You can only access this report from the Web client The path to open the report is Reports gt Advanced Reporting gt Drive Resource Utilization This report provides TapeAlert counts for various combinations of tape drives tape cartridges and TapeAlert flags You can use this report to help determine if a problem is due to a specific tape drive or tape cartridge The report displays the number of TapeAlerts for the selected Grouping and combination of Attributes Additionally the downloaded report includes the last 10 tape drive error codes for each TapeAlert displayed in columns with the headings Error 1 Error 2 and so on The onscreen report does not contain the tape drive error codes 138 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports The Media Integrity Analysis report collects the following information for each TapeAlert Date and time UTC of TapeAlert occurrences Tape drive physical serial number Cartridge barcode TapeAlert value Occurrence count of each TapeAlert Tape drive error codes for each TapeAlert To configure the report specify the following Date Range Specifies the range of time covered in the report Choose one of the following e Last 7 days e Last
266. ed to a particular partition all unassigned tape drives and the control path tape drive for each partition by flashing the green LEDs on the back of tape drives that are in a ready state e Use the Identify All button to flash the LEDs on the back of the selected tape drives Only tape drives in a ready state will flash If you have selected a specific partition or have only one partition configured all the green LEDs on the tape drives within the partition will blink If you have selected Unassigned all the green LEDs on the unassigned tape drives will blink If you have selected All the green LEDs on all tape drives installed in the library will blink e Click Identify Control Path to flash the green LEDs on the back of the one or more control path tape drives Only tape drives in a ready state will flash The control path tape drive is used to connect each partition to the host application Use this button when you are cabling the library or troubleshooting the library control paths of tape drives If you have selected a partition the green LED on the partition s control path tape drive will blink If you have selected All the green LEDs on all the ready control path tape drives will blink Note There is no control path tape drive for a partition that uses FC I O blades to connect tape drives to a host application The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Identify D
267. ed to provide the following information e Emulation Type This setting allows the partition to appear as a different library type to the host See Manually Creating Partitions on page 71 for a description and available options e Partition Name limited to a maximum of 12 lower case alphanumeric characters and underscores _ Media Barcode Format This setting tells the library how to read and report barcodes of the tape cartridges in the partition The default selection is Standard for definitions of each of the options see Supported Barcode Formats on page 521 e Number of Slots the number of tape cartridge slots allocated to the partition e Drives the tape drive or drives assigned to the partition Note Before deleting a tape drive from a partition verify that it is unloaded For information on unloading tape drives see Unloading Tape Drives on page 252 You cannot modify partitions manually from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the Web client select Setup gt Partitions A partition can be deleted when it is no longer needed or in preparation for removing a module from the library Administrators can delete one partition at a time Unload all tape drives and export all cartridges assigned to the partition that is to be deleted After exporting the cartridges remove them from the I E station For more information see Unloading Tape Drives on page 2
268. eisesressorstsriesoresesieseretat 16 Stackapility mererien n E E E A E E E 16 Front Panel Components e seseesesrssesrseesrssssreeseresterenrerenrerenresenresenrenreeereseen 18 Access DOO oeir eero EET eee Ga an eee 18 IE Statio esa a a E eE EEEO Eneas ESE 19 Operator Panel sesiis oa ieee e Er E E EEEE tenes 19 Front POWer Butto svensson oe sigre itige 20 Back Panel Components seision sarae rn EEE ENEEK EET 20 Reat P wer Switeh S seiretan eera En EE 21 Power Systefis sssr ariere a NEEE EE eee ees 22 Library Control Blade ssssssssossisesnron esiseinas 24 Fibre Channel Input Output Blades ssssessesesessessseseserrrereerereereree 26 Robotic System and Barcode Scanner ss ssssssesiesissesrseriestesresrrsresresresress 29 Tape Drive Support aesa a AEE EE TEON 30 iii Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Scalar i500 User s Guide Library Features is ccsicsctcsscetsidiivecetenesstasesldesievcnnsegeaensedquesnnsernsts A 31 User Interfasea enen r Ta E E E EE ETE EENE 31 Parno peen A eolvesslah aw dpeavurden aeetaastenes 31 Control Path Modification ice ecesesssceesenseceeseeseeenseasecseeeeeseeaseenes 32 Support for WORM serseri ee e a e T ae einen 32 Licenisable Feature Sstre e EE E ETE 32 Understanding the Location Coordinates ss sssssssssesreeresrrssesresreerisresres 32 Modules h sa ncss sceueseneessteciesorndoceiesnaceds lanes Gobaststgestadssberdiad ib saverencstadaasstbertons 34 CONS aiena cave RE E reset lane AE 34 S
269. elements of a partition reside in the module you are removing or replacing you may be able to modify the partition instead of deleting it Gee Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 for more information on how the library logically addresses tape drives and slots In that case you would 1 export those tape cartridges that reside in the module you are removing or replacing and 2 modify the partition instead of deleting it so that the partition no longer references any storage or drive elements within the module you are removing or replacing See Modifying Partitions on page 73 For example in Figure 58 after exporting all affected tape cartridges from the module you are removing the cleaning slots are deleted then Library_c is completely deleted and Library_b is modified to reduce its storage slot count by one as this deletes the storage slot reference in the expansion module No storage element modifications are required for Library_a 360 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Figure 58 Library Configuration Example 2 Your library has the following configuration Right library_b B IE Station B Cleaning E Unavailable Media present in slot Unreadable barcode c Drive is control path Location Coordinates Partition Type Chassis Magazine Slot Show ALL coordinates Show Barcodes 8 Ifa parti
270. ems occur You can select the buttons to view Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS tickets that report problems in the subsystems The three subsystems are e Library This subsystem represents connectivity control cooling power and robotics e Drives This subsystem represents tape drive components such as tape drives tape drive firmware and tape drive sleds e Media This subsystem represents media components such as cartridges and barcode labels Each subsystem button will be in one of three states indicated by color The three states are e Green No RAS tickets exist for this subsystem or if any tickets do exist they have all been closed e Yellow The library contains open or unopened low or high priority RAS tickets for this subsystem e Red The library contains open or unopened urgent RAS tickets for this subsystem If the color of a subsystem button is red or yellow you can click the button to display the corresponding RAS Tickets screen This screen lists library drives or media RAS tickets depending on which button was selected RAS tickets display in order of last occurrence of each event starting with the most recent Note Last Occurrence indicates the last time a ticket event occurred This information updates any time the event recurs Last Occurrence does NOT update if you open close or resolve the RAS Ticket You can change the order in which the
271. en The screen is only accessible from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the operator panel select Tools gt Internal Network Library Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu contains a number of tests you can run to determine if tape drives robotics and Q EKM path if Q EKM is licensed are working as they should The following sections describe the Diagnostics tests e Drive Diagnostics on page 514 e Robotics Diagnostics on page 517 Using EKM Path Diagnostics on page 183 only available if EKM is licensed on the library Notes about Diagnostics include e Only users with Admin level privileges can access Diagnostics e Only one user can be logged into Diagnostics at a time Entering Diagnostics disconnects all other library users with the same or lower privileges on both the operator panel and the Web client When one Admin level user is logged into Diagnostics all other users with Scalar i500 User s Guide 513 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Drive Diagnostics Admin level privileges and below will be unable to log in to the library and will get an error message stating that Diagnostics is in progress Entering Diagnostics takes all your library partitions offline Be sure any crucial operations have stopped before you enter Diagnostics When you exit Diagnostics your partitions return to the online offline status they were in previously Diagnostics cannot be performed from the op
272. ent The menu paths are Setup gt Host Access gt Host Registration and Setup gt Host Access gt Host Connections Registering a Host for There are two ways to register a host using the Create and Add buttons Host Access Create Create allows you to manually create and register a host by entering the host information 1 ao a Fk WO N Add From the Web client select Setup gt Host Access gt Host Registration Click Create Enter a user defined host name Enter the host WWPN Select the host type from the pull down list Click Apply The host appears in the list of registered hosts on the Setup Host Registration screen Add allows you to choose a host for registration from a list of unregistered hosts 1 2 Scalar i500 User s Guide From the Web client select Setup gt Host Access gt Host Registration Click Add The library displays a list of all currently unregistered hosts that are connected to tape drives or FC I O blades in the library 161 Enabling Tape Drives for Host Access Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Host Access 3 Select a host and click Add you can only add one host at a time Under Add a Host enter or modify the host name in the Name field and select the host type from the Select Type drop down list Click Apply This registers the host The page reloads so you are now viewing the Registered Hosts list on the Set
273. ention is Not Required After enabling the repaired target port save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation For information on how to configure the repaired port as the standby or active target port see Configuring FC Host Port Failover on page 119 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Port Failover e From the operator panel Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Port Failover Scalar i500 User s Guide 122 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Working With Data Path When I O blades are installed administrators can configure data path Conditioning conditioning an automatic means of verifying monitoring and protecting data path integrity between FC I O blades and FC tape drives Data path conditioning allows you to proactively detect and resolve data path problems before they affect backup restore and other data transfer operations The I O blade does not manage data path conditioning along the path between the host and the I O blade It do
274. eplacing Cabling the Library Caution Quantum sells both SAS 1 and SAS 2 tape drives SAS 2 technology and the SAS 2 standard allow for increased connection speed and greater cable lengths when compared to SAS 1 Quantum recommends the use of Quantum qualified cables when using SAS tape drives Quantum engineers and qualifies cables specifically to be compatible with the tape library SAS connection architecture The library does not support daisy chaining SAS cables The library does not support the use of SAS expander devices or cables at this time Use this procedure along with Figure 43 and Figure 44 to connect SAS cables directly to the host Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library 299 Figure 43 Stand Alone Control Module SAS Cabling Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library ON DOF WN Ethernet cable to network GB Ethernet port Power supply Rear power switch P
275. er E mail Address includes an e mail address for the library for example libraryname mycompany com The library uses this address in the From field of e mail messages that it sends out indicating the originator of the message Send snapshot with e mail notifications instructs the library to automatically attach a library snapshot file ASCII format to certain RAS ticket e mail notifications see Working With RAS E mail Notifications on page 94 Snapshots are only auto generated for this purpose if they help to clarify or diagnose the problem This feature is turned off by default Library snapshot files can also be sent to specified e mail addresses using the Capture Snapshot operation see Capturing Snapshots of Library Information on page 485 If the library is in the process of capturing an automatic snapshot you will not be able to manually capture a snapshot via the Web client until the automatic snapshot is complete If this happens an error message will display Wait about 10 minutes and try again e Authentication includes a means to enter the login account name and password for the library Selecting the box enables use authentication Clearing the box disables use authentication The following fields are only available if use authentication is enabled e Login Account includes the name of a valid account on the SMTP server for example John User The login account name can contain the following special characters
276. er help line 15 Memory chipin W The memory in the tape cartridge has Memory chip failed cartridge failure failed which reduces performance Do in cartridge not use the cartridge for further write operations 16 Forced eject C The operation has failed because the Manual or forced tape cartridge was manually demounted eject while drive while the tape drive was actively writing actively writing or or reading reading 17 Read only W You have loaded a cartridge of a type Media loaded that is format that is read only in this drive The read only format cartridge will appear as write protected 18 Tape directory W The directory on the tape cartridge has Tape drive powered corrupted on been corrupted File search performance down with tape load will be degraded The tape directory can loaded or permanent be rebuilt by reading all the data on the error prevented the cartridge tape directory being updated 19 Nearing media I The tape cartridge is nearing the end of Media may have life its calculated life It is recommended that you 1 Use another tape cartridge for your next backup 2 Store this tape cartridge in a safe place in case you need to restore data from it exceeded its specified number of passes Scalar i500 User s Guide 534 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions No Flag Severity Recommended Application Client Message Probable Cause 20 Cleaning required
277. eration severe trouble reading or writing which will be resolved by a retension cycle 25 Multi port W A redundant interface port on the tape Failure of one interface error drive has failed interface port in a on a primary dual port port configuration for example Fibre Channel 26 Cooling fan W A tape drive cooling fan has failed Fan failure inside failure tape drive mechanism or tape drive enclosure 27 Power supply W A redundant power supply has failed Redundant power failure inside the tape drive enclosure Check supply unit failure the enclosure user s manual for inside the tape drive instructions on replacing the failed enclosure or rack power supply subsystem 28 Power W The tape drive power consumption is Power consumption consumption outside the specified range of the tape drive is outside specified range 29 Drive W Preventive maintenance of the tape The drive requires preventive drive is required Check the tape drive preventative maintenance user s manual for device specific maintenance not required preventive maintenance tasks or call the cleaning tape drive supplier help line 30 Hardware A C The tape drive has a hardware fault The drive has a s hardware fault that 1 Eject the tape or magazine i requires reset to 2 Reset the drive recover 3 Restart the operation Scalar i500 User s Guide 536 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client
278. erator panel select Setup gt System Settings 128 Enable SNMP V1 V2 Enable IPv6 Enable SMI S Unlabeled Media Detection Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings Enables Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP V1 and V2c services to run on the library This option is disabled by default Note SNMP v3 is always enabled For more information on SNMP see Configuring SNMP Settings on the Library on page 63 Note This setting differs from opening the SNMP port in the Tools gt Security menu see Configuring Library Security Settings on page 124 In order to run SNMP the port must be open and the SNMP service must be enabled Enables support for IPv6 This option is disabled by default The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt System Settings Enables the SMI S service to run on the library This setting is disabled by default Note This setting differs from opening the SMI S port in the Tools gt Security menu see Configuring Library Securi Settings on page 124 In order to run SMI S the port must be open and the SMI S service must be enabled The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt System Settings At bootup and other times the library performs an inventory of all slots and media If a slot con
279. erator panel the only exception is the Drive Reset operation see Drive Reset on page 514 The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics Drive Diagnostics Drive Tests Scalar i500 User s Guide Drive diagnostics are separated into the following categories e Drive Tests Tests any tape drive and does not require you to use a scratch tape Media Tests Tests only IBM tape drives and requires you to insert a scratch tape in the top I E station slot to perform the test Ethernet Expansion Blade Control Allows you to power cycle an Ethernet Expansion blade and remove an Ethernet Expansion blade from the library s configuration The Drive Tests currently include only one test the Drive Reset operation Drive Reset The Drive Reset operation power cycles the tape drive while the tape drive remains in the drive sled in the library You may want to perform a reset if a tape drive does not come ready or it is not behaving properly for example if a tape is stuck in the drive and will not unload 514 Media Tests Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Drive Diagnostics After the reset operation completes the tape drive is rebooted and reconfigured This takes about 60 seconds Wait 60 seconds before performing further drive operations Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple adminis
280. erheating of the FC I O blade Add or replace the FC I O blade s following the instructions in Adding an FC I O Blade on page 448 or Replacing an FC I O Blade on page 453 If you are installing two FC I O blades in an expansion module install the lower one first Make sure cover plates are installed over any unused bays in the expansion module Connect the library and tape drive cables to the FC I O blade see Figure 48 on page 310 See also Recommended Library Cabling for FC I O Blades on page 313 Configure reconfigure library partitions if needed from the Web client select Setup gt Partitions Configure control paths if needed The library assigns control paths for new partitions when they are created Ensure that each partition has only one control path Ensure that you do not select an FC tape drive as the control path if it is connected to an FC I O blade See Working With Control Paths on page 86 for more important information about control paths To modify the control path select Setup gt Control Path from the operator panel or Web client Configure host mapping optional If you have more than one FC I O blade in the library each FC I O blade will present each partition that does not have a tape drive as the control path as a target device to the host Thus the host may see the same partition multiple times To minimize confusion you should configure host mapping so that each host sees each device only
281. erial number control path mode encryption method encryption system type number of slots number of media number of tape drives and whether FIPS is configured for each partition Tape drives location coordinates vendor name model type physical serial number P SN logical serial number L SN firmware level sled boot version sled application version encryption method and whether the tape drive is connected to an I O blade FC I O blades if the library contains FC I O blades this table lists the location coordinates World Wide Node Name WWNN firmware level and ready status EE blades if the library contains Ethernet Expansion blades this table lists the location coordinates and status The path to open the report from the Web client is Reports gt System Information Scalar i500 User s Guide 267 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing the Library Configuration Report Viewing the Library Configuration Report Scalar i500 User s Guide The Library Configuration Report is a dynamic representation of the physical locations of various library resources including tape drives slots partitions and modules Each partition s slots are displayed in a unique color indicated in the legend I E station slots cleaning slots and unavailable slots are also displayed in unique colors A black triangle in the upper left corner of a slot indicates media is present in the slot A re
282. ernet cables with the fastener Ethernet cables and Ethernet hook and loop straps that are shipped with the library are blue in color Apply the following procedure to any library that contains at least one expansion module and at least one FC I O blade or Ethernet Expansion blade To secure an Ethernet cable to the library frame using a cable tie 1 Facing the rear of the library install the two push in wire saddle cable clamps onto the control module chassis Push the rivet of one clip into the hole drilled into the cover plate located to the right of the LCB Push the rivet of the other clip into the hole located near the extreme right side of the library below the control module s power supplies See Figure 50 on page 322 for the locations of these holes Note If your control module chassis does not have the drilled holes use the adhesive backed wire saddle cable clamps in the location shown in Figure 50 2 Locate a specific hole that is drilled into the back of the expansion module for the hook and loop strap This hole is located on the rear of the library about three inches from the bottom of the expansion module on the right side of the frame back plane See Figure 50 on page 322 for the location of this hole 320 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines Note If your module chassis does not have the drilled hole use an M5 thumbscrew to at
283. ertificates are currently installed they will be listed in a table at the bottom of the screen If they are not installed a message appears at the bottom of the screen stating that certificates are not installed 4 From the Select the Certificate Type to install drop down list select SKM 5 Select the Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle check box 6 Click the Browse button next to the Quantum Communication Certificate Bundle File field to locate the TLS certificate file 7 Click Open 8 Click Apply 9 Verify that the table at the bottom of the screen is present and contains the required certificates Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library Follow these instructions to install your own TLS certificates for SKM or when installing TLS certificates for KMIP key managers When providing your own certificates it is assumed you understand the concepts of PKI and can access the tools or third party resources needed to generate or obtain certificates Note If you are using SKM You must be running SKM 1 1 or higher on your SKM servers in order to install your own TLS certificates If you install your own TLS certificates on the library you must also install your own certificates on the SKM servers Similarly if you use the Quantum provided TLS certificates on the SKM servers you must also use the Quantum provided TLS certificates on the library See the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for information about installing
284. es 1 Ifthe rackmount shelves are extended collapse them to their smallest size It is easier to fit and position the shelves within the rack when the shelves are compact Note Extending the shelves can be difficult but they are designed to be resized by hand Do not use tools to resize the shelves and never take them apart 2 Place a ferrule on the end of each stud and screw it on completely The larger side of the ferrule should face the rack shelf and the tapered end should face out Be sure to use the proper size ferrule as described in Preparing for Installation on page 418 m8 Na ii JA 1 Stud 2 Ferrule Scalar i500 User s Guide 423 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack 3 Install the rackmount shelves into the rack so that they are level with one another a Install the shelf s rear studs in the rack s rear mounting holes b Position the shelf to the appropriate side of the rack right or left and align the shelf at the desired height c Insert the shelf s rear studs into the rack s rear mounting holes Fasten a thumbnut to the end of each stud Secure the rack tightly so that the ferrule fits snugly within the hole in the rack e Next install the shelf s front studs in the rack s front mounting holes Scalar i500 User s Guide 424 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack
285. es 491 xi Duplicate Media Changer Devices Discovered 0 ccseeesseseeeeeeeeees 492 Identifying Tape Dri ves iscsssccsssasctcsecsvessstaavieonetecacioastiesvsnigiteseaceredevusesonnte 492 Retrieving Tape Drive LOgs ccsssssssesesessesssseeeecenensnseeeseeneneneneseseasesees 495 Retrieving Tape Drive Sled Logs cecccscscessssesssteeseseeesneecsneesesesseneesenees 496 Identifying PC I O Blades 0 ccsccasessesesteicecteeasessestacriesestensevinesbeseneses tage 496 Permanently Removing FC I O Blades c ccesesseeseseseeseneneseseeeenescseenes 497 Resetting FC I O Blade Potts siecssieneni mesinin ar 498 Viewing and E Mailing the Command History LOg ccseeeeseeeees 499 Interpreting LEDS verreden e arsine 500 Blade Status LEDS tirisna E E eats anaes ated cess 500 Blade Port LED Sosea insae e E E 503 Servicing the LCB Based on LED StatuS ccccsessesseeseeseseeneneesees 505 Tape Drive LEDS sicivccitgviisestsecthnsusauesdsvedeues E A 505 Tape Drive Fibre Port Link LED s ss sessessssesssessesisrsressresrerresrssresresresee 507 Power Supply LEDS scseccsseswssiscieacscsascconssctesssvsoscundesdvotenenstansberssitnneseten 508 Using the Installation Verification Test 0 0 0 ccc eeeereseseseeneeneees 509 Viewing the IVT LO gS irrin ainke nnii 511 Saving and E mailing the IVT Logs sessssssssssstsrtessrssstnsstesteseneesensse 511 Running Library DeMOssensesinreniinniadaena 512 Configuring the Internal Netw
286. es Installed si icci tacts asis hes aiken 38 Operator Panel User Interface eceseeserseeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 41 Web Client User Interface occ ecesssesescssseeeseesesenseeeesseeeeees 41 LDAP Setup Example siccccscsscosvsassedehaetanveneiassesiecses 103 xvi Scalar i500 User s Guide Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Enabling FIPS Mode cece cesseseeeeeetesseeneeeteeeseeeeees 132 Report Data Buttons a a A E 142 Saving and E mailing the Report Data 143 Forcing Control Path Failover cccccesessesseteseeeetetesceneens 152 Forcing Control Path Failover cece eee eeene teens 153 HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel Tape Drive Ports 156 Enabling Data Path Failover c cccseessesssesesescessseresessensnenens 157 Forcing Data Path Failover cccccsessesseeseseseseseeneseseeneenens 158 Forcing Data Path Failover cccssesessesessssenesescsnensteneseeeees 159 Setup Encryption System Configuration KMIP Key Maia get iceis vestetie n A sashes Suthers EE tha 171 TLS Communication Certificate Import Sereen 176 Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Screen 181 Enabling FIPS Mode eee ce seeseseeeetesseeneseseseseneneees 201 Installing the SNA
287. es are configured and running e Paused EDLM scanning is paused The New column contains an Active Paused button The button toggles between modes Scalar i500 User s Guide 223 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans 4 Tochange the mode from Active to Paused or from Paused to Active click the button in the New column and then click Apply The operation completes and if successful a Success message appears 5 Click Close to close the Success message Running Manual EDLM You may wish to evaluate media outside of the automatic EDLM Tests scanning policies To do this you can run a manual EDLM scan Manual scans are given highest priority and go to the top of the scanning queue As soon as an EDLM scanning drive has finished its current scan it will accept the tape scheduled for a manual scan Once all manual scans are finished the scan queue continues as normal Manual EDLM scans can be run on any tape in the library as long the following conditions are met An EDLM license must be installed on the library The EDLM library managed partition must be configured on the library see Step 4 Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on page 213 The cartridge you want to scan must be readable by a tape drive in the EDLM library managed partition per standard LTO gen based backwards compatibility limitations The cartridge you want to scan must be labeled properly Unlabeled media
288. es are modular and you can increase the size at any time The three base systems for the Scalar i500 library are as follows The 5U library consisting of a control module The 14U library consisting of a 5U control module and a 9U expansion module The 23U library consisting of a 5U control module and two 9U expansion modules These configurations can be scaled up by adding 9U expansion modules to amaximum rack height of 41U Expansion modules provide additional capacity as your storage and tape drive requirements change See Figure 4 on page 17 for an illustration of library scalability For information on installing removing and replacing modules see Installing Removing and Replacing on page 286 Each module has a specific number of fixed storage slots I E station slots and tape drive slots available See Library capacity is as follows on page 526 for the number of slots available for each library configurations Note Slot counts in this document do not include five inaccessible slots in the bottom row of any library configuration For more information about these slots see Unused Slots on page 247 Scalar i500 User s Guide 15 Control Module Expansion Modules Stackability Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Modules The control module is required in any Scalar i500 library configuration The control module contains the robotic controls library control blade
289. es manage data path conditioning along the path between itself and the FC tape drives Data path monitoring automatically occurs at regular configurable intervals The I O blade generates a RAS ticket if the monitoring tests fail for two intervals To configure data path conditioning set the following parameters for the selected I O blade e The level at which the data path is monitored between an I O blade and the FC tape drives connected to it The two levels are as follows e Interface Test performs tests to verify that FC controllers on I O blades are responsive to commands This is the default level e Device Datapath Test performs tests at the Interface Test level and also performs a device inquiry on each target device e Test Interval the time interval between monitoring checks You can configure the test interval It can range from 5 to 2 880 minutes 48 hours If you do not configure the test interval the default test interval is 60 minutes If you disable data path conditioning and then re enable it in the future the interval reverts to the default of 60 minutes regardless of whether you changed the interval previously Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Scalar i500 User s Guide 123
290. eseeeseeesees 258 Manually Cleaning Tape Di ives cccccsessseseseseeeesesssesteesesessesieeeees 260 About Tape Drive Operations cee cesee cess censeeneeetesseneeeneneneneees 261 viii Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations ccccscsesseseesseeseseseeeeneeeeeeees 262 Controlling FC I O Blade Powetl cccscssecesseesesesesesesseseeceneseseseseeneneseeees 263 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports 265 Viewing Information About the Scalar i500 ccsesesseeeseneseseeeeneseeeeees 266 Viewing the System Information Report eee eeeeeeseeeteeeeeneees 267 Viewing the Library Configuration Report ccccesseseseeeeeseseeteneeeees 268 Viewing the Network Settings Report eee seeeseeeeeeseesseeeeeneneneeeees 271 Viewing Logped in Users v sc csscssessiesscisnicisvicvesterseteqseieresieveosvenstersevesssneenate 272 Viewing the All Slots Report ccccesecssesesesesssieeseeeeeessssenssneseseesenseeeeeees 272 Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs cccseseseseeeeeeeseeeeteees 273 Viewing FC I O Blade Information cccssesseseeeeeeeeseeseeeneseseseeneeneeees 275 Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information essereeseseeneseeeeees 276 Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware 278 Upgrading Library Firmware c cece eeeeeeeeceeseeeeseessseseseneeneneees 279 Upgrading Tape Drive Firmware cceeeseesessssseseseeeseseseseseseseseeeseaes 281 Using an Image File to Upgrade Tape D
291. esesesenesesenenanes 78 Configuring I E Station Slots cesses ceesseeseeeeseseseeeeeeetesseeenesenenenes 79 Configuring Zero I E Station Slots cece cscesesesescseseseeeeees 82 Setting Tape Drive Parameters ccceccceeecseeecseeesesesseeeecsesesssecseseseseeees 83 Working With Control Paths cesessseesescscsesesesescsesesesesescaeanseesees 86 Obtaining and Installing a License Key ou cece tees eeeeeeneteeeeenees 88 About LICENSE KEYS scsesssssssssdssssiscsssessesedsesdescssssssessvssioassssvevssestoavesedessssaeaes 89 Viewing Licenses and License KeyS ccccseeeeee tees eeeeeeneteeeeeeees 90 Obtaining a License Key ccceeeesecscseseeecscseseseeeeceeensnececeeeneneteseneenes 90 Applying a License Key e ri 91 Setting Customer Contact Information cseeeecscscsesneeeeenes 92 Configuring the Library E mail Account 0 ee cece tees ceeseeneteneneeeees 92 Working With RAS E mail Notifications 0 0 0 0 eesseseseseseneesesenees 94 Creating RAS E mail Notifications s ssssssssseseessessssiesresrissessesreeresresses 95 Modifying RAS E mail Notifications 0 0 eee eessseesseeeseneeseneeees 96 Deleting RAS E mail Notifications cece cesses eeeenseeeeeeeeees 96 Working With User Account 00 0 0 cccseseccscsssesesescscsesesesescscseaeseececscseesesesenes 97 Local Authentication vs Remote Authentication ee 97 About Local User ACCOUNLS ccccccseseseeessesesssnsneseseseeesessesenesesesseneneneess 97 Creating Local Use
292. ete successfully The Library Service Utility and installation instructions are located in the zip file that contains the firmware download files If you are currently running library firmware prior to version 320G GS004 do not upgrade to version 320G GS004 or 400G GS006 but instead upgrade to the latest version You will not need to run the Library Service Utility Note If you downgrade from one major firmware version to an earlier major version library configuration settings will be reset to the factory defaults You can restore the other configurable items using a configuration file that was saved when the earlier version of library firmware was installed on the library or you can reconfigure your library s settings For more information see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Note If you are running firmware version 400G or higher and want to downgrade the following restrictions apply If your library is Quantum branded you can downgrade to version 400G or higher there is no lower version of Quantum branded firmware If your library is ADIC branded and has FC I O blades installed you can downgrade to version 400G or higher Firmware versions 320G and lower do not support FC I O blades If your library does not have FC I O blades you can downgrade to a lower version of firmware 280 Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware Upgrading
293. eveling SCSI or SAS tape drives To enable autoleveling you must upload a firmware image file to the library If you have multiple versions of FC tape drives installed in your library for example LTO 4 and LTO 5 you must upload a unique firmware image file for each version You can also delete a firmware image file when you no longer want to autolevel tape drive firmware Before uploading tape drive firmware verify with published release notes or Quantum Support that you are uploading the correct version of firmware For contact information see Getting More Information or Help on page 8 You must have access to a tape drive firmware image file to enable autoleveling Tape drive firmware is available from Quantum Support It is not necessary to delete an old version of firmware before uploading a new version The new version of firmware overwrites the old version You can find step by step instructions in your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You cannot upload tape drive firmware from the operator panel The path to the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Drive Operations gt Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling The library allows you to delete a firmware image file if you no longer want to autolevel tape drive firmware In addition you might want to delete a
294. evices and their media This section provides information about TapeAlert flags issued by tape drives including the identifying number severity recommended message and probable cause Table 19 explains the severity codes and Table 20 lists all the existing TapeAlert flags and their descriptions Support for specific TapeAlert flags may vary based on tape drive type and firmware revision Not all tape drives support every TapeAlert Consult your tape drive SCSI manual for more information For more information on TapeAlert see http www t10 org index html for INCITS SCSI Stream Commands 3 SSC 3 l Informational W Warning The system may not be operating optimally Continued operation without corrective action may cause a failure or raise critical TapeAlert flags C Critical Either a failure has already occurred or a failure is imminent Corrective action is required 531 Table 20 Tape Drive TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 1 Read warning W The tape drive is having problems The drive is having reading data No data has been lost but severe trouble there has been a reduction in the reading performance of the tape 2 Write warning W The tape drive is having problems The drive is having writing data No data has been lost but severe trouble there has been a
295. firmware image file if your library no longer contains a specific version of tape drives For example if you replace all LTO 3 tape drives with LTO 4 tape drives you no longer need the LTO 3 firmware You can find step by step instructions in your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface 284 Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware You cannot upload tape drive firmware from the operator panel The path to the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Drive Operations gt Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling Scalar i500 User s Guide 285 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing This chapter describes how to add remove and replace hardware within your library Adding removing or replacing library components may require you to power off the entire library There are a few components however that you can service without powering off the library such as replacing tape drives Instead you may only need to take a specific partition offline or you may not need to impact the status of the library at all Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug an
296. form suitable for use by the storage disks 542 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary CRU Customer Replaceable Unit The smallest hardware component that can be replaced at a customer installation by a customer Default A value or setting that is selected by the hardware or software unless specified otherwise by the user DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP supports a mix of static and dynamic IP addresses Directory A file that contains a list of other files Directory is short for directory file Drivers Software programs that enable a computer to communicate with hard drives CD ROM drives printers and other peripherals Drivers are stored ona hard disk and loaded into memory at boot up Element ID Logical An address used by a library to locate and track library component The address is specified in programming logic rather than on the physical location of a component within a library When a logical library is used the logical element ID masks the physical element ID Element ID Physical An address used by a library to locate and track library component The address is based on the physical location of a component within a library Applications expect to see resources at specific IDs Ethernet A type of local area network designed to transport data at rates up to 10 million bits per second Other software such as TCP IP runs on
297. g LED flashing increases as the activity increases and can actually appear off if the activity is high enough Also when the blade boots up the link LEDs are all on until firmware initializes the ports at which time they turn off until the port transmitter is enabled and link is acquired Ethernet Expansion Blade Ethernet Port LEDs Table 15 Ethernet Expansion Blade Ethernet Port Link LED States LED Color Blade Status Green Solid ON Link is up data can be sent or received through the Ethernet port Solid OFF Link is down data cannot be sent or received through the Ethernet port Amber Blinks at irregular intervals Data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port Solid OFF No data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port Scalar i500 User s Guide 504 Servicing the LCB Based on LED Status Tape Drive LEDs Figure 71 Location of Tape Drive LEDs ba Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs 1 Observe the blinking patterns of the LEDs for at least 30 seconds 2 Capture a snapshot of the library and send it to Quantum Technical Support for analysis RAS tickets typically report all problems related to tape drives including error codes and TapeAlerts By observing the blinking pattern of LEDs on tape drives however you can discern which operation the tape drive is currently performing Figure 71 shows where the tap
298. g Configuring Data Path Failover You can only force a failover on one tape drive at a time Both Fibre Channel ports must be connected to a host or switch You can only force a failover from the Web client To force a data path failover 1 From the Tools menu click Drive Operations The Tools Drive Operations screen displays see Figure 23 Figure 23 Forcing Data Path Failover Tools Drive Operations To complete tape drive operations the tape drive must be operational and contain no media Select the desired operation Update tape drive firmware using a firmware image file O Retrieve tape drive log Retrieve tape drive sled log Clean a tape drive Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling Force Data Path Failover c Force Control Path Failover 2 Select Force Data Path Failover and click Next The Force Data Path Failover page displays see Figure 24 All of the tape drives that have data path failover enabled are listed The port currently being used as the data path is listed in the Active Port column The Active Port column will state No Link if neither port is connected Scalar i500 User s Guide 158 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Data Path Failover Figure 24 Forcing Data Path Failover Note The drive must be in the Ready state to force a failover O 14 Ready libray_5 1 ner 3 Select the tape drive on which you want to force the
299. g Booting and Unknown The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Tools gt I O Blade Info e From the operator panel select Tools gt Blade Info Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information Scalar i500 User s Guide Administrators can view information about all the FC I O blades installed in the library The Tools Blade Port Information screen lists the following port information for each FC I O blade Port number The port number 1 6 WWPN World Wide Port Name of the port Status The status of the blade Config wait Loop init Login Ready Lost Sync Error Re Init Non part and Failed Actual Speed Negotiated speed of the port 1 Gb s 2 Gb s or 4 Gb s If the port is not in a ready state N A displays Actual Loop ID Negotiated loop ID of the port 0 125 On the Web client if the port connection type is Point to Point or if the port is not ina ready state N A displays On the operator panel if the port is not in a ready state N A displays Requested Speed Requested speed of the port Auto 1 Gb s 2 Gb s 4 Gb s or 8 Gb s Web client only Requested Loop ID Requested loop ID of the port Auto or 0 125 Web client only Framesize Framesize setting of the port 528 1024 or 2048 Mode Mode of the port Public or Private Role Role of the port Target ports 1 2 or Initiator ports 3 6 Connection Conne
300. g Slots on page 78 4 Ifthe module you are removing or replacing contains tape drives make sure that none of the tape drives have media mounted See Unloading Tape Drives on page 252 5 Ifthe module you are removing or replacing contains I E slots remove all media from the affected I E slots and store them separately for each partition so you can import them back into the same partition once the module removal or replacement is complete 6 If one or more partitions reference any storage slots within the module you are removing or replacing export all tape cartridges from the affected partitions and keep the exported cartridges separated by partition so you can import them back into the same partition once the module removal or replacement is complete See Exporting Media on page 249 Caution The library will not be able to locate tape cartridges that are removed from one partition and returned to a different partition The tape cartridges must be returned to the same partition from which they were removed 7 Ifa partition references storage slots within the module you are removing or replacing delete such partition You can create new partitions after modules have been removed or replaced See Working With Partitions on page 68 Scalar i500 User s Guide 359 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Note If the last
301. g the Web client select Operations gt Partitions gt Change Mode 2 For each partition that you want to take online click Online 3 Click Apply Scalar i500 User s Guide 288 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Taking a Libra pelt i To take an entire library offline take all of its partitions offline 1 Using the library s operator panel select Operations gt Change Partition Mode or using the Web client select Operations gt Partitions gt Change Mode 2 For each partition that you want to take offline click Offline 3 Click Apply Cabling the Library Use the following cabling procedure appropriate for your drive type Specific Instructions for LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape Drives on page 289 Cabling Libraries With SCSI Tape Drives on page 293 e Cabling Libraries With SAS Tape Drives on page 298 e Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected Directly to a Host or Switch on page 303 e Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected to Fibre Channel I O Blades on page 308 e Recommended Library Cabling for FC I O Blades on page 313 e Managing Ethernet Cables on page 320 Specific Instructions for The library handles the Ethernet and Fibre Channel data ports on LTO 5 LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape and LTO 6 tape drives differently depending on the tape drive See Drives Figure 37 Figure 38 and Figure 39 for details Scalar i500 User s Guide 289 Scala
302. ge Assignment Disable Remote Service User Enable SSL Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings Administrators can disable or enable manual cartridge assignment When manual cartridge assignment is enabled the default setting the Assign IE screen automatically appears on the operator panel once cartridges are placed into the I E station The Assign I E screen prompts the user to use the operator panel to assign the cartridges to a specific partition or to the System partition The cartridges can then be used only by the assigned partition For more information on manual cartridge assignment see Disabling Enabling Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 77 The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt System Settings For security purposes prevents a service user from logging in to the library remotely from either the Web client or over the Ethernet service port The service user will still be able to log in to the library from the operator panel interface This option is disabled by default The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt System Settings Enables Secure Socket Layer SSL for secure data transmission between the library and remote clients This option is disabled by default The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the op
303. ge 183 Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings on page 188 Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions on the Library on page 188 Generating Data Encryption Keys on page 189 Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 Exporting the Native Encryption Certificate on page 193 Importing Encryption Certificates on page 194 Exporting Data Encryption Keys on page 194 Importing Data Encryption Keys on page 196 Accessing the SKM Server Logs on page 197 Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log on page 197 KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management Scalar i500 User s Guide The Key Management Interoperability Protocol KMIP is a specification developed by OASIS Its function is to standardize communication between enterprise key management systems and encryption systems With version i7 2 the Scalar i500 provides a KMIP version 1 0 compliant encryption solution KMIP is currently only supported with SafeNet KeySecure servers Contact your Quantum representative for details 167 General Notes About Encryption onthe Library About the EKM License Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management Details about the Scalar i500 KMIP compliant implementation include e As with other encryption systems supported by the library in order to use KMIP compliant encryption systems with the Scalar i500 you must have an Encryption Key Management licen
304. ge 509 Installation Verification Test Detailed Log This log is saved each time you run the Installation Verification Test IVT The log saves only the information from the most recently run test If you run the test again the new information overwrites the previous information This option presents the detailed log For more information see Using the Installation Verification Test on page 509 Command History Log Available only if you are using FC I O blades When you select this report you choose the FC I O blade and device for which you want to run the report The Blade menu lists all FC I O blades installed in the library if more than one are installed The Devices menu lists the devices associated with the selected FC I O blade The report shows all commands from the selected device to the selected blade When the log file reaches its maximum size the oldest information is replaced as new information is added Cleaning Log Shows all cleanings that have been performed in the library since firmware version 520G was installed When the log reaches its maximum size the oldest information is replaced as new information is added The comma separated values csv file provides the following information Date Time date and time Barcode barcode of the cleaning cartridge Tape location coordinates of the cleaning cartridge Drive location coordinates of the tape drive that was cleaned Status pass fail Return Code
305. ge context fiducials may be fiducial labels or fiducial tabs allowing reliable identification of cartridge magazines and drive sleds including both location and media domain information In the Scalar i500 tape library a fiducial tab refers to the plastic locator tabs which are installed on the media storage columns The robot determines the location of these tabs to identify media storage locations A fiducial label refers to the barcode label on cartridge magazines or drive sleds which identify magazine or drive sled type Firewall A set of security tools designed to separate an internal network from the public Internet in order to keep unauthorized users out of a restricted network Firewalls are the primary line of security defense for businesses FL_Port Fabric Loop Port An F_Port that is capable of supporting an attached Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop An FL_Port on a loop will have the AL_PA hex 00 giving the fabric the highest priority access to the loop N_Ports or NL_Ports can attach to it in an Arbitrated Loop topology and are capable of communicating with FC AL protocol FMR Field Microcode Replacment tape See FUP Firmware Upgrade tape 544 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary FRU Field Replaceable Unit The smallest hardware component that can be replaced at a customer installation by a certified field service representative Gb E or GigE Gigabit Ethernet A transport protocol u
306. ge the setting via the operator panel Tools gt Security menu The default setting is enabled State Indicates whether allowing SMI S to run on the library is enabled or disabled You can change this setting on the operator panel Tools gt System Settings The default is disabled SNMP access enabled disabled V1 enabled disabled V2 enabled disabled V3 enabled disabled algorithm encryption enabled disabled and port SNMP Traps IP addresses and ports The path to open the report from the Web client is Reports gt Network Settings Scalar i500 User s Guide 271 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing Logged in Users LE rd Viewing Logged in Users The Logged in User s Report report contains information about the users that are currently logged into the library The report contains the following information User name Name of logged in user Role name Privilege level of logged in user for example Admin for administrator User for non administrator non service user e Login date and time Date and time the user logged into the library e Last activity date and time Date and time the user last logged into the library e Login location IP address or host name of the system being used to access the system e Management interface User interface being used to access the system Web client or operator panel The path to open the report from the
307. gn a static IP address for IPv6 Your library has the following name and network settings You can edit these settings or accept them LibraryName Network Settings Use DHCP OR 15 Accept the default settings by pressing Apply or make any changes to the network settings and then press Apply The progress window displays a Success message when complete Scalar i500 User s Guide 408 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card SUCCESS Action Network Configuration Status Operation Succeeded Elapsed Time 00 00 01 16 Press Close The next screen lists one or more IP addresses assigned to the library 17 Write down the IP addresses You will need them to log in from your Web browser 18 Click Close The system logs you out and you return to the login screen Caution The installation is NOT complete at this point Install current library firmware following the steps below Firmware Installation can take up to 1 hour to complete DO NOT remove power from the library during this process 19 Open a Web browser on the host PC and type the following in the address bar http lt ipaddress gt where ipaddress is one of the IP addresses assigned to the library that you wrote down earlier A screen appears displaying the current version of library firmware Scalar i500 User s Guide 4
308. gt If the studs do not reach the mounting holes pull the front of the shelf toward you to extend it to the necessary length Hold the base of the shelf with one hand and pull the extensible part of the shelf with your other hand Note Extending the shelves can be difficult but they are designed to be resized by hand Do not use tools to resize the shelves and never take them apart g Insert the shelf s front studs into the rack s front mounting holes h Fasten a thumbnut to the end of each stud Secure the rack tightly so that the ferrule fits snugly within the hole in the rack 4 Visually make sure that both shelves are level and that they are aligned properly within the rack 5 Make sure that all thumbnuts are fastened tightly Some thumbnuts may have loosened during installation Scalar i500 User s Guide 425 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack Preparing Modules for 1 Power off your library and disconnect all power cords network data Rack Installation cables and module to module cables 2 Remove all tape cartridges tape drives power supplies and all cords and cables from the library modules The modules are much easier to lift into the rack without the additional weight of the tape drives Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a control module weighs approximately 60 Ibs 27 2 kg An expansion module without tape d
309. gure 16 Enabling FIPS Mode Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up the Encryption for library partitions Note Encryption is supported on LTO 4 and LTO 5 media and IBM and HP LTO 4 and LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS tape drives Encryption is not supported on SCSI tape drives For more information refer to the online help or user s guide Select Allow Application Managed as the encryption method to disable library managed encryption The Allow Application Managed encryption selection allows your backup application to control when encryption is used If your backup application is not configured to control encryption data will not be encrypted LME Settings Partition Primary Host Port Secondary Host Port FIPS SSL Key Server Encryption Method library_5 f v Sd Enable Library Managed library_bS Ett poama E000 Vv Vv Enable Library Managed library_c5 Emma mamap Ema a Vv Allow Application Managed library_d2 a j E rl E Allow Application Managed Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics ae eee Viewing FIPS Status on There are three ways to view FIPS status on the library the Library e The Partition Configuration screen Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration shows which partitions are enabled for FIPS All tape drives in FIPS partitions are enabled e The System Information Report Reports gt System Information contains a FIPS column in the Library Partitio
310. h User Accounts e Local Authentication vs Remote Authentication e Creating Local User Accounts e Configuring LDAP e Configuring Kerberos Setting the Date Time and Time Zone Working With FC I O Blades Configuring Library Security Settings Configuring the Internal Network Configuring System Settings Configuring Operator Panel Display Settings Registering the Library About the Setup Wizard Scalar i500 User s Guide When you first power on the library the operator panel displays the Setup Wizard which walks you through the initial configuration of the library s basic operational settings The Setup Wizard on the operator panel only runs once at initial startup After that administrators access the Setup Wizard any time via the Web client or use commands on the Setup and Operations menus to modify all library settings including network settings See Completing the Library Configuration With Menu Commands on page 54 53 Using the Default Administrator Account Completing the Library Configuration With Menu Commands Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library About the Setup Wizard While completing the Setup Wizard at initial startup is recommended you may need to begin using the library locally immediately In this case you can cancel out of the Setup Wizard and allow the library to run on the default configuration settings See Default Configuration Settings on p
311. h you insert a cable becomes the active data port and the second port becomes the failover port For example if data path failover is enabled and you insert a cable into Port 2 that port becomes the active data port Inserting a cable into Port 1 makes that the port used for data path failover Figure 22 Enabling Data Path Failover Setup Drive Settings Modify the settings on Fibre Channel drives Fibre Channel Drives Total Number of Drives 11 LT0 5 14 D Biss F oino Point VB Auto E Loop L 8Gb s 500308C0 9894F01C No libray_5 LTo 5 02 Jes wv auton Auto Loop a BGbis 500308C0 9894F004 No libran_5 LTO 5 12 Em wv aon iv auto Loop L 8 Gb s 500308C0 9804F094 No libray_5 LTO 5 34 Mar wv auto nt iv Auo y Loop L 8Gbis 00308C0 9894F030 No libray_5 LT0 5 11 Meo si aon a Aao Loop L 8Gb s 500308C0 9894F090 No libray_5 L105 1 2 s5 Auto NL Auto Loop L 8 Gb s 500308C0 9894F014 No libray_b5 OF EO aiid Forcing Data Path You can manually swich the active Fibre Channel port on a DPF enabled Failover tape drive by forcing a failover You might want to force a failover to check that the non enabled port still works or to switch back to using Port 1 once the issue that originally caused it to fail over is fixed Scalar i500 User s Guide 157 Chapter 6 Storage Networkin
312. hapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module a 1 Ly 9 EEE To Mi i ft 99900000000 VECOS 3 E CCOCCOC CCCA 1 Thumbscrews behind doors 6 Loosen the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Scalar i500 User s Guide 393 Replacing the 9U Expansion Module Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Open the module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module beneath it From the front of the library slide the entire module toward you and lift it off of the module below it 9 Repeat these procedures for each module that you need to remove Remove and replace the cover plates if appropriate Caution Before removing the control module s bottom cover plate the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 If you plan to stack the control module at the top of the library and if a 9U expansion module will be located below it remove the control module s bottom cover plate and the 9U expansion module s top plate If you plan to stack the control module between 9U expansion modules remove both the top and bottom plates of the control module Also remove the top plate
313. he screen as unknown Note On the Web client the Drive Settings screen displays tape drive information in tables Bold column headings in the tables can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates Scalar i500 User s Guide 85 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Control Paths The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Drive Settings e From the operator panel select Setup gt Drive Settings Working With Control Paths The control path tape drive is used to connect a partition to a host application The library automatically assigns control paths when you set up partitions You can modify the control path at any time Table 5 describes how these control paths are assigned and how to change them Table 5 Control Path Assignment During Partition Creation Then the default And the control path If the library partition for the If you want to change the control path note contains contains partition is the following No FCI O Any The first tape You must select a tape drive as the control path blades combination drive assigned of tape drive to the partition interface types SCSI FC or SAS Scalar i500 User s Guide 86 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Control Paths Then the default And the control path If the library partiti
314. he control module The robot assembly should glide slowly and with some resistance Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot c After raising the robot assembly to the approximate middle of the control module hold it in place with one hand and using your other hand move the parking tab in a counter clockwise direction until it stops in the parked position The metal parking tab is located at the bottom of column 1 d Gently lower the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab Scalar i500 User s Guide 362 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Ie 0 ZB b ZB Ay S 2 Sw Yg 0 Z o ao S amp S Dza R 12090 B 970 90 A Dg PR o oo z 70 0 R 9 0 00 B 25032 R AA z 202020 B A 7292020 Z lt i A 202099 esa 29 0 0 Za 22052 oa oy 220509 o osa 22052 aSo A 95 Lf D Z A 1 Parking tab in parked position 13 Remove all power supplies from each module that you intend to remove For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 14 Remove all tape drives from each module that you intend to remove If you are going to replace the module label the drives with their locations so you can
315. he data paths from the hosts through the FC I O blade to the FC tape drives In addition two powerful features provide ways to manage the interaction between hosts and target devices e Channel zoning allows you to control access between FC I O blade ports configured for host servers and ports configured for target devices For more information see Configuring FC I O Blade Channel Zoning on page 111 e Host Mapping allows you to control visibility to target devices and access from individual host servers to target devices For more information see Managing FC Hosts and Host Mapping on page 113 The topics in this section cover configuring FC I O blades For additional information on FC I O blades see e Fibre Channel Input Output Blades on page 26 Controlling FC I O Blade Power on page 263 e Viewing FC I O Blade Information on page 275 e Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information on page 276 e Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected to Fibre Channel I O Blades on page 308 e Recommended Library Cabling for FC I O Blades on page 313 e Identifying FC I O Blades on page 496 e Resetting FC I O Blade Ports on page 498 Note FCI O blade menu commands are available for use only when FC I O blades are installed in the library 109 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Configuring FC I O Blade When FC I O blades are installed administrators can configure FC I O Ports blade
316. he handle The power supply must be level to slide in smoothly Tighten the power supply s thumbscrews to secure the power supply to the library module 6 Plug inthe power supply cord 7 Turn on the power supply s power using the switch on the rear of the power supply Check the status of the power supply s LEDs The top green LED and the blue LED should be solidly lit 9 Power on the library Check the status of the power supply s LEDs The two green LEDs should be solidly lit and the blue LED should be off These instructions explain how to remove a redundant power supply from the control module You may need to remove the second power supply if it is no longer necessary for the library Required tools None 1 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Access the back of the library and locate the power supply that you want to replace Turn off the power supply s power using the switch on the rear of the power supply Disconnect the power supply cord from the power supply and from its source 415 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies 5 Loosen the power supply s thumbscrews 6 Remove the power supply by gripping the power supply handle and pulling it toward you 7 Install a cover plate over the vacant power supply slot Removing and Replacing These instructions explain how to remove a power supply an
317. he library it is just an indication that the firmware image has been moved to the LCB compact flash card A 14U library with six tape drives installed can take up to 50 minutes to complete this process Actual time may vary You will not be able to log in until the firmware upgrade is complete Caution Do NOT remove power from the library while the firmware is upgrading The library operator panel may display the following upgrade in progress message or it may blank out or change multiple times during the firmware upgrade process Upgrade in progress The library firmware is being upgraded This process may take several minutes Please do not power off the library until the upgrade completes 23 When the firmware upgrade is complete the login screen appears on the operator panel Scalar i500 User s Guide 411 Replacing the LCB Only Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card 24 Enter the following default user name and password 25 e User name admin e Password password Press OK The Setup Wizard screen appears Note At this point the Scalar i500 Library is set up with factory default settings 26 Reconfigure your library settings as they were before Caution Contact Quantum Support before restoring the configuration In genera
318. he right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place 1 Y rail in locked non functional position 4 Remove the rack ears that fasten the module to the rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for detailed instructions on using the rack ears 5 Loosen the thumbscrews located at the base of the front of the module Scalar i500 User s Guide 367 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library 99900000000 VECOS E CCOCCOC CCCA mm i O a TT i OOM NO AONA LAONAA O NAON 1 Thumbscrews behind doors 6 Loosen the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Scalar i500 User s Guide 368 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library 7 Open the module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module beneath it 8 From the front of the library slide the entire module toward you and lift it off of the module below it 9 Repeat these procedures for each module that you intend to remove 10 Remove and replace the cover plates if appropriate see Figure 59 Caution Before removing the control module s bottom cover plate the rob
319. hether the request succeeds or fails Pausing EDLM Scans on Partitions Scalar i500 User s Guide 6 Click Apply to finish You can temporarily halt EDLM scanning ina partition but keep your EDLM policy selections intact so that you can re enable them later You might want to do this if you suspect a problem for example if it seems that too many tapes are being scanned and library operations are being affected 222 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans When you pause EDLM scans tapes that are currently being scanned finish their scans are unloaded from the tape drives and are moved back to their original locations No further tapes are scanned Tapes in the queue remain queued Once unpaused tapes that would have been queued during the pause period are queued and scans resume as normal To pause automatic scanning you must change the EDLM mode ona partition as follows 1 Log on as an administrator 2 From the Web client select Operations gt Partitions gt Change Mode The Change Partition Mode screen appears Change Partition Mode Select the mode for the Partitions Note Taking a Partition offline may affect all current backup operations in that Partition a hp_lto4 ES part_hp_lto5 3 Under EDLM Mode the Current column displays one of the following e Not Configured EDLM policies have not been configured on the partition e Active EDLM polici
320. hile another administrator is performing the same operation Caution While you are installing a license key backup operations may be interrupted Note Ifyou have more than one license key to apply you may enter them all at the same time separated by a space or a hyphen You can enter the license key on the Setup Wizard Licensing screen and you can also use commands on the operator panel or Web client to directly enter a license key at any time after exiting the Setup Wizard You may need to refresh your Internet browser after installing a license key to see the new menus and functionality 91 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setting Customer Contact Information The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt License e From the operator panel select Setup gt Licenses E Setting Customer Contact Information Administrators can use the Web client to enter contact information into the library for the person who is the primary customer contact for the library Keep this information current to expedite the Service process When a problem occurs with the library the contact information is mailed to techsup quantum com along with Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS ticket information assuming that the default e mail notification has been configured For information on configuring the default e mail notification see C
321. i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Install the new 9U expansion module as follows 1 Prepare the rack to hold modules if you want to install your library ina rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions on installing a rackmount kit 2 Remove and replace the cover plates if appropriate Caution Before removing the control module s bottom cover plate the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Install an Additional Expansion Module above a Ifyou plan to stack the control module at the top of the library and if an expansion module will be located below it remove the control module s bottom cover plate and the expansion module s top plate If you plan to stack the control module between expansion modules remove both the top and bottom plates of the control module Also remove the top plate of the expansion module located below the control module and the bottom plate of the expansion module located above the control module If you plan to stack the control module at the bottom of the library and if an expansion module will be located above it remove the control module s top plate and the expansion module s bottom plate 347 Figure 56 Cover Plate Location After Adding an Expansion Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules t
322. ia that has been removed from the library e Media Usage Log Lists information on all media that have ever been in the library In addition you can automatically e mail any of the reports and logs to designated recipients at specified scheduled times 134 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting About the Advanced Reporting License Note To use all the features of Advanced Reporting your library firmware must be at version 580G or higher This chapter covers e About the Advanced Reporting License e Working With Advanced Reporting Reports e Configuring the Drive Resource Utilization Report e Configuring the Media Integrity Analysis Report e Using Advanced Reporting Templates e Loading and Reloading Advanced Reporting Data e Deleting Advanced Reporting Data e Saving and E mailing Report Data Files e Configuring and Viewing the Media Security Log e Viewing the Media Usage Log e Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs About the Advanced Reporting License The Advanced Reporting license applies to your entire library regardless of library size This means you only need to purchase the license once If you increase the size of your library your existing license applies to your new library configuration Scalar i500 User s Guide 135 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Working With Advanced Reporting Reports Working With Advanced Reporting Reports Configuring the Drive Resource Utilization Report
323. ibrary Managing the Network e Modify the default SNMP community string which is used as a password to authenticate GET and GET NEXT SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c messages exchanged between the library and a remote management application For more information see Modifying the SNMP Community String on page 66 e Enable or disable SNMP authentication traps which are messages indicating an authentication failure For more information see Enabling and Disabling SNMP Authentication Traps on page 67 e Download the library MIB which can be used to integrate the library with an SNMP management application For more information see Downloading the SNMP MIB on page 67 Registering External Management Applications Administrators can register transport protocols IP addresses and port numbers of external management applications to enable them to receive SNMP traps from the library By default the library ignores all SNMP SET operations so external management applications cannot register themselves to receive SNMP traps from the library After registering the transport protocols IP addresses and corresponding port numbers you can perform a test to verify that the library can send the SNMP traps to the addresses When registering external management applications to receive SNMP traps you can set the following parameters e Transport The transport protocol This should be the same as the transport protocol configured on the SNMP
324. ices controller LUNs partitions and tape drives This information can help you isolate the source of an issue such as a library device or host application You can select any configured FC I O blade in the library and display a list of associated library devices For each device you can view the command history log You can also choose to e mail the command history to a specific e mail address The log is sent as a text file attached to an e mail message Before you can e mail the command history log the library e mail account must be configured For information on setting up the e mail account see Configuring the Library E mail Account on page 92 in Configuring Your Library You cannot view command history logs from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt Command History Log Scalar i500 User s Guide 499 Interpreting LEDs Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs LEDs provide a visual indication about the status of certain library components LEDs can sometimes communicate that a problem exists when RAS tickets cannot For example an LED can indicate a firmware problem that prohibits the library from generating RAS tickets The following components of the library have LEDs Library control blade LCB FC I O blade FC I O fan blade Ethernet Expansion blade Tape drives Power supplies Some of these components may also include a fib
325. ies exceeds 65 Ibs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules Removing the Expansion To remove the expansion module Module DRI 1 Before removing a module follow the instructions in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 2 For each module that you plan to remove open the I E station and access doors of each module Caution Before unstacking the modules the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 3 Disengage the Y rails so the modules can be unstacked safely Scalar i500 User s Guide 365 Scalar i500 User s Guide POSES M A s s s 7 5y 4 ry SS Ul A LAIN 3 7 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library A O N Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up Squeeze here to release 366 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library a From the front of the library find the Y rail release mechanism which is located on the left side of the control module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place b From the rear of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism located in the interior of t
326. ifting on the latch hooks until the Ethernet Expansion blade is totally unplugged from the library s backplane 4 Slide the Ethernet Expansion blade out of the bay 5 Install the new Ethernet Expansion blade see Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 461 6 Save the library configuration see the library user s guide for instructions Administrators can power cycle individual Ethernet Expansion blades in the library You might want to power cycle an individual Ethernet Expansion blade when troubleshooting such as when resolving a Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS ticket You can only power cycle the Ethernet Expansion blade from the Web client To power cycle an Ethernet Expansion blade 1 On the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics to enter library diagnostics A message warns you that entering diagnostics will log out all other users of the same or lower privilege level 2 Click OK to agree to log all other users out The diagnostics menu bar displays 3 Select Drives gt EE Blade Control 4 Click OK to proceed The Diagnostics Ethernet Expansion Blade Control screen displays see Figure 68 on page 473 474 Viewing Ethernet Connectivity Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LEDs Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade 5 Click the Cycle button corresponding to the E
327. iguring Cleaning Slots e Ifa single partition is defined the host application is notified when the I E station has been accessed Media presence is reported to the sole defined partition as well as to the system partition when either of these partitions checks for changes in the status of the I E station For information about using the host to perform tape operations see your host application documentation Configuring Cleaning Slots Scalar i500 User s Guide Cleaning slots are used to store cleaning cartridges that are used to clean tape drives The Setup Wizard Cleaning Slot Configuration screens prompt you to enter the number of cleaning slots if any you want to designate for your library You can also access the Cleaning Slot Configuration screens directly on the operator panel and Web client Note Only slots that are licensed unassigned and empty can be used for cleaning If there are unassigned slots but no cleaning slots available make sure there are no RAS tickets for unassigned media The Setup Wizard default configuration settings include zero dedicated cleaning slots Configuring at least one cleaning slot enables the library s AutoClean feature When AutoClean is enabled the library allows you to import and export cleaning cartridges When a tape drive needs cleaning it notifies the library If AutoClean is enabled the library automatically cleans the tape drive using a cleaning cartridge loaded i
328. iguring Host Access You must map one host at a time and click Apply after configuring each host 1 Navigate to Setup gt Host Access gt Host Connections or click the Access button from the Setup Host Registration screen 2 Select drives to enable for host access described in Enabling Tape Drives for Host Access on page 162 and click Next The Setup Connection Configuration screen appears displaying two or three sections of items to map as follows e Hosts Displays all registered hosts e Partitions Partitions will only display if the control path tape drive for the partition is enabled for host access If the control path tape drive has a failover tape drive associated with it then the failover tape drive must also be enabled for host access Mapping a partition to a host allows the host send media changer commands to the partition through the control path tape drive e Devices Displays all tape drives that are enabled for host access Mapping a host to a tape drive gives the host access to the tape drive 3 Select a host The Partitions and Devices lists refresh showing the currently selected partitions and drives mapped to that host 4 Select the check boxes corresponding to partitions drives to give the host access clear the check boxes to make the partitions drives inaccessible to the host 5 Click Apply 6 Repeat the above steps on another host if desired You can modify the host name and h
329. il you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 Instructions for upgrading tape drive firmware can be found in the online help and at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocument ationDownloads SI500 Index aspx You can also find step by step instructions in your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface Caution Since tape drives restart after a firmware upgrade make sure that cartridges are not loaded in the applicable tape drives before upgrading firmware Scalar i500 User s Guide 282 Downgrading IBM LTO 4 Tape Drive Firmware Chapter 11 Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware Caution Do not turn off power to the library during the upgrade process Turning off power to the library during the upgrade can cause problems with the library Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation You cannot upgrade tape drive firmware with an image file from the operator panel The path to the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Tools gt Drive Operations
330. ile o In the Client Certificate Password field type the password used when you generated the certificate files g Ifyou used the same password for the client and admin certificates you can select the Use Admin s Password check box For KMIP Key Manager a Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File b Click Browse to retrieve the Client Certificate File c Inthe Client Certificate Password field type the password used when generating the certificate files Click Apply to import the files onto the library Verify that the table at the bottom of the screen is present and contains the required TLS certificates 179 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Step 5 Running EKM Path Diagnostics Perform EKM Path Diagnostics as described in Using EKM Path Diagnostics on page 183 Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption Encryption on the Scalar i500 tape library is enabled by partition only You cannot select individual tape drives for encryption you must select an entire partition to be encrypted Configure the partitions as follows 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration The Setup Encryption Partition Configuration screen appears see Figure 27 Note Your screen might look slightly different depending on which encryption system you are using
331. ily accessible Caution The control module and each expansion module that contains drives must have at least one power supply for every four drives You can add a redundant power supply to each module Installing one power supply in one module and another power supply in another module does not provide redundant power the two power supplies must reside in the same module 22 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components The power system consists of the following components e Power supply e AC power cord The power supply has three light emitting diodes LEDs that provide status information These LED status indicators are green and blue in color e Green represents AC OK or DC OK Blue represents swap mode power status Figure 7 shows the power supply LEDs For more information on the behavior of the LEDs see Power Supply LEDs on page 508 23 Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components Figure 7 Power Supply LEDs 1 LEDs The library control blade LCB manages the entire library including the operator panel and picker assembly and is responsible for running system tests to ensure that the library is functioning properly The LCB also provides internal communication to Fibre Channel FC I O blade slots The LCB has four Ethernet ports supporting a total of four FC I O blades in the library The LCB indicates its status with three LED Reliability Availa
332. ine and not used for testing until brought back online manually This operation allows testing the drive with a known good tape cartridge to determine whether the problems detected by the drive are legitimate or possibly due to a problem with the drive itself If this occurs the library will issue a RAS ticket directing you to test the tape drive To test the drive 1 Select Tools gt Drive Operations The Tools Drive Operations screen opens Tools Drive Operations Select the desired operation from the list below Update tape drive firmware using a firmware image file Retrieve tape drive log Retrieve tape drive sled log Clean tape drive Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling Force data path failover Force control path failover Perform EDLM drive test Scalar i500 User s Guide 235 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans 2 Select Perform EDLM Drive Test and click Next The EDLM Drive Test screen appears EDLM Drive Test lf an EDLM drive reports a suspicious number of errors within a given time period it will be taken offline and not used for testing until brought back online manually This operation allows testing the drive with a known good tape cartridge to determine whether the problerns detected by the drive are legitimate or possibly due to a problern with the drive itself Select the drive to test Drives will only be available for
333. information on viewing and resolving RAS tickets see About RAS Tickets on page 481 Once the port has been repaired you can enable it Details on enabling a repaired target port include 121 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades e The Setup Host Port Failover screen displays all the I O blades found in the library I O blades are listed by the following location in the library WWNN Web client only and status state You can select the I O blade that had a failed target port and proceed to the next screen e Inthe Physical Ports section of the Web client screen check the State Failure Type and Intervention columns for the port that failed Note If you are using the operator panel user interface select the Port Info button to view the physical ports information e If the link is down or has an error the port s state is offline a failure type is indicated and the Intervention is Fix Link You must repair the failed port using information in the RAS ticket that was generated for the host port failover You can then return to this screen and enable the repaired port After you fix the problem the Intervention is Enable Failover and the Enable button becomes available Click Enable to make the port available for another failover or for reconfiguration as the active port e Once the error is corrected and the link is enabled the port s state is online and the Interv
334. ing Scalar i500 User s Guide 27 Figure 9 FC I O Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Back Panel Components 1 FC ports to host s 2 FC ports to drive s 3 LEDs blue amber green Each FC I O blade is cooled by a fan blade that is installed next to the FC I O blade in the expansion module For information on installing the fan blade see Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 Figure 10 shows the FC I O fan blade including the LED The single amber LED represents health status For more information on the behavior of the FC I O fan blade LED see Tape Drive LEDs on page 505 28 Figure 10 FC I O Fan Blade Chapter 1 Description Robotic System and Barcode Scanner 1 LED amber Robotic System and Barcode Scanner Scalar i500 User s Guide The robotic system identifies and moves the cartridges between the storage slots tape drives and the I E station The robotic arm picker has picker fingers that enable it to grab tape cartridges and move them into positions along X Y and Z motion coordinates The robotic system and the barcode scanner work together to identify the locations of resources within the library Each tape cartridge must contain a barcode that the barcode scanner reads during the inventory process During the inventory process the 29 Chapter 1
335. ink is ready to transmit commands The fibre port link LED ona tape drive is located on the rear of the tape drive beside the fibre port Use Table 17 to interpret FC link activity Table 17 Fibre Port Link Status LED Color Represents Fibre Port Link Status Green Loop initialization e Solid ON Loop initialization protocol LIP has protocol LIP and occurred ay e Blinks at regular intervals Host command data activity is occurring Amber Online and light detected Solid ON The library has enabled the tape drive data bus and it can detect light through a fibre optic cable No color No activity or no light e Solid OFF Either the tape drive is off or the tape drive detected cannot detect light through a fibre optic cable which is equivalent to a missing fibre cable If the tape drive is offline the tape drive s blue status LED will be solidly lit Scalar i500 User s Guide 507 Power Supply LEDs Table 18 Power Supply Status Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs RAS tickets typically report all problems related to power supplies You can also observe the blinking pattern of LEDs on power supplies to see if the they are functioning appropriately Power supply LEDs indicate status by the rate at which they blink The color of the LED identifies the area of the component being reported Use Table 18 to interpret power supply activity LED Color and
336. installing the LCB Prepare the library for use as follows 1 Unpark the robot assembly a Gently raise the robot assembly so that it no longer rests on the parking tab Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot b With your free hand move the parking tab in a clockwise direction until it stops in the unparked position When in the correct position the parking tab is removed completely from the interior of the module and will not accidentally swing into the path of the robot c Gently release the robot assembly It will lower to the bottom module of the library 336 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration 1 Parking tab in unparked position Close the library s I E station and access doors 3 Add the tape drives to the modules For details see Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 If your library contains FC I O blades install both the I O blades and the accompanying fan blades in the expansion module For details see and Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade on page 454 337 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Exp
337. integrity check medium integrity checks Someone may WORM medium failed have tampered with the cartridge Scalar i500 User s Guide 539 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions No Flag Severity Recommended Application Client Message Probable Cause 60 WORM medium overwrite attempted W An attempt had been made to overwrite user data on a WORM medium 1 Ifa WORM medium was used inadvertently replace it with a normal data medium 2 Ifa WORM medium was used intentionally a Check that the software application is compatible with the WORM medium format you are using b Check that the medium is bar coded correctly for WORM The application software does not recognize the medium as WORM 61 64 Reserved Media Recognition System MRS is a method where pre defined stripes are placed at the beginning of the media to identify the media The MRS stripes are read to determine if the media is of data grade Data grade media should be used in SCSI streaming devices since it is of the required quality and consistency to be used to store data i e audio video grade media should not be used Scalar i500 User s Guide 540 Glossary gt Scalar i500 User s Guide 1U 2U 3U etc Racks manufactured for mounting computer hardware often define vertical space as units The components that are mounted in the racks are defined by how many units of rack
338. ion module is at the bottom of the existing library configuration except for the 41U where recommended placement is on top Installing the new expansion module at the bottom of the existing library configuration will logically assign slot numbering within the library Expansion Module Control Module Expansion Module Expansion Module Expansion Module 339 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Warning Al libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a 5U control module weighs approximately 60 lbs 27 2 kg A 9U expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 lbs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules Preparing to Install an Prepare to install an additional expansion module as follows Additional Expansion Module
339. is In Progress e Not Configured You requested a Quick Scan only so the tape was not scanned Stopped Scalar i500 User s Guide 233 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Item Description Tape Scan One of the following Analysis e Good e N A V O Blade Component Failure Failed to retrieve scan data Unexpected EOD Possibly corrupt CM Unformatted tape Failed to read tape data Un recovered read errors on the tape Corrupt data format Tape experienced a mechanical error Tape performance is severely degraded Unable to load tape Unable to unload tape Tape is a cleaning cartridge CM fault detected Unknown media type detected Scan operation interrupted and ended Drive does not report media presence Tape is encrypted Tape is blank Block size exceeds maximum Tape is a FUP tape Drive CM read failed Scalar i500 User s Guide 234 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans 4 To send a copy of the test session report via e mail type an address in the Send field and click the Send button Note In order to send an e mail e mail notifications must be set up on the library Setup gt Notifications gt E mail Configuration 5 To update the screen with the current status click Refresh Testing Suspect EDLM If an EDLM drive reports a suspicious number of errors within a given Drives time period it will be taken offl
340. iseesrereeriieriss eristeen esiaren ensenis eetos 116 Host Mapping Vs Channel Zoning ss sssesiesesresrsesierierrsrresrrreressrese 117 Configuring Host Mapping ee esessesssessssreeresrrsresrssreesisnesnenrerrsnesnes 118 Configuring FC Host Port Failover ccccessesesesessetetseeeeeeesseeenenenesees 119 Repairing and Enabling a Failed Target Port eee 121 Working With Data Path Conditioning cccccceeseeesesesesteseeeenens 123 Configuring Library Security Settings 0 ieee eeeeeeeeeneseeeeeneneneneees 124 Configuring the Internal Network cccccecesseseseseseseeeeseeseseseseeenenenees 125 Configuring System Settings 0 0 cceeseceesssesescseseeseseseseseseseseseseneaeseseees 126 User Session Timeout Minutes 0 ee eeeesseeeeeeeeeceeeeseseeeeteeaeeeees 126 Tape Drive Logical SN Addressing cccecssesescseseeesteeeceeesesssnenenens 127 Manual Cartridge Assignment 0 0 0 0 cesses ceeeeeeeneteteeseene tenes 128 Disable Remote Service User csccssssseesssessseenessseseensteseeseeeeeeecesenens 128 Enable SS Lis cates steed de eena E sets E coevestions 128 Enable SNMP VI V 2 rennene eas 129 EMA DIO IPy6 eiieeii ieena enari i ar te a E A Ei eiis 129 Enable SMI S serie iaria arere e eE EE e REE ASER 129 Unlabeled Media Detection cccccccssesessesssseesssseenstseseeeeeesecesenens 129 AUtO Wicket CLOSURES reier re E E EE 131 Configuring the Library for FIPS nse rssessesesreorerssrerrresr
341. ition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 Note If your library has zero I E station slots you will not be able to manually clean tape drives See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface 260 Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Tape Drive Operations The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Tools gt Drive Operations gt Clean a tape drive From the operator panel select Tools gt Drive Mgmt gt Clean drive About Tape Drive Operations Scalar i500 User s Guide You can perform the following tape drive operations Upgrade tape drive firmware using a firmware image file For more information see Using an Image File to Upgrade Tape Drive Firmware on page 282 Retrieve tape drive logs Tape drive logs can be retrieved from any tape drive installed in the library For more information see Retrieving Tape Drive Logs on page 495 Retrieve tape drive sled logs Tape drive sled logs can be retrieved from any sled installed in the library For more information see Retrieving Tape Drive Sled Logs on page 496 Clean tape drives Tape drive can be cleaned manually at any time
342. itten on the suspect cartridge Media tests cannot be performed from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics gt Drives gt Media Tests 515 Ethernet Expansion Blade Control Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Drive Diagnostics The Ethernet Expansion Blade Control menu allows you to perform the following functions e Power Cycling the Ethernet Expansion Blade e Removing an Ethernet Expansion Blade from the Library s Configuration Power Cycling the Ethernet Expansion Blade Administrators can power cycle individual Ethernet Expansion blades in the library You might want to power cycle an individual Ethernet Expansion blade when troubleshooting such as when resolving a Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS ticket From the EE Blade Control screen click the Cycle button corresponding to the Ethernet Expansion blade you want to power cycle Note Power cycling an Ethernet Expansion blade may cause key exchange failures if FIPS is enabled It takes approximately 1 minute to power cycle an Ethernet Expansion blade The status displays as Booting during the power cycle You can only power cycle the Ethernet Expansion blade from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics gt Drives gt EE Blade Cont
343. ive online a From the Operations menu select Drive gt Change Mode The Change Drive Mode screen appears b Locate the tape drive that you want to take online c Inthe New column click Offline to change the button status to Online Check the tape drive s LEDs to make sure that the drive functions correctly see Tape Drive LEDs on page 505 If the blue or amber LED stays on solid reseat the tape drive Add the new tape drive to an appropriate partition You cannot use the tape drive until it is assigned to a partition If necessary upgrade tape drive firmware by following the instructions provided in Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware on page 278 The library can use the tape drive immediately after the firmware is upgraded Due to the way the library logically addresses its tape drives internally see Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 adding a tape drive to the library may change the tape drive ordering and this can affect proper communication to a controlling host Because of this you must refresh the configuration of any backup application that manages the library to reflect the 439 Permanently Removing a Tape Drive Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives adjusted tape drive positions and the presence of the new drive In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detec
344. ives internally see Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 permanently removing a tape drive from the library may 440 Removing and Replacing a Tape Drive Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives change the tape drive ordering and this can affect proper communication to a controlling host Because of this you must refresh the configuration of any backup application that manages the library to reflect the adjusted tape drive positions and the presence of the new drive In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detect the changes These instructions explain how to remove a tape drive and replace it with anew one You may need to replace a tape drive if you are experiencing problems with one that is currently in use You can remove a tape drive while the library is powered on Do not however remove a tape drive that is currently in use The new tape drive replaces the old tape drive in the partition You do not need to delete the old tape drive or add the new tape drive to the partition unless the replacement tape drive is of a different type generation interface or vendor than the original If the original tape drive is ina partition and the replacement tape drive is of a different type the library generates a RAS ticket will not activate the tape drive If this happens you must either repla
345. l it is recommended that you use the setup wizard to manually reconfigure the library It is not recommended to use the restore configuration tool to restore the previous settings Doing so will completely reinstall the former library firmware level and potentially any defective configuration settings encountered prior to installing the new LCB compact flash card combo If you do restore a previous configuration and downrev firmware you will need to install the latest version of firmware again These instructions explain how to replace the LCB while reusing the existing LCB compact flash card Required tools None 1 2 3 Power off the library Access the back of the library and locate the existing LCB Disconnect all cables from the existing LCB You may want to label each cable that is connected to the existing LCB to make sure that you can correctly reconnect them to the new LCB Remove the existing LCB from the library To remove the existing LCB release both of the LCB latch hooks and using the latch hooks as handles pull the entire LCB toward you Remove the existing LCB compact flash card from the existing LCB 412 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card 1 LCB compact flash card 6 Insert the existing LCB compact flash card into the new LCB 7 Insert the new LCB with existing LCB co
346. l libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Preparing to Install a Required tools Multi Module Library Scalar i500 User s Guide Phillips 2 screwdriver for removing and replacing the top cover plate T10 TORX screwdriver for removing and replacing the bottom cover plate Prepare the rack to hold modules if you want to install your library in a rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions on installing a rackmount kit Make sure all tape drives have been removed from all of the modules you plan to install See Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 for instructions on removing tape drives Make sure all power supplies have been removed from all of the modules you plan to install See Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 for instructions on removing power supplies Park the robot assembly in the control module Before unstacking the library the robot assembly must be placed in the control module a Open th
347. l number e System firmware version number e Date and time of last firmware update e Current date and time From the operator panel About screen you can also navigate to other screens for detailed information about e the network IP addresses e tape drives e partitions The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Reports gt About gt Scalar i500 e From the operator panel select Tools gt About Library Scalar i500 User s Guide 266 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing the System Information Report Viewing the System Information Report The System Information Report contains information on the following library settings Date and time current date time and time zone settings Physical library host name Internet Protocol IP address es serial number firmware version board support package BSP level the date the BSP was last updated and robot firmware version Encryption this section displays only if encryption key management is licensed and configured on the library key server type encryption software version SSL connection enabled disabled primary host primary key server IP address or host name primary key server port number primary key server serial number secondary host secondary key server IP address or host name secondary key server port number secondary key server serial number Library Partitions name s
348. lade LEDs 451 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades 7 Make sure cover plates are installed over any unused bays in the expansion module Caution Bays that are not populated with blades must contain a cover plate If the cover plate is not installed FC I O blade temperature errors will occur 8 Cable the library as described in Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected to Fibre Channel I O Blades on page 308 9 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Removing an FC I O These instructions explain how to remove an FC I O blade from your Blade library You can remove an FC I O blade while the library is powered on Note The library will generate a RAS ticket when you remove the I O blade If you do not want the library to generate a RAS ticket you can power down the I O blade before removing it See Controlling FC I O Blade Power on page 263 Required tools None 1 Access the back of the expansion module containing the FC I O blade 2 Tag and disconnect all FC cables from the FC I O blade Caution Handle the FC cables with care They will be damaged if they are bent at more than a four inch arc 3 Lift the latch hooks out of the locked position and push them up You will feel the FC I O blade unplug from the expansion module s backplane 4 Contin
349. ledge a comprehensive repository of product support information Sign up today at http www quantum com osr StorageCare Guardian Securely links Quantum_hardware and the diagnostic data from the surrounding storage ecosystem to Quantum s Global Services Team for faster more precise root cause diagnosis StorageCare Guardian is simple to set up through the internet and provides secure two way communications with Quantum s Secure Service Center More StorageCare Guardian information can be found at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Services Guardian Information Index aspx Quantum Vision Quantum Vision management software provides industry leading administration and helps users make informed decisions about their growing backup needs Vision software saves users time and increases data security by giving users centralized global monitoring and reporting for their for all their Quantum DXi Series disk systems and Quantum tape libraries More StorageCare Vision information can be found at http www quantum com products Software quantumvision In dex aspx 8 Preface For further assistance or if training is desired contact Quantum Customer Support Center United States 800 284 5101 toll free 949 725 2100 EMEA 00800 4 782 6886 toll free 49 6131 3241 1164 APAC 800 7826 8887 toll free 603 7953 3010 For worldwide support http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Index aspx
350. liant IBM LTO 3 SCSI and Fibre Channel e RoHS compliant HP LTO 4 Fibre Channel and SAS e RoHS compliant IBM LTO 4 SCSI Fibre Channel and SAS e HP LTO 5 Dual Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive e HP LTO 5 Single Port SAS Tape Drive IBM LTO 5 Single Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive e LTO 5 Dual Port SAS Tape Drive e LTO 6 Single Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive e LTO 6 Dual Port SAS Tape Drive Supported SAS Cable SFF 8088 Library Robot Control Logical Unit Number LUN Connectivity Native drive interface Power 350W with optional redundant power supply and line cord Library Management e Operator panel touch screen e Web client e SNMP protocol e SMI S protocol Scalar i500 User s Guide 525 Appendix A Library Specifications Library Capacity Library Capacity Library capacity is as follows Note Slot counts in this user s guide do not include five inaccessible slots in the bottom row of any library configuration For more information about these slots see Unused Slots on page 247 5U 14U 23U 32U 41U Maximum Available 41 133 225 317 409 Storage Slots Including I E Station Slots I E Station Slots 0 6 0 6 12 18 0 6 12 0 6 12 18 0 6 12 18 Available 18 24 30 24 30 36 42 24 30 36 42 48 54 Maximum Drive 2 6 10 14 18 Capacity Maximum Power 2 4 6 8 10 Supplies Maximum Partitions 2 6 10 14 18 Maximum FC I O 0 2 4 4 4 Blades Sc
351. license must be installed on the library sufficient to cover all the tape drives you intend to use for Ethernet operations A Storage Networking license must be installed on the library sufficient to cover all the tape drives you intend to use for Ethernet operations 5U libraries do not support an Ethernet Expansion blade For 5U libraries connect the HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drive to one of the internal Ethernet ports on the library control blade see Figure 63 on page 461 In libraries that are greater than 5U it is recommended that all HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drives be connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade The Ethernet Expansion blade is provided as part of your FIPS compliant solution when you purchase 8 Gb Storage Networking tape drives The Ethernet Expansion blade is not in the data path and does not affect tape drive control paths Each Ethernet Expansion blade has six Ethernet ports to allow you to attach up to six HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drives Do not attach tape drives of any other type to the Ethernet Expansion blade Do not connect the Ethernet Expansion blade to an external Ethernet source The Ethernet Expansion blade is for internal Ethernet connectivity within the library The Ethernet Expansion blade must be installed in the bottom left vertical bay in an expansion module The empty bay to the right of the Ethernet Expansion blade must be covered by a cover plate Libraries may contain
352. ling Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack Component Description Quantity Large ferrule Usedin 10 8 M AN racks with square holes required W j 2 spares Thumbnut Secures 8 the rack shelves to the rack M5 thumbscrew 4 SP Secures the rack ears Rack ear left Holds 1 the modules in the rack Scalar i500 User s Guide 419 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack Component Description Quantity a Rack ear right Holds 1 E the modules in the rack Rack shelf left 1 Secures the modules in the rack Rack shelf right 1 Secures the modules in the rack Scalar i500 User s Guide 420 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack Table 10 Rack Ear Kit Contents ae Quantity Component Description Required Nut clip Used in 4 racks with square holes Cage nut Used in 4 racks with round holes M5 thumbscrew 4 2 Secures the rack ears A a Rack ear left Holds 1 the modules in the rack Scalar i500 User s Guide 421 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack Quantity Component Description Required Rack ear right Holds 1 the modules in the rack aAA lt SD 2 Remo
353. ling multiple tape drives with the library powered on do not push the drive in all the way yet Instead push it in almost all the way leaving it out approximately 3 inches so that it does not connect with the library s backplane Then partially insert all of the other new tape drives in the same manner When all the new tape drives are partially inserted push them all the way in at the same time 438 Scalar i500 User s Guide 4 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives Tighten the tape drive s thumbscrews to secure the tape drive to the module The thumbscrews must be aligned with the module s screw holes If they are not aligned the tape drive was not inserted correctly 5 Power on the library if it is not powered on already 6 If the green LED is solidly lit for three seconds and then blinks twice wait 10 15 minutes while the universal drive sled UDS firmware upgrades There are two types of firmware related to the tape drive firmware for the tape drive itself and firmware for the UDS that surrounds the tape drive The UDS firmware is part of the library firmware The library automatically upgrades the UDS firmware if the firmware on the newly inserted UDS is different than the library s current UDS firmware Firmware downloads may take about 15 minutes 7 Connect the host interface cables to the tape drive 10 11 12 Take the tape dr
354. llowing If your library is Do this 5U Perform Cabling a 5U Library for Ethernet Connectivity on page 460 14U or larger Perform Cabling the Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 468 5 Power on the library 6 Install Storage Networking and Encryption Key Management licenses on the library if they are not already installed 7 Enable FIPS mode see Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape Drives on page 201 Scalar i500 User s Guide 200 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management FIPS Certified Encryption Solution Enabling and Disabling To operate your HP LTO 5 or LTO 6 Fibre Channel tape drives to be FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 compliant with FIPS you must enable FIPS mode FIPS mode is and LTO 6 Tape Drives configured by partition You enable FIPS mode on a partition which enables FIPS mode on all of the tape drives in the partition To change FIPS mode for a partition 1 On the library web client select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration The Setup Encryption Partition Configuration page displays see Figure 28 on page 201 Change the Encryption Method of a partition to Enable Library Managed 2 Select the FIPS check box to enable FIPS mode for the partition Clear the FIPS check box to disable FIPS mode for the partition 3 Click Apply Figure 28 Enabling FIPS Mode Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up EKM encryption for library partitions Note
355. longing to a partition have been accounted for numbering continues to the top left slot in the next module above as long as it is in the same partition The numbering can get tricky when partitions span modules and do not use all of the slots in a module Tape cartridge slots are assigned a logical element address whether they contain a cartridge or not Cartridges themselves are not given a logical element address only the slot is Slot element addresses change when slots are added or removed partitions are added removed or modified or cleaning slots are added or removed IE station slots are numbered differently from partitions Numbering begins at the top I E station slot in the uppermost module that contains I E station slots and continues sequentially downward This top slot has element address 16 The slot beneath that is 17 and so on 36 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Understanding Logical Element Addressing Cleaning slots belong to the System partition and are not reported to the host Cleaning slots are skipped they are not given a logical element address so adding or removing a cleaning slot will renumber all of the slots in a partition Generally host software easily recognizes logical slot element addresses even when they change The next time the host issues a READ ELEMENT STATUS command it will process the new number and recalculate all of the slot addresses See Figure 12 on page 38 for
356. ly be disabling for a short time and then changing back to Enable Library Managed just to trigger the key generation process so this should have little effect unless you forget to turn it back to Enable Library Managed 4 Wait 3 minutes to allow the changes to complete 5 Go back to the encryption partition configuration screen and change the partition back to Enable Library Managed Again make sure to apply the changes 6 Wait for the process to complete before resuming library operations 7 Back up both SKM servers You must back up both SKM servers every time you generate new data encryption keys to protect your data in case of catastrophic server failure See the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for instructions on backing up the SKM servers Scalar i500 User s Guide 191 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges If you are using SKM you can share encrypted tapes with other companies and individuals who also use SKM for managing encryption keys Each SKM server provides a unique encryption key for each tape cartridge that is encrypted To read an encrypted tape in a library that is attached to an SKM server that is different than the server that originally provided the encryption key the encryption key from the originating i e source SKM server needs to be shared with the receiving i e desti
357. m Settings Date amp Time Register Library e Update Library Firmware Diagnostics Administrators only Available only when the library contains I O blades Scalar i500 User s Guide Table 2 lists the operator panel menus Some menu commands are available only to administrators I O blade menu items are available for libraries that contain I O blades 47 Table 2 Operator Panel Menus Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees Setup Menu Operations Menu Tools Menu e Partition Mgmt Create Partition Delete Partition e Configure I E Station Slots e Configure Cleaning Slots e User Mgmt e Create User e Modify User e Drive Settings e Fibre e SCSI e SAS e Notification e E mail Alerts e E mail Account e Customer Contact e Licenses e Date amp Time e Network Mgmt e IP version 4 e IP version 6 if enabled e Port Settings e Control Path e Move Media e Import Media Export Media e Import Cleaning Media e Export Cleaning Media e Change Partition Mode e Load Drive e Unload Drive e Change Drive Mode e Lock Unlock I E Station e Shutdown All RAS Tickets e Capture Snapshot Drive Mgmt e Clean drive e Reset drives Drive Info e About Library e Network Info e View Drive Info e Partition Info e Internal Network e System Settings e User Session Timeout minutes Touch Screen Audio e Unload Assist e Logical SN Addressing
358. m and before upgrading firmware This allows you to restore the most current settings if necessary This operation saves your current library configuration and library firmware Save your library configuration when it is ina known working state In the event of a hardware failure the saved configuration can be used to restore the configuration after hardware repairs are made Before initiating a firmware upgrade you should save the library configuration You then have the option to restore the configuration after either a successful or an unsuccessful upgrade The Save Restore Configuration operation is available only on the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the Web client select Tools gt Save Restore Configuration Restoring the Library You can restore the library s configurable items to a previous state using Configuration and Library a saved configuration file If you updated the library firmware since last Firmware saving the configuration the library automatically restores the library firmware to the version that was saved with the configuration You can also downgrade library firmware to an earlier version using the Tools gt Update Library Firmware command Note that you will lose all your current library configuration information except for network settings date and time and license keys You can restore the other configurable items using a configuration file that was save
359. manufacturing date format YYYYMMDD e Type Media type e Mounts Cartridge mount count e RRE Recovered read errors e URE Unrecovered read errors e RWE Recovered write errors e UWE Unrecovered write errors Scalar i500 User s Guide 144 Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs e LW Cartridge lifetime MB written e LR Cartridge lifetime MB read Enc Cartridge encryption status U Unknown E Encrypted N Not Encrypted To view save or e mail the report select Reports gt Log Viewer from the Web client Select Media Usage Log from the list of logs and click Next Se NR gga ON ee oe ee ST eg a a Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs You can configure the library to automatically e mail Advanced Reporting logs and reports to specified recipients on a daily or weekly basis You can create up to 20 e mail recipients If you want to send the same recipient a different set of reports you can enter the same e mail address more than once with different reports selected for each Each entry counts as a unique recipient toward the 20 total Scalar i500 User s Guide 145 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs Note Duplicate entries are not allowed A duplicate entry means the same recipient is set to receive the exact same reports in two
360. mber e WWPN The World Wide Port Name of the host device The WWPN text box is limited to 17 lowercase alphanumeric characters and colons The WWPN must be typed in the following format 12345678 0b33ef12 e Type The appropriate host operating system e WO blades Lists the I O blades you can select for the host Modifying an FC Host Connection For each FC host connection you want to modify you can set the following parameters e Host Name The host device name e Host Port The host port number e Type The appropriate host operating system You cannot modify the WWPN If you want to change the WWPN you must delete and re create the FC host connection 115 Host Mapping Overview Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Deleting an FC Host Connection Administrators can delete connections to FC hosts without powering down the system Before deleting an FC host connection make sure the FC host is disconnected offline from the I O blade A message will appear if the FC host is online when you attempt to delete it To continue take the FC host offline or disconnect the FC host from the I O blade wait for the FC host to go offline and then continue to delete the FC host connection Note If the host application is connected through an FC switch a power cycle of the I O blade might be required to make the host go offline For instructions
361. mmended although not required that the FC I O blade s used for EDLM scanning drives have only EDLM scanning drives attached and recommended that the blade not be connected to a host Otherwise the host will have access to the EDLM drives For this reason we strongly discourage using the same FC I O blade for EDLM drives and host connected 4 Gb s SNW drives If this must be done the FC T O blade must be channel zoned to prevent host access to the EDLM scanning drives Tape drives in the EDLM library managed partition will only be used for EDLM scanning purposes An EDLM library managed partition can be composed of a mix of licensed and unlicensed slots Unlicensed slots will be used first but if the size of a newly configured EDLM partition exceeds the number of available unlicensed slots then the empty licensed slots will be used Standard tape drive cleaning policies apply to the tape drives in the EDLM library managed partition You can set up EDLM scanning policies on the EDLM library managed partition If you plan to use the EDLM partition to scan tapes encrypted using library managed encryption you will need to configure this partition for library managed encryption so that it can request the correct encryption keys from the encryption key servers Without the proper encryption keys the EDLM scanning drives cannot perform normal or full scans on encrypted tapes Select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuratio
362. mpact flash card into the vacant LCB slot on the back of the library When inserting the new LCB into the slot be sure that the LCB LEDs are located at the top of the blade and that the latch hooks are on the right side of the blade When sliding the new LCB into the slot there should be no resistance Caution Do not force the LCB into the slot or damage may occur Scalar i500 User s Guide 413 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies 8 After inserting the new LCB secure it into the control module by depressing both of the LCB latch hooks into the blade The LCB will fit snugly into its slot 9 Reconnect all cables to the new LCB 10 Power on the library The green power light on the front panel turns on The screen may remain dark for up to 5 minutes Then an Initialization In Progress screen displays 11 Check the status of the LCB LEDs All of its LEDs blue amber and green should be solidly lit for a short period of time Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies Adding a Redundant Power Supply Scalar i500 User s Guide Library power is controlled at the individual power supplies and at the front panel of the library The switch on the rear of each power supply shuts down power at the input of the individual power supplies The switch on the front of the control module provides power to all control module and 9U expansion m
363. mputers or programs upon request Serviceability A RAS attribute that refers to a component that is designed to accurately diagnose and report failures as well as minimize downtime in a storage solution See also RAS Setup wizard A tool for initially configuring the library It appears the first time the user starts the library However it can be used to modify configurable items anytime after the initial configuration Sled See UDS SMI S Storage Management Initiative Specification An industry standard SMI S application programming interface API developed by SNIA that facilitates the management of multi vendor devices in a storage area networks SANs environment Snapshot A rapid point in time image of a volume created initially on the same disk as the original by duplicating metadata rather than copying the full data set Snapshots are often used to protect against data corruption viruses etc or to create test or pre production environments Snapshots are also often used as a first step for creating non disruptive point in time backups and for copying datasets to a second disk to create a full duplicate copy of the volume Snapshots are created on disk and in the same 549 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary format as the original data Snapshots are also referred to as point in time copies and as shadow copies SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The protocol governing network management and the mo
364. n Get Count The number of times the picker successfully removed a tape from the slot Get Retries The number of times the picker had to perform a recovery operation to remove a tape from the slot Put Count The number of times the picker successfully placed a tape into the slot Put Retries The number of times the picker had to perform a recovery operation to place a tape into the slot Note Get and put counts and retries are counted from the beginning of library use to the present If the LCB compact flash card is replaced the count starts over at zero The path to open the report from the Web client is Reports gt All Slots Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs Scalar i500 User s Guide The library collects specific information in log files that you can view onscreen save to your computer or e mail to a recipient The following library logs are available e Installation Verification Test Summary Log This log is saved each time you run the Installation Verification Test IVT The log saves only the information from the most recently run test If you run the 273 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs test again the new information overwrites the previous information This option presents the summary log For more information see Using the Installation Verification Test on pa
365. n Note When a partition is configured for Q EKM scan types of Normal and Full cannot be selected Scalar i500 User s Guide You cannot delete the last remaining EDLM partition if a standard partition has EDLM policies enabled To disable EDLM scanning policies on a partition select None for each of the following Scan upon import Scan based on Tape Alert and Use StorNext configuration In addition set the normal and full scan time intervals to zero For more information see Step 5 Setting Up Automatic EDLM Scanning Policies on Partitions on page 216 206 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Cleaning for EDLM Drives Cleaning for EDLM Drives Cleaning for EDLM drives must be done through the library s manual cleaning feature or automatic cleaning feature Simply inserting a cleaning tape into an EDLM drive will not initiate cleaning because EDLM drives are configured for a partial load and the drive won t load the tape to clean the drive Incomplete EDLM Scans Configuring EDLM Scalar i500 User s Guide In rare cases various operational issues could prevent an EDLM scan from properly initiating These instances will be indicated in individual EDLM scan result details as I O Blade Component Failure This message does not necessarily mean there are hardware issues with the I O blade or tape drive but may indicate logical errors within operational software for these components If these indications
366. n the following information is listed Column Indicates Active Drive Location of the current control path tape drive Active Status Ready status of the current control path tape drive Active Connected Whether the current control path tape drive is connected and has a working link Scalar i500 User s Guide 152 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Control Path Failover Column Indicates Standby Drive Location of the standby tape drive Standby Status Ready status of the standby tape drive Standby Connected Whether the standby tape drive is connected and has a working link Figure 20 Forcing Control Path Failover Force Control Path Failover Force a CPF enabled partition to fail over to the standby control path drive This operation may cause a brief interruption of host connectivity Note The standby drive must be ready and have a good host link in order to force a fail over Partition Active Drive Active Status Active Connected Standby Drive Standby Status Standby Connected 1 library_a 0 2 Ready Connected 0 1 Ready Connected 3 Select the partition on which you want to force the failover Note The standby tape drive must be ready and connected in order to force a failover 4 Click Apply The new active tape drive location displays in the Active Drive column The new standby tape drive location displays in the Standby Drive column Note If
367. n Record Saving the Configuration Administrators can use the Tools Save Configuration Record screen on Record the Web client to e mail the library configuration record You cannot save the library configuration record from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Tools gt Save Configuration Record Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration The library has many configurable items such as tape drive IDs partitions user accounts Import Export I E stations and cleaning slots In the event of a hardware failure or firmware upgrade the save and restore operations can be used to restore the library s firmware and configurable items to a previous state Note You cannot restore a saved configuration after removing or replacing a control module or expansion module After removing and or replacing the module save the library configuration for future use Note The Saving and Restoring operations should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Scalar i500 User s Guide 488 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration Saving the Library Configuration Caution Always save the library configuration after modifying a configurable ite
368. n Scalar i500 libraries Administrators have access to the entire physical library and all of its partitions and can configure the library and set up user and administrator accounts The library ships with a default administrator account The user name for the default administrator account is admin and the password is password You cannot modify or delete the user name for the default administrator account but you can modify the password If you misplace the password for the default administrator account contact Quantum Technical Support see Getting More Information or Help on page 8 Users have access to one or more assigned partitions as well as portions of the Operations and Reports menus Users cannot access the Setup and Tools menus Users can perform functions within a partition such as performing cartridge and tape drive operations but cannot set up or configure the library for example creating or deleting partitions Service has access to the entire physical library and all of its partitions as well as to a hidden Service menu that includes service and diagnostic tools Each library has only one service account Details on user privileges include The library can contain eighteen user accounts user or administrator or both including the default administrator account Eighteen user user or administrator or both sessions can be active at one time The same user can be logged in to a library from multiple remote l
369. n a cleaning slot Note If you configure zero I E station slots you will not be able to import or export cleaning cartridges using I E stations See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 Cleaning slots are not assigned to specific partitions Each partition can access cleaning cartridges located in the dedicated cleaning slots The maximum number of cleaning slots that can be configured is four To disable AutoClean configure zero cleaning slots Administrators can configure cleaning slots during the initial library configuration and at any time after that as long as unassigned slots are 78 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring I E Station Slots available If no slots are available in the library you must modify or delete a partition to free up slots For more information see Modifying Partitions on page 73 and Deleting Partitions on page 74 Administrators can also clean tape drives manually For information see Manually Cleaning Tape Drives on page 260 Note Cleaning slots are not visible to the host application To choose host based cleaning do not configure any cleaning slots and configure your host application to manage cleaning tape drives Configuring cleaning slots on the library may affect the host application See your host application documentation for information Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from differe
370. n network settings include Library Name is the network name you want to assign to the library The library name is limited to 12 lowercase alphanumeric characters and dashes DHCP defaults to enabled When DHCP is enabled the library obtains an IP address automatically If DHCP is not enabled you must manually enter an IP address default gateway and subnet mask net prefix IPv4 addresses must be entered in dot notation for example 192 168 0 1 They are limited to numeric characters and do not allow values exceeding 255 for dot separated values IPv6 addresses must be entered in the proper notation IPv6 address can be entered in the most common notation as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits 2001 0ff8 55cc 033b 1319 8a2e 01de 1374 is an example of a valid IPv6 address Also if one or more of the four digit groups contains 0000 you can omit the zeros and replace them with two colons as long as there is only one double colon used in an address Using this notation 2001 0ff8 0000 0000 0000 0000 01de 1374 is the same as 2001 0ff8 01de 1374 IP Address is the IP address of the library For IPv4 this text box is available only if DHCP is disabled Default Gateway Address is the IP address of the default gateway for your portion of the Ethernet network For IPv4 this text box is available only if DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask IPv4 only Text box is available only if DHCP is disabled Network Prefix IPv6 only
371. n of any backup application that manages the library to reflect the adjusted positions In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detect the changes Replacing the Control Module Scalar i500 User s Guide These instructions explain how to remove a control module and replace it with a control module field replaceable unit FRU You may need to replace the control module if its chassis is severely damaged Typically however only certain customer replaceable units CRUs or FRUs within the control module need to be replaced There are some configuration settings to take into account when replacing the control module e Ifyou have applied one or more license keys to the original control module you will need to replace each license key and apply it to the new control module For more information see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 e A partition with all resources in the removed module will be present with no slots or drives This partition can only be deleted There are no restrictions on where the control module can be installed in the library configuration However the recommended placement of the control module for library configurations up to 32U is on top of all installed expansion modules The recommended placement of the control 376 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module module for 41U library configurations is on top of three ex
372. n the left side of the cartridge front Barcode Label Requirements Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine readable Quantum supplied barcode labels provide the best results Barcode labels from other sources can be used but they must meet the following requirements Note Checksum characters are not supported on barcode labels e ANSI MH10 8M 1983 Standard e Font Code 39 3 of 9 e Allowable characters Uppercase letters A to Z and numeric values 0 to 9 Scalar i500 User s Guide 520 Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Supported Barcode Formats e Number of characters 5 to 16 default for LTO is 6 2 Note A maximum of 12 characters is recommended A barcode label with more than 12 characters may not be printable according to the Code 39 label specifications for the tape cartridge area to which the label is attached The effective tape cartridge barcode label length including any media ID may be limited to a maximum of 12 characters Background reflection Greater than 25 percent e Print contrast Greater than 75 percent e Ratio Greater than 2 2 e Module Minimum 254 mm 10 mil e Print tolerance 57 mm Length of the rest zones 5 25 mm 0 25 mm e No black marks may be present in the intermediate spaces or rest zones e No white areas may be present on the bars a Supported Barcode Formats Quantum supplies industry standard LTO b
373. n to lock or unlock I E station doors if this occurs Using the library lock unlock operation may affect the host application See your host application documentation for information There are three reasons the I E station door locks e The library imports or exports a cartridge from the I E station door While the library is attempting to import or export a tape from a given I E station slot only the associated I E station door is locked in the closed position All other I E station doors remain accessible On a get from an I E station slot the associated I E station door remains locked until the media has been successfully moved to its destination This allows the media to be returned to the I E station slot in the event of a put error e A user has requested that the I E station door be locked e Ifthe I E station slots are configured as storage slots the door is always locked When all I E station slots are configured as storage slots you can use the Locking and Unlocking I E station operation to unlock the I E station in the control module When the I E station is unlocked you can open the main access door on the control module This in turn unlocks all remaining I E stations in the library allowing you to access all remaining access doors in the library 262 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Controlling FC I O Blade Power The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select O
374. nation SKM server The key or list of keys if there is more than one tape is exported from the source SKM server to a file which is sent to the destination recipient Each key contained in the file is encrypted using the public key of the destination SKM server The destination SKM server provides its public key to the source SKM server as part of a native encryption certificate which the source SKM server uses to wrap encrypt the encryption keys for transport Upon arrival the file containing the wrapped encryption keys can only be unwrapped by the corresponding private key which resides on the destination SKM server and is never shared The process is as follows 1 The destination administrator exports the native encryption certificate that belongs to the destination SKM server The two SKM servers in a server pair share the same native encryption certificate The native encryption certificate is saved as a file to a location specified by the administrator on a computer see Exporting the Native Encryption Certificate on page 193 2 The destination administrator e mails the native encryption certificate file to the source administrator 3 The source administrator saves the native encryption certificate file to a location on a computer and then imports it onto the source SKM server see Importing Encryption Certificates on page 194 4 The source administrator exports the data encryption keys assigning the destination SKM ser
375. nd that the IP address port and SSL settings configured on the library are correct Check to see if there is a network configuration issue such as a firewall preventing communication with the server Config Test Failure e Q EKM Verify that the key server is set up to accept the tape drive you are testing e SKM A database inconsistency has been detected Contact Quantum Support e KMPP Key Manager Indicates a KMIP key server configuration problem The server does not support all features necessary for the library to use it as a key server Contact your KMIP server administrator for assistance There are two ways to perform EKM Path Diagnostics Using Manual EKM Path Diagnostics on page 185 Using Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics on page 186 For SKM and KMIP key management the manual and automatic diagnostics run in the same way Partitions remain online for either the Manual or Automatic diagnostics For Q EKM the Manual diagnostics differs from the Automatic diagnostics in the following ways The Manual diagnostics takes affected partitions offline during the tests When the tests complete the partitions are returned to the online offline state they were in before the tests began 184 Using Manual EKM Path Diagnostics Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library The Automatic diagnostics does not take partitions offline but it ma
376. nd tape drive must be assigned to the same partition This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to unload tape drives Using the library to unload tape drives may necessitate performing an inventory with the host application See your host application documentation for more information Details about unloading tape drives include e Only drives with media loaded appear on the screen e You can select only partitions to which you have been given access e If the affected partition is online it will be taken offline before the unload operation is performed and brought back online after it is complete Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 You need to provide the following information in the Unload Drive screens to unload tape cartridges from tape drives 252 Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations e Partition The partition containing the tape drive that you want to unload The screens include information about the partition mode online or offline e Tape drive The tape drive that contains the cartridge that you want to unload Note You can sort the list of tape drives by clicking on columns with bold heading
377. nded Data Lifecycle Management license on the library See the Scalar i500 User s Guide or online help for instructions Recommended It is a good idea to create a known good tape cartridge to have on hand in case you need to test an EDLM scanning drive A known good tape cartridge means one that is fairly new formatted fully written and that has a good cartridge memory CM This tape will provide data that is easily verifiable to help isolate media and drive issues To purchase a known good tape contact Quantum Technical Support See Testing Suspect EDLM Drives on page 235 for more information Note The default StorNext Storage Manager port number is 61776 If you changed the port on your server be sure to type the new port number into this field Step 2 Installing the EDLM Plug in for SNAPI This step is optional If StorNext Storage Manager is managing your partitions you can use it in conjunction with EDLM to automatically copy data from bad or suspect tapes or to trigger media scans If you are not using StorNext in conjunction with EDLM skip this step 208 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans In order to use StorNext for these purposes you must first install the StorNext application programming interface GNAPI client plug in on the library and then configure the library to communicate with StorNext Storage Manager The EDLM plug in for SNAPI is available fr
378. nection mode for the ports can be set to Loop Loop Preferred or Point to Point The default setting is Loop Preferred After modifying these parameters save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Port Configuration e From the operator panel select Setup gt I O Blades gt Port Configuration Scalar i500 User s Guide 110 FC I O Blade Internal Virtual Port for Media Changers Configuring FC I O Blade Channel Zoning Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades FCI O blades use an internal virtual port to access the media changer devices partitions Each FC I O blade can access all media changer devices except those that are defined in association with drive based access also known as LUN 1 The Scalar i500 library can have up to 18 partitions These internal virtual ports are not configurable via channel zoning thus all media changer devices are accessible via ports 1 and 2 of each FC I O blade present within the library This may lead to one or more media changer devices being discovered multiple times depending on how the system is connected to host servers for example if four partitions are defined in a system that has two FC I
379. need to enable host port mapping and configure host mapping For more information see Configuring Host Mapping on page 118 Note When Fibre Channel port 2 is selected to be the active port ina host port failover configuration the active port can switch to the default setting port 1 following a reboot Reconfigure the host port failover settings so that the intended port is the active port For information on configuring FC I O blade ports and channel zoning see Configuring FC I O Blade Ports on page 110 and Configuring FC I O Blade Channel Zoning on page 111 The library generates a Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS ticket when port failover occurs Examine the ticket to determine the reason for the failover When the failed port is repaired the port must be re enabled to make it available for host port failover as the standby or active port For more information see Repairing and Enabling a Failed Target Port on page 121 120 Repairing and Enabling a Failed Target Port Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Details on configuring host port failover include e The Setup Host Port Failover screen displays all the FC I O blades found in the library FC I O blades are listed by the following location in the library WWNN Web client only and status state You can select the FC I O blade you want to configure for host port fail
380. nel Operations gt System Shutdown This lowers the robot to the shipping position on the floor of the library 3 Follow instructions on the operator panel screen Turn off library power by pressing the power button on the front panel 5 Turn off the power to each power supply on the back of the library 6 Install the orange robot restraint assembly that secures the robot to the floor of the library The robot restraint assembly was part of the packaging that originally came with the library Remove all cords and cables from the rear of the library 478 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing the Library for Moving or Shipping 8 Remove all tape cartridges from the library 9 Remove the tape drives from the library to decrease the weight when lifting the modules Warning Without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies a control module weighs approximately 60 Ibs 27 2 kg An expansion module without tape drives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 Ibs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules 10 If rack mounted remove one module at a time from the rack Retain the rack mounting hardware and shelves for use in the new location 11 Place the module in the bottom of the shipping carton 12 Reinstall the tape drives in the module 13 Complete the packing For further details see the Unpacking
381. nformation that can help you troubleshoot the problem See Viewing RAS Tickets on page 482 for more information Library Not Ready messages continue to display in the header as well as on the About Library screen until the issue has been resolved and the robot has completed its calibration Note You may not see the Library Not Ready message in the Web client until the browser refreshes Similarly even if the problem has been resolved the Library Not Ready message will not disappear from the Web client until the browser refreshes a Duplicate Devices Discovered If both target ports ports 1 and 2 on an FC I O blade are connected to the same host or if more than one host is connected to a target port you may see duplicates of all the devices connected to the initiator ports ports 3 6 of that FC I O blade To prevent this from happening you can do either or both of the following e If only one host is connected to a target port you can use channel zoning to tell the target port which devices to see see Configuring FC I O Blade Channel Zoning on page 111 If more than one host is connected to a target port you can use host mapping to tell each host which devices to see see Configuring Host Mapping on page 118 Scalar i500 User s Guide 491 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Duplicate Media Changer Devices Discovered Duplicate Media Changer Devices Discovered You may see one or mo
382. ng cartridges include e You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to export cleaning cartridges e You can only export cartridges if empty I E station slots are available You need to provide the following information in the Export Cleaning Media screens to export cleaning media e Media The tape cartridges that you want to export The screen includes information about the number of empty I E station slots in the library The number of cleaning cartridges you can export is limited to the number of empty I E station slots The screen also displays the cleaning status usable expired and cleaning count the number of times the cartridge was used to clean a tape drive for each cleaning cartridge in the library Note You can filter the list of media by entering all or part of a barcode in the Search text box Use an asterisk to search with wildcards You can also sort the list by clicking on columns with bold headings For example selecting the Location column heading sorts the list by location coordinates The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt Cleaning Media gt Export e From the operator panel select Operations gt Export Cleaning Media For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interfa
383. ng on page 113 Note On the operator panel the host management screens Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Management are not available unless FC host mapping is enabled Note If both channel zoning and host mapping are enabled the channel zoning settings supersede any host LUN mapping on the I O blade Administrators can enable or disable the optional FC host mapping feature This feature is disabled by default When host mapping is enabled you can add modify and delete hosts as well as configure FC host mapping 113 Viewing FC Host Information Creating Modifying and Deleting an FC Host Connection Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt FC I O Blade Control From the operator panel select Setup gt I O Blades gt Blade Control The following information is provided for FC hosts e Host Name The host device name e WO Blade The location of the FC I O blade in the library Status The online offine connectivity status of the host Web client onl
384. ng the Active Key Servel ccccccseeeeeseseeenens 187 Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings ccccccsseseeesenseecseeeees 188 Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions on the Library 188 FIPS Certified Encryption Solution eee cesses eeeenesseeeeeneneeneees 199 Configuring the Library for FIPS cee eseseseseneeseseseseeseseeeees 200 Scalar i500 User s Guide vii Chapter 8 Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape Drives sects sss ceestiass nna AEE 201 Viewing FIPS Status on the Library ececcssseseseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeesenens 202 Extended Data Lifecycle Management 203 About EDLM tvcscusts ccescsausscviecsaanscsiussesvnanesssdtovenessunteiisesssnsoalvensassesdes cddvseninbdoree 204 Cleaning for EDLM Drives c i csssseisesssscetisessiseesenssdonssensseseesvenssdonesvenosiseie 207 Incomplete EDLM Scans wicsisiesssussieisssieeessecbssueutide snapetederiuevecnstbenspeteeovenenntanss 207 Config ring EDLM sis scsssesievnst irse ienn EEE Ee EE a E Ee E eai 207 Pausing EDLM Scans on Partitions sssssssssessssessssesresesnssesrsseesesresese 222 Running Manual EDLM Tests ss sssessesissesssessesiesrerrisresresresrrsresresresre 224 Working With EDLM Test Results cee eects ee eeeeeeeeteeeeenees 226 Testing Suspect EDLM Drives ccsscssssssesssssesecssensssssessessersnssnseors 235 Chapter 9 Scalar i500 User s Guide Running Your Library 237 Powering on the LALA osssnosenecee n
385. ng the Date Time and Time Zone Note For step by step date and time configuration instructions see your library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface Note The library may log you off after you change the time or time zone If this happens simply log back on The Setup Wizard Date amp Time screen allows you to set the date and time for the library You can also access the date and time setup screen by selecting Date amp Time from the Setup menu on either the operator panel or the Web client Date and time settings are used to log the date and time events take place and to set the time for automatic backup and restore functions At a minimum you should set the library s date and time as part of the initial library configuration The time is set to a 24 hour clock For example four o clock in the afternoon is entered as 16 00 The library supports the Network Time Protocol NTP NTP allows you to synchronize the library date and time with other components in your IT infrastructure Administrators can either modify the date and time zone settings manually or configure NTP If NTP is enabled the time zone and IP addresses of at least one NTP server must be configured on the library Contact your network administrator for NTP server IP address information You can use the Web client Setup Wizard Date am
386. ning and Installing a License Key on page 88 It is possible to license more slots than are physically available in the library In that case when expansion modules are added the extra licensed slots then become available for use To see your library s current configuration and slot availability open the Library Configuration Report choose Reports gt Library Configuration from the Web client Table 6 shows the number of default and available pre activated slots available for purchase and the number of slots you can activate with a COD license key for each library configuration 147 Table 6 Available Slots and COD Upgrades Per Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand Configuration 5U 14U 23U 32U 41U Minimum 41 41 41 133 41 225 41 317 41 409 Maximum Available Slots including I E station slots Default 41 41 41 41 41 Pre Activated Slots Available 41 41 87 133 41 87 41 87 133 41 87 133 Pre Activated 133 179 225 179 225 271 179 225 271 Slots 317 317 363 409 Available NA 87 133 87 133 87 133 179 87 133 179 COD Slot 179 225 225 271 317 225 271 317 Upgrades 363 409 Scalar i500 User s Guide 148 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Networking Storage Networking SNW is a licensable feature that allows you to take advantage of the control path failover data path failover and host access configuration features of 8 Gb s HP LTO 5 FC ta
387. nitoring of network devices and their functions Similar in function to SAM except SNMP governs LAN whereas SAM governs SAN SSL Secure Sockets Layer A protocol that provides encrypted communications on the Internet SSL is layered beneath application protocols such as HTTP SMTP Telnet FTP Gopher and NNTP and is layered above the connection protocol TCP IP Storage device An appliance containing data that can be accessed added to changed or deleted by the user The storage media types include tapes and optical disks A storage device can be a single disk drive or constitute thousands of tapes in a large tape library Storage slot The physical home where a data cartridge resides Subsystem status A feature that provides predictive alerts warning of any loss of connectivity or device failure using local or remote alerts Subsystem status allows administrators to correct faults before they affect backup or other data transfer operations Tape drive A device that spins disks and tapes while it reads and writes data in storage TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The communications protocol used by the Internet It runs on top of Ethernet to provide high level networking services to applications Topology The logical and or physical arrangement of stations on a network Trap An SNMP alert that is sent when predefined conditions are met For example an error trap tests for an error condition and provides
388. nly static IP configuration enable disable IPv6 only DHCP enable disable IP address subnet mask network prefix and default gateway From the Web client you can use the Setup Network screen to modify the following network settings library name Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP enable disable stateless autoconfiguration enable disable IPv6 only static IP enable disable IPv6 only IP address subnet mask IPv4 only net prefix IPv6 only and default gateway address In addition from the Web client when DHCP is disabled can configure the primary and secondary Domain Name System DNS server addresses DNS servers provide IP address resolution of fully qualified domain names DNS settings are optional If you modify the IP address you will need to type the new IP address in the Address field of your Web browser to access the Web client Note Make sure that the library is connected to the network before modifying network settings If the Ethernet cable is not installed properly you cannot configure the network settings Install one end of the Ethernet cable in the top Ethernet port of the library control blade LCB just below the three LEDs The LCB is located at the back of the control module Make sure the other end of the Ethernet cable is installed in the appropriate LAN port on your LAN 60 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network Details o
389. nning media with EDLM This partition exists solely for media scanning purposes and is not accessible to hosts or other applications Tape cartridges are moved into the EDLM library managed partition and scanned using the tape drives residing in the EDLM library managed partition When the scan is complete the cartridges are returned to their original partitions 213 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Note If you plan to use this EDLM partition to scan tapes encrypted using library managed encryption you will also need to configure this partition for library managed encryption so that it can request the correct encryption keys from the encryption key servers Without the proper encryption keys the EDLM scanning drives cannot perform normal or full scans on encrypted tapes Once you have created the partition select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration and configure the partition for library managed encryption To create the EDLM library managed partition do the following 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Partitions 2 Click Create The Create Partition Basic Settings screen appears see Figure 33 Figure 33 Creating EDLM Partitions Create Partition Basic Settings For each partition set the following Select Partition Type Library Managed EDLM Enter Name edim_b max 12 characters Enter Number of Slots 6 32 Available Select
390. nplugged You can always view closed tickets on the Web client by selecting Tools gt All RAS Tickets and clicking the Include Closed Tickets check box Tickets that were auto closed are designated as Canceled Automatic ticket closure is enabled by default You can enable or disable this feature from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings SS E a E SS ES M Capturing Snapshots of Library Information Technical support personnel may ask you to perform the Capture Snapshot operation so they can better diagnose issues The Capture Snapshot operation captures detailed information about the entire library in a single ASCII file that can be e mailed to technical support personnel The logged information consists of configuration data status information and trace logs for library components Trace logs collect problem data and provide support personnel with vital library information for troubleshooting and solving problems You can e mail the snapshot file from both the operator panel and the Web client On the Web client you can also download the Capture Snapshot file to a computer You cannot download Capture Snapshot files from the library s operator panel and you cannot print Capture Snapshot files from either the Web client or the operator panel Depending on the library configuration and your connection speed saving the Capture Snapshot
391. ns section The column displays Yes if FIPS is enabled on the partition and No FIPS is disabled e The tape drive information pop up screen on the Library Configuration Report Reports gt Library Configuration contains a FIPS Enabled item This item only displays when the tape drive is an HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drive The item displays Yes when FIPS is enabled on the drive and No when FIPS is disabled Scalar i500 User s Guide 132 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring Operator Panel Display Settings Configuring Operator Panel Display Settings You can use the operator panel Display Settings screen to adjust the operator panel s brightness and contrast settings The current applied settings appear on the screen Adjust the brightness and contrast settings by tapping the up and down arrows The Defaults button sets the brightness and contrast to the default settings You cannot configure the display settings from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt Display Settings E a E Registering the Library Registering the library activates the warranty After completing the initial setup of the library choose Setup gt Register Library on the Web client to automatically register the library The library uploads the information you entered in the Setup Contact Information screen Setup gt Notifications gt RAS gt C
392. nstalling the Library in a Rack 12 Check the status of the power supply s LEDs The top green LED and the blue LED should be solidly lit 13 Power on the library 14 Check the status of the power supply s LEDs The two green LEDs should be solidly lit and the blue LED should be off Installing the Library in a Rack Scalar i500 User s Guide All Scalar i500 libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack The rack secures the bottom module and all other modules are then secured to the bottom module The rackmount kit secures your library within a rack These instructions explain how to install your stand alone library into a rack and how to install additional modules into an existing rack Installing the modules into the rack requires at least two people Warning All libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent national standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Warning Under no circumstances should a rack be moved while loaded with one or more modules 417 Preparing for Installation
393. nt locations You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Cleaning Slots e From the operator panel select Setup gt Partition Mgmt gt Configure Cleaning Slots SSS EEE Configuring I E Station Slots Scalar i500 User s Guide I E station slots are used to import and export tape cartridges into and out of the library without disrupting normal library operations The Setup Wizard I E Station screens allow you to configure I E station slots Administrators can also configure these slots on either the operator panel or the Web client Each control module contains six I E station slots and each expansion module contains 12 I E station slots The available library configurations support a minimum of six I E slots in the 5U library to a maximum of 54 I E slots in the 41U library configuration You can also choose to 79 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring I E Station Slots configure zero I E station slots and use all slots in all 1 E stations for tape cartridge storage For more information on configuring zero I E slots see Configuring Zero I E Station Slots on page 82 Each I E station 6 slot or 12 slot is configured as a complete unit When configuring an I E station configure all the slots in the I E sta
394. o an Existing Library Module 5U 14U 23U 32U 41U cover plate cover plate NEW Expansion Module cover plate Control Control Module Module cover plate Control Expansion Expansion Module Module Module cover plate Control Expansion Expansion Expansion Module Module Module Module Control NEW Expansion NEW Expansion NEW Expansion Expansion Module Module Module Module Module cover plate cover plate cover plate cover plate cover plate Recommended location for adding an expansion module Scalar i500 User s Guide 3 Open the expansion module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module on which you are stacking it 348 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library P 0 0 04 0 ear ye Bi y4 gt e 6 8 2590959 I T a 4 p ou oo 699 gt DOM DO DOC o 1 Guide pin 2 Thumbscrew Scalar i500 User s Guide 349 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Lift the new expansion module and from the front of the library place it in the desired location If there is already a module installed secure the two modules together by tightening the two thumbscrews at the base of the front of
395. o fasten the control module on top of a 9U expansion module 381 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module 7 If you placed the control module on top of an expansion module secure the two modules by tightening the two thumbscrews at the base of the front of the module and the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Then lower the module s guide pin located at the base of the front of the module by turning it and pushing it down Stack all expansion modules if any in their original positions above the control module Use rack ears to fasten the modules to the rack Then tighten all thumbscrews located at the base of the front and back of the modules Engage the Y rails Tighten the thumbscrews and lower the guide pin Doing this aligns the Y rail with the Y rail of the module beneath it a From the front of the library open the I E station and access doors of the control module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go 382 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module 1 Y rail in unlocked functional position b From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of
396. o secure other power cords if necessary Bundle adjacent power cords together using the same hook and loop fastener Once complete power cord management for a 41U library should look similar to Figure 49 on page 319 318 Figure 49 Power Cord Management Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines 319 Managing Ethernet Cables Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cable Management Guidelines A Scalar i500 library with FC I O blades or Ethernet Expansion blades uses external Ethernet cables on the rear of the library to provide connectivity between the LCB in the control module and an expansion module The upper and lower FC I O blade Ethernet Expansion blade bays within an expansion module each have a corresponding Ethernet port on the back of the module Running an Ethernet cable between this port and one of the Ethernet hub ports on the LCB establishes Ethernet connectivity between the blade and the LCB The LCB provides ports for up to four Ethernet cables on its internal Ethernet hub This allows the library to support a total of four FC I O blades and or Ethernet Expansion blades To organize Ethernet cables on the rear of the library mount two wire saddles on the control module to route the Ethernet cable s to the right side of the library Mount a blue hook and loop fastener to each module and then secure the Eth
397. o several minutes to complete You can configure the library to re scan only the I E station slots that were identified as empty or all the slots in the library that were identified as empty The library configuration report indicates media with unreadable barcodes by displaying a red triangle in the corner of the slot The library user interface lists No_Label as the barcode for all cartridges with unreadable labels The library posts a RAS ticket T143 when an unreadable barcode label is detected As long as that ticket remains open no more T143 tickets will be issued even if more unreadable barcode labels are found An unreadable barcode label is re scanned every time the cartridge moves to a new location to check if it is readable in the new location The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows Scalar i500 User s Guide From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings From the Web client select Setup gt System Settings 130 Auto Ticket Closure Configuring the Library for FIPS Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings For information about this feature see Closing RAS Tickets Automatically on page 485 To configure your library for FIPS perform the following steps 1 Upgrade library firmware to version 600G or later 2 For all HP LTO 5 FC tape drives tha
398. ocations Clicking the close button X in the upper right corner of the Web client closes the browser window but does not log the user or administrator out 50 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface User Access All users are logged out automatically after a configurable period of inactivity The default user session timeout period is 30 minutes but administrators can change the user session timeout to a value from 15 minutes to 480 minutes eight hours See Configuring System Settings on page 126 e A screen saver is invoked after 10 minutes of inactivity on the operator panel After an hour of inactivity the screen will appear black If the user has not been logged out for inactivity touching the operator panel will reactivate it returning the user to the screen last in use The Web client does not use a screen saver e An administrator can disable any access to the library from the Web client For more information see Configuring System Settings on page 126 e When a service user logs in all other active users are automatically logged out e For security purposes an administrator can prevent a service user from logging on to the library remotely from either the Web client or over the Ethernet service port The service user will still be able to log on to the library from the operator panel interface For more information see Configuring System Settings on page 126 a a User Access Administrators h
399. odule by turning it and pushing it down Tighten all thumbscrews located at the base of the front and back of the modules Fasten the module to the rack with rack ears See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for information on installing a rackmount kit If stacking the expansion module on top of another module engage the Y rails of the new module in your library configuration Ensure that the Y rails are properly aligned and the thumbscrews are tightened 333 Scalar i500 User s Guide 7 4 ry 5y A O N dao UM Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration A LAIN 3 7 Front Y rail Rear Y rail Y rail this end up Squeeze here to release 334 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration a From the front of the library open the I E station and access doors of the expansion module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go b From the back of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism which is located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it out of its locked position and slide it downward as far as it will go Caution Check to make sure that there is no gap between the top and bott
400. odule power supplies You can also turn off library power using the Web client if necessary These instructions explain how to add a second redundant power supply to a module You may need to add a redundant power supply to the library to make sure that the library does not go down and become inaccessible if its original power supply happens to fail The library automatically uses the redundant power supply if the first power supply fails for any reason Note The control module and each expansion module with drives must use at least one power supply You can add a redundant power supply to each module Installing one power supply in one module and another power supply in another module does not provide redundant power the two power supplies must reside within the same module 414 Permanently Removing a Redundant Power Supply Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies Required tools None 1 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Locate the vacant power supply slot and remove the cover plate Save the cover plate in case the redundant power supply needs to be removed at a later date 3 Insert the new power supply into the vacant slot 4 When inserting the power supply make sure that you insert it correctly with its on off switch located at the bottom of the supply below t
401. of partitions See Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 for more details Once the SKM servers are set up most SKM functions occur automatically without user action required SKM provides some key management capability through the library Web client For a complete description and instructions for using these features see the library Web client online help These functions are e Generating Data Encryption Keys on page 189 Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 e Exporting the Native Encryption Certificate on page 193 188 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library e Importing Encryption Certificates on page 194 e Exporting Data Encryption Keys on page 194 e Importing Data Encryption Keys on page 196 e Accessing the SKM Server Logs on page 197 e Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log on page 197 Generating Data Encryption Keys Data encryption keys are generated in sets of a specified quantity see the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for more information The library tracks data encryption key usage and reminds you to generate more keys when needed If you try to generate data encryption keys on an SKM server that already has sufficient unused data encryption keys then it will not create more You will receive a message to that effect on the library remote Web client Not
402. of the 9U expansion module located below the control module and the bottom plate of the 9U expansion module located above the control module If you plan to stack the control module at the bottom of the library and if a 9U expansion module will be located above it remove the control module s top plate and the 9U expansion module s bottom plate Remove all tape drives from the expansion module that you are adding See Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives on page 438 for instructions on removing tape drives Remove the power supplies from the expansion module that you are adding See Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies on page 414 for instructions on removing power supplies Open the expansion module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module on which you are stacking it 394 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module Mai Oxer B05060 O 0 0 gt t Q O7070707070 Dani iB ve s OKOXO Ox I ad 6a0 040506 Be 1 Guide pin 2 Thumbscrew 4 Lift the new expansion module and from the front of the library place it in the desired location 395 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing an Expansion Module 5 Fasten the module to the rack with rack ears 6 S
403. olicy attempts to schedule it for scan later in the queue the scan requests will be combined and the tape will only be scanned once at the earlier time and for the longest scan length quick normal or full You cannot move media using the Operations gt Media gt Move command to or from an EDLM library managed partition You cannot delete the last remaining EDLM library managed partition if a standard partition has automatic EDLM scan policies enabled The maximum number of records returned for an EDLM scan is 500 Details about the EDLM library managed partition include You can have multiple EDLM library managed partitions in the library All tape drives in the EDLM library managed partition must be EDLM scanning drives not standard tape drives which must be purchased from Quantum These EDLM scanning drives are HP LTO 4 Fibre Channel or HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives You can have both LTO 4 and LTO 5 EDLM scanning drives in the same EDLM library managed partition An EDLM library managed partition can support any number of EDLM scanning drives within the normal support of the physical library 205 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management About EDLM e All of the EDLM scanning drives in the EDLM library managed partition must be connected to a Fibre Channel I O blade Each FC I O blade supports up to four tape drives You can use multiple FC I O blades to support the EDLM scanning drives It is reco
404. om Quantum To install the EDLM plug in for SNAPI 1 Confirm that the StorNext Storage Manager application managing your partition is supported by the Scalar i500 firmware For a list of supported external applications and their corresponding plug ins see the Scalar i500 Release Notes 2 Download the correct EDLM plug in for SNAPI bundle as follows a Go to the following Web site http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandD ocumentationDownloads SI500 Index aspx b Click the Drivers tab to view the available plug ins c Click the Download button for the plug in you want to install Download the file to an accessible location on your computer The plug in bundle is a zip file containing the following files e Client plug in End User Open Source License Agreement 3 Extract the files from the zip file 4 Read the End User Open Source License Agreement Installation of the plug in implies acceptance of the license agreement 5 From the library Web client select Tools gt EDLM gt Manage Plug ins 6 The Tools Manage EDLM Plug ins screen appears Scalar i500 User s Guide 209 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Figure 29 Installing the SNAPI Plug in Tools Manage EDLM Plug ins Install or remove EDLM plug ins Installing plug ins can enable additional EDLM features such as automated copying of bad suspect media Name Description Version In Use snapi 2 0 1 S
405. om Y rails on both the front and back of the library If a gap exists the library cannot mechanically initialize Doing this aligns the Y rails with the Y rails of the module beneath it Figure 55 Y Rail in Unlocked Functional Position 7 Repeat these steps for each expansion module you are installing Scalar i500 User s Guide 335 Installing the Control Module Preparing to Use the Multi Module Library Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Install the 5U control module as follows 1 2 3 Open the control module s I E station door and access door Lift the control module and place it in the desired location If stacking the control module on top of another module secure the two modules together by tightening the two thumbscrews at the base of the front of the module and the two thumbscrews located at the base of the back of the module Then lower the module s guide pin located at the base of the front of the module by turning it and pushing it down Tighten all thumbscrews located at the base of the front and back of the modules 5 Use the rack ears to fasten the control module to the rack 6 If not already installed install the library control blade LCB in the control module See Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card on page 402 for instructions on
406. om ports 3 through 6 have been mapped to a specific host server WWPN the devices on ports 5 and 6 cannot be accessed from that host via port 1 even though they are mapped to it only the devices on ports 3 and 4 would be accessible from the host via port 1 Host mapping can be used to control visibility of the media changer devices partitions found on the FC I O blade internal virtual port while channel zoning can be used to create simple access control to the other target devices If the host mapping capabilities are used to control visibility and access for all the LUNs channel zoning might not be necessary or desired Note On the operator panel the host mapping screens Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Mapping are not available unless FC host mapping is enabled See Enabling Disabling FC Host Mapping on page 113 117 Configuring Host Mapping Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades To configure host mapping you need to select the media changer device partition or tape drive you want to map and assign a new LUN number for the device Note Depending on host operating system constraints it might be necessary to reboot or reconfigure the host due to device mapping changes that result from configuring host mapping Details on configuring host mapping include e Host mapping is an optional feature and is disabled by default For instr
407. on Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot b With your free hand move the parking tab in a clockwise direction until it stops in the unparked position When in the correct position the parking tab is removed completely from the interior of the module and will not accidentally swing into the path of the robot c Gently release the robot assembly It will lower to the bottom module of the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 354 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library SEEPS RSA gt DD yi N Parking tab in unparked position Connect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables Make sure the module terminators are installed at the top and bottom of the stack of modules For cabling instructions see Cabling the Library on page 289 Power on the library Reconfigure the library including applying the new COD license key using the operator panel or Web client Recreate any partitions you deleted prior to installing the module 355 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module 10 Add the tape cartridges to the library
408. on for the If you want to change the control path note contains contains partition is the following One or more At least one The FCI O Using the FC I O blade as the control path allows FC I O blades FC tape drive blade you to utilize the LUN mapping and host port failover features You can select a tape drive as control path if the tape drive is not connected to an FC I O blade However it is recommended that you allow the FC I O blade to be the control path for the partition You cannot select a tape drive as control path if the tape drive is connected to an FC I O blade One or more No FC tape The first tape You must select a tape drive as the control path FC I O blades drives drive assigned to the partition Only one tape drive in a partition can be selected as the control path per partition In the event that the control path connection to the host application fails you can select a new control path for the partition Additionally if the control path for the partition is an HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drive and you have Storage Networking licensed on the library you can select another HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drive for control path failover see Configuring Control Path Failover on page 150 for details The Setup gt Control Path screens list a selected partition s tape drives including the tape drive that is currently designated as the control path You can designate a new control path for the partition
409. on how to power cycle an I O blade see Controlling FC I O Blade Power on page 263 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Management e From the Web client select Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Management Host mapping enables you to manually modify host information and set logical unit number LUN mappings and to map specific hosts to library LUN devices I O blades discover target devices that are attached to ports 3 6 as well as their internal virtual port see FC I O Blade Internal Virtual Port for Media Changers on page 111 Each of these devices has its own native logical unit number LUN that is used to address the device via the port to which it is attached These LUNs can be re mapped to new LUNs for presentation via ports 1 and 2 Further custom LUN maps can be simultaneously defined for individual hosts For example the FC I O blade may discover tape drives attached to ports 3 6 each of which report themselves at LUN 0 The FC I O blade could be configured to re map these to LUNs 1 2 3 and 4 for discovery on ports 1 and 2 If desired they could also be simultaneously mapped to LUNs 3 5 7 and 9 for a specific host server There is also an internal i e not attached to a port controller device presented at LUN 0 by default The controller device facilitates initialization and device discovery In some instances it may b
410. on page 76 3 Use the Import Media screens on either the operator panel or the Web client to import the cartridges into the partition Follow the on screen prompts or see the library s online Help for step by step procedures To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface You need to provide the following information in the Import Media screens to import media Scalar i500 User s Guide 245 Bulk Loading Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations e Partition The partition into which you want to import the cartridges The screen lists only the partitions to which you have been given access The screen includes information about the partition mode online or offline and the number of empty slots in the partition The number of cartridges you can import is limited to the number of empty slots e Media The cartridges that you want to import Note You can filter the list of media by entering all or part of a barcode in the Search text box Use an asterisk to search with wildcards You can also sort the list by clicking on columns with bold headings For example selecting the Location column heading sorts the list by location coordinates The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt Media gt Import e From the operator
411. onal standard and having a protective earth ground conductor with a cross sectional area of at least 1 5 mm 14 AWG To ensure proper airflow and access space Allow 60 cm 24 inches in the front and back of the library Note Pay attention to where the operator panel is positioned in the rack for optimum usability 1 If your library is larger than 14U install it in a rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions The instructions include procedures for removing and replacing tape drives 2 Connect the fibre cables to the tape drives a Attach one end of the fibre cable to the fibre port on each tape drive b Attach the other end of the cable to the host or switch Note The fibre cable can be connected from the tape drive to a switch rather than a host 3 Connect the module terminators Caution The module terminator is not the same as a SCSI terminator Using a SCSI terminator instead of a module terminator will damage the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 306 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library a Using the module terminators terminate the top and bottom modules in the library stack Install one module terminator in the top terminator connector on the topmost module and one in the bottom terminator connector on the bottommost module If your library configuration consists of a single module
412. once For more information see 447 Adding an FC I O Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide 12 13 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades the Host Mapping Overview on page 116 and Configuring Host Mapping on page 118 To configure host mapping a From the operator panel or Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt FC I O Blade Control and enable host mapping b From the operator panel or Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Mapping Configure host port failover on the FC I O blade optional From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Port Failover To enable host port failover you must configure target ports 1 and 2 on the FC I O blade as point to point connections Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Port Configuration For more information see Configuring FC Host Port Failover on page 119 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 These instructions explain how to add an FC I O blade to your library You can add an FC I O blade while the library is powered on Required tools None 1 2 3 Access the back of the expansion module Note The recommended order of installing the FC I O blade and fan blade in an expansion module is starting from the bottom bay and moving up Remove the cover plate from the appropriate bay Press up and out to open the lat
413. ons Details on exporting cartridges include e Ifthe partition is online it will be taken offline before the export operation is performed and brought back online after the operation is complete You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 e You can select only the partitions to which you have been given access e You can only export cartridges if empty I E station slots are available e You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to import cleaning cartridges You need to provide the following information in the Export Media screens to export media e Partition The partition from which you want to export cartridges The screens include information about the partition mode online or offline and the number of empty I E station slots The number of cartridges you can export is limited to the number of empty slots e Media The tape cartridges that you want to export Note You can filter the list of media by entering all or part of a barcode in the Search text box Use an asterisk to search with wildcards You can also sort the list by clicking on columns with bold headings For example selecting the Location column heading s
414. ontact If you have not filled out the contact information yet you will receive a message with a link Complete the Setup Contact Information screen and then return to the Setup gt Register Library screen to complete registration You cannot register the library from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Register Library Scalar i500 User s Guide 133 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Advanced Reporting is a licensable feature You must have an Advanced Reporting license installed on your library in order to use the features described in this chapter For more information on licensing see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 Advanced Reporting provides the following reports that you can configure view save and e mail e Drive Resource Utilization Report Provides tape drive usage information showing you which tape drives are working at optimum capacity and which are under utilized This can help you allocate your tape drive resources properly e Media Integrity Analysis Report Provides TapeAlert count for various combinations of tape drives tape cartridges and TapeAlert flags This can help you determine if a problem is due to a specific tape drive or tape cartridge Advanced Reporting provides the following logs that you can view save and e mail e Media Security Log Lists med
415. open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings gt Enable SSL SNMP is a light weight protocol designed for remote management and monitoring of infrastructure devices The library provides SNMP support so an external management application can be configured to receive library SNMP information The library supports SNMP by publishing a Management Information Base MIB that can be queried to obtain the status of the library and many of its individual components SNMP information can be obtained from the library using SNMP Traps and GET queries For more information about SNMP see the Scalar i500 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 01370 xx For information on integrating MIBs with an SNMP management application contact your network management application vendor Administrators can perform the following SNMP procedures e Register the IP addresses and port numbers of external management applications enabling them to receive SNMP traps from the library For more information see Registering External Management Applications on page 64 e Enable or disable support for SNMP v1 and v2c SNMP v3 is enabled by default and cannot be disabled For more information see Enabling SNMP Versions on page 65 e Choose which version of SNMP the library uses to report traps You can choose SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 The default is SNMPv1 63 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your L
416. operation by opening and closing the I E station door 244 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations The process for importing cartridges includes the following steps 1 Go to the front of the library and insert cartridges into the I E station 2 Close the I E station door The Assign I E screen appears on the operator panel if the Manual Cartridge Assignment setting is enabled on the operator panel System Settings screen Tools gt System Settings If the Assign I E screen appears do the following a Assign the cartridges to the appropriate partition by selecting a partition listed on the Assign WE screen The partition button turns red after it has been selected Caution If you select the wrong partition open the I E station door Move the cartridge to a different I E station slot and close the I E station door The library will rescan the I E station and the Assign I E screen will appear again b Select Apply If the selected partition is online it will be taken offline before the import operation is performed and brought back online after the operation is complete If the library contains multiple partitions the import operation will not affect operations in other partitions Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline
417. or e mail them to a recipient In order to e mail the logs the library e mail account must be configured see Configuring the Library E mail Account in the Scalar i500 User s Guide e The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt EKM Management gt Retrieve SKM Logs Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log This log lists the tape cartridges for which encryption keys failed the most recent encryption key import operation If you have only partial success when importing a file of encryption keys meaning some keys import successfully but some keys do not the library displays an import warning message and generates a RAS ticket that directs you to view this log to see which keys did not get imported For each key that failed the import the log provides a message type that is either Error The key could not be imported e Warning The key was imported but the metadata update failed 197 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library For each key that failed the import the log provides one of the following message descriptions e CRC Data Missing Error Metadata is missing for the key This means that the export file is corrupt Suggested Solution Export the key s for the listed tape cartridge s again and then perform the import operation again e CRC Check Failed
418. ore dedicated cleaning slots automatically enables AutoClean Cleaning cartridges are stored in the designated cleaning slots When a tape drive needs cleaning it notifies the library and the library automatically cleans the tape drive using a cleaning cartridge loaded in a cleaning slot Automatic cleaning is 254 Enabling AutoClean Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives integrated into routine library operations The host application requests the library to move a tape cartridge If the tape drive performing the operation needs cleaning the library will perform the move operation and then automatically clean the tape drive with a cleaning cartridge before informing the host application that the move operation is complete When a cleaning cartridge has expired a RAS ticket informs the user to export the expired tape from the library If more cleaning cartridges are present the next cleaning cartridge will be used for the next cleaning request If no more cleaning cartridges are available a RAS ticket will inform the user that the tape drive needs cleaning and that a cleaning tape needs to be imported Only administrators can configure cleaning slots thus enabling AutoClean When AutoClean is enabled the library allows you to import and export cleaning media through the I E Station For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 78 For info
419. ork sensssssssssstsstsssresrensreestinsntestesrsesressnens 513 Library Dia gmOstics sescca an a ER 513 Drive DIA SMOSTICS orrei aE r E E EEE E AREE 514 Drive Tests isere tinai ne EE E E REEE A TE 514 Media Tests iinei E a G E e T ees ulstyioenesidetss 515 Ethernet Expansion Blade Control s ssssesseessisesesrisrsrrrererrsrerreresres 516 Robotics Di gNOstiCS asrinersnihesiioa n Ea A 517 Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes 518 Handling Cartridges Properly cccccscesssesesestetesseeeeeeeseeseenessseeeeeeseeeeees 519 Write Protecting Cartridges siisisiiiisrisirivirieriiiriire iii ii 520 Barcode Label Requirements eesereerreerrrreresserereerreeenreserrererrereseerrreerreesr 520 Supported Barcode Formats seensseenreeenresenrerenresreeerereerireeneeceneseenrseeresees 521 Installing Barcode Labels sssssisiirrsirtseiseereiiinisirrsri nisn iriiai 522 Appendix A Scalar i500 User s Guide Library Specifications 524 Supported COMPONeEMits esien eire aiai aei 524 Library Capacity ic cisscishsdssiticstuscssinetsdnssbagetavacticesiedasssduesbevernarscvanstvens evednase 526 Environmental Requirement 00 0 0 es ceeseeesee ce eeeeeseeeeseseneneneseneneees 527 xii Electrical Requirements csscssssssesssessssesseeseecsesesesensessnsscsessnesessessnsenees 527 IDIMMONSIONS eisses E E E E EEE 528 Component WEIGHS vc ccscaietsisccesnsesescstsseevascsassetdecsaunsadevesanvadsnesevebensuanoeed
420. ormally HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol The communication rules by which a Web browser client and a server delivering Web pages exchange information VE Import Export or Insert Eject The movement of data or hardware in and out of processing and storage systems 545 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary VE slot A bin that contains a single piece of media in the I E station IE station A door on the front of the library that contains tape magazines into which cartridges to be imported are placed manually or cartridges to be exported are placed by the picker Interoperability The capability of two or more hardware devices or two or more software routines to work together IP Internet Protocol A protocol that specifies the formats of packets and addresses Addresses are formulated as four groups of 2 or 3 digit numbers separated by periods such as 255 255 255 255 Kernel The heart of the UNIX operating system The kernel is the part of the operating system that allocates resources and controls processes The design strategy has been to keep the kernel as small as possible and to put the rest of the UNIX functionality into separately compiled and executed programs L_Port Loop Port It only has the capability to communicate over FC AL hubs and through FL_Ports LED Light Emitting Diode The mode of data transmission for multimode cables with short wave optical transceivers Single mode cables by comparison use high
421. ormed using the new active server until that server fails or the key server settings are changed Scalar i500 User s Guide 187 Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions on the Library Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Note This feature is currently only available with KMIP Key Manager 1 From the Web client select Tools gt EKM Management gt Server Status The Key Manager Status screen appears A list of all your connected EKM servers displays The currently active server displays in bold green type with the word Active after it 2 To choose a different server to be the active server select that server s radio button and click Apply You can view the encryption settings in the following ways e System Information Report To view encryption information on all key servers partitions and tape drives select Reports gt System Information from the Web client Library Configuration Report To view the encryption status of a selected tape drive or tape cartridge select Reports gt Library Configuration from the Web client and click a tape drive or slot The encryption status is displayed in a pop up status window e Partition Encryption From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration to view and change the encryption settings
422. ort Data Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting Configuring and Viewing the Media Security Log Retrieve the report data file Save recipient company com Configuring and Viewing the Media Security Log Scalar i500 User s Guide Media removal is detected by the library when it performs an inventory at boot up after an open door is closed etc The media security log lists media that have been removed from the library You can enable the library to collect information about media removal and then view save and or e mail the log You can configure the library to collect any or all of the following information By default the library collects nothing and the log is empty You must select each item you want the library to collect e Unexpected Removal Detection After Power up and Reboot Only e Unexpected Removal Detection During Library Operation e Expected Removal Detection From I E Slots During Library Operation Note Unexpected removal refers to tape cartridges that were removed from the library without being properly exported via the I E station Expected removal refers to tape cartridges that were exported properly via the I E station The log file contains the following information Date and time of media removal e Tape cartridge barcode e Type of removal expected or unexpected e Slot location coordinates of the slot the cartridge is missing from e Slot type I E storage or cleaning
423. orts the list by location coordinates Scalar i500 User s Guide 250 Loading Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt Media gt Export e From the operator panel select Operations gt Export Media For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface The Load Drive operation enables you to load a cartridge from a storage slot into a tape drive The storage slot and tape drive must be assigned to the same partition This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to load tape drives Using the library to load tape drives may necessitate performing an inventory with the host application See your host application documentation for more information Details on loading tape drives include e Ifthe partition is online it will be taken offline before the load operation is performed and brought back online after the operation is complete You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on
424. ost type of a registered host Changing these settings will not affect your host access connections You cannot modify the WWPN of a registered host If you need to change the WWPN you must delete the host and create a new one 163 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Host Access To modify a host 1 Click Setup gt Host Access gt Host Registration 2 Select a host and click Modify 3 Modify the host name or type and click Apply Deleting a host un registers it with the library The host is deleted from Deleting a Host 3 the Registered Host list If the host is mapped to drives or partitions on the Setup Connection Configuration screen you will need to disable all the mapped connections before you can delete the host To delete a host 1 Click Setup gt Host Access gt Host Registration 2 Select a host and click Delete A dialog box opens asking you to confirm you want to delete the host 3 Click OK Scalar i500 User s Guide 164 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Encryption Key Management EKM is a licensable feature You must have an EKM license installed on your library in order to use the encryption key management features described in this chapter The Scalar i500 supports three encryption key management systems which are described in Table 1 These systems work in conjunction with the library to generate protect store and manage encryption keys The key
425. ot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 a Ifyou plan to stack the control module at the top of the library and if an expansion module will be located below it remove the control module s bottom cover plate and the expansion module s top plate b If you plan to stack the control module between expansion modules remove both the top and bottom plates of the control module Also remove the top plate of the expansion module located below the control module and the bottom plate of the expansion module located above the control module c If you plan to stack the control module at the bottom of the library and if an expansion module will be located above it remove the control module s top plate and the expansion module s bottom plate Scalar i500 User s Guide 369 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library Figure 59 Cover Plate Location After Removing an Expansion Module 5U 14U 23U 32U cover plate cover plate Control Module cover plate Control Expansion Module Module cover plate Control Expansion Expansion Module Module Module Control Expansion Expansion Expansion Module Module Module Module cover plate cover plate cover plate cover plate Preparing to Use the New Prepare to use the new library configuration as follows Lib Confi ti ee e aih 1
426. ote For Q EKM only The tape drive used for the test must be unloaded ready and online in order to run any of the tests e Ping Verifies the Ethernet communication link between the library and the key servers Drive Q EKM only Verifies the tape drive s path in the library communication from library to tape drive sled and from tape drive sled to tape drive The tape drive must be unloaded ready and online in order to run this test If this test fails the Path and Config tests are not performed e Path Verifies that EKM services are running on the key servers Note For Q EKM only This test cannot run if the Drive test fails e Config Verifies that the key servers are capable of serving encryption keys 183 Differences Between Manual and Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Note For Q EKM only This test cannot run if the Drive test fails If any of the tests fail try the following resolutions and run the test again to make sure it passes Ping Test Failure Verify that the key server host is running and accessible from the network to which the library is connected Drive Test Failure Look for any tape drive RAS tickets and follow the resolution instructions in the ticket Path Test Failure Verify that the key server is actually running a
427. ounter difficulties reading the label Scalar i500 User s Guide 522 Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Installing Barcode Labels The cartridge cannot have any stickers or labels attached to the top or bottom because if the labels come loose they can get caught in the tape drives or become unreadable by the scanner Caution Do not place a barcode label or any labels on the top or bottom of a cartridge Doing so can cause the tape cartridge and tape drive operations to fail Figure 72 Barcode Label Orientation Scalar i500 User s Guide 523 Appendix A Library Specifications Scalar i500 libraries follow the specifications described in this chapter Supported Components The Scalar i500 library supports the following components Supported Cartridges e LTO 1 read only in LTO 3 drives e LTO 2 read write in LTO 2 and LTO 3 drives read only in LTO 4 drives e LTO 3 read write in LTO 3 and LTO 4 drives read only in LTO 5 drives supports write once read many WORM functionality e LTO 4 read write in LTO 4 and LTO 5 drives supports WORM functionality e LTO 5 read write in LTO 6 drives supports WORM functionality e LTO 6 read write in LTO 6 drives supports WORM functionality Scalar i500 User s Guide 524 Appendix A Library Specifications Supported Components Supported Tape Drive e IBM LTO 2 SCSI and Fibre Channel Types RoHS comp
428. over and proceed to the next screen To enable FC host port failover for the selected FC I O blade you can select a check box to enable FC Host Port Failover Clearing the check box disables FC host port failover for the selected FC I O blade If you are enabling FC host port failover select one target port on the FC I O blade as the Active Port The selected target port becomes active by default The other target port will go on passive standby until failover occurs After enabling or disabling FC host port failover save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Port Failover e From the operator panel Setup gt I O Blades gt Host Port Failover After host port failover occurs the failed target port must be repaired and enabled before it can be configured as an active or standby port for the host port failover feature To repair the failed port use the information in the RAS ticket that was generated when the host port failover occurred For
429. oving and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade 1 Fan blade LED 3 Latch hooks open Caution Forcing the blade into the bay can cause the pins to bend 4 Evenly apply pressure to both sides of the fan blade and slide it into the expansion module until the latch hooks begin to move towards the middle of the blade Push the latch hooks towards the middle of the blade and into the locked position You will feel the blade pins connect with the expansion module s backplane as the blade locks into place Scalar i500 User s Guide 456 Removing an FC I O Fan Blade Replacing an FC I O Fan Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade Note The LED for the FC I O fan blade is on the bottom of the blade when the blade is correctly installed in the expansion module 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 These instructions explain how to remove an FC I O blade from your library You can remove an FC I O fan blade while the library is powered on Caution Do not permanently remove an FC I O fan blade unless you also permanently remove the FC I O blade to which it is associated Required tools None 1 Access the back of the expansion module containing the FC I O fan blade Lift the latch hooks out of the locked position and p
430. ower cord SAS cable to host Library control blade Module terminators 300 Figure 44 Multi Module SAS Cabling Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library OMAN Oa A ON Module to module cable Library control blade GB Ethernet port Power supply Rear power switch Power cords SAS cables to host Module terminators Ethernet cable to network 301 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library 1 If your library is larger than 14U install it in a rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions The instructions include procedures for removing and replacing tape drives 2 Connect one end of the SAS cable to the tape drive Connect the other end of the SAS cable to the host 3 If your library configuration consists of a single module place module terminators in the module s top and bottom module terminator connectors Caution The module terminator is not the same as a SCSI terminator Using a SCSI terminator instead of a module terminator will damage the library 4 Ifthe library consists of more than one module connect the modules together as follows Caution The module terminator is not the same as a SCSI terminator Using a SCSI terminator instead of a module terminator will damage the library a Using the module terminators terminate the top and bottom
431. p Contact Quantum Support for the firmware if needed Latest library configuration saved on PC or laptop 402 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card Instructions The Compact Flash Card is new and has never been initialized It contains only a minimal level of library firmware which allows the library to boot up and display an Upgrade Notification message Once you install the LCB compact flash card you will need to upgrade firmware and reconfigure your network settings Note Do not separate the old compact flash card from the library control blade unless you are replacing the compact flash card only Return the old LCB compact flash card as a pair to Quantum 1 If possible save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 2 Power off the library 3 Disconnect all cables from the existing LCB You may want to label each cable that is connected to the existing LCB to make sure that you can correctly reconnect them to the new LCB 4 Remove the existing LCB from the library To remove the existing LCB release both of the LCB latch hooks and using the latch hooks as handles pull the entire LCB toward you 403 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card imp MOO OE
432. p Time screen to enable and configure NTP You can also access the date and time setup screen by selecting Date amp Time from the Setup menu on the Web client Details on NTP settings include e NTP servers must be configured in available in groups of 3 or more with one exception a single NTP server configuration is also allowed 107 Setting the Time Zone Setting Daylight Saving Time Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Setting the Date Time and Time Zone e NTP is enabled on the Date amp Time screen When NTP is enabled you cannot manually configure date and time For more information on setting date and time manually see Setting the Date and Time Manually on page 107 e You can enter an IP address for a primary and an alternate optional NTP server e NTP server IP addresses must be entered in the proper format See Modifying Network Settings on page 60 for the proper format of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses e After you apply NTP settings system clock synchronization may take several minutes You can only enable and configure NTP on the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Date amp Time To select your time zone from a list disable Use Custom Time Zone setting and select your time zone If your time zone does not appear on the list or you want more control over your time settings enable Use Cu
433. p system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface The Export Media operation enables you to export data cartridges from Exporting Media E a storage slots to empty I E station slots for removal from the library Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export media See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to export media Using the library to export media may necessitate performing an inventory of the library with the host application Also if the host application has issued a prevent media removal command you will not be able to use the library user interface to export media See your host application documentation for more information If you have AutoClean enabled you can also export cleaning cartridges For information see Exporting Cleaning Media on page 258 Note Once the export operation has started do not interfere with the operation by opening and closing the I E station door Scalar i500 User s Guide 249 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avoid possible conflicts with the other partiti
434. page 76 e You can select only partitions to which you have been given access Default tape drive locations are highlighted if the barcode field is empty or the field is cleared You need to provide the following information in the Load Drive screens to load tape cartridges into tape drives e Partition The partition containing the cartridge you want to load into a tape drive The screens include information about the partition mode online or offline e Media The tape cartridges that you want to move 251 Unloading Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations Note You can filter the list of media by entering all or part of a barcode in the Search text box Use an asterisk to search with wildcards You can also sort the list by clicking on columns with bold headings For example selecting the Location column heading sorts the list by location coordinates The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Operations gt Drive gt Load e From the operator panel select Operations gt Load Drive For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface The Unload Drive operation allows you to unload a cartridge from a tape drive to a storage slot The storage slot a
435. pansion modules and below the top expansion module Removing the Control 1 Before removing a module follow the instructions in Preparing to Module Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 2 Starting with the topmost module of your library open the I E station and access doors of the module Caution Before unstacking the modules the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 3 Disengage the Y rails so the modules can be safely unstacked a From the front of the library find the Y rail release mechanism which is located on the left side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place b From the rear of the library find the rear Y rail release mechanism located in the interior of the right side of the module Squeeze the handle of the Y rail release mechanism lift it and release it so that it locks into place Note The rear Y rail is impossible to lift up with the tape drives installed Scalar i500 User s Guide 377 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module 1 Front Y rail 2 Rear Y rail 3 Y rail this end up 4 Squeeze here to release 4 Remove the rack ears that fasten the module to the rack Loosen the thumbscrews located at the base of the front and rear of the module a Scalar i500 User s G
436. partitions before removing the module Recreate the partitions after the removal or replacement is complete Scalar i500 User s Guide 356 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Required tools e Phillips 2 screwdriver for removing and replacing the top cover plate T10 TORX screwdriver for removing and replacing the bottom cover plate Instructions 1 View your library s current configuration before removing or replacing any library modules to determine which partitions may be affected which tape cartridges belong to which partition and whether cleaning slots are configured within the library module you are removing or replacing See Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 268 For example in Figure 57 the following library configuration may be observed Note that there are three partitions configured All three partitions share six I E elements in the control module The library is configured for automatic cleaning and has three cleaning slots configured in the expansion module e Library_a configured all storage elements in the control module and has one drive configured in the control module and one drive configured in the expansion module e Library_b configured most storage elements in the control module but references its last storage element in the expansion module This partition has one drive configured in the control module and on
437. pe drives without those drives being connected to a 4 Gb s FC I O blade Since the FC I O blade has a maximum speed of 4 Gb s you can only get the full speed by NOT being connected to the FC I O blade The SNW license is also required for FIPS compliance For more information on FIPS see FIPS Certified Encryption Solution on page 199 This chapter covers e About the Storage Networking License e Configuring Control Path Failover e Forcing Control Path Failover e Configuring Data Path Failover e Enabling Data Path Failover e Forcing Data Path Failover e Configuring Host Access e Registering a Host for Host Access Enabling Tape Drives for Host Access e Mapping a Host to Tape Drives and Partitions e Modifying a Host e Deleting a Host 149 Chapter 6 Storage Networking About the Storage Networking License About the Storage Networking License If you purchase a Storage Networking SNW license after you purchase your library you must install the license key on your library to enable the SNW functionality The SNW license is sold on a per drive basis The license installed on the library indicates the number of tape drives that are licensed If you purchase an SNW license for a particular number of tape drives and later want to license more drives you must purchase additional SNW licenses The licenses are not tied to specific tape drives but to how many tape drives are currentl
438. perability Protocol KMIP is a specification developed by OASIS Its function is to standardize communication between enterprise key management systems and encryption systems The Scalar i500 library provides a KMIP version 1 0 compliant encryption solution KMIP is only supported in certain environments See the release notes for details Scalar i500 User s Guide If you purchase Q EKM Quantum Support will schedule an appointment to install the application onto your key server s If you purchase SKM you will receive the software application two key servers optional and installation and configuration instructions Installation for KMIP compliant systems differ according to the manufacturer and may include up to 10 key servers This chapter describes how to configure your encryption key management EKM solution on the library This chapter also describes all of the EKM functions available on the library Refer to the Quantum Encryption Key Manager User s Guide the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide or your KMIP key manager user s guide for information on how to manage your encryption system outside of the library 166 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management This chapter covers General Notes About Encryption on the Library on page 168 About the EKM License on page 168 Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library on page 169 Using EKM Path Diagnostics on pa
439. perations gt I E Station e From the operator panel select Operations gt Lock Unlock I E Station Controlling FC I O Blade Power Administrators can turn on turn off or power cycle individual FC I O blades in the library Turning off or power cycling the FC I O blade will cause a temporary loss of communication with connected hosts The screen will display a warning message about the communication loss and ask you to confirm that you want to proceed The Setup Blade Control screen allows you to perform the following operations on the selected FC I O blades On the Web client e Click On to turn on the FC I O blade e Click Off to turn off the FC I O blade e Click Cycle to power cycle the FC I O blade It takes approximately 3 minutes to power cycle a blade On the operator panel select the option you want Power Cycle Blade e Power On Blade e Power Off Blade Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Scalar i500 User s Guide 263 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Controlling FC I O Blade Power The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt I O Blades gt Blade Control e From the operator panel select Setup gt I O Blades gt Blade Control
440. pes in that partition have reached the 180 day mark at the same time that you import the tape into Partition A Because these automatic scans occur at the same time the test session includes all 11 tapes from both partitions Within each test session you view details about each tape that was scanned see Viewing EDLM Session Report Details on page 229 Working with the EDLM Test Sessions List To view the status of EDLM test sessions both automatic and manual do the following 1 Log on as an administrator 2 From the Web client select Tools gt EDLM gt Test Results The Tools EDLM Test Results screen appears Tools EDLM Test Results Choose the session you would like to view or modify You may also filter based on a specific time range Select Time Range LastMonth v 21982 PM 12 19 52 PM 01 32 33 PM Mar 25 2012 09 12 07 AM Mar 25 2012 09 12 58 AM In Progress Scalar i500 User s Guide 227 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans The table displays the set of media tests that have run based on the time range selected Each row in the table presents an overview of a single EDLM test session The table displays the following information about the test sessions Item Description Session ID The session identifier a unique number assigned to each test session that was run State Pending Complete In Progress Stopped or Paused Start Time The date
441. ping out a tape drive if the Logical SN Addressing feature is enabled the library reports a logical tape drive serial number to the host that remains with the slot so a replacement tape drive in the 442 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades same slot reports the same logical serial number and the host recognizes it immediately see Tape Drive Logical SN Addressing on page 127 If Logical SN Addressing is disabled the library reports the actual tape drive serial number to the host so a swapped tape drive will not be registered by the host unless you refresh the configuration of any backup application that manages the library In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detect the changes Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades Scalar i500 User s Guide This section describes adding removing and replacing FC I O blades The FC I O blades support connections to LTO 2 LTO 3 LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 FC drives Caution If you are adding a new FC I O blade or completely removing an FC I O blade be sure to read Working With Control Paths on page 86 If you do not configure control paths correctly you will experience communication problems with tape drives and media changer devices partitions Details about FC I O blades include You must be running 400 level code or above in order to use FC I O blades Ea
442. placing an Ethernet Expansion Blade in the Same Location 474 Power Cycling the Ethernet Expansion Blade ccccccsseesseeeeees 474 Viewing Ethernet Connectivity cccessescescsssesesneeseseeeessssessnsneseseaes 475 Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LEDS eeeesessesseseseseneeeeseees 475 Preparing the Library for Moving or Shipping eee 478 Chapter 13 Scalar i500 User s Guide Troubleshooting 480 Quantum s Knowledge Base uu eeeeseseececeeseseseeeeceeenaneseeecenananesey 481 PRDOUE RAS TICK CHS sernir Ee A EE E EE E 481 Viewing RAS Ticketsericenonainniniiniini nann 482 Resolving and Closing RAS Tickets ccccccssesssesssseseseeeeeessseeeeneneees 483 Closing RAS Tickets Automatically cccccccssesessesesseeeeesesseneneeseseaes 485 Capturing Snapshots of Library Information eee eens 485 Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record csee 486 E mailing the Configuration Record c ccccsssssesseesesetesesesesteteseeees 487 Saving the Configuration Record cccceseseseseseeteseeseneeseseseeneeneeees 488 Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration cece 488 Saving the Library Configuration cccccsesseeeseeeeeseeeeeseseeneneneees 489 Restoring the Library Configuration and Library Firmware 489 Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages c cseeseeeeeeeees 490 Duplicate Devices Discovered 0 cececssesessesesenseceessenseeeesesseecseeassesenseee
443. plain how to install the FC cables that connect the FC drives to the FC I O blades The FC I O blades support connections to LTO 2 LTO 3 LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 drives Caution LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives can be configured for speeds of up to 8 GB per second and support auto negotiation to 8 Gb s 4 Gb s and 2 Gb s If they are configured for 8 Gb s you should connect them directly to a host or switch and not to an FC I O blade because the FC I O blade only allows speeds up to 4 Gb s If you connect an LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drive to an FC I O blade the speed will autonegotiate to 4 Gb s see Setting Tape Drive Parameters on page 83 Speeds less than 2 Gb s are not supported For information on installing FC I O blades see Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades on page 443 Cabling may be affected by partitioning or zoning changes made as part of configuration When cabling to drives ensure that they are cabled to the correct hosts for the defined partitions If the FC I O blades have active channel zoning ensure that the drives are attached to ports that are accessible to the defined zone For information on partitioning configuring FC I O blade ports channel zoning and host mapping see Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Details about cabling FC I O blades include e Each expansion module can support up to two FC I O blades A maximum of four FC I O blades can be present in any library
444. port parameters Each FC I O blade has six ports Ports 1 and 2 are always target ports and are configurable Ports 3 through 6 are always initiator ports and are not configurable For information on viewing the current configured settings for all I O blade ports see Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information on page 276 Details on configuring FC I O blade ports include e The Setup I O Blade Port Configuration screen lists all I O blades found in the library The screen lists the following information for each I O blade location in the library World Wide Node Name WWNN status and ports You can select the I O blade target port 1 or 2 you want to configure and proceed to the next screen For the target port you selected the screen displays the World Wide Port Number WWPN e For the selected target port ports 1 and 2 you can configure the following parameters e Loop ID Loop IDs can be set to Auto or a hard value from 0 through 125 Selecting Auto automatically selects a unique loop ID Some FC host operating systems require hard loop ID settings The default setting is Auto e Speed The interface speed can be set to Auto 1 Gb s 2 Gb s or 4 Gb s Selecting Auto automatically sets the interface speed The default setting is Auto e Frame Size Frame size can be set to 512 1024 or 2048 The default setting for ports 1 and 2 is 2048 Your FC host might require a different setting e Connection The con
445. primary server first If server 1 is not available to perform a key request the library tries server 2 For KMIP key managers if server 2 is not available the library will try server 3 and so on in order Once the library identifies a server that can perform the request this server remains the active server until it fails a key request or the library is rebooted At that point the library starts over and uses server 1 for key requests In the text boxes type either e The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the key server if DNS is not enabled or e The host name of the key server if DNS is enabled Port In the Port text boxes type the port numbers corresponding to the listed servers The port number listed in the text box must match the port number on the server Note the following e Q EKM The default port number is 3801 unless SSL is enabled If SSL is enabled the default port number is 443 Note If you change the Q EKM port number listed in the Port text box from the default setting on the library you must also change the port number on the actual key server to match or library managed encryption will not work properly See the Quantum Encryption Key Manager User s Guide for information on setting the port number on the Q EKM key server 173 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Note If you are using a seconda
446. ption read write operations are not affected by media barcode label and will continue to work correctly To export encryption keys 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 2 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Key gt Export 3 Assign the encryption certificate with which you will wrap encrypt the keys by selecting it from the Certificate Name Used For Export drop down list Choose the certificate that belongs to the server to which the keys will be imported Note The owner of that server should have sent you the certificate and you should have imported it see Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 and Importing Encryption Certificates on page 194 The drop down list contains all of the encryption certificates that you have ever imported onto your SKM servers indicated by the word imported in the list as well as the certificate belonging to your SKM server pair indicated by the word native in the list 4 Select which SKM encryption keys to export from the following options e Export Used Exports all the keys that have ever been used to encrypt tape cartridges in the library performing this export Also exports all keys that were imported onto the key server via a key import operation from any library Scalar i500 User s Guide 195 Scalar i500 User
447. r This hole is located on the rear of the library about three inches from the top of the expansion module near the right side of the library chassis Refer to the illustration below to locate this hole Note If your module chassis does not have the drilled hole use an M5 thumbscrew to attach the black hook and loop fastener to the nearest available M5 threaded hole on the lower right of any module chassis Insert a push rivet into the rivet hole on the black hook and loop fastener The head of the rivet should be on the same side of the fastener as the plastic loop Firmly press the push rivet through the hole in the expansion module described above The hook and loop fastener should now be secured to the library chassis Plug the power cord into a power supply unit closest to the hook and loop fastener Determine how much cord length you need to reach and easily plug into the AC power source Do not plug the cord into power source until you are ready to power on the library If there is excess power cord loop the excess cord into a bundle in the shape of a figure eight The bundle should be small enough to hold comfortably with one hand or about eight inches in length Wrap the bundle with the hook and loop fastener Thread the strap through the plastic loop and tighten the strap around the bundled cord Secure the strap by pressing it down The power cord is now secured to the expansion module Repeat these steps t
448. r 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades When installing an FC I O blade you must follow the installation steps in this order or communication with the FC I O blade and tape drives in the library will not work properly Caution If you are adding a new FC I O blade or completely removing an FC I O blade be sure to read Working With Control Paths on page 86 If you do not configure control paths correctly you will experience communication problems with tape drives and media changer devices partitions You may perform the following steps with the library powered on 1 2 Ensure you are running 400 level firmware or above Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 Connect the Ethernet cable from the Library Control Blade to the expansion module s For each FC I O blade installed in an expansion module connect the expansion module containing the FC I O blade s to a port in the Ethernet hub on the LCB see Figure 48 on page 310 Caution If the Ethernet cable between the LCB and the expansion module is not connected when power is applied to the blade the blade will hang in the Booting state If the FC I O blade is installed in the bottom bay of the expansion module connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port labeled LOWER in the lower right corner of the expansion module Connect
449. r AcCOUNES 0 0 0 cece cseseseseecscstaeseececscataneeeeanes 98 Modifying Local User Accounts 0 0 ccessesesescssnsesesescseseseeceescatanseeeeees 98 Deleting Local User ACCOUNES 0 cc ccccessesesescsesesesescscseseseecscscseateeeeenes 99 Configuring LDAP ssi cissscssscssvsessssessvssissssesssvsossestvtsdscsestaesedestonsiassedbobesses 99 Configuring Kerberos 00 0 ee ee cesseseeeecessssseesesssesesesenenesesees 104 Setting the Date Time and Time Zone s es sssssssssesiesessesresiereesrsseesrereeses 106 Setting the Date and Time Manually 0 0 ce ccceeeesecceesee tees eeeneeeees 107 Setting the Date and Time Using the Network Time Protocol 107 Setting the Time Zone sierran inisi se ieii i 108 Setting Daylight Saving Time ss ssesessessessssrierierrsressresrerreseseesrereesrs 108 Working With FC I O Blades ss sssssessssssssessessesssssessresrssrsstesteniesresnesresrenee 109 v Configuring FC I O Blade Ports 0 0 cesesesseseesesessseeeeteseseeeeessescesenens 110 FC I O Blade Internal Virtual Port for Media Changers 111 Configuring FC I O Blade Channel Zoning eens 111 Managing FC Hosts and Host Mapping ceeeseeesseseeeseneneeeeees 113 Enabling Disabling FC Host Mapping eee eeeeeeeee renee 113 Viewing FC Host Information 0 cece eeeseeeseeeeeeneseeseeeseneseseees 114 Creating Modifying and Deleting an FC Host Connection 114 Host Mapping OvervieW sss
450. r feature so that a standby target port 1 or 2 on an I O blade can assume the identity and LUN mapping configuration of the designated active target port if the active port fails Host port failover enables the library to continue operations without requiring you to reconfigure the host or the SAN 119 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades To enable host port failover you must configure target ports 1 and 2 on the FC I O blade as point to point connections Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Port Configuration FC I O blade target ports 1 and 2 must be attached to the same SAN fabric to provide host access The primary active port is used for host communications while the passive standby port is kept idle In addition channel zoning must be configured so that target ports 1 and 2 have access to all initiator ports ports 3 6 Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Channel Zoning If these conditions are not met an error message will display when you attempt to enable host port failover Note The current feature implementation does not support arbitrated loop or target initiator mode Note Ports on the 4 Gb FCI O blade used for failover must connect to the same SAN fabric Note When both target ports on the FC I O blade are attached to the same SAN fabric you may see duplicate media changer devices partitions being reported To stop this from happening you
451. r from the control module terminator connection that is closest to the expansion module c Replace the module terminator in the expansion module in the terminator connection that is furthest from the control module Connect the module to module cable from the control module to the expansion module Connect your Ethernet cable to the Gigabit GB Ethernet port on the library control blade LCB for remote access to the library via the Web client Connect a power cord to the outlet on the power supply on the rear of the library There should always be a power cord connected to the power supply on the control module If redundant power supplies are used connect a power cord to each of the additional power supply outlets Power on the library a Turn on the rear power switch of each of the power supplies b Turn on the front power button c Power up the host system 8 Verify communication with all devices on the bus 9 Configure the library using the commands on the operator panel See configuration information in Configuring Your Library on page 52 Each SAS tape drive should be connected directly to the host bus adapter HBA using one SAS cable The LTO 4 and LTO 5 SAS tape drives in the Scalar i500 library use the SFF 8088 type SAS connector The connector needed on the host end of the cable depends on the type of Host Bus Adapter HBA being used 298 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and R
452. r i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Module to module cable Library control blade GB Ethernet port SCSI terminator Power supply Rear power switch Power cords SCSI cables to host Module terminators OMAN Oa KF O Na 10 Ethernet cable to customer network 295 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library 1 If your library is larger than 14U install it in a rack See Installing the Library in a Rack on page 417 for instructions The instructions include procedures for removing and replacing tape drives 2 Connect the SCSI cables to the tape drives There are two recommended ways to cable SCSI tape drives one tape drive per SCSI bus or two tape drives per SCSI bus see Figure 42 Note To avoid possible performance issues do not connect more than two SCSI drives per SCSI bus Caution The library supports a maximum cable length of 12 meters including internal wiring for Ultra 160 SCSI and Ultra 320 SCSI cables To connect one tape drive per SCSI bus a Use a SCSI cable to connect the bottom port of the tape drive to your host b Use aSCSI terminator to terminate the top port of the tape drive To connect two tape drives per SCSI bus a Connect one end of the SCSI cable to the top SCSI port of the bottom tape drive Then connect the other end of the cable to the bottom SCSI port of the tape
453. r i500 User s Guide Administrators can run the Installation Verification Test IVT following a library service action to determine if the library is ready for production use Examples of such library service actions include installing a new library or replacing a FRU or CRU Note IVT is optimized for library firmware versions 520G and above and libraries built after July 1 2008 serial numbers with last four digits 8602 and above e If your library was built on or before July 1 2008 and you are running firmware version 520G or above you will not be able to run the IVT test even though the selection is available If your library was built on or before July 1 2008 and you are running firmware version 500G or below you can run the test but it is not recommended because it may produce erroneous results A new IVT Log is created each time you run IVT The log reports detailed information about library readiness and indicates where specific marginal conditions and failures are located in the library subsystems if there are any The full IVT is divided into five subtests You may choose to run only certain subtests depending on the amount of time available and your area of interest The full IVT may take up to five and one half hours to complete for a maximum configured library that includes five modules five I E stations and 18 drives e The Robot test evaluates the basic functionality of the library robotics assembly
454. r i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Caution LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives can be configured for speeds of up to 8 GB per second and support auto negotiation to 8 Gb s 4 Gb s and 2 Gb s If they are configured for 8 Gb s you should connect them directly to a host or switch and not to an FC I O blade because the FC I O blade only allows speeds up to 4 Gb s If you connect an LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drive to an FC I O blade the speed will autonegotiate to 4 Gb s see Setting Tape Drive Parameters on page 83 Speeds less than 2 Gb s are not supported Caution If you enable data path failover control path failover or host access control do not connect the tape drive to an FC I O blade Caution Do not connect a tape drive to both an FC I O blade and an Ethernet Expansion blade 290 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Figure 37 HP LTO 5 Dual Port Fibre Channel Tape Drive 1 Ethernet port Use for Ethernet connectivity in conjunction with FIPS 2 Fibre Channel port 1 Default data port If you are only using one port use this port 3 Fibre Channel port 2 Default failover port for use with data path failover Scalar i500 User s Guide 291 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Figure 38 HP LTO 5 Single Port
455. r i500 User s Guide 537 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 39 Diagnostics W The tape drive may have a hardware The drive may have a required fault Run extended diagnostics to verify hardware fault that and diagnose the problem Check the may be identified by tape drive user s manual for device extended diagnostics specific instructions on running i e SEND extended diagnostic tests DIAGNOSTIC command 40 Obsolete 46 47 Reserved 49 50 Lost statistics W Media statistics have been lost at some Drive or library time in the past powered down with tape loaded 51 Tape directory W The tape directory on the tape cartridge Error prevented the invalid at just unloaded has been corrupted File tape directory being unload search performance will be degraded updated on unload The tape directory can be rebuilt by reading all the data 52 Tape system C The tape just unloaded could not write Write errors while area write its system area successfully writing the system faale 1 Copy data to another tape cartridge preg vat 2 Discard the old cartridge 53 Tape system C The tape system area could not be read Read errors while area read successfully at load time reading the system aile 1 Copy data to another tape cartridge area On Io 54 No start of data C The start of data could not be found on Tape dam
456. rary and all of its partitions The library ships with a default administrator account The user name for this account is admin and the password is password You cannot delete this user account or change the user name but you can change the password The default administrator account is used to perform the initial configuration of the library If you misplace the password for the 97 Creating Local User Accounts Modifying Local User Accounts Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts default administrator account contact Quantum Technical Support See Getting More Information or Help on page 8 See User Privileges on page 50 for more information on library permission levels For information on changing passwords see Modifying Local User Accounts on page 98 During or after the initial configuration you can use the default administrator account to create up to eighteen additional local user accounts including other administrator accounts These administrators can themselves create other local administrator and user accounts Users without administrator privileges cannot create accounts The library can contain eighteen user accounts including the default administrator account To create local user accounts you need to provide information for the following fields e User Name the login name of the user account you are creating User names are limited to 1 12
457. rations occurring in rapid succession If you get an error stating that an SKM operation failed check network functionality and try the operation again Make sure ports 80 6000 and 6001 on the SKM servers are opened up in a bi directional mode on all firewalls in your network If they are not the library will not be able to communicate with the SKM servers Step 1 Installing the EKM License Key on the Library If your EKM license key is not already installed on the library install it now Scalar i500 User s Guide 169 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Step 2 Preparing Partitions for Library Managed Encryption For each partition on which you want to enable library managed encryption do the following 1 Make sure the partition contains encryption supported and encryption capable tape drives and media Note the following e Q EKM partitions must contain only IBM LTO 4 IBM LTO 5 and or IBM LTO 6 tape drives Note You must be running Q EKM version 2 0 or higher to support IBM LTO 5 or LTO 6 tape drives e SKM partitions must contain only HP LTO 4 HP LTO 5 and or HP LTO 6 tape drives SKM media must have valid barcode labels affixed SKM does not support the use of unlabeled media e KMIP partitions must contain only HP LTO 4 and or HP LTO 5 tape drives On the tape drives install the latest version of firmw
458. rator panel and begin using the library locally with the default settings in place If you accept the default network configuration settings you will not be able to access the library remotely from the Web client You can however use Setup gt Network Mgmt on the operator panel at any time to modify network settings See Default Configuration Settings on page 57 for more information The default configuration settings are as follows License keys COD 41 slots minimum The total number depends on number of pre activated slots purchased Network settings DHCP enabled IPv6 disabled Import export I E station slots 6 Cleaning cartridge slots 0 Partitions By default the library creates partitions and assigns available library resources proportionately among the partitions grouping tape drives according to distinct combinations of tape drive interface type SCSI FC or SAS and tape drive vendor To mix tape drive types vendors within a partition create partitions manually See Manually Creating Partitions on page 71 See also About the Setup Wizard on page 53 As you work through the Setup Wizard screens follow the on screen instructions The Setup Wizard screens contains only a subset of all configuration options The Setup and Operations menus contain most configuration options including those in the Setup Wizard This section includes detailed descriptions of the configuration tasks including how and when to acces
459. rce SKM server you need to import the encryption keys used to encrypt those tapes onto your SKM server i e destination Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to import data encryption keys To import encryption keys 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 192 Receive the file of encryption keys from the source SKM server and save it in a known location on your computer 196 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Key gt Import Click Browse to locate the saved file of encryption keys Click Open Click Apply to import the keys onto your SKM server Nn oO on ff Back up both SKM servers following the instructions in the SKM user s guide In case of an incomplete import the library displays a message and generates a RAS ticket For instructions on what to do if this happens see Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log on page 197 Accessing the SKM Server Logs The library can download the audit and error logs from the SKM servers You should not need to retrieve these logs unless Quantum Support directs you to do so You can download the logs to your computer
460. rd read and write errors This log is only available if you have an Advanced Reporting license installed on the library see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 For more information about the information displayed in this log see Viewing the Media Usage Log on page 144 SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log Lists keys that failed the most recent data key import operation This log is only available if you are running Scalar Key Manager SKM For detailed information about this log see Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log on page 197 The path to open the report from the Web client is Reports gt Log Viewer Viewing FC I O Blade Information Scalar i500 User s Guide Administrators can view information about all the FC I O blades installed in the library The Tools Blade Information screen lists the following FC I O blade information Location Library location coordinates of the blade module blade where blade is 1 for the top blade in the module and 2 for the bottom blade in the module Firmware Version Firmware version of the blade part of the library firmware Serial Number Serial number of the blade WWNN World Wide Node Name of the blade 275 Chapter 10 Getting Information Logs and Reports Viewing FC I O Blade Port Information CCL Command control LUN e Status State The status of the blade can be Ready Not Ready Auto Level Failed Auto Levelin
461. re media changer devices partitions being discovered multiple times For information on why this happens see FC I O Blade Internal Virtual Port for Media Changers on page 111 To prevent this do the following Ensure that host mapping is enabled see Enabling Disabling FC Host Mapping on page 113 e Assign each media changer a unique LUN and map each one to the appropriate host see Configuring Host Mapping on page 118 Identifying Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide You can use the operator panel and the Web client user interfaces to view information about all tape drives installed in the library In addition you can identify tape drives including the control path tape drive in selected partitions The Web client also allows you to identify tape drives that are not assigned to specific partitions On the Web client you can only identify tape drives that are in a ready state The operator panel Drive Information screen lists the following information for each tape drive e Control path tape drive status yes no e Vendor e Model e Type e Serial number e Tape drive firmware version e Sled boot version e Sled application version 492 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Identifying Tape Drives Mode status online offline ready not ready Loaded status unloaded loaded SCSI ID for SCSI tape drives World Wide Node Name WWNN for Fibre Channel FC tape drives
462. re not resolved It is recommended that each RAS ticket be viewed analyzed and closed individually The paths to open the appropriate screens are e From the Web client select Tools gt All RAS Tickets e From the operator panel select Tools gt All RAS Tickets Administrators can resolve some RAS tickets Others must be resolved by Service personnel Only one person at a time can resolve a ticket Multiple users can however view ticket details simultaneously If your Web client session goes down while resolving a RAS ticket you must wait 3 minutes before you can continue resolving the RAS ticket from either the Web client or the operator panel 1 Log in to the Web client 2 From the Tools menu select All RAS Tickets The Tools All RAS Tickets screen appears 483 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting About RAS Tickets 3 Identify the RAS ticket you want to resolve Note You can use the Go to RAS Ticket text box at the bottom of the screen to locate a specific RAS ticket number In addition if there is more than one page of RAS tickets use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional tickets 4 Click Resolve The Ticket Resolution window appears This window contains information on how to resolve the ticket 5 Review the description 6 Do one of the following a To close the ticket now click Close The Tools All RAS Tickets window displays with the RAS ticket no longer in the list The task
463. re port link LED Blade Status LEDS This section covers status LEDs for Library control blade LCB FC I O blade FCI O fan blade Ethernet Expansion blade Figure 70 shows the location of the blade LEDs Use Table 12 to interpret the current status of the LEDs Scalar i500 User s Guide 500 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs Figure 70 Location of Blade LEDs Library Control Blade Fibre channel I O Blade and Fan Blade Ethernet Expansion Blade Library Control Blade Status LEDs Ethernet Port LEDs Ethernet Expansion Blade Status LEDs FC I O Blade FC I O Fan Status LEDs Blade LED Scalar i500 User s Guide 501 Table 12 Blade Status LEDs Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs LED Color Represents Blade Status Green Library e Blinks once per second Normal operation application i code Blade Solid ON Not operational processor e Solid OFF Not operational or blade is booting pra Solid ON for 3 seconds then blinks twice FC I O blade only Blade firmware is downloading e Blinks 10 times per second FC I O blade only Identify mode per user request to distinguish it from other blades see Identifying FC I O Blades on page 496 Amber Health status Solid OFF Normal operation e Blinks once per second LCB only Library application code is not operating or firmware upgrade downgrade is in progress on existing compact
464. reating RAS E mail Notifications on page 95 You can set customer contact information from the Web client only but you can view it from the operator panel The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications gt RAS gt Contact Information e From the operator panel select Setup gt Notification SS ee SSS Configuring the Library E mail Account Scalar i500 User s Guide The library uses the library e mail account whenever library e mail services are used such as when the library automatically sends e mail notifications about library issues Before configuring the e mail account ask your network administrator for an IP address valid login account optional and valid password 92 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring the Library E mail Account optional for your SMTP server The login account name and password can contain the following special characters and E mail account settings are not case sensitive After configuring the e mail account you can send a test message to an e mail address to verify that the account is configured properly The Setup gt Notifications gt E mail Configuration screen contains the following options SMTP Server includes the IP address or host name of the SMTP server IP addresses must be entered in dot notation for example 192 168 0 1 and cannot exceed 255 Send
465. reen automatically appears on the operator panel The Assign I E screen prompts you to use the operator panel to assign the cartridges to a specific partition or to the system partition The cartridges can be used only by the assigned partition All of the cartridges you placed in the I E station are assigned to the same partition that you selected If you cancel out of the Assign I E screen or forget to assign the inserted cartridge to a partition the cartridges remain unassigned until you either import them via the Web UI or open and close the I E station so the Assign I E screen displays again You cannot import unassigned media into the library via the operator panel You can import unassigned media into the library via the Web client When importing cartridges via the Web client all unassigned cartridges in the I E station will be assigned to the same partition However only the cartridges you select will actually be moved into the library storage slots The non selected cartridges will remain in 243 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library Performing Media Operations the I E station assigned to that partition until you import them into that partition To import a previously assigned cartridge into a different partition you must first remove that cartridge from the I E station place it in a different I E station slot and then import it into the desired partition e Unassigned cartridges are not visible to
466. reserserersessnress 131 Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 Tape Drives 131 Viewing FIPS Status on the Library 0 0 ccccesceseeseseseseeeeseeeeeeseseseaes 132 Configuring Operator Panel Display Settings 0 0 0 0 ccc 133 Registering the LAbrary e cscsicesiscsccrsevers wevesdeantnetsvsensqdevevivessneestvecbeveetenovenace 133 Chapter 4 Scalar i500 User s Guide Advanced Reporting 134 About the Advanced Reporting License 0 ec eeeeee ee eenseeneeeneneneneees 135 Working With Advanced Reporting Reports cccccceceeeseseeneteteeees 136 Configuring the Drive Resource Utilization Report ccceecceee 136 Configuring the Media Integrity Analysis Report ccseseeeee 138 Using Advanced Reporting Templates cece cere 140 Loading and Reloading Advanced Reporting Data 0 c cee 141 Deleting Advanced Reporting Data ccccceeeeesesenesesesceseneneneeees 141 Saving and E mailing Report Data Files eee ee teens 142 vi Configuring and Viewing the Media Security LOg ccsseseeeeeeeeeees 143 Viewing the Media Usage Log eee eeseeeeseseseeseeeetessseeeeensneeneees 144 Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs 145 i Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand 147 SEE Chapter 6 Storage Networking 149 About the Storage Networking License ccc ee eeeeeeeeteeeneeeees 150 Configuring Control Path Failover secsesesesesescsesesesesescseneseseseees 150 Forcing Control Path Failover
467. ridge is inaccessible Note This feature is currently disabled The library always reports media accessible to hosts i e the box is de selected and cannot be selected Scalar i500 User s Guide 219 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans Setting Description Use StorNext Select whether to use StorNext in conjunction with EDLM to perform Configuration certain EDLM operations and if so which StorNext configuration to use From the drop down list select None default or select one of the StorNext configurations you set up in Step 3 Configuring the StorNext Host Settings on the Library on page 211 Scan Settings Scan upon import Choose whether to scan tapes as soon as they are imported into this partition and if so which type of scan to perform This policy is disabled by default Choices are e None default Does not scan upon import e Quick Does not scan the tape Evaluates data from the cartridge memory CM only Takes less than one minute per tape Examples of when to use a quick scan e When you first import previously used scratch tapes into the library e When you import data cartridges that have been used in other backup and archival environments and need to do a quick check to determine whether the tape cartridge is nearing end of life at end of life or may have had issues reading or writing e Normal Evaluates the cartridge memory C
468. rive Firmwate 00 282 Downgrading IBM LTO 4 Tape Drive Firmware cceeeeee 283 Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware cccssssssseseseseneeseseseseeeeeseseees 283 Uploading Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling 284 Deleting Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling 0 284 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing 286 Taking the Library Online Offline ss sssssssssssssssereesssrsssissrerrrsresnesresreseess 288 Taking a Library Onine ernennen 288 Taking a Library QOHIDEs neresinenininsiinynni eis eni 289 Cabling the Library vi isscseseseadessdeensdessvenonnaesyvococptesisvonsaesvvesenstonsvcwessdveesevecespe 289 Specific Instructions for LTO 5 and LTO 6 Tape Drives 0 0 289 Cabling Libraries With SCSI Tape Drives eee eeeeeeeeees 293 Cabling Libraries With SAS Tape Drives eee eens 298 Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected Directly to a Host or Switch oo cece ce ceeeeeee cece cetereneteeeenes 303 Cabling Libraries With Fibre Channel Tape Drives Connected to Fibre Channel T O Bladesissa iin ericsson 308 Recommended Library Cabling for FC I O Blades ccceeee 313 Scalar i500 User s Guide ix Scalar i500 User s Guide Cable Management Guidelines 0 0 0 ccceeeeesecseeescscscseseseecscseanaeseeeeeenens 316 Cable Management Kit 0 0 eee ce cesseseeeeceeseeeeseseseseseseseneneaeseee 316 Managing Power Cords 0 cccese
469. rive and slot to create a partition If no tape drives or slots are available you must modify or delete an existing partition to free up resources For more information see Modifying Partitions on page 73 and Deleting Partitions on page 74 When you manually create partitions the library creates control paths See Working With Control Paths on page 86 for a description of the default control paths and how to change them When creating partitions manually you need to provide the following information e Partition Name Limited to a maximum of 12 lower case alphanumeric characters and underscores _ e Emulation Type This setting allows the partition to appear as a different library type to the host In most cases you can ignore this setting and just use the default However if your host application does not support the default and cannot recognize the partition using 71 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions the default setting you can choose a library type that your host has previously qualified This makes the partition appear to the host as the selected library type and should allow the host to communicate ADIC Scalar i500 default Quantum Scalar i500 Quantum Scalar i2000 ADIC Scalar i2000 ADIC Scalar 100 ADIC Scalar 24 Media Barcode Format This setting tells the library how to read and report barcodes of the tape cartridges in the partition The library s
470. rives e From the operator panel select Tools gt Drive Info Scalar i500 User s Guide 494 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Retrieving Tape Drive Logs EE Retrieving Tape Drive Logs Administrators can use the Web client to retrieve tape drive logs Tape drive log information can be used to help troubleshoot library and tape drive issues You can use the Retrieve Drive Log screen to select the appropriate tape drive Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates Details on retrieving tape drive log files include e Since the log retrieval process can take up to 30 minutes the tape drive and associated partition are automatically taken offline during the operation and brought back online when the operation completes You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the tape drive and partition offline Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 e Tape drive logs adhere to the following naming convention UDS_ID_SN dmp where ID identifies the tape drive coordinate location within the library and SN identifies the tape drive serial number e You can select the interface type SCSI SAS or FC of the tape drive from which you want to retrieve logs For
471. rives tape cartridges or power supplies exceeds 65 Ibs 29 5 kg To avoid serious injury at least two people are required to safely lift the modules 3 Park the robot assembly in the control module Regardless of which module you are installing the robot must be parked in the control module before you begin moving the modules into the rack a Open the I E station and access doors of each module b Using your hands gently lift the robot assembly into the control module The robot assembly should glide slowly and with some resistance Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot c After raising the robot assembly to the approximate middle of the control module hold it in place with one hand and using your other hand move the parking tab in a counter clockwise direction until it stops in the parked position The metal parking tab is located at the bottom of column 1 d Gently lower the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab Scalar i500 User s Guide 426 Installing the Library in a Rack Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Y f Ruy 4 MMMM 7 Y Pa Gy aa is ff 25 Hy PS __ N bS ia cameo R
472. rmation 253 Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives Details on changing the tape drive mode include e The default tape drive mode is online e You can select only tape drives in partitions to which you have been given access The Online Offline buttons toggle between modes e Once taken offline tape drives remain offline until they are turned online again or the library is restarted Restarting the library will bring all offline tape drives back online Note If you change the mode of a control path tape drive to offline a caution dialog appears asking you to confirm the mode change For information on control path tape drives see Working With Control Paths on page 86 The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt Drive gt Change Mode e From the operator panel select Operations gt Change Drive Mode For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface About Cleaning Tape Drives Scalar i500 User s Guide Library tape drives require occasional cleaning Cleaning cartridges are used to remove accumulated residue from each tape drive s read write head The library supports two methods for cleaning tape drives with cleaning cartridges AutoClean and Manual AutoClean Configuring one or m
473. rmation on importing and exporting cleaning media see Importing Cleaning Media on page 256 and Exporting Cleaning Media on page 258 Note Cleaning slots are not visible to the host application To choose host based cleaning do not configure any cleaning slots and configure your host application to manage cleaning tape drives Configuring cleaning slots on the library may affect the host application See your host application documentation for information Manual Cleaning When a tape drive needs cleaning it notifies the library If the library s AutoClean feature is not enabled no cleaning slots have been configured the library generates a RAS ticket informing the user that the tape drive needs cleaning Administrators can clean tape drives manually at any time using commands on the operator panel or Web client For more information see Manually Cleaning Tape Drives on page 260 To enable AutoClean an administrator must configure at least one cleaning slot in the library For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 78 For a description of AutoClean see About Cleaning Tape Drives on page 254 255 Viewing the Cleaning Count Using Valid Cleaning Media Importing Cleaning Media Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives The cleaning count is the number of times a cleaning cartridge has been used to clean a tap
474. rnet cables from the Ethernet Expansion blade 5 Lift the latch hooks out of the lock position and push them up see Figure 65 on page 465 You will feel the blade unplug from the library s backplane 6 Continue lifting on the latch hooks until the Ethernet Expansion blade is totally unplugged from the backplane 7 Slide the Ethernet Expansion blade out of the bay 8 Remove the cover plate from the bay to the right of the Ethernet Expansion blade Install the original double wide cover plate over both bays This is required for cooling and dust reduction If you need a cover plate contact Quantum 9 Save the library configuration see the library user s guide for instructions Scalar i500 User s Guide 473 Replacing an Ethernet Expansion Blade in the Same Location Power Cycling the Ethernet Expansion Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade If you are replacing an Ethernet Expansion blade in the same location you do not need to perform a remove operation via the web client as you would if you were permanently removing or relocating the Ethernet Expansion blade 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cables from the Ethernet Expansion blade 2 Lift the latch hooks out of the lock position and push them up see Figure 65 on page 465 You will feel the blade unplug from the library s backplane 3 Continue l
475. rogress motion commands are stopped and the picker slowly lowers to the bottom of the library When the access door is closed the library returns any media in the picker to its original slot and also performs a library inventory Caution Care should be taken to avoid opening the access door during robotic operations since the robot will stop immediately and will fail to complete the current operation I E stations enable importing and exporting cartridges with minimal interruption of normal library operations I E stations are located on the front of the control module and on the front of expansion modules A 5U I E station has a capacity of six cartridges within a removable magazine A 9U I E station has a capacity of 12 cartridges within two removable magazines The I E stations can also be configured as storage as well as become part of a logical division of library resources known as a partition The I E station is shared among all partitions but the I E station slots are owned by one partition at a time When an I E station slot is assigned to a partition only the assigned partition can access that slot The operator panel is the touch screen display device upon which the graphical user interface GUI appears The operator panel is located on the access door of the control module The library operations and service functions are performed from this screen The GUI is also accessible 19 Chapter 1 Description
476. rol Removing an Ethernet Expansion Blade from the Library s Configuration This feature is described in detail in Permanently Removing or Relocating an Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 472 516 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Robotics Diagnostics E Robotics Diagnostics The Robotics diagnostics currently include only one test the Get Put Test Get Put Test The Get Put Test requires the robot to remove one tape cartridge from the top I E station slot and then put the tape cartridge back into the same slot To run this test you must insert a tape into the library s top uppermost I E station slot Robotics tests cannot be performed from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics gt Robotics gt Robotics Get Put Test Scalar i500 User s Guide 517 a Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes This chapter describes how to work with cartridges and barcodes When working with tape cartridges certain considerations should be taken into account For example all tape cartridges in the library must have a barcode label In addition when loading your library you should be aware of whether or not your cartridges are write protected This chapter discusses these types of items in general terms See Library Specifications on page 524 for information on what type of tape cartridges are supported for each drive typ
477. rom the library using the import and export commands of the operator panel or Web client 4 Power off the library 5 Disconnect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables from all of the modules Note You should label all cables before you remove them so you can later reconnect them to their proper locations 6 Park the robot assembly in the control module Before unstacking the library the robot assembly must be placed in the control module a Open the I E station and access doors of each module b Using your hands gently lift the robot assembly into the control module The robot assembly should glide slowly and with some resistance Caution Support the robot assembly by holding onto the broad metal X axis plate Lifting the robot by the thin metal rod will bend the rod Lifting the robot by the black plastic picker body can damage the robot Scalar i500 User s Guide 341 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library c After raising the robot assembly to the approximate middle of the control module hold it in place with one hand and using your other hand move the parking tab in a counter clockwise direction until it stops in the parked position The metal parking tab is located at the bottom of column 1 d Gently lower the robot assembly to rest on the parking tab gt o ZNN A VANN Oo SA Z S
478. ront of the library a Open the I E station door At the lower right corner of the module is a vertical slot Insert the hinge of the right rack ear into the slot and then position the holes of the rack ear flush with the rack rail J 1 Hinge of rack ears b Using two M5 thumbscrews fasten the rack ear to the rack The thumbscrews should thread through the nut clips or cage nuts and fasten completely and evenly Scalar i500 User s Guide 435 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack 9 Install the left rack ear a With the I E station door open open the left door the access door of the module and pull the door toward you in order to access the slot located in the lower left corner of the module The flexible door hinge allows the door to be pulled away from the module providing access to the slot Note You may need to pull the door toward you in order to access the slot b Install the left rack ear in the same manner as the right rack ear c Using two M5 thumbscrews fasten the rack ear to the rack The thumbscrews should thread through the nut clips or cage nuts and fasten completely and evenly Scalar i500 User s Guide 436 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack HEA 10 Close the module s doors 11 Reinstall the tape drives to the library 12 Cable your librar
479. rtition When manual cartridge assignment is disabled the Assign I E screen does not appear on the operator panel and the cartridges in the I E station remain unassigned until they are moved or imported into the library For more information on how manual cartridge assignment affects importing of media see Importing Media on page 242 You can disable manual cartridge assignment by clearing the Manual Cartridge Assignment check box on the operator panel System Settings screen For more information on system settings Configuring System Settings on page 126 Manual cartridge assignment cannot be configured from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt System Settings Understanding Host Application Notification When manual cartridge assignment is enabled SCSI Unit Attention 6 2801 notifies the host application when the I E station has been accessed allowing the host to automatically detect the presence of media in the I E station and update its I E station status information When manual cartridge assignment is disabled host notification via SCSI Unit Attention 6 2801 depends on the number of configured partitions e If multiple partitions are defined the host application is not notified when the I E station has been accessed Media presence in the I E station is reported to any partition requesting it 77 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Conf
480. ry Q EKM key server then the port numbers for both the primary and secondary key servers must be set to the same value If they are not synchronization and failover will not occur e SKM The port number is always 6000 You cannot change SKM port numbers e KMIP Key Manager The port number must match the configured port number on the KMIP key manager server A typical port number used for communication between the KMIP key manager server and the library is port 9003 9 Click Apply Note You cannot edit the encryption system configuration settings when any partition is enabled for library managed encryption If this happens go to Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration change all EKM partition settings from Enable Library Managed to Allow Application Managed Then make your changes to the system configuration settings Finally go back and change all the EKM partition settings to Enable Library Managed 10 Ensure all ports corresponding to the EKM servers are open on your firewall to allow the library to connect to the servers For SKM ports 80 6000 and 6001 must be open Step 4 Installing TLS Certificates on the Library SKM Only If you are running SKM or a KMIP key manager Transport Layer Security TLS communication certificates with valid dates must be installed on the library in order for the library to communicate securely with attached EKM servers Note If you are using Q E
481. rying to write to a write Write command is protected cartridge Remove the write attempted to a write protection or use another tape protected tape 10 Media removal I You cannot eject the cartridge because Manual or software prevented the tape drive is in use Wait until the unload attempted operation is complete before ejecting the when prevent media cartridge removal on 11 Cleaning media I The tape in the drive is a cleaning Cleaning tape loaded cartridge into drive 12 Unsupported I You have tried to load a cartridge of a Attempted load of format type which is not supported by this unsupported tape drive format 13 Recoverable C The operation has failed because the Tape snapped cut or mechanical tape in the drive has experienced a other cartridge cartridge failure mechanical failure mechanical failure in 1 Discard the old tape 2 Restart the operation with a different tape the drive where medium can be demounted Scalar i500 User s Guide 533 Appendix B TapeAlert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 14 Unrecoverable C The operation has failed because the Tape snapped cut or mechanical tape in the drive has experienced a other cartridge cartridge failure mechanical failure mechanical failure in 1 Do not attempt to extract the tape me as ena Adn dse medium cannot be 5e demounted 2 Call the tape drive suppli
482. ryption Key Management FIPS Certified Encryption Solution FIPS Certified Encryption Solution Scalar i500 User s Guide FIPS Federal Information Processing Standard 140 2 is a U S government standard relating to computer security and encryption The Quantum Scalar i500 now offers a FIPS 140 2 Level 1 certified encryption solution composed of the Scalar Key Manager and HP LTO 5 or LTO 6 Fibre Channel tape drives in a Scalar i500 library FIPS mode can be enabled on the HP LTO 5 or LTO 6 tape drives via the library user interface Once in FIPS mode all encryption key communication between the tape drive and the library controller is authenticated and encrypted Details about configuring FIPS mode include Library firmware must be at version 600G or later HP LTO 5 or LTO 6 FC tape drive firmware must be at the latest version qualified with the Scalar i500 library see the Scalar 1500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels An Encryption Key Management license must be installed on the library sufficient to cover the tape drive s on which you want to enable FIPS mode A Storage Networking license must be installed on the library sufficient to cover the tape drive s on which you want to enable FIPS mode FIPS mode is configured by partition FIPS partitions must contain only HP LTO 5 FC or HP LTO 6 FC tape drives The partition encryption method must be set to Enable Library Managed in order to set FIPS mode FIPS mode
483. s For example selecting the Location column heading sorts the list by location coordinates The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Operations gt Drive gt Unload e From the operator panel select Operations gt Unload Drive For step by step procedures see the library s online Help To access the online Help system click the Help icon at the top right of the Web client or operator panel user interface There are two tape drive modes online and offline Online Tape drive is available for use This is the normal operating mode for the tape drive Offline Tape drive is offline to the host application and is not available for cartridge load and unload move operations initiated by the host application but it remains available for Web client or operator panel initiated move commands Note Ifa cartridge is already in the tape drive when you take the tape drive offline then the host can still read and write data on the tape Some operations require that the tape drive be offline You can take a tape drive offline rather than the entire library or partition so as to minimize disruption of library operations This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to change the tape drive mode Using the library to change tape drive mode may affect the host application See your host application documentation for more info
484. s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library SEEPS RSA gt DD N 1 Parking tab in unparked position Close the library s I E station and access doors Connect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables Make sure the module terminators are installed at the top and bottom of the stack of modules For cabling instructions see Cabling the Library on page 289 8 Power on the library Re create and or modify partitions cleaning slots and I E station slots as desired 375 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module 10 Import tape cartridges to the correct library partitions as needed 11 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 12 Ifthe host application inventories the location of each tape cartridge in the library open the host application and reinventory in order to sync its logical inventory with the physical inventory of the library Due to the way the library logically addresses its tape drives and slots internally permanently removing an expansion module from the library will change the element addresses and this can affect proper communication to a controlling host See Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 Because of this you must refresh the configuratio
485. s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Export Current Exports all the keys that were used to encrypt the tape cartridges that are currently in the library performing this export This includes storage slots I E stations and tape drives If a tape cartridge is no longer in the library the key used to encrypt the tape will not be exported If a tape cartridge barcode label is missing or changed the key used to encrypt the tape will not be exported Export Selective Exports only the key s associated with a string of characters that you type into the text box Each key is associated with its encrypted tape cartridge identified by the tape cartridge barcode You can type in all or part of a tape cartridge barcode and any keys that are associated with that string will be exported This is helpful if you only want to export a single key associated with a particular tape cartridge If a tape cartridge barcode label is changed the key used to encrypt the tape will not be exported 5 Click Apply All the exported keys are saved to a single encryption key file 6 A Save As dialog box opens allowing you to save the encryption key file to a location on your computer Choose a location and click Save Importing Data Encryption Keys SKM servers provide a unique encryption key for each tape cartridge that is encrypted In order to read tapes encrypted by a different i e sou
486. s Information in the library The configuration record includes e Product information vendor model product ID product version library firmware version and serial number e Capacity on Demand COD license information licensed slots and expiration date e Module information vendor module type module serial number and module location coordinates e Tape drive information e SCSI tape drives partition name number of tape drives in partition drive location SCSI element address online status active status ready state vendor model serial number tape drive firmware version drive type logical serial number interface type SCSI ID and LUN Scalar i500 User s Guide 486 E mailing the Configuration Record Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record Fibre Channel FC tape drives partition name number of tape drives in partition drive location SCSI element address online status active status ready state vendor model serial number tape drive firmware version drive type logical serial number interface type World Wide Node Name WWNN loop ID topology speed and actual speed Note If the FC tape drive is attached to an FC I O blade the WWNN indicates the WWNN of the I O blade not the tape drive Serial Attached SCSI SAS tape drives partition name number of tape drives in partition drive location
487. s are used by tape drives to encrypt information being written to and decrypt information being read from tape media The library communicates with the encryption key management server s The encryption keys pass through the library so that encryption is transparent to the applications Using the library in this way is known as library managed encryption Note These three solutions are not interoperable The Scalar i500 library does not support more than one encryption key management system on a single library Note Library firmware version 607G GS003 release i7 2 only supports KMIP Key Managers Other encryption systems are not supported 165 Table 1 Encryption Systems Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Encryption System Supported Tape Drives Supported Media Quantum Encryption Key Manager Q EKM IBM LTO 4 Fibre Channel and SAS IBM LTO 5 Fibre Channel IBM LTO 6 Fibre Channel You must be running Q EKM version 2 0 or higher to support IBM LTO 5 tape drives LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape cartridges Scalar Key Manager SKM HP LTO 4 Fibre Channel and SAS HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS HP LTO 6 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape cartridges KMIP compliant key managers HP LTO 4 Fibre Channel and SAS HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS HP LTO 6 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape cartridges The Key Management Intero
488. s follows From the Web client select Operations gt Cleaning Media gt Import e From the operator panel select Operations gt Import Cleaning Media When AutoClean is enabled you can use the Export Cleaning Media operation to export one or more cleaning cartridges from dedicated cleaning slots to the I E station for removal from the library You may need to export expired cleaning cartridges or free up cleaning slots for data storage After exporting cleaning cartridges you can reduce the number of configured cleaning slots The extra slots become available for use as storage slots For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 78 For a description of AutoClean see About Cleaning Tape Drives on page 254 Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avoid possible conflicts with the other partitions 258 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 9 Running Your Library About Cleaning Tape Drives Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export cleaning media See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 73 Note Once the export operation has started do not interfere with the operation by opening and closing the I E station door Details on exporting cleani
489. s obtained The most recent license contains the full amount of the license for that feature for example the most recent COD license contains the total number of COD slots licensed and replaces previous license keys To see which licensable features are enabled on your library go to the Licenses screen e From the Web client select Setup gt License e From the operator panel select Setup gt Licenses To obtain your license key for a new feature or upgrade 1 Contact your Quantum technical sales representative to submit your order for the feature or upgrade See Getting More Information or Help on page 8 2 Upon receipt of your order Quantum will ship you a license key certificate containing your authorization code Note If you order more than 46 COD slots COD licenses come in 46 slot increments If you order more than 46 slots you will receive more than one license key certificate For example if you want to activate 92 slots you will receive two license key certificates You need to follow the procedure outlined here twice once for each certificate However because each additional license key replaces the previous ones you only need to apply one license key the final one to the library 3 On your library locate the serial number You will need the Serial Number to retrieve your license key from the Web site To view the serial number e On the operator panel select Tools gt About Library or e
490. s them through the Setup and Operations menus 57 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Using the Setup Wizard e Welcome operator panel Welcomes you to the Setup Wizard e Hardware Installation operator panel Reminds you to install tape drives and the Ethernet cable e Setting the Date Time and Time Zone operator panel and Web client Allows you to set the date and time on your library e Managing the Network operator panel Allows you to configure your IPv4 network settings for remote access using the Web client Allows you to enable IPv6 so that you can configure IPv6 network settings later using Setup gt Network Mgmt e Applying a License Key operator panel and Web client Allows you to enter license keys for licensable features For more information see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 e Configuring Cleaning Slots operator panel and Web client Allows you to configure dedicated cleaning slots Configuring at least one cleaning slot enables the AutoClean feature e Configuring I E Station Slots operator panel and Web client Allows you to configure import export I E station slots e Working With Partitions operator panel and Web client Allows you to set the number of library partitions e Confirm Settings operator panel and Web client Allows you to confirm your library settings Caution Always take a library snapshot and save the library
491. s to complete 6 Do one of the following e If Completed appears in the Progress Window the diagnostics were performed this does not mean that the diagnostics passed just that the diagnostics were performed Click Close to close the Progress Window e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the diagnostics were not performed Follow the instructions listed in the Progress Window to resolve any issues that occurred during the operation 7 If you are entered the Diagnostics menu select Exit from the menu bar and then click OK in the dialog box that appears You can enable the library to automatically perform EKM Path Diagnostics at selected intervals During each interval the library tests every configured key server The default test interval is 10 minutes The library generates a RAS ticket if there are problems e For Q EKM Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics is disabled by default It is recommended that you leave Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics disabled unless network interruptions are a common cause of encryption failures at your site 186 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Caution Q EKM Only Running Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics may cause an increase in RAS tickets if tests are skipped due to tape drives being unavailable for a configurable number of consecutive test intervals To reduce the occurrences of RAS tickets you can specify the number of
492. s you to back up both SKM server keystores as soon as possible e If automatic key generation fails the library tries again every time a new key is requested until the keys are 90 percent depleted At that point the library stops trying to auto generate keys and issues a RAS ticket stating that you must manually generate keys See Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys on page 190 Generating Data Encryption Keys When 100 Depleted If an SKM server completely runs out of data encryption keys for a particular library that library generates a RAS ticket which states that you have run out of data encryption keys and that the library attempted to fail over to the other SKM server If this happens it is imperative that you manually generate a new set of data encryption keys on the depleted server immediately and then back up both SKM servers See Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys on page 190 Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys To manually generate data encryption keys you need to temporarily disable library managed encryption on a partition and then enable it again Enabling library managed encryption on a partition triggers the library to check both SKM servers to see if new data encryption keys are needed If so it creates the keys Note The data encryption key generation process takes approximately 15 minutes You should not run any library or host initiated operations on SKM partitions during key generation and ba
493. screpancies such as missing tape cartridges Selecting All RAS Tickets from the Tools menu on both the operator panel and the Web client opens the All RAS Tickets screen which lists RAS tickets in order of last occurrence of each event beginning with the most recent 482 Resolving and Closing RAS Tickets Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting About RAS Tickets Note Last Occurrence indicates the last time a ticket event occurred This information updates any time the event recurs Last Occurrence does NOT update if you open close or resolve the RAS Ticket Included in the list is a brief description of the error condition captured by the RAS ticket The All RAS Tickets screen allows you to view RAS ticket details and navigate to ticket resolution information If you want to request technical support the Ticket Details and Ticket Resolve windows provide a link to the online service request Website The initial status of all RAS tickets is Unopened Once the administrator selects the Resolve button on the All RAS Tickets screen for a ticket its status changes to Opened When the user closes the ticket its status changes to Closed You can view Opened and Unopened tickets on both the operator panel and the Web client but you can view Closed tickets only on the Web client Caution Be careful when pressing the Close All Tickets button This closes all RAS tickets even if they a
494. se installed on the library e A minimum of two KMIP compliant encryption servers are required for failover purposes A total of 10 KMIP compliant encryption servers are allowed for increased failover capability See Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library on page 169 for more information and instructions on how to configure KMIP compliant encryption systems on the library Keep the following points in mind when using encryption on the library e Data written to encryption supported and encryption capable media in EKM supported tape drives will be encrypted unless data was previously written to the media in a non encrypted format In order for data to be encrypted the media must be blank or have been written to using library managed encryption at the first write operation at the beginning of tape BOT e You cannot append encrypted data to a non encrypted tape e You cannot append non encrypted data to an encrypted tape e Only one data encryption key can be used per tape cartridge e Encryption is configured by partition Partitions must be configured for Library Managed Encryption EKM partitions must contain only the tape drives supported by the encryption system you are using For more information see Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 If you purchase an EKM license after you purchased your library you must install the license key on your library to enable the EKM f
495. sed for transmitting data across traditional LANs GigE is an enhanced version of the Ethernet protocol that has been used for many years as the underlying transport technology in IP networks GUI Graphical User Interface A computer environment that provides a visual view of a system by incorporating windows icons menus and a pointing device Also referred to as a Windows Icons Mouse and Pointers WIMP interface HAT Host Access Table The HP FC Storage Networking drive saves current and previously logged in host information in a Host Access Table HAT An entry is a combination of a host s WWPN and the drive s FC port to which it is connected Host information is stored and maintained in the HAT until filled up in which case the oldest unused entry is freed to allow a new host to get registered in the HAT HDD High Density Drive A drive that contains increased storage capacity of bits and or tracks per square inch Home position Accessor axes positioned at 0 vertical and 0 horizontal that serve as the point of reference for the position of other library components Home position is used as a basis for calibration Host In general a host is a computer or program that contains data and provides services to other computers or devices In Fibre Channel terms a host is a computer that initiates contact with storage devices Hot swappable The ability to replace a defective component while the system continues to function n
496. sesesssssssesesesesssesesesesesesesesesesesssesesesens 317 Managing Ethernet Cables 0 0 0 0 cece ceeeeeeecseeeseeeeeecenenaneneeeenes 320 Installing a Stand Alone 5U Control Module eseseseneeeeees 325 Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration c eee 326 Preparing to Install a Multi Module Library eee 327 Installing the Expansion Module 0 ceeeeeesssessesesessseeseseessesesesens 332 Installing the Control Module eee ceesssseseeeesssesesesessesesesens 336 Preparing to Use the Multi Module Library eee 336 Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library 0 0 eee 338 Preparing to Install an Additional Expansion Module 04 340 Unstacking the Existing Modules cece tenses eeneneeeeeneees 343 Installing the New 9U Expansion Module cece eeeeeeeeeees 347 Preparing to Use the Library cece cceeseseececseseseeceeecenenetees 353 Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module eee eesesseseeeeeneneneees 356 Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library364 Removing the Expansion Module ccceceecsssesesescseseesescseseseeseeees 365 Preparing to Use the New Library Configuration 370 Replacing the Control Module esses ee eesessseeeseteeeseeeenseneneees 376 Removing the Control Module ececesssssssesessssssseseseesssesesesens 377 Replacing the Control Module cece ceseeseecscetsnaeeeeesees 380 Preparing to Use the Control Module cesseseseesesenesesesens 385 Special In
497. sh card from the removed control module in the new control module For details see Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card on page 402 Connect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables Make sure the module terminators are installed in their previous positions at the top and bottom of the stack of modules For cabling instructions see Cabling the Library on page 289 6 Power on the library 7 Re create and or modify partitions cleaning slots and I E station slots as desired 8 Import tape cartridges into the correct partitions as needed 10 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 If the host application inventories the location of each tape cartridge in the library open the host application and reinventory in order to sync its logical inventory with the physical inventory of the library Due to the way the library logically addresses its tape drives and slots internally replacing a control module may change the element addresses and this can affect proper communication to a controlling host See Understanding Logical Element Addressing on page 35 Because of this you must refresh the configuration of any backup application that manages the library to reflect the adjusted positions In addition you may need to reboot the host server s or rescan the bus to detect the changes 385 Special Instructions for Replacing
498. stics and click OK to the message that appears From the Diagnostics menu select EKM gt EKM Path Diagnostics Note Performing Diagnostics will log off all other users of the same or lower privileges and take your partitions offline When you exit Diagnostics the partitions automatically come back online e Select Setup gt Encryption gt System Configuration or Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration and click the link that says Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics 185 Using Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 2 Q EKM Only A list of all the tape drives enabled for library managed encryption is displayed along with the tape drive status and the partition in which each tape drive resides 3 Q EKM Only Select the tape drive on which you want to perform diagnostics and click Apply Tape drives must be unloaded ready and online in order for the test to run A dialog box appears telling you that the selected partition will be taken offline When the test completes the partition automatically comes back online 4 Click OK to start the Q EKM diagnostics or click Apply to start the SKM or KMIP diagnostics 5 The library performs the diagnostics and displays pass fail results on each of the tests in the Progress Window Note The diagnostics tests may take several minute
499. stom Time Zone and set a Universal Coordinated Time UTC offset You can only set the time zone on the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Setup gt Date amp Time If you selected your time zone from the drop down list see Setting the Time Zone the library automatically adjusts for daylight saving time There is no need to manually reset the clock for time changes However if you set a custom time zone the library will not automatically adjust for daylight saving time You must enable the Use Custom Daylight Saving Time setting Once enabled you can set start and stop times to an accuracy of one minute You can only set daylight saving time on the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Date amp Time 108 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Working With FC I O Blades Scalar i500 User s Guide The library supports optional FC I O blades which provide host connections to LTO 2 LTO 3 LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 FC drives The number of FC I O blades in any library configuration cannot exceed four and each FC I O blade in the library supports up to four FC tape drives FC I O blades reduce switch port and cabling requirements and increase backup reliability When tape drives are connected to FC I O blades the library proactively checks the status and readiness of t
500. structions for Replacing a Control Module in a Library Running SKM siei eei cbt REEE EEEE rE E eS 386 Replacing an Expansion Module s sssssssssssessssssissiesresresresresresresresresresne 388 Removing the 9U Expansion Module ssssssssssssssesssseerissesresresrereeses 390 Replacing the 9U Expansion Module sssssssssessssssssissesiesresrrsresresrern 394 Preparing to Use the 9U Expansion Module ssssssessesissisrseseereeseese 400 Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Fl sh C rdenas asiani i ani eie EAR E EER e 402 Replacing the LCB Compact Flash Card or Compact Flash Card OMY iee E E R A E E E A A E i 402 Replacing the LCB Only sssssssssssessesssessssissessrssresresresrrsrenrenresersnesnesrenre 412 Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies cece 414 Adding a Redundant Power Supply ssesssessesissesrrsssesiesresesresresresee 414 Permanently Removing a Redundant Power Supply see 415 Removing and Replacing a Power Supply sss sssssesssesiesisserseereesese 416 Installing the Library in a Rack eee esesesseceseessesesesesssesescsesesesesesees 417 Preparing for Installation eessessesesescsesesesescsesesesescscseaeseseeees 418 Installing the Rackmount Shelves cece essssseseeessseeeeeeesesseseeess 423 Preparing Modules for Rack Installation 00 0 0 cece eceseneeeeeeee 426 Installing the Bottom Module in the Rack o 0 eee eeseeeseseneeeeerenees
501. t receiving power Blinks once per second Ethernet Expansion blade Powered off Ready to remove Blade Port LEDs Table 13 LCB Ethernet Hub This section describes blade port LEDs LCB Ethernet Hub Port LED The LED for an Ethernet hub port is located above the port Use Table 13 to interpret Ethernet hub link activity on an LCB Link Activity LED Color Represents Fibre Port Link Status Amber Link and activity Solid ON The link is up e Blinks The link is up and currently transmitting commands Scalar i500 User s Guide Fibre Port Link LED on FC I O Blades A fibre port link LED on a FC I O blade shows the current state of an FC link and indicates whether or not the link is ready to transmit commands 503 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs The link LED for an FC I O blade fibre port is located either below or above the port For each link LED pair on the FC I O blade the LED on the left belongs to the fibre port below The LED on the right belongs to the fibre port above Black lines on the FC I O blade faceplate may indicate which LED belongs to which port Use Table 14 to interpret Fibre Channel link activity on an FC I O blade Table 14 Fibre Port Link LED on FC I O Blade LED Color Represents Fibre Port Link Status Green Link and activity e Blinking Link with activity e OFF No link or link with constant activity e Solid ON Blade is initializin
502. t the changes These instructions explain how to remove a tape drive that you do not intend to replace with another one You may want to permanently remove a tape drive from your library if you are decreasing the size of your SAN or reducing the number of partitions in your library You can remove a tape drive while the library is powered on Do not however remove a tape drive that is currently in use Required tools None 1 2 3 Prepare host applications for tape drive removal Save the library configuration If there is a tape cartridge in the target tape drive use the Web client to unload it Using the Web client delete the partition that uses the target tape drive Then re create the partition if desired using another tape drive Disconnect the host interface cables from the tape drive that you want to remove From the back of the library loosen the tape drive s thumbscrews 7 Remove the tape drive by gripping the tape drive handle and pulling the entire tape drive toward you Install a cover plate over the vacant tape drive slot If you cannot find a cover plate contact Quantum Support to order one It is important that all vacant slots have a cover plate to keep unwanted materials out of the library Warning Running the library without a cover plate can be dangerous Doing so also causes the library to run ata reduced speed Due to the way the library logically addresses its tape dr
503. t to Point with HP drives if the tape drive is connected to a host You cannot use Point to Point if the tape drive is connected directly to a host You cannot use Point to Point if the tape drive is connected to an FC I O blade You must use Point to Point if the tape drive is being used for control path failover see Configuring Control Path Failover on page 150 or data path failover see Configuring Data Path Failover on page 154 If a tape drive is being used for control path failover or data path failover you cannot change its topology from Point to Point to anything else The requested interface speed can be set to Auto default 1 Gb s 2 Gb s 4 Gb s or 8 Gb s depending on drive type Caution LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives can be configured for speeds of up to 8 Gb s If they are configured for 8 Gb s you should connect them directly to a host and not to an FC I O blade because the FC I O blade only allows speeds up to 4 Gb s If you connect an LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drive to an FC I O blade you must configure the tape drive speed to 4 Gb s or less e Ifthe requested FC topology and speed settings are not supported the next appropriate settings are negotiated On the Web client the Drive Settings screen displays both the requested and the actual FC topology connection mode and interface speed If FC drives are not connected to the host the negotiated actual settings appear on t
504. t you plan to enable for FIPS upgrade firmware to the latest version qualified with the Scalar i500 library see the Scalar 1500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels 3 Shut down the library 4 Do one of the following If your library is Do this 5U Perform Cabling a 5U Library for Ethernet Connectivity on page 460 14U or larger Perform Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade on page 461 5 Power on the library 6 Install Storage Networking and Encryption Key Management licenses on the library if they are not already installed 7 Enable FIPS mode see Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO 5 Tape Drives on page 131 To operate your HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives to be compliant with FIPS you must enable FIPS mode FIPS mode is configured by partition You enable FIPS mode on a partition which enables FIPS mode on all of the tape drives in the partition To change FIPS mode for a partition 1 On the library web client select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration The Setup Encryption Partition Configuration page displays see Figure 16 on page 132 131 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings Change the Encryption Method of a partition to Enable Library Managed 2 Select the FIPS check box to enable FIPS mode for the partition Clear the FIPS check box to disable FIPS mode for the partition 3 Click Apply Fi
505. tach the black hook and loop fastener to the nearest available M5 threaded hole on the lower right of any module chassis Insert a push rivet into the rivet hole on the blue hook and loop fastener The head of the rivet should be on the same side of the fastener as the plastic loop Firmly press the push rivet through the hole in the expansion module described above The hook and loop fastener should now be secured to the library chassis Plug the one end of the Ethernet cable into one of the four Ethernet hub ports on the LCB Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the appropriate port on the expansion module If the FC I O blade is installed in the module s upper I O blade bay plug the cable into the Ethernet port labeled UPPER If the FC I O blade or Ethernet Expansion blade is installed in the module s lower I O blade bay plug the cable into the Ethernet port labeled LOWER Open the wire saddle nearest the LCB place the Ethernet cable inside and snap the wire saddle shut 8 Repeat for the other wire saddle 9 If there is excess Ethernet cable loop the excess cable into a bundle in 10 the shape of a figure eight The bundle should be small enough to hold comfortably with one hand or about six inches in length Wrap the bundle with the hook and loop fastener Thread the strap through the plastic loop and tighten the strap around the bundled cable Secure the strap by pressing it down The Ethernet
506. tains media with an unreadable barcode label for example the label is missing torn or marked up the scanner cannot identify it so the library normally reports the slot as empty With the Unlabeled Media Detection feature you can configure the library to detect and report which slots contain media with unreadable barcodes Since cartridges with unreadable barcodes will not work for 129 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring System Settings some library functions knowing which labels are bad enables you to replace them with good ones as soon as possible When you enable Unlabeled Media Detection the calibration sensor re scans slots identified as empty in the inventory to see if a cartridge is physically in the slot If so the library reports the cartridge as having an unreadable barcode Note The library always re scans empty slots in the top and bottom rows of the library even if you don t enable the Unlabeled Media Detection feature This is because occasionally a small or poorly placed label cannot be read by the barcode scanner in those two rows The calibration sensor re scans the bottom row and the picker physically checks the top row because the calibration sensor cannot reach it Bottom row here means the bottommost available row as indicated in the library configuration report This feature is disabled by default When enabled the following occurs The re scan may take up t
507. talling Additional Modules Into the Rack on page 431 Reinstall the tape drives power supplies and tape cartridges in the library Cable your library as necessary following the instructions provided in Cabling the Library on page 289 Power on the library 430 Installing Additional Modules Into the Rack Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack All modules that you add to the rack must be positioned above the module that you previously installed since the bottom module must be secured to the rackmount shelves unless you decide to uninstall the entire library from the rack and reconfigure it Required parts Rack ears 4 M5 thumbscrews 4 nut clips or 4 cage nuts Explanation of parts Each rack ear contains two elongated holes enabling you to fasten it to the rack using the M5 thumbscrews and either the nut clips or cage nuts using the most accessible mounting holes 1 If you are installing a module above a module that currently has a top cover remove the top cover Similarly if the module you are installing has a bottom cover remove the bottom cover before installing the module above another module in the rack You need to make sure the library is hollow all the way through with just one bottom cover on the lowest module and one top cover on the top module See Installing the New 9U Expansion Module on page 347 2 Determine
508. tape drives can be mixed e HP and IBM tape drives can be mixed e Different media generations for example LTO 3 LTO 4 LTO 5 can be mixed e For partitions that use Library Managed Encryption e Tape drives must be FC or SAS FC and SAS tape drives can be in the same partition e Q EKM partitions can only contain IBM LTO 4 and IBM LTO 5 tape drives SKM partitions can only contain HP LTO 4 and HP LTO 5 tape drives For more information on partitions with Library Managed Encryption see Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 Using the Web client administrators can modify partition settings any time after the partition is created The tape drive set as the control path for a particular partition cannot be deleted from that partition The check box associated with the control path is grayed out For more information on setting the control path see Working With Control Paths on page 86 The library automatically takes the partition offline before modifying it and places the partition back online after it is modified 73 Deleting Partitions Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions Note If the operation does not complete successfully the partition remains offline until you turn it back online manually or restart the library see Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 76 When modifying a partition you may ne
509. testing if they are currently offline Before beginning the test you must load a known good tape cartridge into the top I E slot Location Partition Type O 1 3 edim_a HP LTO 5 3 Place a known good tape cartridge into the top I E station slot Note A known good tape cartridge means one that is fairly new formatted fully written and that has a good cartridge memory CM It is a good idea to create one to have on hand for this type of operation 4 Select the drive to test and click Apply The tape is tested using the known good tape cartridge When the test completes a Success or Failure message appears 5 Do one of the following e Ifthe result is Success Manually bring the tape drive back online Tools gt Drives gt Change Mode e Ifthe result is Failure If you used a known good tape a failure generally means the drive has failed View the RAS ticket details or contact Quantum Support for further analysis Scalar i500 User s Guide 236 Chapter 9 Running Your Library This chapter explains how to access and operate your library Most of the library functions described here can be found on the Operations menu Note The information in this chapter assumes you are using the Web client Differences in functionality between the Web client and the operator panel are noted This chapter covers Powering on the Library e Shutting Down Powering Off and Completely
510. th channel zoning and host mapping are enabled the channel zoning settings supersede any host LUN mapping on the FC I O blade e After configuring channel zoning save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Scalar i500 User s Guide 112 Managing FC Hosts and Host Mapping Enabling Disabling FC Host Mapping Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Channel Zoning e From the operator panel select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Channel Zoning An FC host is the main processing server on a storage area network SAN that receives data and initiates communication with other devices When FC I O blades are installed in the library administrators can access add modify and delete FC hosts and also configure FC host mapping Before you can perform any of these FC host management operations you need to enable host mapping which is disabled by default See Enabling Disabling FC Host Mappi
511. the control module To completely remove power Perform the shutdown sequence and power off the library Then turn off the power switch on each power supply located at the rear of the library Finally disconnect the power supply cables from their electrical source 238 Chapter 9 Running Your Library Restarting the Library The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the Web client select Operations gt System Shutdown e From the operator panel select Operations gt Shutdown Restarting the Library The Restart command shuts down and restarts the library s operating system and firmware When performing a restart the library finishes the current command then shuts down the library and restarts it During the restart the library brings all tape drives and partitions online and performs an inventory of cartridges tape drives and slots Before performing a restart make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library Restarting takes approximately 5 minutes for the control module and longer for the 14U and higher library configurations If the Not Initialized message appears on the operator panel after the restart process is complete the library did not properly initialize View the All RAS Tickets screen to find the problem that is preventing the library from properly initializing See Viewing RAS Tickets on page 482 The paths to open the appropriate screens ar
512. thernet Expansion blade you want to power cycle It takes approximately 1 minute to power cycle an Ethernet Expansion blade The status displays as Booting during the power cycle There are two places on the library Web client which tell you whether tape drives are connected via Ethernet either via an Ethernet Expansion blade or connected directly to the library control blade These two places are e Tools gt Drive Operations gt Update tape drive firmware using a firmware image file e Tools gt Drive Operations gt Retrieve Tape Drive Log The tape drive table in each of these screens has a column called Ethernet Connected If the tape drive is connected via Ethernet the tape drive IP address will be listed in the column If the tape drive is Ethernet capable but not connected the column displays No If the tape drive is not Ethernet capable the column displays N A You can also view the location coordinates and Ethernet Expansion blade status in the library System Information Report e Reports gt System Information The status LEDs for the Ethernet Expansion blade are located at the bottom of the Ethernet Expansion blade below ETH 6 see Figure 69 on page 476 475 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 69 Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs Port LED status Ethernet Expansion blade status LEDs Left Blue
513. ticket that alerts service personnel and customers of an issue with the library RAS tickets identify which library components are most likely causing the issue When possible a RAS ticket provides instructions for resolving the issue Reliability A RAS attribute that is designed to prevent failure of a storage solution See also RAS Scalar i500 User s Guide 548 Scalar i500 User s Guide Glossary SAM SCSI Architecture Model An ANSI standard that defines the generic requirements and overall framework in which other SCSI standards are defined New generations of this standard are identified by a numeric suffix for example the second generation standard is SAM2 SAN Storage Area Network A dedicated network that connects storage devices and servers ina pool providing consolidated storage and storage management Storage interconnects between many initiators and target devices The SAN allows for sharing resources target devices among multiple servers initiators SCSI Small Computer System Interface A set of standards for a high speed parallel interface that connects processing devices to peripheral devices such as storage subsystems The acronym is pronounced scuzzy SCSI ID Small Computer Systems Interface Address An address ona SCSI BUS Typically there are 16 addresses on a single channel SCSI BUS Server A powerful centralized computer or program designed to provide information to clients smaller co
514. tings as follows Note You cannot log into the Web client until you have configured the network settings e Ifyou are using IPv4 On the Setup Wizard Enable IPv6 screen do NOT select the Enable IPv6 check box Click Next Configure the network settings Scalar i500 User s Guide 55 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Using the Setup Wizard e Ifyou are using IPv6 On the Setup Wizard Enable IPv6 screen select the Enable IPv6 check box and click Next You have enabled IPv6 but you will not be prompted to configure IPv6 settings here Continue with the Setup Wizard screens Then when you are finished using the Setup Wizard configure the IPv6 network settings by going to Setup gt Network Mgmt on the operator panel 4 Log out of the operator panel 5 Using the default administrator account log in to the Web client Type admin in the User Name text box and password in the Password text box Complete the Setup Wizard screens on the Web client interface The final Setup Wizard screen will prompt you to apply your settings When you have completed the Setup Wizard the Library Configuration report appears on the Web client The Library Configuration report provides information on the library s tape drives partitions I E stations storage slots cleaning slots and loaded media See Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 268 for more information on the Library Configuration
515. tion Adding Expansion Modules to an Existing Library Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Permanently Removing Expansion Modules From an Existing Library Replacing the Control Module Replacing an Expansion Module Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card Adding Removing and Replacing Power Supplies Installing the Library in a Rack 287 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Taking the Library Online Offline e Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives e Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades e Adding Removing and Replacing the FC I O Fan Blade e Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade e Cabling a 5U Library for Ethernet Connectivity Installing the Ethernet Expansion Blade e Permanently Removing or Relocating an Ethernet Expansion Blade e Replacing an Ethernet Expansion Blade in the Same Location e Viewing Ethernet Connectivity e Preparing the Library for Moving or Shipping Taking the Library Online Offline An online library allows a host application to fully control library operations Taking a library offline switches library control to the user interfaces and limits host application command requests Taking a Library Online To take an entire library online take all of its partitions online 1 Using the library s operator panel select Operations gt Change Partition Mode or usin
516. tion references tape drives within the module you are removing or replacing modify any affected partition by removing the referenced drive elements from the partition See Modifying Partitions on page 73 For example in Figure 57 on page 358 all partitions reference drives in the expansion modules In Figure 58 on page 361 Library_c was deleted as well as its drive references in the expansion module Scalar i500 User s Guide 361 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module Library_a and Library_b still require partition modifications to remove the drive reference and hereby free the expansion module of all partition resource references 9 If you are removing or replacing an expansion module set the number of I E station slots to six You can reconfigure I E station slots after the module removal or replacement is complete See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 79 10 Power off the library 11 Disconnect all power cords network data cables and module to module cables from each module you will be removing Note You should label all cables before you remove them so you can later reconnect them to their proper locations 12 Park the robot assembly in the control module Before unstacking the library the robot assembly must be placed in the control module a Open the I E station and access doors of each module b Using your hands gently lift the robot assembly into t
517. tion the same way all storage or all I E slots If the library consists of a control module all six I E station slots must be configured either as storage or as I E station slots A 14U library consists of a control module with six I E station slots and an expansion module with 12 I E station slots All 12 of the slots in the expansion module must be configured the same way as either I E station slots or storage slots Therefore a 14U library can contain a minimum of six and a maximum of 18 dedicated I E station slots Table 4 lists the number of I E station slots available per library for all base library configurations 80 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring I E Station Slots Table 4 Number of I E Station Slots Available Comic ibn 5U Control Module 9U Expansion Module Library Total VE VE VE VE VE VE Stations Slots Stations Slots Stations Slots 5U 1 6 1 6 14U 1 6 1 12 2 18 23U 1 6 2 24 3 30 32U 1 6 3 36 4 42 41U 1 6 4 48 5 54 Details on configuring I E station slots include Before changing the number of I E station slots remove all tape cartridges from any slots currently configured as I E station slots e An T E station that has been configured for storage may contain cleaning slots These cleaning slots must be deleted before you can reconfigure the storage slots as I E station slots e The default number of dedicated I E slots is six If you accept the Se
518. tly asked questions troubleshooting tips and service bulletins for all of its products To access the knowledge base go to the Quantum Support Web site and click on Knowledge Base http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Index aspx Sag About RAS Tickets The Scalar i500 library uses advanced problem detection reporting and notification technology to alert you of problems as soon as they occur The library performs numerous self tests to monitor the library s temperature voltage and currents and standard library operations It performs these self tests each time the library is powered on and during normal operation when the library is idle If the self test detects a problem the library generates a Reliability Availability and Serviceability RAS ticket that identifies the component that is likely causing the problem The library s light emitting diodes LEDs may also turn on or off and flash to indicate an abnormal state If Scalar i500 User s Guide 481 Viewing RAS Tickets Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting About RAS Tickets the problem is not severe the library continues to provide full functionality to all unaffected partitions RAS tickets have three priority levels e Low Informational message Indicates that an abnormal condition exists within the library that warrants investigation and correction but the nature of the condition may have little or no effect on operations
519. tly assigned to a partition You cannot mix tape drive interface types vendors or media generations in partitions that you create automatically To create a partition with mixed interface types vendors and media generations you must create the partition manually see Manually Creating Partitions on page 71 For example If your library contains two tape drives an FC IBM LTO 4 and an FC IBM LTO 5 two partitions would be created because although they have the same interface type they have different media generations LTO 4 and LTO 5 e If your library contains two tape drives a Fibre Channel IBM LTO 4 and a Fibre Channel HP LTO 4 two partitions would be created because the tape drive vendors are different On the Automatically Create Partitions screen you can select the number of partitions to create from a minimum of the default specified by the library to a maximum that equals the number of unassigned tape drives in your library The library must contain at least one unassigned tape drive and one unassigned slot to automatically create a partition If no unassigned tape drives or slots exist you must modify or delete one or more partitions to free up resources For more information see Modifying Partitions on page 73 and Deleting Partitions on page 74 When the library automatically creates partitions it creates control paths See Working With Control Paths on page 86 for a description of the default control paths and
520. to perform library functions To view more information about the library s condition select Tools gt About Library The State field on the About Library screen will display Not ready followed when applicable by a brief explanation For example if the library door is open the State field will display Not ready door is open The header in the Web client also alerts you when the library is not ready For instance if the library door is open the header will display the following message Library s door is open Library Not Ready messages appear in the header in the operator panel and the Web client under the following circumstances e The robot is in the process of calibrating When the robot has finished calibrating the Library Not Ready message no longer appears e The robot cannot calibrate For example a fiducial label is missing preventing the robot from calibrating 490 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Duplicate Devices Discovered e The robot requires manual intervention For example the picker contains a tape cartridge that it cannot unload The library door is open The robot will not operate if the door is open e If none of the above situations apply but the library is still not ready to operate the header will display a Library Not Ready message without additional detail The library generates a RAS ticket whenever the library enters a not ready state The RAS ticket may provide i
521. to the date and time settings on the encryption key server To install your own certificates 1 Ensure that the date on all encryption key servers and the library are set to the current date Incorrect date settings may interfere with the TLS certificates and cause the library to stop communicating with the key servers Place the TLS certificate files in a known location on your computer 178 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Import Communication Certificates The Tools TLS Communication Certificate Import screen opens see Figure 26 on page 176 If TLS certificates are currently installed they will be listed in a table at the bottom of the screen If they are not installed a message appears at the bottom of the screen stating that certificates are not installed From the Select the Certificate Type to install drop down list select your encryption key management system SKM or KMIP Key Manager Retrieve the certificate files as follows For SKM a Make sure the Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle check box is deselected b Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File c Click Browse to retrieve the Admin Certificate File d Inthe Admin Certificate Password field type the password used when you generated the certificate files Click Browse to retrieve the Client Certificate F
522. torNext Plugin 3 5 to 4 1 120i GE001 Yes 7 Click Install The Tools Manage EDLM Plug ins screen appears Figure 30 Installing the SNAPI Plug in Tools Manage EDLM Plug ins Select the plug in package file to install Browse 8 Click Browse to navigate to and select the EDLM plug in for SNAPI you downloaded earlier 9 Click Next A confirmation screen appears Scalar i500 User s Guide 210 Chapter 8 Extended Data Lifecycle Management Incomplete EDLM Scans 10 Click Install The file is installed When complete a Success message appears 11 Click Close to close the Success message Step 3 Configuring the StorNext Host Settings on the Library This step is optional If StorNext Storage Manager is managing your partitions you can use it in conjunction with EDLM to automatically copy data from bad or suspect tapes or to trigger media scans If you are not using StorNext in conjunction with EDLM skip this step After installing the SNAPI client plug in you must configure the library to communicate with the StorNext Storage Manager host server 1 From the Web client select Tools gt EDLM gt Configure StorNext Settings The Tools EDLM StorNext Configuration screen appears 2 Click Create The Tools EDLM StorNext Configuration entry screen appears Figure 31 StorNext Host Configuration Tools EDLM StorNext Configuration Enter the following information for the StorNext host Nam
523. trap receiver Select one of the following e UDP UDP6 User Datagram Protocol For IPv4 select UDP for IPv6 select UDP6 e TCP TCP6 Transmission Control Protocol For IPv4 select TCP for IPv6 select TCP6 Host Name IP Address The host name or the IP address of the external management application you want to register A host name may be entered only if DNS is enabled Otherwise IP addresses must entered For information on DNS see Modifying Network Settings on page 60 Port the port number of the external application you want to register The default port number for an external application is 162 64 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Managing the Network e Create Adds the IP address and port number of the external application to the list of registered addresses that will be sent SNMP traps Delete Allows you to delete a selected IP address and port number e Test Verifies only that the library has sent SNMP traps to all registered IP addresses Check the external applications to verify that the traps were received While the test is in progress the Progress Window appears If the test is successful Success appears in the Progress Window and the traps were successfully sent If the test is unsuccessful Failure appears in the Progress Window Follow the instructions listed in the Progress Window to resolve any issues that occur during the operation See the S
524. trators You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics then select Drives gt Drive Tests gt Drive Reset From the operator panel select Tools gt Drive Mgmt gt Reset drives The Media Tests are drive tests that require you to insert a scratch or suspect tape into the library s top uppermost I E station slot You can only run these tests on IBM tape drives The following tests are available Drive Self Test Performs the drive s Power On Self Test POST to make sure that drive hardware is working properly Read Write Test Reads and writes 96 wraps worth of data in each of the scratch tape s four data sections During the test the drive overwrites the data on the scratch tape Fast Read Write Test Reads and writes two wraps worth of data in each of the scratch tape s four data sections During the test the drive overwrites the data on the scratch tape Media Test Run this test if you suspect media damage in a tape cartridge Since media damage usually comes from the tape edges this test reads and writes two wraps worth of data on each of the two outside data bands on both edges of the tape for the entire length of the tape For this test insert the suspect cartridge in the top I E station slot The data will be overwr
525. tting is enabled by default 124 Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring the Internal Network Note This setting differs from enabling the SMI S service in the Tools gt System Settings menu see Enable SMI S on page 129 In order to run SMI S the port must be open and the SMI S service must be enabled You cannot configure the security settings from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the operator panel select Tools gt Security SSS EE OO Configuring the Internal Network Scalar i500 User s Guide Use the Internal Network Configuration screen to configure your library s internal network setting The default internal network address is 10 10 10 X The library s internal network enables communication among library components While rare it is possible that the default addressing of the internal network could conflict with your network potentially causing the library to become confused When installing the library make sure that the external network setting is different from the internal network setting on the library If DHCP is enabled or you do not know what your external network setting is check with your network administrator Caution Do not change the library s internal IP address during backup restore operations From the operator panel administrators can change the setting of the internal network using the Internal Network
526. tup Wizard default configuration settings six I E slots will be created in the control module e Ifyou increase the size of your library by adding expansion modules the I E stations in the new modules will be storage slots by default You can select to reconfigure these slots as I E slots Based on the number of I E slots you configure the library automatically determines which I E stations to configure as I E slots and which to configure as storage The library configures I E slots in the control module I E station first and then works outward to the I E stations in the expansion modules I E stations in expansion modules below the control module have precedence over I E stations in expansion modules above the control module Scalar i500 User s Guide 81 Configuring Zero I E Station Slots Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Configuring I E Station Slots All slots in an I E station must be configured the same way as either storage or I E slots For this reason if your library includes one or more expansion modules and you configure an even number of I E slots greater than six the control module I E station may be configured automatically as storage If the I E station is configured as data storage slots its door is always locked For information on unlocking I E stations see Locking and Unlocking the I E Stations on page 262 I E station slots are shared by all partitions within a li
527. tures above 125 6 F 52 C can cause permanent damage If cartridges have been exposed to temperatures outside the ranges specified above stabilize the cartridges at room temperature for the same amount of time they were exposed to extreme temperatures or 24 hours whichever is less Do not place cartridges near sources of electromagnetic energy or strong magnetic fields such as computer monitors electric motors speakers or x ray equipment Exposure to electromagnetic energy or magnetic fields can destroy data and the embedded servo code written on the media by the cartridge manufacturer rendering the cartridges unusable Place barcode labels only in the designated slots on the cartridges 519 Chapter 14 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Write Protecting Cartridges e Ifyou ship cartridges ship them in their original packaging or something stronger e Do not insert damaged cartridges into tape drives e Do not touch the tape or tape leader Caution Do not degauss cartridges that you intend to reuse Write Protecting Cartridges All cartridges have a write protect write inhibit switch to prevent accidental erasure or overwriting of data Before loading a cartridge into the library make sure that the write protect switch is positioned correctly either on or off Slide the red or orange write protect switch to the right so that the padlock shows in the closed position The switch is located o
528. tus 00 cscoscics feseitcecessetsaustedeonestectoseevsantenens 507 xiv Scalar i500 User s Guide Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Power Supply Status cece cece ceeeeeeecesseeneeeteseeneeees TapeAlert Flag Severity Codes cssesssseseseseneeneseees Tape Drive TapeAlert Flag Descriptions 0 cee XV Scalar i500 User s Guide Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figures 5U Library Configuration Standalone Control Module 12 14U Library Configuration 5U Control Module Plus One 9U Expansion Mod ulle essesssessecsseseneessececneensererseesseenes 13 23U Library Configuration 5U Control Module Plus Two 9U Expansion Modules 0 c cee ceseeceseseeseseseseneeeesseeseeeeeeeeaes 14 Base Systems Plus Expansion Modules cece 17 Front Panel Components 00 0 cceceseseesesescreeeeeseesesenseeeseneeeeeees 18 Back Panel Compomentts cececssseeeseeseseeeeeeseecseeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeaes 21 Power StUpply LEDS eicsisccnsusesinnscsestessescssssssivecsessessenes sssdesesevenseste 24 Library Control Blade eee cee ceessseeeeseessseeseeeseseeees 26 FCO Bladesissa E S 28 FC I O Fan Blade wiscsiccisiasssestanetisminitvenimetabadetinenaeuaee 29 Library Location Coordinates ccceeeeseessssssseeeseneeseseeees 33 Logical Element Addressing 14U One Partition Six Tape Driv
529. two host communication ports and four connection ports to FC drives Each FC I O blade is cooled by a fan blade that is installed next to the FC 1 O blade in the expansion module FC I O blades and fan blades are hot swappable FC I O blades cannot be installed in the control module so your library configuration must include at least one expansion module to include FC I O blades Each expansion module can house up to two FC I O blades Depending on the number of installed expansion modules the library can support from one to four FC I O blades No library configuration can contain more than four FC I O blades Any FC drive in the library including drives in the control module can be connected to an FC I O blade in an expansion module Note FCI O menu commands are available for use only when FC I O blades are installed in the library The FC I O blade indicates its status with three LED status indicators These indicators are green amber and blue in color e Green represents processor status e Amber represents health status Blue represents power control status Figure 9 shows the FC I O Blade including LEDs For more information on the behavior of the FC I O Blade LEDs see Blade Status LEDs on page 500 For information on configuring I O blades see Working With FC I O Blades on page 109 For information on installing and cabling FC I O blades and FC tape drives see Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replac
530. uctions on how to enable or disable host mapping see Enabling Disabling FC Host Mapping on page 113 e The Setup I O Blade Host Mapping screen on the Web client lists the host name I O blade location World Wide Port Name WWPN and operating system type of each available FC host You can select the FC host to configure and proceed to the next screen The screen lists the available partitions and tape drives connected to the FC I O blade to which the FC host is attached For each available partition and tape drive the screen lists the following e Description For tape drives Drive location coordinates associated partition For partitions the name assigned to the partition during the partition creation process e Type Device type for example processor media changer partition tape drive e Serial Number Serial number of the partition or tape drive e Vendor Device manufacturer e Product Name of the device e LUN Current logical unit number LUN assignment Assign a new LUN number for the device Note The operator panel host mapping configuration screens show less information about each device however you still select the host and device s and configure the LUN number s 118 Configuring FC Host Port Failover Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades After configuring FC host mapping save the library configur
531. ue lifting on the latch hooks until the blade is totally unplugged from the backplane 5 Slide the FC I O blade out of the expansion module Scalar i500 User s Guide 452 Replacing an FC I O Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing FC I O Blades 6 Make sure cover plates are installed over any unused bays in the expansion module If you are permanently removing the FC I O blade you will need to configure the library to stop monitoring the FC I O blade see Permanently Removing FC I O Blades on page 497 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 These instructions explain how to replace an FC I O blade in your library You can remove and replace a FC I O blade while the library is powered on Note The library will generate a RAS ticket when you remove the FC I O blade If you do not want the library to generate a RAS ticket you can power down the FC I O blade before removing it See Controlling FC I O Blade Power on page 263 Required tools None 1 2 Access the back of the expansion module If you have not already done so remove the old FC I O blade following the directions in Removing an FC I O Blade on page 452 Press up and out to open the latch hooks on each side of the replacement FC I O blade Carefully align the FC I O blade with the guide slots in the bay The status L
532. uide 378 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module PDHS OD a Control module front 2 Thumbscrews Control module rear Scalar i500 User s Guide 379 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module 6 Open the module s access door and raise the guide pin by pulling it up and turning it slightly as if it were a screw Otherwise the guide pin may scratch the front doors of the module beneath it 1 Guide pin 2 Thumbscrew 7 Slide the entire module toward you and lift it off of the module below it Replacing the Control 1 Ifnot already removed remove the tape drives and power supplies Module from the control module you are replacing 2 Using the Phillips 2 screwdriver for the top cover plate and the T10 TORX screwdriver for the bottom cover plate remove the new control module plates from the top and bottom of the module as necessary Scalar i500 User s Guide 380 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Replacing the Control Module Caution Before removing the control module s bottom cover plate the robot assembly must be parked as described in Preparing to Remove or Replace a Module on page 356 a Ifyour library consists of only the control module do not remove the plates b Ifyou
533. ule The user interface appears on the touch screen LCD display of the operator panel for executing basic library management functions Audible feedback or key click sounds are generated when a user presses a button on the operator panel Users can choose to disable the audible feedback See Configuring System Settings on page 126 43 Operator Panel Keypads Operator Panel Indicates Intervention Required Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Web Client When a user touches a text box requiring data entry a keypad screen appears The alpha numeric or month keypad appears depending on the type of input field touched All alphabetic character entries are lower case The text box appears at the top of screen and the numbers characters appear as they are entered Pressing 123 opens the numeric keypad The operator panel lights up screen saver turns off if intervention is required For example when manual cartridge assignment is enabled the operator panel lights up following an import of tapes into the I E station so that the operator sees the prompt to assign tapes to a partition Web Client Scalar i500 User s Guide The Web client user interface is similar to the operator panel user interface The Web client interface is accessible from supported Web browsers See Library Capacity on page 526 for information about supported browsers To manage the library from a remote location you must set up the li
534. ule terminator connectors See Cabling the Library on page 289 for information on installing the module terminators Power on the library Configure the library using the operator panel Setup Wizard 325 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration 14 Add the tape cartridges to the library using the I E station 15 If your host application inventories the location of each tape cartridge in the library open the host application and re inventory to sync the logical inventory with the physical inventory of the library Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Scalar i500 User s Guide Use this procedure for installing a new multi module library A multi module library contains a control module and up to four expansion modules There are no restrictions on where the control module can be installed in the library configuration However the recommended placement of the control module for library configurations up to 32U is on top of all installed 9U expansion modules The recommended placement of the control module for 41U library configurations is on top of three 9U expansion modules and below the top expansion module Expansion Module Control Module Expansion Module Expansion Module Expansion Module 326 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration Warning A
535. unctionality The EKM license is sold on a per drive basis The license corresponds to the number of tape drives that you can enable for library managed encryption If your library contains more encryption enabled tape drives than are covered by the license you will need to purchase an additional license to cover them Your new license key replaces your current license key and contains the entire license for the total number of tape drives 168 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library a Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library Make sure your Q EKM SKM or KMIP compliant key servers are installed and running before configuring the library see the Quantum Encryption Key Manager User s Guide the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide or your KMIP key manager user s guide for instructions Then follow these steps in order to configure the library e Step 1 Installing the EKM License Key on the Library on page 169 e Step 2 Preparing Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 170 e Step 3 Configuring Encryption Settings and Key Server Addresses on page 170 e Step 4 Installing TLS Certificates on the Library SKM Only on page 174 e Step 5 Running EKM Path Diagnostics on page 180 e Step 6 Configuring Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 180 Note Scalar Key Manager is very sensitive to network instability due to the large amount of ope
536. up Host Registration screen The host you just added appears on the Registered Hosts list and no longer appears on the Unregistered Hosts list If you need to register more hosts from the Unregistered Hosts list click Add again to see the list of unregistered hosts and proceed from Step 4 Tape drives must be enabled for host access before you can map hosts to them 1 Navigate to Setup gt Host Access gt Host Connections or click the Access button from the Setup Host Registration screen The Setup Host Connections screen appears displaying a list of all tape drives that can be enabled for host access Select the Access Control check box of all tape drives you want to enable for host access Clear the Access Control check box of any tape drives you do not want to enable for host access Note If you disable a tape drive that was previously enabled and mapped to hosts the tape drive can be accessed by all hosts However the library keeps track of the mapped connections so that if you re enable the tape drive later the connections you had before are reinstated Click Apply 5 Click Next to go to the next screen to map hosts to tape drives and partitions If the Next button does not appear on the screen it means no tape drives are enabled for host access 162 Mapping a Host to Tape Drives and Partitions Modifying a Host Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Networking Conf
537. upports the following options for definitions of each of the options see Supported Barcode Formats on page 521 Standard default Standard Six Plus Six Extended Media ID Last Media ID First e Number of Slots The number of storage slots allocated to the new partition Drives The tape drive or drives assigned to the partition Note Before creating partitions verify that all tape drives are unloaded For information on unloading tape drives see Unloading Tape Drives on page 252 Note Creating Partitions operations cannot be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation 72 Mixing Tape Drive Types Within Partitions Modifying Partitions Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions You cannot create partitions manually from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the Web client select Setup gt Partitions When you automatically create partitions tape drives with different interface types vendor types and media generation are placed in different partitions If you manually create partitions you can mix tape drive types as follows e For non encrypted partitions and for partitions that use Application Managed Encryption e SCSI FC and SAS
538. uration either with your initial purchase or afterward see Licensable Features on page 32 This section describes how to license these features on your library in the following sections e About License Keys e Viewing Licenses and License Keys e Obtaining a License Key e Applying a License Key Scalar i500 User s Guide 88 About License Keys Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Obtaining and Installing a License Key If you purchase a licensable feature with your library the license will be installed when you receive the library If you upgrade or add new features after the initial purchase Quantum issues you a license key certificate The license key certificate contains an authorization code that enables you to retrieve your license key from the Quantum Web site Once you install the license key on the library the feature becomes available Details about license keys include An authorization code to obtain a license key can be used one time only The license key may contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters The license key can also contain the at hyphen or underscore _ symbols Alpha characters must be lowercase The user interface automatically converts entries to lowercase A given license key can only be used on the library to which it is assigned and cannot be transferred to another library The key is verified when it is applied to the library to make sure it is
539. uring the Library E mail Account on page 92 Administrators can configure the library e mail account and e mail notifications Users with user privileges can receive e mail notifications but they cannot configure the library e mail account or e mail notifications The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Notifications gt Advanced Reporting gt Receiver Addresses 146 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand All Scalar i500 library configurations ship with the purchased number of slots pre activated The number of available pre activated slots begins at 41 for all library configurations and increases in 46 slot increments to a maximum of 409 slots in the 41U library configuration After the initial purchase of your library you can activate any remaining inactive slots in your library by purchasing a COD license upgrade Upgrades are sold in 46 slot increments For example a 14U library could have 87 slots licensed at the time of the initial purchase 41 default 46 purchased 87 The remaining 46 slots of the 14U library can be activated at a later time by purchasing an upgrade The full 133 slots would then be available for use If you upgrade to more slots your new license key contains the entire license corresponding to your expanded slot count The new license key replaces your current license key For more information on licensing see Obtai
540. user can access by modifying the user s account Also any user assigned to a partition that has been deleted can be reassigned to other partitions To change partition access you must provide the following information e Password A unique password that can be viewed and modified by the administrator e Privilege Level Determines the user s access privileges See User Privileges on page 50 for more information on user privilege levels e Partition Access the partitions to which the user has access 75 Taking a Partition Online or Offline Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With Partitions The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows From the Web client select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts From the operator panel select Setup gt User Mgmt gt Modify User There are two partition modes online and offline Online SCSI hosts control the partition In this mode all host application SCSI commands are processed Offline SCSI hosts cannot control the partition In this mode library operations can be performed via the operator panel or Web client This topic focuses on using the library user interface to manually change a partition mode to online or offline Changing a partition mode using the library user interface may affect your host application See your host application documentation for more information Details about
541. ush them up You will feel the FC I O fan blade unplug from the expansion module s backplane Continue lifting on the latch hooks until the blade is totally unplugged from the backplane Slide the FC I O fan blade out of the expansion module 5 If you are permanently removing the FC I O fan blade place a cover on the empty bay Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 These instructions explain how to replace an FC I O fan blade in your library You can remove and replace an FC I O fan blade while the library is powered on 457 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Required tools None 1 2 Access the back of the expansion module If you have not already done so remove the old I O fan blade following the directions in Removing an FC I O Fan Blade on page 457 Press up and out to open the latch hooks on each side of the replacement I O fan blade Carefully align the FC I O fan blade with the guide slots in the bay The status LED must be at the bottom Caution Forcing the blade into the bay can cause the pins to bend Evenly apply pressure to both ends of the FC I O fan blade and slide it into the expansion module until the latch hooks begin to move towards the middle of the blade As you push in on the blade you will feel the blade pins connect with the expansion modul
542. ve all rack hardware that may interfere with the installation of the rackmount kit and the modules that you plan to add to the rack Consider removing the front and back doors of the rack to obtain full access to the mounting holes and other areas of the rack Determine the type of rack in which you plan to install the rackmount kit Different racks require different rackmount parts Although the rackmount kit contains many parts the parts you use depend on your rack s mounting holes a Ifthe rack has round mounting holes use the small ferrules and the nut clips b If the rack has square mounting holes use the large ferrules and the cage nuts c Ifthe rack has threaded tapped M6 holes do not use the ferrules nut clips or cage nuts Determine where in your rack you want to install the rackmount shelves Consider installing the shelves at a height that puts the base of the control module anywhere between the 28U 32U alignment markers which is usually a comfortable height for reading the operator panel Remember the control module can be placed anywhere within the 422 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Installing the Library in a Rack library configuration above below or between any expansion modules However for recommended configuration see Installing a New Multi Module Library Configuration on page 326 Installing the Rackmount Required parts Rackmount shelves 8 ferrules 8 thumbnuts Shelv
543. ver administrator Install certificates as described in Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library on page 177 Checking for Current Certificates From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Import Communication Certificates The Tools TLS Communication Certificate Import screen appears see Figure 26 175 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library If TLS certificates are currently installed they will be listed ina table at the bottom of the screen If they are not installed a message appears at the bottom of the screen stating that certificates are not installed Figure 26 TLS Communication Certificate Import Screen Tools SKM Communication Certificate Import Import TLS communication certificate s Note Transport layer security TLS certificates may be uploaded by browsing to the files and selecting Apply Either individual certificates or a Quantum certificate bundle may be uploaded if applicable Quantum bundles are only applicable for SKM certificates Select the Certificate Type to install xpyyp Key Manager Root Certificate File Browse Admin Certificate File Admin Certificate Password Client Certificate File Browse Client Certificate Password Use Admin Password Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle Quantum Communication Certificate Bundle File eel Location Serial Number Valid Between Dates Issuer and Subject Lib
544. ver s native encryption certificate to wrap encrypt the keys The file containing the wrapped encryption keys is saved to a location on a computer specified by the source administrator See Exporting Data Encryption Keys on page 194 5 The source administrator e mails the file containing the wrapped data encryption keys to the destination administrator 192 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Encryption Key Management on the Library 6 The destination administrator saves the file containing the wrapped data encryption keys to a location on a computer and then imports the keys onto the destination SKM server see Importing Data Encryption Keys on page 196 7 The destination library can now read the encrypted tapes For more information about the key servers and library managed encryption best practices please refer to the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide Exporting the Native Encryption Certificate To receive encryption keys from another SKM server you must first send your SKM server s native encryption certificate to that server The public key contained in the native encryption certificate will be used to wrap encrypt the encryption keys to protect them during transport to you Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Since the native encryption certificate is the same for both servers in an SKM server pair you may export it when only one
545. very storage slot I E station slot and tape drive in the library Host software is designed to understand this addressing system and generally there are no problems relating to tape cartridge slots However hosts sometimes have problems relating to tape drives particularly when tape drives library control modules or library expansion modules are added or removed or empty tape drive slots exist This section explains how the library logically addresses tape drives and slots so that you can avoid common problems with host software Note The logical element addressing described in this section is different from the library specific location coordinates described in Understanding the Location Coordinates on page 32 Tape drive logical element addresses are assigned by partition The numbering is sequential within a partition and starts over with each partition The addresses start with the lowest library module ina partition The top tape drive in the module and partition is always number 256 The tape drive beneath that is 257 and so on until all tape drives in that module partition have been accounted for Numbering 35 Cartridge Slot Logical Element Addressing Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Understanding Logical Element Addressing continues with the top tape drive in the next module up Empty tape drive slots are skipped they are not given an element address Host software may have problems
546. with all devices on the bus Configure the library using the commands on the operator panel See configuration information in Configuring Your Library on page 52 Use this procedure along with Figure 45 and Figure 46 if you are installing a library that includes FC tape drives that are connected directly to a host or switch 303 Figure 45 Stand Alone Control Module Fibre Channel Cabling Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library ON DOF WY Ethernet cable to customer network GB Ethernet port Power supply Rear power switch Power cord Fibre cable to host Library control blade LCB Module terminators 304 Figure 46 Multi Module Fibre Channel Cabling Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library f em w a r OoOAN Oa A ON Ethernet cable to network GB Ethernet port Power supply Rear power switch Power cords Fibre cables to host Module terminators Library control blade LCB Module to module cable 305 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Cabling the Library Warning Al libraries taller than 14U must be installed in a rack having a main protective earthing grounding terminal and power must be supplied via an industrial plug and socket outlet and or an appliance coupler complying with TEC 60309 or an equivalent nati
547. with the module s screw holes If they are not aligned the tape drive was not inserted correctly Power on the library if itis not powered on already and wait for initialization to complete If the green LED is solidly lit for three seconds and then blinks twice wait 10 15 minutes while the universal drive sled UDS firmware upgrades There are two types of firmware related to the tape drive firmware for the tape drive itself and firmware for the UDS that surrounds the tape drive The UDS firmware is part of the library firmware The library automatically upgrades the UDS firmware if the firmware on the newly inserted UDS is different than the library s current UDS firmware Firmware downloads may take about 15 minutes Connect the host interface cables to the tape drive Take the tape drive online a From the Operations menu select Drive gt Change Mode The Change Drive Mode screen appears b Locate the tape drive that you want to take online c Inthe New column click Offline to change the mode to Online Check the tape drive s LEDs to make sure that the drive functions correctly see Tape Drive LEDs on page 505 If the blue or amber LED stays on solid reseat the tape drive If necessary upgrade tape drive firmware by following the instructions provided in the Updating Library and Tape Drive Firmware on page 278 The library can use the tape drive immediately after the tape drive firmware is upgraded When swap
548. within a library that present the appearance of multiple separate libraries for purposes of file management access by multiple users or dedication to one or more host applications Partitions Organizing the library into partitions divides the resources into virtual sections Partitions can be used to control access to portions of the library by granting permissions to user accounts to access certain partitions For more information on partitions see Working With Partitions on page 68 Scalar i500 User s Guide 31 Chapter 1 Description Licensable Features Control Path Modification TPe control path tape drive is used to connect a partition to a host application Only one tape drive can be selected as the control path at one time For more information see Working With Control Paths on page 86 GunnatforWORM ocalar i500 tape libraries support WORM write once read many sl a technology in LTO 3 LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape drives WORM allows non rewriteable and non erasable data to be written and provides extra data security by prohibiting accidental data erasure The WORM feature is supported whenever you use WORM cartridges Licensable Features In addition to the standard features the following additional licensable features are available for the Scalar i500 e Advanced Reporting described in Chapter 4 Advanced Reporting e Capacity on Demand described in Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand e Storage Networking
549. y e Host Port The host port number WWPN The World Wide Port Name of the host device e Type The operating system of the host device The paths to open the appropriate screens are as follows e From the operator panel select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Management e From the Web client select Setup gt FC I O Blades gt Host Management Administrators can manually create a connection to an FC host if the host was not already connected to the library when it was turned on You can also modify and delete an existing FC host connection You can perform these operations without down the library You can add up to 32 FC host connections per FC I O blade 114 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With FC I O Blades After creating modifying or deleting an FC host connection save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration on page 488 Note These operations should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Creating an FC Host Connection For each FC host connection you want to create you can set the following parameters e Host Name The host device name e Host Port The host port nu
550. y delay moves to tape drives while they are being tested The Manual diagnostics requires that you select one tape drive to use for the test Since the test only validates the selected drive if you want to test the path for each tape drive you must run the test multiple times once for each drive In addition if the tape drive is not available it must be unloaded ready and online the Drive Path and Config tests are not performed The Automatic diagnostics tests every connected EKM server in turn and the library selects the tape drive to use for each test If the selected tape drive is not available it must be unloaded ready and online then the library tries another tape drive that is connected to the key server until it finds one that is available If no tape drives connected to a particular key server are available then that server is skipped and the tests are not performed If a server is skipped for X number of consecutive test intervals where X is configurable on the Web client the library generates a RAS ticket If a tape drive remains loaded for a long time it is possible that it will never be tested If you want to test a specific tape drive then you should use the Manual EKM Path Diagnostics In particular if you replace a tape drive run the Manual EKM Path Diagnostics Access the EKM Path Diagnostics screen in one of two ways Enter library Diagnostics From the Web client select Tools gt Diagno
551. y see the Scalar i500 Release Notes for qualified firmware levels 3 Shut down the library 4 Connect the tape drives to one of the four internal Ethernet ports on the library control blade LCB using Ethernet cables see Figure 63 Note This figure and subsequent figures show two cables but only one cable is used unless you are using data path failover Power on the library 460 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Figure 63 Ethernet Connectivity on 5U Libraries Ethernet cable Power cords to network Internal Fibre Ethernet Channel ports on cables to LCB host Service port do not use Library control Ethernet cables from blade LCB tape drives to LCB Installing the Ethernet The Ethernet Expansion blade must be installed in the bottom left vertical Expansion Blade bay in an expansion module The empty bay to the right of the Ethernet Expansion blade must be covered by a cover plate Equipment Required e Ethernet Expansion blade e Cover plate Ethernet cables one for each tape drive that you will connect to the Ethernet Expansion blade plus an extra one per Ethernet Expansion blade to connect the LCB to the expansion module in which the Ethernet Expansion blade is installed Scalar i500 User s Guide 461 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet
552. y allowed you to change the topology once control path failover was configured even though this prevented the feature from working Now the library will not enable control path failover unless both the control path and failover tape drives are configured as Point to Point and will not allow you to change the topology from Point to Point on any tape drives configured for control path failover The control path and failover tape drives must be connected to an NPIV enabled switch on the same fabric They must not be connected to an FCI O blade The control path and failover tape drives are assigned by location in the library so even if you replace a tape drive the library will still fail over or revert to the specified location When control path failover is configured for a partition the partition uses a virtual port as the control path communication port The World Wide Port Name WWPN for this virtual port is listed in the library s System Information Report in the Library Partitions section under Control Path see Viewing the System Information Report on page 267 A tape drive can be configured for both control path failover and data path failover see Configuring Data Path Failover on page 154 You can manually force a failover see Forcing Control Path Failover on page 151 You can only configure control path failover from the Web client The path to open the appropriate screen is e From the Web client select Setup
553. y as necessary following the instructions provided in Cabling the Library on page 289 13 Power on the library Scalar i500 User s Guide 437 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives Adding Removing and Replacing Tape Drives Adding a Tape Drive Scalar i500 User s Guide The tape drive always resides in a universal drive sled UDS and together they are effectively one unit If you order a new or replacement tape drive it will already be installed in a sled Note If you are installing multiple tape drives with the library powered on follow the special instructions in the note in Step 3 below These instructions explain how to add a tape drive to your library You can add a tape drive while the library is powered on Required tools None 1 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 489 2 Detach the tape drive slot s cover plate Loosen the cover plate s thumbscrews and remove the plate Store the cover plate in a separate cabinet If you later decide to remove the tape drive you will need to reinstall the cover plate 3 Insert the tape drive into the drive slot Using the guide rails on both the tape drive and in the tape drive slot slowly slide the tape drive into the slot The tape drive must be level to slide in smoothly Note Special Instructions for Installing Multiple Tape Drives If you are instal
554. y ea cy Z v c RT c w ve wv o w oW gg wo w gt Txo c OT 5 c o oc u xv ov cn c v S 9 rv oftuad agzat v Q astros cros xEot Se T o z zag weagd Ethernet cable to LCB 471 Scalar i500 User s Guide Permanently Removing or Relocating an Ethernet Expansion Blade Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Tape Drive Ethernet Connectivity and the Ethernet Expansion Blade Library firmware monitors all Ethernet Expansion blades after they are installed in the library Once an Ethernet Expansion blade is installed the library expects the blade to be in the same installed location after every power cycle If an Ethernet Expansion blade is permanently removed from the library or relocated within the library the library firmware must be configured to stop monitoring the EE blade If this is not done and the library continues to monitor a removed EE blade RAS tickets could be generated Note You do not need to configure the library to stop monitoring an Ethernet Expansion blade if you are replacing a failed Ethernet Expansion blade with a new Ethernet Expansion blade in the same location see Replacing an Ethernet Expansion Blade in the Same Location on page 474 1 If you are permanently removing the Ethernet Expansion blade disable FIPS mode on all Ethernet Expansion blade connected tape drives FIRST before you remove the Ethernet
555. y on the LDAP server associated with library users who have administrator level privileges see User Privileges on page 50 for information on privilege levels This group must exist on your LDAP server see LDAP Server Guidelines on page 100 For an example see Figure 15 102 Figure 15 LDAP Setup Example The simple LDAP server configuration shown below would give the library settings shown at right Simple LDAP Server Configuration is DIT v A Root DSE 2 YV dc mycompany dc com 3 cn admin Vv amp ou groups 3 cn admins cn users v amp ou partitions 1 t cn library_a v amp ou people 2 3 cn lib_user v amp ou admins 1 3 cn lib_admin Chapter 3 Configuring Your Library Working With User Accounts Setup Remote Authentication Authenticate logins against a third party service Authentication Type Local Only LDAP LDAP Server Server URI StarttTLS Install TLS CA Certificate Remove TLS CA Certificate Principal Password Confirm Password Authorization User DN Group DN Library User Group Library Admin Group User LDAP with Kerberos C Idap imycompany com Vv Browse Oo cn admin dc mycompany dc com ou people dc mycompany dc com ou groups dc mycompany dc com users admins Password Testing LDAP Settings Apply any changes to the settings before Test with a user that belongs to both the User The
556. y receives an SNMP message that does not contain the correct community string or other authentication information the library sends an SNMP authentication trap message to registered remote management systems indicating the authentication failure SNMP authentication traps are disabled by default See the Scalar i500 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 01370 xx for further configuration and access details You cannot enable or disable SNMP authentication traps from the operator panel The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows From the Web client select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP Downloading the SNMP MIB The library supports an SNMP MIB that can be used to integrate the library with commercial SNMP management applications The MIB can be queried to obtain the status of the library and many of its individual components Administrators can download the SNMP MIB from the library The MIB can then be installed on an SNMP external management application For more information about the library MIB see the Scalar i500 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 013 70 xx or contact Quantum Technical Support see Getting More Information or Help on page 8 For information on integrating MIBs with an SNMP management application contact your network management application vendor Note The SNMP MIB is also available on the Scalar 1500 Documentation and Training CD You cannot download the SNMP MIB from the operator panel
557. y until initialization completes Caution From this point forward until the process is complete do NOT remove power from the library Doing so may cause failure and cause LCB to become unusable When initialization is complete the screen will display Upgrade Notification Compact Flash Replacement screen shown below 405 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card 10 Click OK The login screen appears 11 Enter the following default user name and password e User name admin e Password password 406 Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card 12 Press OK The Enable IPv6 screen appears Do you want to enable Internet Protocol version 6 IP v6 This will allow remote clients Web UI SNMP etc access to the library using IP v6 Enable iPus 13 Select the Enable IPv6 check box if you are required to use IPv6 or leave the check box blank to not enable it 407 Chapter 12 Installing Removing and Replacing Removing and Replacing the Library Control Blade and LCB Compact Flash Card 14 Press Next The Network Configuration screen appears The system defaults to DHCP For IPv4 only you can deselect the DHCP option and assign a static IP address You cannot assi
558. y using SNW features If you remove all SNW features from a tape drive then the license becomes available to use on another tape drive For more information on licensing see Obtaining and Installing a License Key on page 88 Configuring Control Path Failover Scalar i500 User s Guide If an HP LTO 5 FC tape drive is the control path for a partition you can select another HP LTO 5 FC tape drive in that partition for control path failover This means that if the control path tape drive fails the failover tape drive becomes the control path for the partition The failed over tape drive remains the control path for the partition unless it fails or the library is restarted When either of these events occurs the library starts over and attempts to use the original control path tape drive as the control path and the original failover tape drive for failover Details about control path failover include e The SNW license must be sufficient to cover both the control path and failover tape drives in order to enable a tape drive for failover e The control path and failover tape drives must both be HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel tape drives 150 Forcing Control Path Failover Scalar i500 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Control Path Failover Both the control path and failover tape drives must have their topology configured as Point to Point see Setting Tape Drive Parameters on page 83 Previously the librar
559. you want to configure data path failover Both FC ports on the tape drive must be connected to a host or switch Neither tape drive port may be connected to a Fibre Channel I O blade Data path failover must be enabled on the tape drives data path failover is disabled by default Tape drive topology settings must be set to Point to Point Enabling Data Path To enable data path failover Fail capil 1 Connect both tape drive Fibre Channel ports Port 1 and Port 2 toa Scalar i500 User s Guide host or switch see Figure 21 155 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Data Path Failover Figure 21 HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel Tape Drive Ports Port 1 Status LED Port 2 Status LED Port 1 default Port 2 default data path failover port 2 From the library Setup menu click Drive Settings The Setup Drive Settings page displays see Figure 22 3 For each tape drive on which you want to enable data path failover do the following a First change the Requested Topology setting to Point to Point b Then select the DPF check box 4 Click Apply Scalar i500 User s Guide 156 Chapter 6 Storage Networking Configuring Data Path Failover Note The illustration shows Port 1 as the default data port and Port 2 as the default failover port but these defaults apply only if the data path failover feature is not enabled when you insert cables If data path failover is enabled the first port into whic

Quantum Scalar i500 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents